Home

Voluson™ E8/E8 Expert Basic User Manual

1. 16 3 The Measure Setup Pages 16 3 Chapter 17 Connections How to Connect Auxiliary Devices Safely 17 2 Connection between Internal I O and External I O 17 5 Recorder type 17 8 ECG Preamplifier 17 12 Chapter 18 Technical Data Information safety Conformance 18 2 Physical Attributes 18 3 System overview 18 5 screen Formats 18 6 Display Modes 18 7 Display Annotation 18 7 System Standard Features 18 10 System Options 18 11 System Parameters 18 13 Scanning Parameters 18 17 Generic Measurements and Measurements Calculations 18 26 External Inputs and Outputs 18 33 Chapter 19 Glossary Abbreviations Voluson E8 E8 Exper
2. 12 59 Pediatric Calculations 12 62 Neurology Calculations 12 64 MSK Calculations 12 67 Chapter 13 Archive Current Patient Dialog 13 3 Clipboard 13 6 Patient Archive 13 11 Image History 13 34 Exam Review 13 35 Selecting Exams 13 43 Settings 13 45 Chapter 14 Utilities and System Setup Utilities 14 2 System Setup 14 11 Chapter 15 Programmable Keys Where to program the keys 15 2 P keyS 15 3 Start Exam Button 15 8 End Exam Button 15 9 Chapter 16 Measure Setup To Invoke the Setup Procedure 16 2 To Exit from the Measure Setup
3. 10 111 SonoAVC follicle 10 130 SonoAVC general 10 136 sonoVCAD heart Volume Computer Aided Display 10 139 SonoVCAD labor 10 144 HDlive Mode 10 149 System messages 10 151 Chapter 11 Measurements Generic Measurements 11 2 Chapter 12 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports Calculation Packages 12 2 Basic Calculation Functionality 12 2 Basic Patient Worksheet Functions 12 5 Abdomen Calculations 12 10 Small Parts Calculations 12 18 Obstetric Calculations 12 20 Cardiac Calculations 12 39 Urology Calculations 12 54 Vascular Calculations 12 56 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Table of Contents Gynecology Calculations
4. Rise 3 Mero Ensemble n E rR Ensemble Fall 4 a Frequency norm Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 7 9 M Mode Note Some functions are only available in scan mode The submenu settings are the same as those of the CFM mode For more information see CFM Sub Menu on page 8 73 7 5 MTD Mode M Tissue Doppler Mode Tissue Doppler Mode and Color M Mode are Doppler modes intended to add color coded qualitative information concerning the relative velocity and direction of blood flow within the 2D mode or M mode image Tissue Doppler overlays color on the M mode trace using velocity and variance color maps The Tissue Doppler wedge overlays the 2D mode image and M mode timeline The description of MTD mode is subdivided in two groups s To use the MTD mode For more information see MTD Main Menu on page 7 10 s To adjust MTD setting For more information see MTD Sub Menu on page 7 12 7 5 1 MTD Main Menu M Mode key TD Mode key hard keys e By pressing the M control and the TD control the MTD mode is switched on in the preparation mode The M cursor with M Color window appears on the active 2D image These hard keys are also the Gain control for the MTD mode only in scan mode e For more information see MTD Operation on page 7 77 To start and use the MTD mode For more information see MTD Operation on page 7 11 e To adjust the MC
5. 11 1 3 1 5 Stenosis Distance Se hy This measures the vertical distance tissue depth between two points The measurement j J procedure is the same than the measurement in 2D Mode review Stenosis Distance n 2D N Mode Measurements on page 11 4 11 1 3 1 6 HR Heart Rate Fee 1 To measure the Heart Rate touch the HR key on the touch panel A line appears on the screen 2 Move the line to the start point of the period and press the right or left trackball key Set The second line appears 3 Move the second line to the end point of the period 4 Select the number of heart rate cycles for measurement with the digipot below the touch panel 5 Press the right or the left trackball Set key again The Heart Rate is displayed 11 1 4 D Mode Measurements For details about settings review Measure Setup Measure amp Calc on page 16 3 n The Factory Generic Sub Category for Doppler Mode see image above supports 2 Study types and following Measure methods Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 11 15 Measurements eee Generic Measurements Auto Trace eT Jal tale Manual Trace Velocity Acceleration RI Resistivity Index PI Pulsatilityy Index PS ED Peak Systole End Diastole Ratio Time HR Heart Rate PG Pressure Gradient PG max Pressure Gradient maximum Measurements PG mean Pressure Gradient mean 11 1 4 1 Generic Measurements Meas Appli
6. Soon4esstont Hone fa indicatie Exam Qom ExamTime ExomType M img Application If the system is connected to a work list server e g HIS RIS you can select a patient from the list Operation For more information see To Retrieve Patient Data via External Work list Server on page 4 21 Otherwise use the keyboard to type in the Patient Information Operation For more information see Standard Input on page 4 8 4 4 1 Standard Input Selecting an input field There are 3 possibilities to select an input field i Using the trackball ETS Trackball position the cursor in the input field q C Enter select an input field press the right or left trackball key m E a Cc Using the touch panel ES E Start Exit Archive Exam SS A aaa S aa ID Name DOB Age Sex Search Perf LMP Gravida Phys Access Ref DOC Para Phys indicat e Sono Custom EDD Aborta grapher Field aa a A GA Ectopic Fetus Exam Custom Type Field2 Touch the corresponding key on the touch panel Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 4 8 H48691CF Revision 2 Operating the System Note If you touch the Name key repeatedly the write cursor jumps from the Last Name to the First Name and to the Middle Name input field Using the keyboard Enter a a o Press the Enter or Tab input fields are selected in successive order Entering patient inform
7. 14 2 1 To invoke the Setup Procedure To invoke the Setup procedures touch the System Setup key in the menu Utilities to activate the setup desktop on screen Touch the Utilities Hardkey Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 14 12 H48691CF Revision 2 Utilities and System Setup The touch panel changes to the Utilities menu Then touch System Setup Histogram Monitor Setup Video Setup Tis A Guided Biopsy Biopsy Kit select Biopsy Line select H486814AT ae i y MBX 1 MBx 2 MBx 3 Touch Ser Brightn 41 Console Keyboard Backgr 0 Brightn 100 Brightn 100 14 2 2 To Exit from the Setup Procedure Touch the Exit key on the touch panel Setup changes are cancelled and not saved Select the Exit button with the mouse pointer arrow and press Set right left trackball keys Setup changes are cancelled and not saved Select the Save amp Exit button with the mouse pointer arrow and press Set right left trackball keys Setup changes are saved Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 13 Utilities and System Setup 14 14 14 2 3 General 14 2 3 1 General filing card BUM Langage E rej linet 14 2 3 1 1 To Enter Date Time and Time Zone kent ita Diag j Dabe Forrest PRE ei EB t HECO Y COAT Bis e e Shaw TOC owe Di Tie P Sow b in orange 1 0 Soren Lock of SOT en SrA WAD Screen Canbro
8. 2 4 8 2 Probe Handling and Infection Control This information is intended to increase user awareness of the risks of disease transmission associated with using this equipment and provide guidance in making decisions directly affecting the safety of the patient as well as the equipment user Diagnostic ultrasound systems utilize ultrasound energy that must be coupled to the patient by direct physical contact Depending on the type of examination this contact occurs with a Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 2 18 H48691CF Revision 2 Safety and Maintenance variety of tissues ranging from intact skin in a routine exam to recirculating blood in a surgical procedure The level of risk of infection varies greatly with the type of contact One of the most effective ways to prevent transmission between patients is with single use or disposable devices However ultrasound transducers are complex and expensive devices that must be reused between patients It is very important therefore to minimize the risk of disease transmission by using barriers and through proper processing between patients 2 4 8 3 Probe Cleaning and Disinfecting Process Adequate cleaning and disinfection is necessary to prevent disease transmission It is the responsibility of the user to verify and maintain the effectiveness of the infection control procedures in use High level disinfection is recommended for surface probes and is mandatory for endocavity pr
9. 3 Switch ON the Main switch at the rear of the system 4 To switch on the system press the Standby switch located to the left of the touch panel 1 Main Switch Standby switch Once system is switched on it is completely reset The boot up time is about 2 minutes and then the 2D mode main menu for the previously selected transducer is displayed In case you disconnect the previously selected transducer the menu Probe Select will appear even if it has been disconnected during shutdown In case software version and user program version are not identical a message will be displayed during boot up Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Operating the System Message window Message The current user programs are not compatible with this software version Incompatibility of user programs and software version may lead to reduced image quality Please open Utilities System Setup Backup page and load the latest available backup Small Backup 4 2 2 Power Off To avoid loss of the current Patient data as well as all the measurements in the Patient Worksheet it is absolutely necessary to press the End Exam key on the control panel before switching OFF the system For more information see Ending an exam on page 4 77 1 To switch off the system press the Standby switch located to the left of the touch panel once The shutdown dialog appears The information in the dialog wil
10. Remarks Changing the Gain Quality WMF PRF Steering and 2D 2D HD is only possible in scan mode Beam steering is only possible with linear probe and in scan mode Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 8 20 H48691CF Revision 2 Doppler Modes 8 5 2 HD Flow Operation The HD Flow operations HD Flow Box Position and HD Flow Box Size 2 HD Flow Gain Control Quality on page 8 33 4 Wall Motion Filter WMEF on page 8 36 as Velocity Range PRF on page 8 35 2D 2D HD HD Flow Operation on page 8 27 8 5 2 1 HD Flow Box Position and HD Flow Box Size In 2D imaging the relations between 2D frame rate line density and sector width were detailed to show how these three factors can be used to obtain optimal 2D images A similar relationship exists in Power Doppler imaging On the HD Flow Submenu the line density selection adjusts the balance between the 2D line density and the HD Flow line density The values available are scan head dependent The ability to change the HD Flow Box size and position provides flexibility in Power Doppler imaging The trackball changes the HD Flow Box size and position Use the trackball to adjust the HD Flow Box position on the 2D image Single Dual Quad gt HD Flow box horizontal position t 4 HD Flow box vertical position The box is adjustable within the entire 2D image area GD The upper trackball key switches between HD Flow Box position
11. Vessel Area Vessel Diameter s Stenosis Area Stenosis Diameter id IMT DoS The measurement procedures in 2D Mode are the same than in application Abdomen For N more information see Abdomen Calculations in 2D Mode on page 12 11 12 9 4 Vascular Calculations in M Mode Vessel Diameter Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 57 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports Stenosis Diameter Time HR Heart Rate IMT The measurement procedures in M Mode are the same than in application Abdomen For J more information see Abdomen Calculations on page 12 10 12 9 5 Vascular Calculations in Spectral Doppler Mode i Auto Trace 2 Manual Trace Measurement of Each Item R Measurement of PS ED RI SD id Time HR Heart Rate Sly The measurement procedures in Spectral Doppler Mode are the same than in application A Abdomen For more information see Abdomen Calculations in Spectral Doppler Mode on page 12 14 12 9 6 Vascular Worksheet Press the Worksheet key on the control panel or touch the Worksheet key in the Calculation menu to view the report that contains detailed results of vascular calculations Report far Data al izome Off Pa Door Poga E Esam Type Nome Dok Henriette Perf Prags Pot 0 D03001 07 07 24 1 DOB Ref Phys mdicatiorn 20 Meosunements Value ml mez CCA Al CCA Intima CCA Flow Diam ECA
12. x Le Le oe fe fe fe fe fe fe 7 N IAO N IAO h Q Q Q EA Old ldl lal g Auala la Wo Fee Q1P a Njal elaz O ETI Olin lo llalla l l l Olole lalo AQ inl Pls lolela o jaja jaz gl Sse lLis lw lwlszliaye ty Oj as Qirixig elala Cictieayeaiaeaijy lye lslss SsIizie e sl e nIiIniale t lo l ceio l o Vwlelesia A I IZI IZIZIZ IZIZIZIZ IZ IZ IZ IJV Imaging Modes o Q wz Oo D O c gt lt n M VCI SW Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 5 6 Probes and Biopsies Contrasts X a Biopsy ti N A Imaging Modes bal ic a 2D norm a aoe a a a X X X X X X Probes RNA5 9 D on m 2 IC5 9 D aa ML6 15 D aa PA6 8 D aa RAB2 5 D RAB4 8 D aa RAB6 D aa RAM3 8 RIC5 9 D aa RIC6 12 D aa RM14L RM6C Ey weap e e e ue ef e o h eoo e reoh e p AE PETE E CE p X A a MF PEREC Ee Imaging Modes S E a i C a op Q V D Q O G gt 5 lt Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Dah Probes and Biopsies Probes 9L D gt vy M N J C1 5 D C4 8 D IC5 9 D ML6 15 D Peet O O u N J PA6 8 D RAB2 5 D RAB4 8 D RAB6 D RAM3 8 RIC5 9 D RIC6 12 D RM14L RM6C RNA5 9 D RRE5 10 D RRE6 10 D RSM5 14 RSP6 16 D SP10 16 D 4 10 D 5 2 Biopsies 5 2 1 Biopsy gui 5 8 Imaging Modes Advanced STIC
13. 3 Select the measurement parameter Stenosis Diameter 4 To measure the outer diameter use the trackball to move the cursor to the start point of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker 5 Move the second cursor to the second point of the measurement and press Set again Note To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key Change before completing the measurement This alternates the control from one cursor to the other 6 Perform the measurement of the inner diameter in the same manner as described above Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 13 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports The results such as outer and inner diameter and the Stenosis appear automatically 12 4 4 3 Time To measure the Time in M Mode 1 Press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the desired item For example select Left Renal Artery 3 To measure a horizontal time interval touch the Time key A line appears in the screen 4 Move the line to the start point of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set Note To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key A second line parallel to the first one appears 5 Move this line using the trackball to the end point of the measurement and then press Set 12 4 4 4 HR Heart Rate To measure the Heart Rate HR in M Mode Diam Diam Last
14. 5 Select the reference image Ref Image gt 6 Start the calculation of the cine sequence Calculate Cine Sequence 10 4 2 4 Calculating a Cine During the calculation process the following menu is displayed Image after image of the sequence is calculated and stored in the cine memory After the calculation is finished the rotating cine sequence is displayed on the screen Break Cine Calculation Touch of the Break Cine calculation key to stop the calculation The images that have been calculated before the calculation has been stopped are displayed as a sequence 10 4 2 5 During Display of a Cine If a Cine sequence is in the cine memory the following menu appears Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 65 Volume Mode 10 66 Cine type 3D Rot Cine Replay mode pe New Cine sequence The kind of cine is displayed in the first line e g 3D Rot Cine Touch this key to start or stop the display of 3D cine sequence Replay Mode Shows the sequence back and forth Shows the sequence in an endless loop from start to end Select the speed of the Cine sequence The speed of sequencing through the number of images can be varied between 6 12 25 50 100 200 and 400 Select the aspect ratio i The 3D image magnification can be varied by turning the Zoom control Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691C
15. CZECH REPUBLIC GE Medical Systems Ultrasound Vyskocilova 1422 1a 140 28 Praha Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 1 4 H48691CF Revision 2 General DENMARK GE Medical Systems Ultrasound Park Alle 295 2605 Br ndby Phone 45 43 295 400 Fax 45 43 295 399 ESTONIA amp GE Medical Systems FINLAND Kuortaneenkatu 2 000510 Helsinki P O Box 330 00031 GE Finland Phone 358 10 39 48 220 Fax 358 10 39 48 221 FRANCE GE Medical Systems Ultrasound and Primary Care Diagnostics F 78457 Velizy Fax 33 13 44 95 202 General Imaging Phone 33 13 449 52 43 Cardiology Phone 33 13 449 52 31 GERMANY GE Healthcare GmbH Beethovenstrasse 239 42655 Solingen Phone 49 212 28 02 0 Fax 49 212 28 02 28 GREECE GE Healthcare 8 10 Sorou Str Marousi Athens 15125 Hellas Phone 30 210 8930600 Fax 30 210 9625931 HUNGARY GE Hungary Zrt Ultrasound Division Akron u 2 Budaors 2040 Hungary Phone 36 23 410 314 Fax 36 23 410 390 INDIA Wipro GE Healthcare Pvt Ltd No 4 Kadugodi Industrial Area Bangalore 560067 Phone 91 1 800 425 8025 ITALY GE Medical Systems Italia spa Via Galeno 36 20126 Milano Phone 39 02 2600 1111 Fax 39 02 2600 1599 KOREA Seoul Korea Phone 82 2 6201 3114 LUXEMBOURG Phone 0800 2603 toll free Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 1 5 General MEXICO NETHERLANDS NORTHERN IRELAND NORWAY POLAND PORTUGAL RE
16. EDD 11 01 2005 no clinical GA available no growth percentile or standard deviation SD display 2 BPD 4 61cm 0 650 GA 20w0d EDD 11 01 2005 Display of the Standard Deviation e g 0 6SD 11 40 10 26 4 56 342 2 28 114 crm ow 10w 15w ZOw Zo 3w sow 4Qw AS Selection of the field Growth Dev Display in the Measure Setup is SD For further details review Global Parameters on page 16 19 3 BPD 4 61em 71 3 GA 20w0d EDD 11 01 2005 Display of the growth percentile e g 71 9 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 98 6 54 6 70 4 56 2 28 1 14 cm ow 10w 15w 2w 25w Fa aw 40w 45a Note Selection of the field Growth Dev Display in the Measure Setup is For further details review Global Parameters on page 16 19 12 6 4 8 Obstetric Calculations in M Mode s FHR Heart Rate 1 To measure the Fetal Heart Rate in Spectral Doppler Mode or M Mode press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the FHR item and the measure parameter FHR A vertical line appears on the screen 3 Move the line to the start point of the period and press the right or left trackball key Set The second line appears 4 Move the second line to the end point of the period HR Cycles 5 Select the number of heart rate cycles for measurement with the rotary
17. EFW Table JEMA Equation 3 Select EFW Table or EFW Equation Note The procedure Is the same as in New Table or New Equation Measure amp Calc on page 16 3 except that the Author s Name cannot be edited Remark Factory preseted tables equations cannot be edited 16 3 1 10 3 EFW GP SD 1 Click on EFWGP SD the display is illuminated and the display about New key shows EFW GP SD Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 16 16 H48691CF Revision 2 Measure Setup 2 Click on New key Following window appears Hew EPW Table Equation EFW Table 3 Select EFW Table or EFW Equation Note The procedure Is the same as in New Table or New Equation Measure amp Calc on page 16 3 except that the Author s Name cannot be edited Remark Factory preseted tables equations cannot be edited 16 3 2 Application Parameters Application e g OB Application Select the desired Application e g Obstetric Select a measure preset e g My own TRS To rename the selected term click this button On freeze 2D 3D start Select the status on freeze in 2D 3D mode None Measure Preset Calc Calculation menu appears automatically on Freeze Generic Generic measurement menu appears automatically on Freeze Bodymark Bodymark menu appears automatically on Freeze On freeze M start Select the status on freeze in M mode None C
18. Ensemble Balance 10 j 180 Note Some functions are only available in scan mode The submenu settings are the same as those of the TD mode For more information see TD Sub Menu on page 8 25 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 7 12 H48691CF Revision 2 M Mode 7 6 MHD Mode M High Density Mode HD Mode and M Mode are Doppler modes intended to add color coded qualitative information concerning the relative velocity and direction of blood flow within the 2D mode or M mode image HD Mode overlays color on the M mode trace using velocity and variance color maps The HD Mode wedge overlays the 2D mode image and M mode timeline The description of MHD mode is subdivided in two groups To use the MHD mode MTD Main Menu on page 7 10 gt To adjust MHD setting MTD Sub Menu on page 7 12 7 6 1 MHD Main Menu PD Mode key M Mode key hard keys By pressing the PD control and the M control the MHD mode is switched on in the preparation mode The M cursor with M Color window appears on the active 2D image These hard keys are also the Gain control for the MHD mode only in scan mode For more information see MTD Operation on page 7 77 To start and use the MHD mode For more information see MTD Operation on page 7 77 To adjust the MHD settings For more information see MTD Sub Menu on page 7 12 The MHD Main menu appears on the touchpanel scan mode Sub MHD Flow Setting Appl
19. Note The image s will be deleted after ending the exam There will be no confirmation dialog Press the upper trackball key to mark an image for deletion 13 5 3 End Exam 13 5 3 1 Setup Switch End Exam Dialog OFF End Exam function is done immediately when pressing the above buttons 13 5 3 2 Setup Switch End Exam Dialog ON If an incomplete measurement exists a dialog window appears on screen Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 13 38 H48691CF Revision 2 Archive Voluson E amp want to End Exam Do you really es A es p In both cases pressing Yes or No leads to the same result No Dialog window disappears current state as before Yes End Exam command is executed and dialog window disappears Note End Exam command is also executed if End Exam button is pressed again when dialog window is present 13 5 4 Reload When the Reload button is pressed the selected image is reloaded into the system This also means that the exam that the image belongs to is reopened The other images belonging to the exam are displayed on the clipboard and can also be reloaded to the clipboard To reload a different image switch the Reload prev next flip switch previnext The selected file is displayed in Full Screen Actions that are then possible are determined by whether the reloaded file is raw data or a bitmap file Reload of RAW data It is possible to pe
20. Ref slice Ref slice or by rotating the C Mode digipot make parallel sections through the reference image Frets 3 Select the first section through the body by rotating the right digipot below the touch panel Ref slice Note The first section should be set at the edge of the measured object 4 Measure the area proceed as for area measurement Position the start dot of the area to be surrounded with the trackball and store it Surround the area with the trackball then press the right or left trackball key Set The area is calculated and displayed The area may even be zero dot at the edge 5 Touch the key Set twice 6 Select the next parallel section with the middle digipot below the touch panel or the C Mode digipot and measure the area 7 Repeat 5 and 6 until the edge of the measured object is reached Remarks The contour of the measured area is not erased if a new section is adjusted From the deviation in the new section it is possible to decide whether a new area should be marked With new marking the old contour is erased lI To callback the measured areas touch the Prev respectively Next key on the touch Prev Next panel e The different sections can be chosen liberally it is not necessary to follow a certain order The volume measurement is only possible in 3D static mode 3D static mode will be activated automatically when switching on the measurement Full size fo
21. Reorient or relocate the device 4 Increase the distance between equipment Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the other device s are connected 4 Consult the manufacturer or field service technician for help 2 3 2 Environmental Conditions for Operation A For more information see Details on page 18 2 Ultrasound systems are highly sensitive medical instruments that can easily be damaged by improper handling Use care when handling and protect from damage also when not in use DO NOT use a damaged or defective ultrasound system Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious injury and equipment damage Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Safety and Maintenance This equipment is not to be used during transportation e g ambulance cars aircraft This equipment must not be used in oxygen enriched atmosphere or in the presence of inflammable gases e g anesthetic gases The use of the system outside the described conditions or intended use and disregarding safety related information is considered as abnormal use The manufacturer is not liable for damage caused by abnormal use of the device Use for diagnostic purposes only Do not operate the system in the vicinity of a heat source of strong electric or magnetic fields close to a transformer or near instruments generating high frequency signals such as HF surgery These can affect
22. Segmentations are shown with a contour line Segmentations are filled with color Hide or display numbering next to the segmentations according to the index Hide or display grey box around rendered image 10 14 2 3 SonoAVC general Report All custom defined SonoAVC general follicles are shown in the report with the defined description Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 138 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode 36 Date ofExam 06 11 2008 Page 4 5 x Exam Type Pat ID SONO AVC GENERIC Description Niere X Praa Nr d Vj mm Vicm3 Nr d Vi mm Vicm Nr d Vi mm Vicm 14 6 16 117 0 8 i 8 4 0 3 1 0 lt 0 01 0 7 lt 0 01 In the report it is possible to edit the follicle description by double clicking on the description text box 10 15 SonoVCAD heart Volume Computer Aided Display 10 15 1 General Description VCAD is a technology that helps to generate a number of views of the fetal heart to make diagnosis easier 10 15 1 1 Operation 1 Acquire a 3D 4D view of the fetal heart Ideally the acquisition should start with a four VOIGSOM resse RAB48 ON0B chamber view Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 139 Volume Mode 10 140 Press the VCAD Heart button on the touch panel The following menu will appear a eS ED Render Planes Set Starting Plane ore goa Breech Ref Image If you can already see the heart t
23. The Export Symbol denotes that the image or cine sequence has been copied and has been exported to a predefined data storage medium If the export process has not yet been performed the middle circle of the symbol appears green If the image has already been exported the middle circle of the symbol appears red The symbol shows in the lower left corner of the screen e 13 2 4 3 Deletion Mark When you want to delete an image from the clipboard mark it using the trackball and a red cross appears in the image The actual deletion will be performed upon pressing the End Exam hardkey 13 2 4 4 Open Image For adding measurements or text to an image the image needs to be opened i e the raw data must be loaded This state is denoted by a green frame around the image 13 2 4 5 Tool Tip While the mouse cursor is positioned over a clipboard image the Acquisition mode of this image is shown Possible readouts 2D CFM PD CW BF TD XTD Contrast 3D 4D STIC VCI 4D Biopsy 13 3 Patient Archive The Patient Archive like a database allows you to search for patients and exams Press this key to shift from scan mode to Current Patient Dialog Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 13 11 Archive Press the Archive Button to evoke the Archive Screen 1 Archive Touch panel Patient History Review Archive Exam EN O mene All Repro Source Local Archive Search
24. ee D Uterus n Penetration FFC Maen 2D 2D SRI CE Sector Dyn Contr Foc Zones Frequency Angle 106 R View 0 1 norm Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 2D Mode Example 3D abdominal convex array probe Setting Application SmaliPart a Cer ee eet Breast Breast Penet DEFAULT ma mym a Convex Dyn Contr Foc Zones Frequency 6 2 norm Example 2D linear array probe Remarks sd In freeze Mode changing the Angle B View Focal Zones OTI Frequency Virtual Convex Mode CE FFC and XBeam CRI and combinations of these modes is impossible The keys for the functions Focal Zones OTI B View Angle Frequency FFC XBeam CRI CE SRI and Virtual Convex Mode only appear on the touch panel if they are available for the selected probe The Virtual Convex Mode is only available with linear probes 6 2 2D Operation The 2D operation consists of 2D Gain on page 6 4 2D Mode Depth on page 6 4 s 2D Image Angle on page 6 4 TGC Slider Controls on page 6 5 2D Automatic Optimization on page 6 5 id Transmit Power on page 6 6 i Receiver Frequency Range on page 6 6 Harmonic Imaging HI on page 6 7 s Optimized Tissue Imaging OTI on page 6 21 B View Beta View on page 6 7 Focus and Frequency Composite FFC on page 6 8 Virtual Convex Mode on page 6 8 gt Coded Excitation
25. search er Emi Doe Hern Olio IOP 2000 12 MAPLE F Lost updote 8 17 2011 14 To sort the list of exams click the appropriate caption e g Date Time as image above Whatever criterion you choose for ordering your list will be indicated by a blue triangle and stored Select the desired Search field with the trackball or the corresponding key on the touch panel can be used as a wildcard Click this button or the Search key on the touch panel to search for the corresponding input Ifa procedure with more than one procedure step is retrieved from the worklist only one entry is created The number of steps is given in the S column Highlight the result using the trackball cursor and the left or right trackball key Set Select Click either this button or touch the Select key on the touch panel Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Operating the System Note To start an exam directly trom the worklist press the button Start Exam in the bottom right corner of the worklist window by touching the space bar or the middle trackball key Note The data from the workiist is filled into the patient information dialog if no MPPS Server and no procedure information are available Connectivity on page 14 37 Following actions are possible if MPPS Server is available and procedure information available 1 Highlight an entry from this list using the trackball a
26. 17 2 3 2 Rear Ul Panel The rear UI panel can be found on the rear side of the User Interface Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 17 6 H48691CF Revision 2 Connections CC vss uRBZOp woo ooo eov 17 2 3 3 DVD Panel CAUTION Laser radiation Avoid exposure to the beam Class 3B laser product CAUTION Class 3B laser radiation When open avoid exposure to the beam DVD The DVD panel is located on the left hand side of the system DVR Optional DVR Digital Video Recorder For more information see DVD Optional internal DVR on page 17 9 Is ee cstcchocsesscaecs Ol S 3 e essen 3 USB Dedicated USB port on optional DVR Record to stick Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 17 7 Connections 17 3 Recorder type 17 3 1 How to select the recorder type 1 Press the Utilities button on the user interface Press System Setup on the touch panel Select Connectivity on the monitor display Select the Peripherals tab oe e Select the desired recorder type System messages Message Description If DVD Internal DVR is deselected it This message appears if the recorder type is is not possible to record videos or data changed from DVR to DVD on the DVR DVD Internal DVR is not selected in the This message appears during system startup if System Setup It is therefore not the DVR is installed but not selected in the possible to record data or videos
27. Add annotation When pressing the Abc key For more information see mage Annotation on page 4 26 The annotation will appear on the selected position Position of the Scan assistant annotation Choose between Top Left Bottom Left or Home Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Utilities and System Setup 14 2 4 Administration dministration Press the Administration key on screen to enter the Administration section In the Administration section you have the following options Service System Info Options 14 2 4 1 Service 1 Position the cursor into the displayed password window and press Set 2 Enter the password and click the Accept button to display the Service Tools window Note For further details and explanations refer to the Service Manual of the system 14 2 4 2 System Info In the System Info page the Software Hardware version that is installed in the system can be seen Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 27 Utilities and System Setup 14 28 Note 14 2 4 3 Options fon Humbe AD Voluson Ex Gower Wei ECE Debro iiy poe Satie rikr Mondor DPU WE HHE kiar HDC biriga i Re Cy ee hra HARDEE ORC _HOTEGP ER CES Bird RECA POE Baki FESAMPCOEF ID Ey SAR PCO WETT Hanian Eye CEA Example Serial Number Displays the serial number of the system System Info Software Displ
28. Chapter 13 Archive Describes the general functions of the archive like image history patient archive and exams Sections in this chapter Current Patient Dialog on page 13 3 Clipboard on page 13 6 Patient Archive on page 13 11 aTa Pk Image History on page 13 34 Exam Review on page 13 35 Selecting Exams on page 13 43 Settings on page 13 45 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 13 1 Archive 13 2 The Voluson E8 E8 Expert provides an Image Management System that allows fast and extremely easy image management It allows users to view print and transfer images stored in the Voluson E8 E8 Expert In addition it allows users to send and receive DICOM images over the DICOM Network The following functions are available 1 Current Patient Dialog The patient dialog allows you to enter patient data see Current Patient Dialog on page 13 3 2 Clipboard Clipboard is meant for storing US pictures intermediate You can store pictures onto the clipboard and later choose the clearest to use for diagnosis and long term archiving see Clipboard on page 13 6 3 Patient Archive The Patient Archive is the database in which you search for a particular exam of a particular patient see Patient Archive on page 13 77 4 Image History Image history gives you access to all the US pictures of all exams of one particular patient see Image History
29. E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 se AJ Archive Not possible to use DICOM Storage Commit and Query Retrieve with the same DICOM Server It is usual to receive images and storage commits both on port number 104 13 3 4 Patient Menu To evoke the patient menu click a patient from the patient table When a patient from the patient table is selected the left margin of the screen and the touch panel show the patient menu Touch panel Archive Patient Edit Data Delete pe Current Patient Current Patient Opens Current Patient Screen see Current Patient Dialog on page 13 3 aa eta _ Image History Opens the Image History Screen see Image History on page 13 34 ecm Haviey Exam Review Opens the Exam Review Screen see Exam Review on page 13 35 Use as Current Uses the currently selected patient as the current patient and changes back to the Current Patient menu see Patient Menu on page 13 27 This button is only active if there is no current exam oe Editbata Edit Data Opens the Edit Data menu and allows you to edit the data of the selected patient see Patient Menu on page 13 27 au Delete Delete Deletes the currently selected Patient see Data Transfer Menu on page 13 28 Reproduce a scan For more information see Repro on page 13 40 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 13 21 Archive S Close th
30. E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 19 5 Glossary Abbreviations JSUM Japan society of ultrasound in medicine JUGUL lat Jugularis engl jugular MD Mid Diastole minimum velocity see also Vd and Vmin Mee me venesse oo Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 19 6 H48691CF Revision 2 Glossary Abbreviations e fowom PO Poweromier a Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 19 7 Glossary Abbreviations C ooo eomme o Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 19 8 H48691CF Revision 2 Glossary Abbreviations tricuspidal valve E A ratio Vd BO re Velocity diastolic minimum velocity or end diastolic velocity see also ED and MD Vp Hem posterior horn of lateral ventricle hemisphere Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 19 9 Glossary Abbreviations XBeam CRI CrossBeam Compound Resolution Imaging XTD View XTD View Extended View Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 19 10 H48691CF Revision 2 GE Healthcare Austria GmbH amp Co OG Tiefenbach 15 4871 Zipf Austria www gehealthcare com C 0123 GE imagination at work
31. For more information see VOCAL Edit on page 10 123 The image shows the different visualization techniques VOCAL shows a surface Mesh sSurtac Volume Rendered Image of a Shell Contour The shell contour is used to define which voxels in the 3D ultrasound data set are parts of the shell geometry and which are outside Voxels outside the shell contour are not displayed in the Volume Rendered image Shell Volume Calculation Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 113 Volume Mode The shell volume is defined as the difference between the volume defined by the outer surface of the shell geometry and the volume defined by the inner surface of the shell geometry Shell Niche presentation The niche presentation allows the visualization of slices and the shell contour in one image The presentation gives a 3D overview about the orientation of the slices and the shell contour Shell Vii cme Pia 205 10 cm lngide 130 85 cm Ouigide J0 o cm Screenshot of a shell contour 10 12 2 VOCAL Define a new Contour Operation 1 After volume acquisition Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 114 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode Planes MagiCut een Cine Mode Cale a Ref Image 3D Orientation se SRI init pan RA B 30 Dnt wd a m a f tilt j 180 270 Pinas Quality Vol Angle TH bow 25 high2 TE 2 Touc
32. Move the cursor to the desired field press the right or left trackball key Set and type in the changes The edited values are marked with an asterisk next to the changed value Additionally some parameters or settings can be changed when clicking into the specific field on the worklist page For example Method average minimum maximum last or off 12 3 3 To change the Application T 1 To change the application of the worksheet touch this key on the touch panel Meas Applicat 2 Select another application and then touch the Return key 12 3 4 Exam Comment Touch the Exam Comment key to view the Exam Comment summary report to enter a comment using the keyboard or to enter a previous defined comment by touching the Comment A Comment B or Comment C key on the touch panel Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 7 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports Date 04 12 2006 Perf Physician Sonographer EE Meas Worksheet Gyn y Applicat Obstetric Fetal Anatomy Save as Clear ommen Cc Comment Comment B C Preview Print Report If a comment is already saved type in the comment desired using the alphanumeric keyboard or touch the Comment A Comment B or Comment C key to enter a previous defined comment If no comment is saved and you want to save one 1 Type in the comment desired using the alphanumeric keyboard 2
33. Note Note Note V SRI is a three dimensional volumetric filter The volume data is filtered first and then the sectional planes and the rendered image are created This improves the visual appearance of the B and C planes and smooths out artefacts in the render image For more information see Speckle Reduction Imaging SRI II on page 10 44 This mode is only available for specific probes This mode is only available on Voluson E8 Expert 1 Press the V SR button on the touch panel The V SRI pop up window opens 2 Select the desired filter settings for Sectional Planes and Render Image The V SA button shows the selected settings separated by a slash Numbers 7 2 3 will affect surface rendering numbers 4 5 6 will affect structure rendering e g bones Yo Cine TH low 20 39 10 3 7 3D Gray Chroma Map Gray 2D W 4 1 Touch the Gray 3D key Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 45 Volume Mode 2 Select either a predefined Gray Curve 1 9 or a user definable Gray Curve User1 3 10 3 7 1 Gray Edit Menu Edit menu When touching the Gray Edit key the Edit menu appears on the touch panel and the graphic display of the Gray Map is shown on the monitor With the Edit function it is possible to create a Gray Map curve Map position select Save and Exit Exit Return to the previous menu Note that changes in the Edit menu will not be s
34. Note 1 At 80MHz and 800MHZ the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies Note 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from structures objects and people Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 2 30 H48691CF Revision 2 Safety and Maintenance 2 11 Network disclosure Purpose and scope This disclosure is intended to satisfy the requirements of IEC 60601 1 2005 clause 14 13 and IEC ISO 80001 1 2010 clause 3 5 for disclosure of network related specifications requirements and residual risks in order to facilitate the responsible organization s risk management activities e g pursuant to 80001 1 for their networks incorporating the Voluson E8 E8 Expert Purpose of the network connection The connection options USB Ethernet WLAN Bluetooth provide a possibility for data transfers from and to the Voluson E8 E8 Expert This allows the customer to use a convenient database system for data management and data sharing e g within a hospital or any other relevant organizations Also simple standard device connections such as printers USB storage devices or similar are provided by the USB connection for data exchange Network interface technical specifications Physical and link layer interface Ethernet IEEE 802 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX and 1000BASE T Internet Protocol Version IPv4 IP Addressing static or DHCP Physical and
35. Set again The measurement results of PSV EDV RI and S D are displayed and stored in the report To measure the Time in Spectral Doppler Mode 1 Press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the desired item For example select Left Renal Artery 3 To measure a horizontal time interval touch the Time key A line appears in the screen 4 Move the line to the start point of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key A second line parallel to the first one appears Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 5 Move this line using the trackball to the end point of the measurement and then press Set 12 4 5 6 HR Heart Rate To measure the Heart Rate HR in Spectral Doppler Mode 1 Press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the desired item For example select Left Renal Artery 3 Touch the HR key on the touch panel A line appears on the screen 4 Move the line to the start point of the period and press the right or left trackball key Set The second line appears 5 Select the number of heart rate cycles for the measurement with the rotary control below the touch panel 6 Move the second line to the end point of the period according to the selected number of heart rate cycles to be measured 7 Press the right or the left
36. SonoAVC Generic Cut Merge ROI n Init Ref Image m A B 3D Init tilt ral fais 36 Separation TH low 80 g t e7 gr 4 Reselect the ROI press Left Ovary Start or Right Ovary Start SonoAVC general Left Ovary Right Ovary Start Start Ref Image TH low 21 After a few moments the list of low echogenic objects is displayed The following screen appears Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 131 Volume Mode RbCS 9 O G44 le Etm LaF sine The QI 7 S DETA TETA E TEAT A 4 F P 10 13 2 1 Table of low echogenic objects The calculation results are displayed in the top right corner The objects are listed according to size All different objects are color coded i e the color surrounding the number of the object also denotes the object on the image If the mouse cursor hovers over a specific item on the list the respective object in the image is highlighted and vice versa The color of the object is bound to its position on the list The biggest object will always be displayed in red the second biggest one in green and so on Day of Stimulation oe oo as if the object were a Ovary perfect sphere Total Amount Length of x axis of the best fitting ellipsoid Length of y axis of the best fitting ellipsoid Length of z axis of the best fitting ellipsoid Average value of the x axis y axis and z axis Volume of the object Note The measu
37. The 4D Mode menu appears on the touch panel Scan mode 4D Real Time Omni View Setting Application Gynecology Contrast Slice Thickness 15 mm 20 mm 3 Select a VCI A user setting e g Default The preset values are loaded 4 Select the Slice Thickness by touching one of the keys on the touch panel Note The actual values for slice thickness may vary trom probe to probe Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 96 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode 5 Select the display format desired Note The selected format will be present in freeze and scan mode 6 Place the Volume box over the region of interest The trackball has two functions position and size of the Volume box The activated function is displayed in status bar area on the monitor Q Ga Press the upper trackball key to change the function of the trackball from position to size or l vice versa 7 Change the size of the Volume box by moving the trackball Moving decrease the box size in vertical direction increase the box size in vertical direction increase the box size in horizontal direction decrease the box size in horizontal direction 8 Select the Quality This function changes the line density against acquisition speed 9 To start the VCI A acquisition press the Freeze key or the right trackball key Start gt displayed in Status bar area on the monitor JOL The volume acquis
38. Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 41 Volume Mode 10 3 Sub Menus The More key is available in all Volume acquisition menus freeze and scan mode Touch the More key on the upper right side of the touch panel The 3D 4D Sub Menu appears f Probe Edit R Orientation Light 3D 4D Sub Gray Tint Maps Render View Direction Gray 2D Up 3D Info 5 Down Tint 2D Clear 5 z Tint 3D 3D Sepia 1 Frame OmniView icon Color Trans gt Start Background Slope 35 0 Remark The Render View Direction keys are not available in Static 3D Sectional Planes mode 2D Bright 20 Contrast Background 50 50 44 The additional Sub Menu functions are not available in Static 3D Sectional Planes mode J Balance Power Tresh 130 These keys are only available if a 3D CFM 3D PD or a 3D HD Flow volume is acquired The 3D 4D Sub Menu contains different functions Render View Direction on page 10 43 s Power Threshold on page 10 49 id 3D Color Off on page 10 44 Speckle Reduction Imaging SRI II on page 10 44 3D Gray Chroma Map on page 10 45 Tint Map Tint 2D on page 6 25 Tint Map Tint 3D on page 10 47 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode id Contrast on page 10 48 ad Background on page 10 48 Balance on page 10 49 Power Threshold on page 10 49 1
39. on page 7 4 To start and use the MCFM mode For more information see MCFM Operation on page 7 8 To adjust the MCFM settings For more information see MCFM Sub Menu on page 7 9 The MCFM Main menu appears on the touchpanel scan mode Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Pad M Mode MCFM Menu Setting Application Abdomen ET Liver Adipose Kidney ERE DEFAULT Frequency penet Remarks In freeze mode changing the Speed Wall Motion Filter PRF and Gain is not possible In MCFM mode only one focus zone is available When the MCFM box is moved the focus position is set to the center of the Color box 7 4 2 MCFM Operation Overview of MCFM operations Color Box Size and Cursor Position Activation of MCFM Mode MCFM Gain Control Invert For more information see nvert on page 8 32 Wall Motion Filter WMF For more information see Wall Motion Filter WMF on page 8 36 Velocity Range PRF For more information see Velocity Range PRF on page 8 35 MCFM Cineloop For more information see M Cineloop on page 7 5 All further image optimizing functions are the same as those of the M mode For more information see M Operation on page 7 3 7 4 2 1 Color Box Size and Cursor Position After pressing the M and the C control adjust the Color box size and the cursor position 1 using the trackball in the 2D single image ED JOU 7 8 The
40. 0 85 GAIN range e 15 to 25dB PW WMF wall motion filter PW 30 500Hz iment owes PRF 2 8 steps FFT Fast Fourier Transformation max 256 channels 256 amplitude levels PW sweep speeds Simplex 26 44 13 22 8 81 6 61 4 40 2 94 cm s Duplex Triplex 6 61 4 40 2 94 cm s Review memory times gt 60 s 32MB Measurable flow velocities PW e 1cm s 8m s a 0 2 0MHz max zero shift e 1cm s 16m s a 60 2 0MHz max zero shift CW e 1cm s 11 60m s a 0 2 0MHz max zero shift e 1cm s 23 20m s a 60 2 0MHz max zero shift Signal processing Dynamic range 15 steps 10 to 40 Gray maps 18 basic curves and 3 User defined pre post Tint maps 15 Scale Display Veritical kHz cm s m s selectable Horizontal 1s marker big 1 2 s marker small Screen formats 2D D up down horizontal three different sub formats 30 70 50 50 70 30 left right vertical 50 50 D pencil probes only Image Formats 2D D duplex update simultaneous 2D CFM D 2D HD Flow D 2D PD D 2D TD D triplex update CW or PW 2D CFM PW 2D PD PW 2D HDFlow PW 2D TD PW triplex simultaneous PW only Audio Modes Stereo both directions separately in both channels Audio Volume Adjustable control digipots Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 18 19 Technical Data Information 18 10 4 Color Doppler Screen formats 2
41. 3 Select the number of histogram 1 2 or 3 4 Use the trackball to place the ROI over one of the sectional planes Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 5 Utilities and System Setup 5 The upper trackball key changes from position to size of the ROI and back 6 Press the Calculate key on the touch panel by using the right or left trackball key The histogram with corresponding number will be calculated and displayed Note The display is the same as the display of the 2D Histogram For more information see Histogram on page 74 3 14 1 3 3 Volume Histogram Calculating a Volume Histogram is only possible in combination with the VOCAL Imaging program Virtual Organ Computer aided Analysis For more information see VOCAL II on page 10 177 Volume Histogram operation review VOCAL Edit on page 10 123 14 1 4 External Video An externally connected video signal e g VCR is displayed on the monitor For more information see How to Connect Auxiliary Devices Safely on page 17 2 Operation 1 Switch on Ext Video by touching the keys Utilities and Ext Video The touch panel changes to the Extern Video menu Extern Video Live Mode 3 Use the controls of the VCR to display the external video signal on the monitor 4 Use the digipot control below the right loudspeaker to increase or decrease the volume of the sound Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 14
42. 3D or 4D key to activate Volume mode Remark The overview window is hidden when 3D 4D mode is activated without acquiring a volume Operation For more information see Volume Acquisition Static 3D Sectional Planes on page 10 13 For more information see Volume Acquisition Static 3D Render on page 10 49 6 Press the 3D or 4D key to activate Volume mode Remark The overview window is hidden when 3D 4D mode is activated without acquiring a volume Press the 2D button again to exit the High Resolution Zoom function 10 2 2 During 3D Acquisition The system displays only the volume box area during the acquisition of a 3D Volume After acquisition the system changes to freeze mode For more information see After the Static 3D Sectional Planes Acquisition on page 10 17 1 acquired 2D images during a volume sweep same size and position as the Volume box During the acquisition the following message will be displayed on the touch panel Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 16 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode Volume Acquisition in progress stop acquisition Possible operation during acquisition Touch Exit Stop acquisition The acquisition stops and the 3D or 4D Mode menu appears again Note The recorded information will be deleted except if more than 50 of the volume have already been acquired 10 2 3 After the Static 3D Sectional Planes Acquisition After the 3D Sec
43. 4 1 When creating a new Sub Category or Study entry following window appears Enter Name My Ownl Enter a name confirm with OK and then click the Close button 4 2 When creating a new user defined Measure item following window appears Hew Measure Calc Item d Measurement OB Biometry Pi a Select the item desired and then click on OK Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 16 6 H48691CF Revision 2 Measure Setup 16 3 1 2 To Create a New Measurement or Calculation Item 1 Select the relevant item in all the digest column s and then highlight the Measurement column For further details review To Add a Sub Category Study or Measure Item on page 16 5 Hew 2 To create a new entry click on the New button 3 In the New Measure Calc Item window select the item desired and then click OK Eda Measurement Heterence Tabie Equation Measure Name APAD Fetal Age Fetal Growth Authors Hane be 7 J Table Mescuremert Took Cie sarc ha F Equation k Ditame APAD Dest 1 cm 2 avg 5A Calculabed wed Af GP Cakusksd 4 In the displayed screen select resp enter Either select a parameter from the drop down menu or enter it directly Author s Name Enter author s name Note Author s Name must be unique if measure Name exists Measurement Tool Select the measurement parameter from the drop down menu Selection Field Adjust
44. 7 3 3 Dynamic Contrast Dyn Contr affects the amount of gray scale information displayed You can select between twelve different Dynamic Contrast curves The value is displayed in the Image Info area on the screen Note The appearance of the gray values depends also on the selected gray map For more information see Gray Map on page 6 27 7 3 4 Display Format For more information see Format on page 8 30 7 4 MCFM Mode M Color Flow Mode Color Flow Mode and Color M Mode are Doppler modes intended to add color coded qualitative information concerning the relative velocity and direction of blood flow within the 2D mode or M mode image Color Flow overlays color on the M mode trace using velocity and variance color maps The Color Flow wedge overlays the 2D mode image and M mode timeline The description of MCFM mode is subdivided in two groups s To use the MCFM mode For more information see MCFM Main Menu on page 7 7 To adjust MCFM setting For more information see MCFM Sub Menu on page 7 9 i To use special utilities Utilities on page 14 2 and Gray Map on page 6 21 7 4 1 MCFM Main Menu M Mode key C Mode key hard keys By pressing the M control and the C control the MCFM mode is switched on in the preparation mode The M cursor with M Color window appears on the active 2D image These hard keys are also the Gain control for the MCFM mode only in scan mode For more information see M Gain Control
45. A small number cuts off fewer signals than a higher number 45 Touch the Exit key to exit the Threshold Volume function 10 12 5 7 Vocal Measurement Display The layout and position of the display of the VOCAL results has to be the same as selected in Measurement Setup Global Parameters in Global Parameters on page 16 19 If result position is mode dependent the settings for 2D apply to VOCAL as well Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 129 Volume Mode If a measurement function is activated in VOCAL a yellow caution symbol appears on the screen This symbol reminds the user that UNINTENDED USE of this feature could lead to measurement inaccuracy For more information see Accuracy of measurements on page 11 20 This symbol will also be shown on the patient report in the report header if the performed VOCAL measurements are stored in the report For more information see To view a Worksheet on page 12 5 The same applies for the Threshold Volume result window For more information see VOCAL Edit on page 10 123 10 12 5 8 Volume Histogram After volume calculation via the VOCAL program it is possible to display an automatically calculated Color Angio Histogram of the volume 7 Touch the Volume Histogram key in the Vocal menu Volume Histogram Following window with the calculated histogram appears on the screen Conteur eheill Histogr
46. Angle correction cursor must be positioned parallel to the vessel axis in the area of the measuring volume When the result display is full max 4 the first measurement will be overwritten first Except for Auto Trace measurements all measurement results will be automatically included in the corresponding Generic Worksheet To store Auto Trace measurement results press the right or left trackball key Set previously Depending on the Application setting and the adjustment in the Measure Setup ad RI and PI will be calculated using ED End Diastole or MD Mid Diastole Vdiastole Vend diastole or Vmin depending on this selection all previously set measuring marks are erased when starting a new scan unfreeze gt Run mode or the measurement results are kept on screen the Spectral Doppler envelope curve is performed with a continuous trace line or by setting points the Doppler measuring results according to the Auto Manual Trace setting are displayed after an Auto or Manual Trace measurement For more information see Application Parameters on page 16 17 Depending on the setting in the Measure Setup ad all previously set measuring marks are erased when activating cine mode or the measurement results are kept on screen a new cursor appears to repeat the measurement or not the caliper the last measuring mark of the current measurement is fixed when pressing the Freeze key
47. Aube Dran Sop 1 Select the Date Time button to activate a sub dialog window to enter date time and time zone 2 Enter the correct date or time 3 Close the sub window with Ok to save the changes or Cancel to return to the Setup Page without saving the changes Date and Time Properties a r Date Time Time 7o Uate fal Ws 10 25 52 P ii pi Ta Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Utilities and System Setup 14 2 3 1 2 To Change the Time Format Time Format gt Select the Time Format button to activate a sub dialog window to choose the preferred time format Chose a time format from the pull down menu Close the sub window with Ok to save the changes or Cancel to return to the Setup Page without saving the changes Appearance sample Time sample 9 25 30 PM Time format hemmes tt vv Time format notahon hehouw meminute s second t am orpm h 12 hou a H 24 hou k hh mm leading zero h m no leading zero 14 2 3 1 3 Date Format Date Format ee ee F Ih gk Jaime ee ee E PT a a b A LAL i Iir r Rm a 1 RARAN IU Irar ee ee cj MbO OY Ty Yea b db d 5 m m m O r BOME mirr Activate the corresponding option button only one can be active to select the order of the date format desired day DD month MM and year YY 14 2 3 1 4 Display each button is an on off swi
48. CE on page 6 8 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 6 3 2D Mode 6 2 1 2D Gain CrossBeam Compound Resolution Imaging XBeam CRI on page 6 9 e Speckle Reduction Imaging SRI II on page 6 9 R Image Orientation on page 6 9 Multi Format on page 6 10 Cine Mode on page 6 15 With the Gain control the overall brightness of the 2D image is adjusted The adjustment of the gain control determines the amount of amplification applied to the received echoes All incoming echoes are amplified with the same gain value regardless of depth 2D Mode key Rotate this key to adjust the gain brightness of the entire image When the GAIN control is turned clockwise the entire image becomes brighter When the GAIN control is turned counterclockwise the entire image becomes less bright Remarks e The current gain value is displayed on the screen GN To change the 2D Gain is only possible with 2D Mode Single Dual Quad on and real time mode scan mode active independently of additional modes like CFM or PW 6 2 2 2D Mode Depth When the Depth control is flipped downwards the depth range of the 2D image is enlarged and the display size of the image is reduced to display the entire depth range When the Depth control is flipped upwards the depth range of the 2D image is reduced and the display size of the image is magnified With this function the depth range of the
49. E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 11 Volume Mode Review the following diagram to understand how the render box determines the direction of view Six different view directions are possible Render View Direction Right Left Back Front For more information see Render View Direction on page 10 43 10 1 8 General Advice to Obtain Good Rendered 3D Images 10 12 B MODE Poor quality of the volume scan will lead to a poor quality 3D image For a good 3D image quality adjust high contrast in 2D mode of the interesting structures before starting the volume scan Only the ultrasound data within the ROI render box will be calculated and displayed The correct placement of the ROI is essential for a good result because the ROI determines the view onto the interesting object 7 Surface Mode note that the surface of interest has to be surrounded by hypo echoic structures otherwise the system is unable to define the surface With the function THRESHOLD echo structures adjacent to the surface can be cut off if their gray values are much lower than the gray values of the surface structures i Minimum Mode note that the interesting objects vessels cysts should be surrounded by hyper echoic structures Avoid dark areas shadows caused by attenuation dark tissue presentation within the ROI otherwise large parts of 3D images will be displayed dark i Maximum Mode avoid bright artefact
50. H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode Parallel shift control Parallel shift enables a parallel shifting up down of the green line and the corresponding parallel planes of image B will be displayed automatically Adjust the position of image A and C with trackball The position of image A and C in relationship to the reference image B is determined through the Y axis intersection line for image A and through the X axis intersection line for ee image C By positioning these two axes within the reference image B the corresponding SZ 5 parallel planes of A and C images are displayed automatically The spatial position of plane C in relationship to the displayed 3D image is always a parallel plane with a rotation of 90 Therefore it is not possible to indicate the trace of image C by means of an intersectional line within the 3D image Parallel shift control Parallel shift enables a parallel shifting forward backward of plane C The depth position of the image C in relationship to the Z direction perpendicular to the display of the 3D image is indicated by the X axis in image A and B Adjust the position of image A and B with trackball The position of image A and B in relationship to the reference image C is determined through the Y axis intersection line for image A and through the X axis intersection line for image B By positioning these two axes within the reference image C the corresponding parallel plane
51. Height no height limitations e Qualified and trained physicians or sonographers with at least basic ultrasound knowledge The operator must have read and understood the user manual ophthalmic use or any use causing the acoustic beam to pass through the eye ad intra operative use that is defined as introducing probe into a surgical incision or burr hole ESSENTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE ULTRASOUND SYSTEM d Acquisition of ultrasound images as Display of ultrasound images on main display Measurement on ultrasound images System must remain in a safe condition acc IEC60601 2 1 Symbols and Labels Description of all symbols and labels used on the system and in the basic user manual 2 1 1 Warning labels used in the Basic User Manual Note Warning labels in the user manual have to be read and observed before proceeding N ai Notice 55 Describes important information that has to be read before proceeding 272 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 i A 2 1 2 Description of symbols and labels Caution Safety and Maintenance Describes general precautions necessary to protect health and equipment Bio Hazard Describes precautions necessary to prevent the risk of disease transmission or infections Electric Hazard Describes precautions necessary to prevent the risk of injury through electric hazards Explosion Hazard Describes precautions necess
52. Housing connection operating elements display facilities labels accessories user manual Functional test Checking of functions according to user manual check also modular combinations and common operability of system and accessories C Electric test Checking of the electric safety of system combinations according to EN 62353 or respective national regulations For safety reasons avoid handling fluids in the vicinity of the system Console Leakage Current Annually Also corrective maintenance or as required Checks by your facilities QA program Peripheral Leakage Annually Also after corrective maintenance or as required Current Checks by your facilities QA program Surface Probe Leakage Annually Also after corrective maintenance or as required Current Checks by your facilities QA program Endocavity Probe Annually Also after corrective maintenance or as required Leakage Current Checks by your facilities QA program 2 3 6 2 Note for the Administration of Full Backup Data All settings and patient data created since last full backup are NOT backed up It is highly recommended to create a full backup of settings and patient data regularly Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 2 13 Safety and Maintenance 2 14 When the Full Backup is stored on a network drive it may be desirable to move the data e g for backup or maintenance For further details review Backup on pa
53. If one transfer fails all subsequent transfers are stopped until the failed transfer succeeds or is removed from the queue Use for servers that cannot handle multiple associations or do not sort the images by Image Number If Send sequ is not checked the up to 5 data sets can be transferred at the same time This means that transfer is faster Images can arrive out of order in this case Use for servers that have none of the limitations listed in the above paragraph Image Size Original Colt Color 20 Compression JPEG 20 JPEG Quality pigh En EI EI Cine Compression JPEG Gina JPEG Quality pigh Volume Compr Jossy Hame Compr Chasity high Send image ri image Send 20 Cine 28 iduitirame Send 3D Volume 23 DCOM Volume Send 40 Cine as mCOM Volume DICOM Image Type gefist Send Measurements d SR mo Mukifrome FPS Limit Unlimited Inchode Scan ASSIS yas Data EN STORE STORE 3D Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 14 36 H48691CF Revision 2 Utilities and System Setup Color Image Size select either Color Grayscale or Automatic select either Original or 640x480 2D Compression 2D JPEG Quality select either NONE or JPEG select the desired JPEG compression factor Cine Compression Cine JPEG Quality select either NONE or JPEG select the desired JPEG compression factor Volume Compr Volume Compr Quality Select None lossless or lossy select the desired volume compression quality DICOM I
54. PRINT MPPS WORKLIST STRUCTURED REPORTING and STORAGE COMMIT destination However only one PRINT STRUCTURED REPORTING MPPS and WORKLIST destination can be selected at a time If more than one STORE STORE 3D or STORAGE COMMIT services are selected images are sent to all selected STORE or STORE3D destinations and committed with all STORAGE COMMIT destinations It is possible to use different Port numbers for each item in the Services list Only one address for a REPORT station can be configured any AE Title can be used The sent report data are compatible with View Point 14 2 5 3 2 Edit a server Press the Edit button to edit the selected server from the list The following menu will appear DICOM Configuration IP Address 172 16 99 99 Port 3104 Storage Commit Color Color Image Size Original 2D Compression None Cine Compression JPEG Cine JPEG Quality jo lt siess Volume Compr None Send Image a3 image Send 2D Cine aS Multiframe Send 3D Volume as Image Send 4D Cine aS Multiframe DICOM Image Type default Multiframe FPS Limit Unlimited Send Measurements as 5 E E 5 include Scan Assistant no Data Make your edits then press Save amp Exit to save them Press Exit to discard them Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 14 34 H48691CF Revision 2 Utilities and System Setup 14 2 5 3 3 Delete a server Press the Delete button to delete the selected s
55. Phone 46 8 559 50010 SWITZERLAND GE Medical Systems Ab Europastrasse 31 8152 Glattbrugg Phone 41 1 809 92 92 Fax 41 1 809 92 22 TURKEY GE Healthcare Turkiye Istanbul Office TEL 90 212 398 07 00 Levent Ofis FAKS 90 212 284 67 00 Esentepe Mah Harman Sok No 8 Sisli lstanbul Ankara Office TEL 90 312 289 77 00 Mustafa Kemal Mah FAKS 90 312 289 78 02 2158 Sok No 9 Cankaya Ankara United Arab Emirates GE Healthcare Holding U A E Dubai Internet City Building No 18 P O Box 11549 Dubai U A E Phone 971 4 4296161 Phone 971 4 4296101 Fax 971 4 4296201 UNITED KINGDOM GE Medical Systems Ultrasound 71 Great North Road Hatfield Hertfordshire AL9 5EN Phone 44 1707 263570 Fax 44 1707 260065 USA GE Healthcare Ultrasound Service Engineering 9900 Innovation Drive Wauwatosa WI 53226 Phone 1 800 437 1171 Fax 1 414 721 3865 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 1 7 General This page was intentionally left blank Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 1 8 H48691CF Revision 2 Chapter 2 safety and Maintenance Describes the safety and maintenance information pertinent for operating this ultrasound system and the probes Sections in this chapter Na Pk Symbols and Labels on page 2 2 Remarks for Safe Use on page 2 7 System Safety and Maintenance on page 2 7 Probe Safety and Maintenance on page 2 14 Biopsy Safety and Maintenance
56. Press the F1 button to invoke the electronic user manual Operation For more information see Electronic User Manual EUM on page 3 16 Up Down Page up Page down Switch between the next or previous page Left Home Moves left or with the Fn key to home position For more information see Auto Annotation on page 4 27 3 Electronic User Manual EUM F1 Help Function Activates additional keys on the keyboard Additional key functions are framed on the key e g Set Home Print Screen Copies an image of the current screen to the connected USB Stick or HDD Right End Moves right or with the Fn key to end position For more information see Auto Annotation on page 4 27 Press the F1 key on the keyboard to invoke the electronic user manual The EUM screen appears e g 2D Mode qo 6 amp Hide Bak Forward Prt Options Corterts index Search Faveetes GE Medical Systeaxs 2 Solely Uer Ultrasound 3 Description of the System 4 Starting the System 6 M Mode 7 Spectral Doppler Mode 8 CFM Mode Coles Flow Mo 5 2D Mode 9 PO Mode Power Doppie 10 TD Mode Tissue Doppie 12 Ues actual TOC curve 13 Basic Measuremerts 14 Coleudstions and Patiers I 2 Descrphon of Abbreviations chapter 5 22 The Help screen is divided into three sections To use the 20 mode review 20 Main Meny Chapter 5 1 2 To use Special utilities review U
57. Principle of Sectional Image Analysis on page 10 20 10 2 4 Principle of Sectional Image Analysis The display screen shows that sectional plane located within the volume which has been selected by rotating and shifting of the volume body in relation to the display plane Displacement of the volume body relative to the display plane YD 0 3 Resultant image of plane within volume 2 Volume Center plane 4 Displacement Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 20 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode Rotation of the volume body in relation to the display plane The rotation can be around the X axis or the Y axis of the display plane or the Z axis which is perpendicular to the display plane Start situation Rotation around X axis The position of the volume body in relation to the display plane is determined by a relative coordinate system This is made up of three orthogonal axes The common intersection of these axes is the central dot These axes are displayed within the display plane exactly in the X Y and Z directions and colored Rotation around any of these axes and displacement of the center of rotation make any imaginable plane within the volume body display able The INIT position of the volume body in relation to the display plane is reset able it is the start situation after completion of a volume scan The standard representation 3 sectional planes The 3 orthogonal sectional planes are simultaneou
58. Probe handle Abdomen Wide field of view Only CIVCO manufacturer needle guides may Obstetrics Biopsy guide be used with this biopsy Gynecology available Material Pediatrics CFM MCFM HD Plastic Flow Power Tissue and PW Doppler Urology Multi angle biopsy Only the biopsy bracket is reusable ani For detailed information please contact the manufacturer Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 5 24 H48691CF Revision 2 5 3 3 4 IC5 9 D Curved array transducer Probes and Biopsies IC5 9 D Biopsy H40412LN Biopsy E8385MJ T ar TA ASD 1 Patient applied part 2 Probe handle Obstetrics Wide field of view e Gynecology Biopsy guide CFM MCFM HD Flow Power and PW Doppler Broad bandwidth Multi frequency 5 3 3 5 C1 5 D Curved array transducer 1 Patient applied part 2 Probe handle Abdomen Wide field of view Obstetrics CFM MCFM HD e Gynecology Flow Power Tissue and PW Doppler Broad bandwidth Multi frequency Biopsy guide available Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Needle diameters Needle diameter gt 1 6mm lt 1 65 mm Material Material Stainless Steel Plastic Sterilization with Sterile packaged autoclave possible component Single Use only For detailed information please contact the manufacturer Only CIVCO manufacturer needle guides may be used with this biopsy Material Plastic Multi angle biopsy
59. R ender Display of 4D Display of A ROI 4D as Display of ROI 4D Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 81 Volume Mode 10 5 2 Real Time 4D Acquisition During Active High Resolution Zoom F 1 Press the Zoom control while still in 2D 2 Place the zoom box over the region of interest ans The trackball has two functions adjusting position and size of the zoom box The activated a f function is displayed in the status bar area on the monitor Press the upper trackball key to change the function of the trackball from position to size or f vice versa 3 Change the size of the zoom box by moving the trackball Moving increase the box size in horizontal direction decrease the box size in horizontal direction 4 Select HD Zoom by pressing the right trackball key 5 The overview window appears To readjust overview window settings For more information see General on page 14 14 Note You can still adjust the adjust position and size of the zoom box using the trackball 6 Press the 4D key to activate Volume mode Remark The overview window is hidden when 3D 4D mode is activated It appears again when you return to 2D Operation For more information see Real Time 4D Acquisition on page 10 79 7 Press the right trackball key to start volume acquisition JO Remarks Real Time 4D Acquisition is not possible in PD HD and CFM mode
60. SERIAL NUMBER Position Rear side of the system on the identification plate Rating plate Examples wal RT DIt6Ss30_2 W GE Healthcare Austria GmbH amp Co OG J6 Tiefenbach 15 4871 Zipf Austria Voluson E8 sn m 2012 11 100 130 220 240 V 1000 VA 50 60 Hz 130kg in de 0423 Pe Symbols Symbols used on the Rating Plate Description of symbols and labels on page 2 3 Listed to UL 60601 by a Nationally Recognized Test Lab Certified to CSA 22 2 60601 1 by an SCC accredited Test Lab CB Test report by National Certification Body CE Marked to Council Directive 93 42 EEC on Medical Devices Conforms to the following standards for safety IEC 60601 1 Electrical medical equipment IEC 60601 1 2 Electromagnetic compatibility s IEC 60601 1 4 Programmable medical systems ad IEC 60601 2 37 Particular requirements for the safety of ultrasound medical diagnostic and monitoring equipment IEC 61157 Declaration of acoustic output ISO 10993 Biological evaluation of medical devices NEMA UD3 Acoustic output display MI TIS TIB TIC WEEE Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment Inculding national deviations 18 1 1 Details CISPR11 Group 1 Class A Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 18 2 H48691CF Revision 2 Technical Data Information Immunity IEC 61000 4 2 2 4 8 kV air discharge e 2 4 6 kV contact discharge IEC 61000 4 5 e 2kV differential mode SNE
61. Select Yes if you want delete exam select No if you want to proceed Use this button or the Cancel key on the touch panel to return to patient dialog page without saving data Use this button or the Save amp Exit key on the touch panel to return to the Patient Dialog Page and save data Only data that was entered via the past exam dialog is shown Measurements from exams performed on this machine are not listed Data that was entered via the past exam dialog page is to be used in the fetal trending and those exams will be listed in the previous report section as well For more information see Obstetric Calculations in 2D Mode on page 12 22 4 4 5 3 Patient Information Gynecology GYN 4 18 Application Data Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Operating the System Exp Ovul Day of Cycle Day of cycle Date of expected ovulation LMP The first day of the last menstrual period must be entered using the selected format e g mm dd yyyy Note The first day of the last period must be entered Note For more information see Patient Information screen on page 4 74 4 4 5 4 Patient Information Cardiology CARD Perf Prepare ef Prc beef et iE j Application Data Height Enter the patient s height in one of the dimensions cm ft inch Weight Enter the patient s weight in one of the dimensions kg up oz Body Surface Area calculation value
62. Stand by Allows you to turn the system on or put it in standby mode Utilities Allows you to switch to the utilities menu Utilities on page 14 2 Probe Program Switch to the Probe Program menu for selecting a probe with its related program For more information see Probe selection on page 4 5 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 A Review 13 Probe holders UI Level Adjustment Allows you to adjust the height of the User Interface see User interface adjustment on page 3 5 Patient Data Entry Switch to the patient data entry menu the previous exam will be closed For more information see Entering Patient Data on page 4 7 Review Switch to the exam review mode For more information see Selecting Exams on page 13 43 Unless no exam has been started then pressing the Review key opens the Archive For more information see Patient Archive on page 13 11 3 11 Description of the System 3 12 End Exam Patient and measurement data are stored e in the Data manager and all temporary patient and measurement data are cleared Operation Caution It is absolutely necessary to press this key before switching OFF the system Otherwise the current Patient data as well as all the measurements in the Patient report will be lost Elastography Pressing activates deactivates the Elastography Mode Functions depend on current probe For mo
63. VOCAL Modes menu touch the Contour Finder Trace contour mode key 2 To define the contour touch the Start key 3 Outline the first contour on the touch panel Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 119 Volume Mode VOCAL Settings Contour Finder Trace Selection Clear Sensitivity 5 4 Adjust the sensitivity of the Contour Finder algorithm Note To delete the currently defined contour touch the Clear key on the touch panel 5 Select the next image plane by means of this control below the touch panel or touch the Next key eee The contour is copied to the next image plane and can be redefined by drawing a new contour Every time you start to outline a contour the new contour in this image plane replaces the old one err Touch this key if it is desired to manually modify the defined contour add or cut Add by ET moving from inside the contour back to the inside of the contour Cut by moving from ddi outside the contour back to outside the contour The red line indicates the adding cutting boundary VOCAL Creation Contour Finder Semiauto Trace Return Clear Clear Rot Ref 1 sensitivity Next 5 Back Note This function is deactivated automatically when switching to the next rotation slice Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 120 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode 5 Trace all remaining contours in t
64. also the size of the zoom box can be changed The scan frame rate and line number are automatically optimized with the zoom box active in scan mode 1 Press the Zoom digipot to switch to Zoom Pre Mode 2 Place the zoom box over the region of interest The trackball has two functions adjusting position and size of the zoom box The activated f function is displayed in the status bar area on the monitor Ga Press the upper trackball key to change the function of the trackball from position to size or vice versa 3 Change the size of the zoom box by moving the trackball Moving decrease the box size in vertical direction increase the box size in vertical direction increase the box size in horizontal direction decrease the box size in horizontal direction 4 Place the zoom box and select between PanZoom left trackball key and HDZoom right trackball key Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 6 13 2D Mode 6 14 Note Note Pan oom 5 The overview window appears In Pan Zoom the overview image is updated with every Frame In HD Zoom the overview image is not updated It is the last image before HD Zoom was activated To readjust overview window settings General on page 14 14 6 To change the Zoom factor turn the Zoom digipot Remarks In the overview image the zoom box is depicted with a yellow border and is identical with the zoomed sector on screen Us
65. click Forward 3 2 2 To Use the Index 1 Click on the Index tab A list of topics arranged in alphabetical order will be displayed 2 Use the scroll bar to look up a topic 3 Either double click the desired topic to view or highlight the topic and click the Display button GE Medical Systems Krew UISA 14 2 Basic Patient Report Functions Report key hard key EY The results of OB GYN Cardiac and Vascular calculations are recorded in the patient report By pressing on the Report key the corresponding report is switched on To view a Patent Report chapter 14 2 1 To save send a Patient Report chapter 14 2 2 To edit a Patient Report chapter 142 3 To view previous Reports chapter 14 2 9 To transfer a Patient Report chapter 14 2 5 in To print a Patient Report chapter 14 26 GE Medical Systems Kretztechnik 3 7 2 3 To Search for a Topic 1 To search for a specific topic click on the Search tab 2 Type in the topic name in the Type in the keyword to find field Topics with the word or phrase you typed appear in the Se ect Topic to display area D Either double click the desired topic to view or highlight the topic and click the Display button Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 3 18 H48691CF Revision 2 Description of the System D e gt amp _Hide Back Forwed Pint Options G l To select the Render Mode Type in the
66. frames will be displayed as a dotted line in the plot curve Enable all disabled frames invalid frames will be displayed as non existing values Single plot image with strain data Single plot image with ratio data Dual plot image upper image with strain data lower image with ratio data The scale adapts to the strain values The scale can be adjusted manually Filter off Average filter over time Average filter over a certain number of frames samples Store current filter position as default position Cine function 9 7 Elastography Mode Function Button Description Touch panel rotary and flip switch Start Frame Moves to the first frame of the loop controls End Frame Moves to the last frame of the loop Loop Speed Loop speed 25 50 100 200 100 corresponds to real time speed Hor Sweep Adjusts the time scale of the horizontal plot axis Frame by Fr Moves from one cine frame to the other Table 9 1 Elastography Analysis description of touch panel elements Elastography monitor display Voluson 96 Figure 9 5 Elastography monitor display Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 9 8 H48691CF Revision 2 Elastography Mode Elastography Analysis monitor with description 11L D Breast MI 1 2 Hospital Figure 9 6 Elastography Analysis monitor display description o_o Reference ROI Lesion Harder compression Lower compression Strain plot Ratio plot N OO oO FP W N Frame indicato
67. irea ra ECG symbol Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 18 34 H48691CF Revision 2 Chapter 19 Glossary Abbreviations Description of abbreviations sorted alphabetically Sections in this chapter A on page 19 2 B on page 19 2 _ C on page 19 3 D on page 19 3 E on page 19 4 F on page 19 4 G on page 19 5 H on page 19 5 on page 19 5 e J on page 19 6 L on page 19 6 E M on page 19 6 N on page 19 7 O on page 19 7 P on page 19 7 R on page 19 8 S on page 19 8 T on page 19 8 e U on page 19 9 h V on page 19 9 X on page 19 10 e Y on page 19 10 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 19 1 Glossary Abbreviations A A a B Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 19 2 H48691CF Revision 2 Glossary Abbreviations lat Bulbus engl carotid artery bulb C D eni Diastole diastolic Din Inner reduced distance Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 19 3 Glossary Abbreviations Outer original distance Ductus Venosus PI Pulsatility Index Ductus venosus PLI preload Index DV PVIV Ductus venosus PVIV peak velocity index vein DV S a Ductus venosus S a ratio E End Diastole see also Vd F Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 19 4 H48691CF Revision 2 Glossary Abbreviations foo meore Voluson
68. key The HD Flow Submenu appears Vv 4 Quality WMF PRF norm low2 0 6 kHz Note Some functions are only available in scan mode 8 5 3 1 HD Map This function allows selection of the color coding for an optimization of the display of blood flow similar to the post processing curves with gray scale 2D scans It is useful especially with low flow rates It may be altered in real time or Freeze Mode respectively The color is coded in a color wedge light yellow white white white red light red dark red dark red dark blue light blue dark blue dark blue light blue white white white cyan pink white yellow dark blue dark red dark grey dark red dark blue dark red dark grey dark red cyan Pink white yellow Strong echo lighter hue high brightness Weak echo darker hue low brightness Selection of a HD Flow Map curve Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 8 22 H48691CF Revision 2 Doppler Modes Touch the HD Map key and select the HD Map curve by touching key 1 to 8 8 5 4 HD Flow 2D Spectral Doppler Triplex Mode Triplex mode is the simultaneous real time display of 2D mode Power Doppler and Spectral Doppler There are two possibilities to combine Power Doppler HD Flow with Spectral Doppler Information 1 HD Flow 2D Mode PW Doppler Pulsed Wave Doppler HD Flow Menu In scan mode it is possible to switch between HD Flow menu PW menu and the Submenus to readjus
69. key unlit M mode display normal Ean A key lit M mode display inverted Remark The Invert function is only available with endo vaginal probes 7 2 6 Frequency It is the same as the 2D mode frequency For more information see Receiver Frequency norm Range on page 6 6 Frequency 7 2 f TGC Slider Controls The TGC settings is the same for the M trace and the 2D image For more information see TGC Slider Controls on page 6 5 7 2 8 Transmit Power This function is the same for the M trace and the 2D image For more information see Transmit Power on page 6 6 7 2 9 M Mode Depth The function is the same as 2D mode depth For more information see 2D Mode Depth on Depth lD page 6 4 7 2 10 M Cineloop Several 2D image frames and M mode trace information can be recalled When freezing a certain time frame M information of the last examination sequence is stored in the loop memory The sequence can be reviewed frame by frame Display 2D image cine and Loop or Cursor for M trace M Loop Trackball moves the whole M Mode area M Cursor Trackball moves a cursor within the M Mode area For more information see Cine Mode on page 6 75 1 Freeze the image After freezing the trackball controls the M mode loop and 2D cine Gb 2 The upper trackball key changes from M loop to M cursor and back Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 7 5 M Mode 3 Use the trackball to
70. nearby electronic equipment RF emissions CISPR 11 The Voluson E8 E8 Expert is suitable for use in all lish i e hospital i amo caa Ee eN CA establishments i e ospitals doctors practice etc other than domestic The Voluson E8 E8 Expert is 61000 3 2 l intended for professional use only Voltage fluctuations Complies flicker emissions IEC 61000 3 3 Guidance and manufacturer s declaration electromagnetic immunity The Voluson E8 E8 Expert is intended for use in electromagnetic environment specified below The customer or the user of the Voluson E8 E8 Expert should assure that it is used in such an environment Immunity test IEC 60601 test level Compliance level Electromagnetic environment guidance Electrostatic discharge 2 4 6 kV contact 2 4 6 kV contact Floors should be wood ESD IEC 61000 4 2 24 8 KV air 24 8 KV air concrete or ceramic tile If floors are covered with synthetic material the relative humidity should be at least 30 Electrical fast transient 2kV for power supply 2kV for power supply Mains power quality burst IEC 61000 4 4 lines lines should be that of a typical commercial or hospital 1kV for input output lines 1kV for input output lines l environment Surge IEC 61000 4 5 1kV differential mode 1kV differential mode Mains power quality should be that of a typical commercial or hospital environment 2kV common mode 2kV common mode Voluson E8 E8 Expert Ba
71. no input Dimension selection Position the cursor into the dimension field using the trackball and press the left or right trackball key The different dimensions will appear in Successive order for selection Note The BSA value is calculated automatically after entering height and weight If Height and or Weight are entered in other dimensions inch b first convert to kg and cm before calculation of the BSA can take place Calculation formula for BSA BSA WT x HT x 10 x 71 84 WT kg HT cm BSA m Note For more information see Patient Information screen on page 4 74 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 4 19 Operating the System 4 4 5 5 Patient Information Urology URO Perf Phujsachane PRGA Coefficient 1 l Ret Physidae PPoA Codtfaoert 7 Sonographer Enam Type Exom Comment Curie ree teenie Application Data PSA Enter the value of the Prostate specific antigen PPSA Coefficient 1 Enter the 1st value of the predicted PSA Coefficient PPSA Coefficient 2 Enter the 2nd value of the predicted PSA Coefficient Note The PPSA Is a number in dimensions of ng ml grams which gives the normal level of PSA that would be expected for a prostate of a given volume Predicted PSA Volume grams x 0 15ng mV g the Coefficient factor is adjustable in the Measure Setup Note For more information see Patient Information screen on page 4 74 4 4 5
72. on page 2 22 Manufacturer Responsibility on page 2 24 Service Documents on page 2 24 Bioeffects and Safety of Ultrasound Scans on page 2 24 Disposal on page 2 27 Guidance and manufacturer s declaration on page 2 28 Network disclosure on page 2 37 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 2 1 Safety and Maintenance The Voluson E8 E8 Expert scanner system has been designed for utmost safety for patient and user Read the following chapters thoroughly before you start working with the machine The manufacturer guarantees safety and reliability of the system only when all the following cautions and warnings are observed INTENDED USE This system is intended for use by a qualified physician for ultrasound evaluation in the following clinical applications Image Acquisition for diagnostic purposes including measurements on acquired image Clinical applications Patient population Operator profile Fetal Obstetrics Abdominal GYN including infertility monitoring of follicle development Pediatric Small Organ breast testes thyroid etc Cardiac fetal cardio Peripheral Vascular Musculo skeletal Conventional and Superficial Transvaginal and Transrectal CONTRAINDICATIONS The Voluson E8 E8 Expert system is not intended for Age all ages incl embryos and fetuses Location worldwide Sex male and female Weight all weight categories
73. on page 6 37 Note If you want to return to the preparation mode press the right trackball key XTDpre Og displayed in the status bar on the monitor 6 7 4 After the XTD View Image Acquisition After the XTD View image acquisition the system switches automatically to the XTD read menu The Overview display format will be present on the screen Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 2D Mode Overview Frame Review 2D XTD XTD rot 0 Guidance and precautions for interpretation of XTD images Always adopt a critical attitude to images created in XTD mode Be aware that any diagnostic conclusion must not be drawn from XTD images alone but have to be checked with other diagnostic procedures If in doubt about a structure seen in XTD View mode consult the original 2D slides in the After the XTD View Image Acquisition on page 6 37 Please note that the accuracy of measurements in XTD images is limited and can be lower than measurements in B images Routine Har mid 100 A good XTD image has a smooth edge with no sharp curves It has a clear direction with almost no curves When reviewed with the corresponding 2D images the cursor moves linearly over the XTD image e g equal trackball distances lead to an equal movement of the blue rectangle All structures visible in the 2D images can be found clearly in the XTD image Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 6
74. w Cs p a a Note that 3D Translational Cine and Slice Cine can be displayed either in Quad Screen Mode or in Full Screen Mode To switch between the Modes use the hard keys on the UI while the settings screen appears on the touch panel 10 4 2 1 3D Rotational Cine Note 3D rotation cine is the rotation of a volume around either X or Y axis 3D Rotational Cine is only available in full screen mode Single View Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10259 Volume Mode The basic screen elements are Pre view of the rendered start image top left position when rotating around the x axis ee bottom left position when rotating around the y axis e Pre view of the rendered end image bottom left position when rotating around the x axis eG bottom right position when rotating around the y axis Operation 1 Press the 3D Rot Cine key The settings screen appears on the touch panel Cine gt Rotation Angle Step Angle Rot Axis 180 360 a Cine Sequence Start Image End Image 22 5 22 5 2 Select the Rotation Angle Rotation Angle Alternatively use the Start Image and End Image control below the touch panel to select the rotation angle desired Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 60 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode Start Image End Image 22 5 22 5 3 Select the step angle Step Angle T The increment defines the amoun
75. 0 5 10mm T U I slice position in overview image VCAD Acoustic output Tx Frequency Transparency Elasto Map Persistance Line Density Velocity Range Technical Data Information Cine Frame Number Recorder Status Measurement Results Displayed Acoustic Output TIS Thermal Index Soft Tissue TIC Thermal Index Cranial Bone TIB Thermal Index Bone MI Mechanical Index Power output Biopsy Guide Line ECG Line Trackball function Trackball and Trackball buttons GE Logo Zoom overview image Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 zoom box position Technical Data Information 18 7 System Standard Features State of the art user interface with high resolution 10 4 inch LCD touch panel Operating modes B M Conventional M PW CFM Color Flow Doppler Mode PD Power Doppler Mode HD Flow HD Flow Doppler Mode TD Tissue Doppler Mode B Flow Static 3D Mode B Mode only B Power Doppler Mode B CFM Doppler Mode B HD Flow Mode B CRI B CRI CFM B CRI PD B CRI HD Flow Contrast dependent on contrast option B Flow dependent on B Flow option Automatic Tissue Optimization Coded Harmonic Imaging Coded Excitation CE XTD SRI II Speckle reduction imaging V SRI Volume Speckle reduction imaging CRI Compound Resolution Imaging Cross Beam FFC Focus amp Frequency Composite High Resolution Zoom Pan Zoom Steering Virtual Conv
76. 05 31 2006 e FIFE 5 1 Req aie 06 01 2006 by F D e FF0505 ib test m 3 Ferma 6 23 2008 r S955 06 06 Test Person Check 05 05 1985 z Frak 06 25 2006 r Feii i Fri abe EEA E Select AN Deaebeet All lt Back text gt Cancel l Help Here you can choose between Patient View and Exam View Depending on which view you choose you can select patients or exams to load from the archive It is also possible to choose a singular patient or a singular exam 5 To de select a patient or an exam check the appropriate check box on the left side of the screen To select this patient or exam again check the check box again Use the Select All button or the Deselect All button below the information screen to select all exams or patients or de select them After selecting the patients or exams you desire confirm with Next The following dialog appears lt 7 Start Restore Backup now 6 Confirm with Yes If you do not want to restore the backup now press No The Process bar appears As soon as the loading procedure is finished the following window appears 7 Confirm with OK You will be returned to the Image Archive tab 14 2 6 2 2 How to Save an Archive 1 Press the Save button The following menu appears Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 61 Utilities and System Setup Last successful Backup Imoae Archive Backup ae 11 06 2007 Allexans to dole N Remove L
77. 1 Press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the desired item For example select Left Renal Artery 3 Touch the HR key on the touch panel A line appears on the screen 4 Move the line to the start point of the period and press the right or left trackball key Set The second line appears HR Cycles p 5 Select the number of heart rate cycles necessary for measurement with the rotary control 2 below the touch panel 6 Move the second line to the end point of the period according to the selected number of heart rate cycles to be measured 7 Press the right or the left trackball Set key again The Heart Rate is displayed 12 4 5 Abdomen Calculations in Spectral Doppler Mode There are many possibilities to measure different vessels in Spectral Doppler mode Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 12 14 H48691CF Revision 2 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports s Auto Trace Manual Trace Measurement of Each Item Measurement of PSV EDV RI SD Time HR Heart Rate 12 4 5 1 Auto Trace m m m ron Vein TE Applicat RI SD Sensitivity Baseline Trace Mode 60 0 auto 1 After obtaining a feasible Doppler spectrum press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the desired measurement item and then select Auto Trace The Doppler spectrum is traced automatically and the results are displayed 3 Select the sensitivity of the envelope curve to eli
78. 2 16 6 2 18 Multi Format Several 2D Mode images can be displayed simultaneously on the screen by using the Multi Format buttons Dual and Quad To change between the images press the upper trackball key or use the Multi Format buttons There are three 2D mode display modes each one having a different screen layout Single Screen Format Dual Screen Format Quad Screen Format 6 2 18 1 Dual Screen Format Dual Screen Format keys hard key Press these keys to change the display mode from Single or Quad display Mode to the Dual display mode Real time mode Pressing the Dual mode key freezes the real time 2D image in the actual display position and shows the real time 2D image live in the next display position Next Position Dual 1 gt 2 gt 1 and so on Freeze mode read mode The Dual mode key selects the next display position without activating real time mode thus allowing for post processing read magnifying cine etc of a frozen image If no image is stored in the next position then real time mode is activated in the next position The right trackball key Real time mode The Update 2D key freezes the real time 2D image in the actual display position and activates the real time 2D image in next display position Freeze mode The Update 2D key activates the actual display position and activates the real time 2D image using the actual settings The upper trackball key Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic
79. 21 cm a ME i 922 lowed HC Hodlock 15 55 cm 96 1 E 20 Calculations Ci BPD OFD 8596 70 BEY Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 33 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports Touch this flip switch control below the touch panel to change from the 1 A fetus to the 2 Note With this flip control below the touch panel additional worksheet pages of the measured Fetus e g Fetus A can be selected B or 3 C or 4 D fetus To close the worksheet touch the Return key on the touch panel The appearance of the Obstetric worksheet depends on i information s that were entered in the Obstetric Patient Information page adjustments in the Measure Setup Pages For more information see Measure amp Calc on page 16 3 s the performed measurements the selected summary report pages Use following keys to switch between different summary reports Anatomy Compare Sanare paa It is now possible to switch between Gyn and OB worksheets if both worksheets exists For more information see Measure amp Calc on page 16 3 For more information see Basic Patient Worksheet Functions on page 712 5 12 6 4 12 1 Summary Report Calc This is the default page which is displayed after activating the worksheet function All calculation listed in the report can be valued by choosing a value in the drop down menu i Norm
80. 378 x350 bhta Pett Pett efi tae fae 644 x 176 UD 50 50 a a pitta pet bay STATUS AREABAR Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 8 30 H48691CF Revision 2 Doppler Modes esque Logo Patient name EEL e aa erm a UD 40 60 ___ 2004 17 10 0004 RAB2 5 0 betetric 190 x 176 Py to nd a C 669 x 356 E pt The frequency setting controls the Transmit Frequency It is common to work with the center frequency Frequ Mid of the ultrasound crystal With a higher Transmit Frequency Frequ High lower flow velocities are displayed at a given PRF advantage better display of lower flow velocities but the penetration depth is reduced With a lower Transmit Frequency Frequ Low the aliasing velocity is increased at a given PRF advantage display of higher flow velocities with increased sensitivity in depth Touch the Frequ key and select the suitable transmit frequency Low The transmit frequency is lower than the center frequency of the crystal Mid The transmit frequency is the center frequency of the crystal High The transmit frequency is higher than the center frequency of the crystal Information of frequencies For more information see Chapter 5 8 7 10 1 Frequency for Elastography Steps penet norm resol 8 7 11 Gently Colors Gently Color defines the transition between color and gray scale in
81. 3D 4D data only volumes and cine sequences to a different store server e g PC with Software 4D View installed than screen images and 2D cine sequences Select PRINT to send images stored in printer clipboard to a DICOM printer Select MPPS to send images to a DICOM server with transfer information Select ST COMMIT to send image with an additional layer of security Select REPORT to send the Patient report data to a PC via network or serial port Select STR REPORT to send a structured report Select WORKLIST to retrieve Patient Information Name ID Birth from an external Worklist server e g HIS Hospital Information System RIS Select VIEWPOINT to get default settings for Viewpoint server Alias Enter a nickname for each DICOM node to make it easier to handle various nodes Use any name but do not insert space characters AE Title Application Entity Title of the remote DICOM application IP Address Enter the host name or IP address of the DICOM node e g any dicom server net Port Number Enter the port number of the DICOM node e g 104 Storage Commit The Storage Commit drop down menu contains all currently available storage commit servers The selected storage commit server is used for committing the images sent to this store server Send Sequ If Send sequ is checked it causes all data to be sent to this server sequentially This means that only one transfer is active at a time
82. 4D calculation which is inserted in the orthogonal planes A B C The rendering result is displayed in the lower right quadrant The Edit ROI key is in the Real Time 4D ROI 4D A ROI 4D menu available The adjustments of Position Size and Curvature of the Render Box are the same as in the 3D Menu For more information see After the Static 3D Render Acquisition on page 10 57 10 5 2 7 Accept ROI Mode The Edit ROI key is available in the Real Time 4D ROI 4D A ROI 4D menu Disable the Edit ROI key to activate Accept ROI mode The adjustments are the same as in the 3D Menu For more information see After the Static 3D Render Acquisition on page 10 51 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 87 Volume Mode 10 5 3 MagiCut 4D This software has the ability to electronically edit the images and makes it possible to cut away structures obstructing the view onto the ROI The left image displayed above is rendered without cutting whereas the right image has had cutting techniques applied to give a clearer view of the object of interest There are six methods available for cutting These different methods can be used in different cases to facilitate an unobstructed view to the object of interest The following image shows a 4D rendered image before 4D cutting and after The cutting was performed by rotating the image to give the best view and util
83. 6 Edit Patient Information Touch Edit Data The key is available in the Archive Patient Menu Patient Menu on page 73 27 or in the Exam Menu on page 13 23 Note If 3D or 4D data are loaded from Archive back into the system editing is impossible the Edit Data key is grayed Phys ee grapher Comment GA Ectopic Fetus Sam Custom Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 4 20 H48691CF Revision 2 Operating the System Potent ID Lost Nome MED 10907 10 12 21 1 2nd Patient ID DOB Imm dd yyyyk SMP PED Perf Physician Ref Physicior Sonographer Exam Type Exorn Comment Scan Assistont Exom Date Erom Time Exom Type For more information see Standard Input on page 4 8 Cancel amp Return Cancel 2 Return Press Cancel amp Return to discard your changes and return to the previous operating state dave aturn Press Save amp Return to save your changes and return to the previous operating state Save ad Return Note The ID number cannot be changed 4 4 6 To Retrieve Patient Data via External Work list Server Select the Worklist button to view the available Data from the external worklist server This button is available in the Patient Information screen on page 4 74 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 4 21 Operating the System Note 4 22 P Bimm Proc ID k Station Hamu Station AE Tithe
84. 6 H48691CF Revision 2 Utilities and System Setup Touch the Live Mode key to change back to the internal signal 14 1 5 Thermal Indices With this function the user can select the required Thermal Index for display g TIS Soft Tissue Thermal Index TIB Bone Thermal Index TIC Cranial Bone Thermal Index Operation 1 Touch the Utilities hardkey to invoke the Utilities menu 2 Touch the TI select key and select the desired Thermal Index Upon selecting the desired Thermal Index you will be automatically returned to the Utilities Menu The selected Thermal Index is displayed in the TI select key Remarks While you are scanning notice the index numbers you are using and which controls affect the readings Try to keep the index numbers as low as you can while maintaining diagnostic information within the image This is particularly important when scanning the fetus For details review Reporting Tables on page 2 27 Regulated Parameters on page 2 26 14 1 6 Guided Biopsy The biopsy lines must be programmed once by the service personnel or the user The procedure must be repeated if probes and or biopsy guides are exchanged Before performing a biopsy make sure that the displayed biopsy line coincides with the ee needle track check in a bowl filled with approx 47 C warm water For further instructions review Biopsy line adjustment for single angle biopsy guide on page 5 77 Biop
85. Calculations amp Annotations on CINE Length 512MB up to 10 min depending on B image size and FPS typical about 3min 4000 images with curved array 15cm depth angle 81 22 FPS Cine operation manual image by image auto run speed 25 to 200 of real time rate play repeat mode forward forward forward backward forward 18 9 8 Image Volume Storage Archive On board data storage viewing and backup software Image data stored as e Raw data file proprietary format meee Sonme r e omme Volume file stored as Raw data file proprietary format a Size typically 0 8 5 MB depending on probe and adjusted volume size Compression 2D JPEG lossless high mid low ee 3D 4D Lossy and lossless compression available Typical compression rates are 50 with lossless compression 15 with lossy compression but maximum quality and 5 with lossy compression and reduced quality approximate values Review e Current Exam and archived data sets Single Images and Cine Clips e View Format Raw data DICOM data e Display Formats 1x1 2x2 3x3 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 18 16 H48691CF Revision 2 Technical Data Information Reload of current archived data sets e 2D Raw Data incl Color Doppler Spectral Doppler and M Mode e 3D Raw Data Single Volume incl Calc Cines e 4D Raw Data Volume Cine Bitmap files BMP TIFF JPEG Raw files RAW 2D VOL Volume data 4DV RAW VOL incl Patient
86. Cancel A Sa Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Note Archive If the current exam Is still active a message will be displayed before loading the 3D or Real Time 4D volume data set For details about Raw Format and Multiframe review Connectivity on page 14 37 One Image Forward One Image Back Display Displays image numbers according to the following format current Image number total number of images Images Scroll bar The indicator shows the position of the currently displayed frame in the cine Move around the indicator in the scroll bar to skim through the cine One selected image from any layout can be displayed in full screen size To use Full Screen View move the cursor to the desired image and press the right or left trackball key Set twice To return to normal viewing press the right or left trackball key again twice 13 5 9 Images with JPEG Compression less than 100 If images were saved using lossy less than 100 JPEG compression a yellow sign e g J80 compression factor 80 is displayed at the left upper part of the image For details about JPEG Compression review Connectivity on page 14 37 A lossy compression reduces image quality which can lead to a false diagnosis 13 6 Selecting Exams This chapter describes how to select load remove and back up exams It also describes how to transfer exams to another system via the DICOM network To Use t
87. Change between different Visualization modes In the 3D 4D Mode menu you can change to different Visualization modes 3D Orientation To 180 270 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 91 Volume Mode 10 6 Sono Render Start General Sono Render Start helps to find the render start position to easily separate solid tissue in front of the render object The Sono Render Start algorithm looks for the transition from solid tissue to liquid and positions the Render Start into the liquid area If the analysis finds a valid result the current Render Start area will be replaced by the new one if not a temporary message appears on screen The Render Box Size is transverse to the render direction and the Render Box Position will not be changed The Sono Render Start can be activated via the Auto key on the user interface if i The acquisition mode is 3D read or 4D read write not possible in Vol pre Edit mode is On e Double click Clear all Sono Render Start changes When Sono Render Start is activated the current displayed 3D data set is used for analysis process and the new found Render Start Area will be displayed graphically on the Render Box 1 green line on A and B image If no valid render start area can be found following message appears No valid Sono Render start found 10 7 Volume Cine 10 92 The 4D VolCine funct
88. Cine Gestational Age Focal zones marker Orientation marker 15 pessera 3 5 3 1 Detailed Image information Name of user program Receiver frequency MHz Acoustic power or fixed to maximum power 100 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 3 9 Description of the System Image Info B 2D Mode C5 M7 Dynamic curve number and Gray map number P6 E4 Persistence number and Edge enhancement number max Dynamic range dB and selected Dynamic curve number Edge enhancement number Reject number D PW CW Mode Acoustic power or fixed to maximum power 100 Wall motion filter Hz Angle correction Sample volume size Sample volume depth Transmit frequency Probe data Velocity Range kHz cm s m s CFM Mode PD Mode HD Flow Mode Acoustic power or fixed to maximum power 100 Transmit frequency Probe data Quality of CFM table Wall motion filter table Velocity Range kHz cm s m s Th45 S5 5 Threshold number and Smooth rise fall number 3D CFM 3D PD only Ti e Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 3 10 H48691CF Revision 2 Remarks Description of the System ad When the Automatic Optimization function is active an asterisk next to the Gray map number is displayed in the B mode Image Info area The Image Info in 3D 4D Mode depends on the selected Acquisition and Visualization Mode 3 5 4 Control Panel 3 6 Button description
89. Cyst 2D amp Fetal Brain 22 W Gall bledder STIC AMM Uterine Mass Essure Device Fract Limb AVol Fract Limb TVol Fetal Exam Fetoscopic 2 Fetoscopic 4 Ber 06 24 1975 BELAOQUINAT KHE 07 29 1976 SonoAVC STIC 28w a ie Hie ie Bie Bi ee es iie Eie ees Ebe Sies fie Eie Eie Ebe Sie Biao Search procedure Enter ID or Name into the corresponding input field using the keyboard keys can be used as a wildcard Select the result using the trackball cursor and the left or right trackball key The result is highlighted Double clicking selects and copies the result immediately to the Patient Information screen ad or click the Select Patient button Select Patient Select Patient The search result will be copied to the patient dialog screen The Patient Information screen For more information see Patient Information screen on page 4 74 appears again Show All k the Show All button and all Patients will be displayed on screen as shown on the picture above p Cancel Cancel Search Search Exit from the search dialog screen no result is copied The Patient Information screen For more information see Patient Information screen on page 4 74 appears again 4 5 Image Annotation Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 4 26 H48691CF Revision 2 Operating the System ABC Annotation key hard key Press this key to start the documen
90. E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 151 Volume Mode This page was intentionally left blank Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 152 H48691CF Revision 2 Describes the general functions of generic measurements Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Chapter 17 Measurements List Measurements 11 1 Generic Measurements Generic Measurement Caliper key hard key By pressing the Caliper key the Generic Measurement functions are switched on and a cursor appears in the image area For description of Generic Measurement functionality review Basic Operations on page 11 3 rw Area Volume Angle Meas Applicat Dist Clear Study 2 Line Distance Trace Point Cancel For Example 2D D the active menu is for 2D mode By means of these keys the mode can be changed and the corresponding measurements will be shown on the touch panel When a key is greyed out this menu is not accessible at the moment 2D Mode Measurements on page 11 4 M Mode Measurements on page 11 13 sd D Mode Measurements on page 11 15 Additional functions in the Generic Measurement menu To Change the Measurement Application on page 11 19 i To Review the Generic Work Sheet on page 11 19 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 11 2 H48691CF Revision 2 Measurements 11 1 1 Basic Operations By pressing the Caliper key on the control
91. For more information see Cine Mode on page 6 75 Operation 1 Freeze the spectrum After freezing the trackball controls the Doppler loop and 2D cine 2 The upper trackball key changes from the D Loop to D Cursor and back Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 8 5 Doppler Modes The active Cine is displayed on the Monitor 2D D image or 2D D image 3 Use the trackball to scroll through the stored sequence The Doppler spectrum will scroll 1 simultanously with the 2D image 8 1 3 PW Sub Menu The PW Main menu has to be active Touch the key Sub PW The PW Submenu appears p PW OFF Gray Map Tint Display Format VY Vv UD 50 50 UD 40 60 E Scale Unit cmis V Center Frequency aana Vel Range Baseline 55 kHz Note Some functions are only available in scan mode The following functions are available Dynamic on page 8 29 Frequency on page 8 31 Scale on page 8 34 i Format on page 8 30 Gray Map on page 6 27 Utilities on page 14 2 8 1 4 PW 2D Color Information Triplex Mode Triplex mode is either the simultaneous real time display or update of 2D mode Spectral Doppler and Color Doppler There are two possibilities to combine Pulsed Wave Doppler PW with Color Information 1 PW 2D Mode Color Mode CFM Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 8 6 H48691CF Revision 2 Doppler Modes In scan
92. H aia L 5 When Lock Screen is activated the system is configured as follows All scanning activities are stopped as if the Freeze or Cancel button was hit s All hard keys are disabled except the trackball left and right trackball button and the power knob The hardware is put into power save 14 1 7 1 Enabling Lock Screen Lock Screen has to be enabled before it can protect your system Press the Utilities hardkey Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 14 8 H48691CF Revision 2 Utilities and System Setup Press the System soft key to invoke the System Setup Screen Click the General filing card Tag the Screen Lock check box 4 to enable Lock Screen Tag check box 5 if you want Lock Screen to protect your system automatically when the screensaver starts When you enable Lock Screen the first time you are prompted to enter a password Change Screeniock Pareword Enter the password and click Save amp Exit Note A valid password must be at least 6 characters long and has a maximum length of 80 characters A password must contain at least 2 non letter characters 0 9 or Confirm that you want Lock Screen enabled with Save amp Exit You have just enabled Lock Screen and the Utility menu has changed The Lock Screen button is active Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 9 Utilities and System Setup Lock Scre
93. If no image is stored in the next position then the real time mode is activated in the next position The right trackball key Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 6 11 2D Mode Real time mode The Update 2D key freezes the real time 2D image in the actual display position and activates the real time 2D image in the next display position Freeze mode The Update 2D key activates the current display position and activates the gt lt real time 2D image using the actual settings The upper trackball key A gt The upper trackball key changes between Cine and 2D image position of the current 2D Ole Freeze key Real time mode The Freeze key freezes the real time 2D image in the actual display Freeze mode The Freeze key activates real time mode of the frozen 2D image in the actual display position The last real time settings will be employed again in the new selected display position Operation Select Quad display mode Freeze the image Select the next display position by using the format key a ee Se Freeze the next image If the image is frozen and you use Update 2D the right trackball key the same image is selected and active If the image is active in real time mode by pressing the Update 2D the right track ball key the next image is selected and active Press the Single key to return to Single display mode 6 2 19 Zoom 6 12 Zoom is controlled by
94. Information Urology URO 3 Enter the required Application Data for the selected Application 4 Enter additional Study Information Area Perf Physician Ref Physician Sonographer Exam Type Accession Indication Custom 1 Custom 2 5 Exam List of the Selected Patient If an existing patient file has been selected then all the exams of this patient will be displayed in this area One exam can be marked for further manipulation by using the trackball For more information see Standard Input on page 4 8 or To Search in the Patient List on page 4 25 4 4 5 1 Patient Information Abdomen ABD jomar Enam Type Esam Cogent Application Data Height Enter the patient s height in one of the dimensions cm ft inch Weight Enter the patient s weight in one of the dimensions kg Ib oz Dimension selection Position the cursor into the Dimension selection field using the trackball and press the left or right trackball key The different dimensions will appear in a Successive order for selection Note For more information see Patient Information screen on page 4 74 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 4 15 Operating the System 4 4 5 2 Patient Information Obstetrics OB Pet Papii Bel Papic Soncrop her Echo Eara Tipe 1 Fetus z Eam Comment An ih Cibe Sonn daioi H mdogbore Application Data Enter the date
95. Make new measurements 2 Save Screenshots of reloaded DICOM data Even if the ed data was a cine it is only possible to save a single screen When reloading DICOM data the two lined title bar header patient information is hidden In order to close the reopened exam again press the Back to Live Scanning button on the ee Back to Live Scanning touchpanel Repro is the reload of work settings of a stored picture It is possible to recall the exact setting e g Geometry Gain Colormap etc from a stored picture Choose a Picture at the Exam Review Patient Archive or from the Clipboard whose settings Repro will recall When using the repro function the same probe that was used when storing the image has to be connected If the correct Probe is connected but not selected the Voluson Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Archive Application automatically activate the correct probe If the Repro probe is not connected following dialog appears at the screen Voluson ES Please connect Probe xxx After connecting press OK otherwise press Cancel When the probe is connected press OK all probe settings will be loaded automatically The repro can now be loaded Without new patient exam with new exam i with new patient 13 5 6 Commenting 13 5 6 1 Exam Comment Press the Exam Comment key Exam Comment Comment This is the same comment as in
96. Manual H48691CF Revision 2 6 27 2D Mode A This symbol reminds the user that unintended use of this feature could lead to measurement inaccuracy For further details After the XTD View Image Acquisition on page 6 37 To use the XTD View XTD View Main Menu on page 6 28 To use special utilities Utilities on page 14 2 And Gray Map on page 6 27 6 7 1 XTD View Main Menu XTD View key hard key By pressing the XTD key XTD View is switched on in the preparation mode A blue box frames the 2D image Its size adapts to the 2D image To start and to use the XTD View mode XTD View Operation on page 6 30 The XTD View Main menu appears on the touch panel scan mode Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 6 28 H48691CF Revision 2 2D Mode Acquisition Display centered moving e Pe Sector Foc Zones Harm Frequ 1 HIGH Acquisition Display mga Frequency Foc Zones J resol Remarks XTD View is intended for scanning areas too large to fit in a regular frame Always scan slowly and in uniform motion lengthwise in either direction relative to the probe marker Make sure that the probe stays in one plane throughout the scan For details Image Orientation on page 6 9 XTD View acquires images using leading edge vectors and does not acquire slices as in Cine The image is stored as you perform the scan and can be monitored during acquisiti
97. Manual NT 2 1 inner inner 3 2 inner middle 12 6 4 6 Sono 7 Sonography based Intracranial Translucency Sono 7 is a software option Sono 7 Sonography based Intracranial Translucency is a system supported measurement for Intracranial Translucency Starting from the routinely used midsagittal view of the fetal face obtained for assessment of the Nuchal Translucency and nasal bone the ultrasound system uses a semi automated mode to measure the anterior posterior diameter of the fourth ventricle recognizable as intracranial translucency The workflow is identical with SonoNT Fetal g Biometry nes Cranium Lt Uterine CRL gt BPD FL Hadlock iellman Hadlock Hadlock 12 6 4 7 Display of 2D Measurement Results BPD 4 61cm GA 20w0d EDD 11 01 2005 BPD Type of Measurement GA Gestational Age EDD Estimated Date of Delivery Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 27 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 12 28 Note Note Note GA OOR means that the Gestational Age is Out Of Range no standard curve available for current input EDD Estimated Day of Delivery is only displayed if the selection of the field Show EDD calc on screen in the Measure Setup is Yes For further details review Global Parameters on page 16 19 There are 3 possibilities to display 2D Measurement results BPD 4 61cm GA 20w0d
98. Map on page 6 27 8 4 1 PD Main Menu wz PD Mode key hard key By pressing the control PD the PD mode is switched on The PD Box appears on the active 2D image To use the PD mode PD Operation on page 8 16 To adjust the PD settings PD Sub Menu on page 8 17 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 8 15 Doppler Modes The PD button is the Gain control for the PD mode in scan mode only For more information see PD Operation on page 8 76 The PD Main menu appears on the touch panel scan mode LS es Sub HD Flow PD Setting Application Peri Vascular EE Artery Artery con SS E Vertebralis Vessel Gen Artery DEFAULT m 2D 2D PD Sub window Note Once HD Flow has been activated it is automatically activated each time the PD hardkey is pressed until the user switches to PD again by using the PD hardkey Remarks Changing the Gain Quality WMF PRF Steering and 2D 2D PD is only possible in scan mode Beam steering is only possible with linear probe and in scan mode 8 4 2 PD Operation The PD operations g PD Box Position and PD Box Size PD Gain Control on page 8 17 Quality on page 8 33 Wall Motion Filter WMEF on page 8 36 Velocity Range PRF on page 8 35 i 2D 2D PD PD Gain Control on page 8 17 8 4 2 1 PD Box Position and PD Box Size In 2D imaging the relations between 2D frame rate line density and
99. P posterior image visible in the Vol preparation area dorsal Cr cranial Ca caudal R right L left Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 26 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode Init condition of an small parts probe If the VOL start image is a longitudinal section Cr on the left of the screen below the following Init positions are obtained A A Cr Longitudinal Ca R Transversal L P P L Cr Horizontal Ca R The sectional image A represents that 2D A anterior ventral P posterior image visible in the Vol preparation area dorsal Cr cranial Ca caudal R right L left Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 27 Volume Mode Init condition of an endocavity probe If the VOL start image is a median sagittal section left side of the screen is posterior the following Init positions are obtained Cr Horizontal L Ca P Transversal A The sectional image A represents that 2D A anterior ventral P posterior image visible in the Vol preparation area dorsal Cr cranial Ca caudal R right L left 10 2 4 3 1 Initial Condition of different Probes ree Touch this key on the touch panel to reset the rotations and translations of a volume section to the initial start position nit Init condition of an endorectal probe Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 28 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode eS E
100. Patient key on the control panel select the URO page and enter all patient information for Urology calculations For more information see Entering Patient Data on page 4 7 Note To cancel all calculations performed before and to start new measurement press this key and select End Exam or Clear Exam gt 2 Press Start Exam Starrexam 3 Make sure that the probe and application are selected properly If another application is N selected press the Probe key on the control panel and change it to Urology For more information see Probe selection on page 4 5 Probe 12 8 3 Urology Calculations in 2D Mode gt Distance Measurements like Length Height etc Vessel Area Vessel Diameter Stenosis Area Stenosis Diameter mes The measurement procedures in 2D Mode are the same than in application Abdomen For JN more information see Abdomen Calculations on page 12 10 12 8 4 Urology Calculations in M Mode e Vessel Diameter Stenosis Diameter Time HR Heart Rate Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 55 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports DoS The measurement procedures in M Mode are the same than in application Abdomen For J more information see Abdomen Calculations on page 12 10 12 8 5 Urology Calculations in Spectral Doppler Mode Auto Trace Manual Trace Measurement of Each Item Measurement of PS ED RI S
101. Patiest 10 Potens 6 bons Exams Osiy e Peber ID 010037 31 06 27 2 010017 11 07 73 1 010017 31 07 22 1 010017 11 07 71 1 010017 11 07 16 1 010017 11 07 28 1 010017 21 06 27 1 010017 11 06 20 1 010017 11 06 4 4 010017 11 06 14 5 010037 11 06 24 2 Se ee AIALL Emors Em Dote f 5 ma Laam Comment u Or 26 2011 2 Or 26 2011 2 Pil orazon 7 imi Osver 2011 1 Potient Archive C hn eel Archive Exom Use os Current Repro Dota Tronsfer i 3 Archive Screen Exam Only table Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 13 12 H48691CF Revision 2 Archive l gt l Q oc 3 h i se os Current Repro Dato Tronsfer 13 3 1 Trackball allocation ie Press the left or right trackball key to set Press the lower left trackball key to send and image to dicom For more details see Data AO Transfer Menu on page 13 28 Press the lower middle trackball key to print an image For more information see Data A Transfer Menu on page 13 28 Press the lower right trackball key to export an image For more information see Data AC Transfer Menu on page 13 28 a Double click on the left trackball key will open the Exam Review menu Double click on the first image in the Exam Review will start a exam reload Oe Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 13 13 Archive 13 3 2 Lock or unlock selected exams How to lock or unlock exams 1 Select one
102. RAB6 D RAB6 D Biopsy H48681ML 1 Patient applied part 2 Probe handle Abdomen Urology Obstetrics Pediatrics Gynecology 3D 4D Real Time imaging Wide field of view Small and light weight Biopsy guide available CFM MCFM HD Flow Power Tissue PW and CW Doppler Broad bandwidth Multi frequency Only CIVCO manufacturer needle guides may be used with this biopsy Material Plastic Multi angle biopsy Only the biopsy bracket is reusable For detailed information please contact the manufacturer Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 5 3 2 3D 4D Probes Linear Array Probes 5 3 2 1 RSP6 16 D Small parts transducer RSP6 16 D 1 Patient applied part 2 Probe handle Small Parts Peripheral vascular Pediatrics MSK Breast 9 3 2 2 RM14L 3D 4D Real Time imaging Wide field of view virtual convex Biopsy guide available CFM HD Flow Power and PW Doppler Broad bandwidth Multi frequency Probes and Biopsies Biopsy PEC75 H46721W Biopsy PEC79 H46701AD Needle diameters lt 1mm lt 1 4mm lt 2 2mm Material Stainless Steel Sterilization with autoclave possible Only CIVCO manufacturer needle guides may be used with this biopsy Material Plastic Only the biopsy bracket is reusable For detailed information please contact the manufacturer If the probe is continuously operated for longer than 10min in fast 4D mode at l
103. ROI The left image displayed above is rendered without cutting whereas the right image has had cutting techniques applied to give a clearer view of the object of interest There are six methods available for cutting These different methods can be used in different cases to facilitate an unobstructed view to the object of interest The following image shows a 3D rendered image before 3D cutting and after The cutting was performed by rotating the image to give the best view and utilizing the contour inside method Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 68 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode Note The cutting function is only available on a 3D rendered image In a combined display mode Pictogram mode 3D image 2D sectional planes the cut information still remains in the 2D planes 10 4 3 1 MagiCut Operation MagiCut 1 Touch the MagiCut key to switch on the MagiCut function The following menu appears on the touchpanel 3D MagiCut Main Cut Mode Cut Type Cut Depth Cut Undo Trace Outside Ni eee EE pens Box Box Defined Inside Outside m SSC 2 Use the controls to rotate the rendered 3D image to a position where 3D artefacts or undesired information can be cut Note For faster rotation press on the rotation control switch function slow rotation fast rotation 3 Select the Cut Mode and set the region of interest to be cut Trace Mode inside outside Volus
104. Render Acquisition After the 3D acquisition the system switches automatically to the 3D menu The selected format will be present on the monitor e g 3D ROI Mode Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 51 Volume Mode MagiCut More Mode Cale Ref Image 30 Orientation Ce Quality Vol Angle high 25 Voluzon Konrad franz 26788 9999 06 05 09 3 CO Note d If you want to return to the 3D 4D Volume Mode menu press the right trackball key Vol pre displayed in the status bar area on the monitor Display of the rendered image 3D ROI Edit ROI Mode 3D Pictogram Accept ROI Mode Fixed ROI Edit ROI off Remark In the 3D 4D Mode menu you can always change to a different Visualization 10 4 1 1 3D ROI Edit ROI Mode This is the mode for the adjustment of the volume render box The volume render box determines the ROI for the 3D calculation which is inserted in the orthogonal planes A B C The rendering result is displayed in the lower right quadrant Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 52 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode The Edit ROI key in the Static 3D Render menu and the Quad screen format key are selected 3D Full size Display Single screen format key illuminated The rendered 3D image is magnified and displayed in a full size format without the sectional planes A B and C 10 4 1 2 Adjust
105. Storing a biopsy line Figure 5 4 Biopsy Setup Menu Rectal biopsy guide 1 Select a rectal probe 2 Perform steps 1 to 8 see Biopsy setup on page 5 9 3 Press Rectal 4 The needle point is visible on the screen Mark the needle point by using the right or left trackball button Sed 5 The acoustic block of the probe is moved 45 related to the shaft of the probe 6 Again the needle point is visible on the screen Mark the needle point by using the right or left trackball button Sed 7 Press Save amp Exitto store the needle points 8 Based on the stored needle points the biopsy line can be displayed in Volume Mode 5 3 Overview of all probes and biopsies Slight noise emissions may occur in 3D 4D probes when operating in volume mode gN If the material of the biopsy needle guide is plastic only Single Use is possible ee A The biopsy bracket is reusable gN y For detailed information please contact the manufacturer The high elasticity of the probe surface ensures an optimal coupling of the probe This p elasticity can lead to small deformations of the applied part N The intended use of the probe will be in no way affected by this deformation and leads to no loss of the ultrasound image quality Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 5 13 Probes and Biopsies 5 14 5 3 1 3D 4D Probes Curved Array Convex Probes 5 3 1 1 RAB2 5 D Abdominal transduce
106. The VOCAL Static 3D menu appears on the touch panel The shell contour is not accepted and you return to the VOCAL Modes menu where you can define a new contour Of course only valid reference contours generate a valid shell contour 10 12 5 3 Display of the Shell Volume The shell volume is defined as the difference between the volume defined by the outer surface of the shell geometry and the volume defined by the inner surface of the shell geometry A degenerated surface is symbolized in the display with xxxxx The Volume is displayed on the monitor in the lower right quadrant Shell XXX XX cm Vref XXX XX cm Inside XXX XX Cm Outside XXX XX Cm If the reference surface geometry is not valid all volumes are invalid and displayed with xxxxx 10 12 5 4 VOCAL Static 3D In this menu several display modes can be selected You will enter this menu after accepting the ROI r Touch this key in the VOCAL Edit menu The defined shell contour is accepted stored Accept ROI and the result is displayed Following menu appears on the touchpanel Sectional Planes MagiCut Ref Image o pe Threshold Volume B Volume c 3D Histogram Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 126 H48691CF Revision 2 New ROI Volume Mode p Return to the VOCAL Modes menu where you can define a new contour Return to the VOCAL Edit menu where you can re
107. The following Rendering combinations are possible Gray mode Color mode e Transp Texture Surface e Transp Texture Transp Max e Transp Max Surface e Transp Max Transp Max In case Surface mode is selected it will normally be necessary to adjust the low threshold for the border recognition of the surface These threshold values do not apply for the Transparent modes For adjustment of Threshold low and Transparency review Color Render mode Render Mode Image Type and Render Algorithm on page 10 72 For adjustment of Balance and Power Threshold review Sub Menus Balance on page 10 49 Power Threshold on page 10 49 10 4 4 8 Inversion Render Mode This render mode is used to display anechoic structures such as vessels fluid to solid This gray render mode inverts the gray values of the rendered image e g image information that was black becomes white and vice versa The availability of Inversion Render Mode depends on the selected acquisition mode nversion Activate Inversion Render Mode Select the render algorithm desired Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 77 Volume Mode Gray Mode 1 Gray Mode 2 Fare i care gt 7 Max Min ce Transp l Texture X Ray Light Small Part Breast Apply Render Settings from User Program Remark Inversion has its own set of render mode settings Mostly Gradient Light will be
108. To start defining the contour touch the Start key The result is displayed on the monitor If necessary edit the contour review VOCAL Edit on page 10 123 otherwise touch this oie key to accept the computer assisted contour 10 12 4 6 Save VOCAL After accepting the ROI the VOCAL image can be stored in the archive by using the P keys To customize the P keys For more information see Chapter 15 10 12 5 VOCAL Edit The monitor screen appears as follows The reference image shows the first generated contour outlined with red and yellow dots In the orthogonal slices the intersection curves between the shell geometry and the different image planes are outlined as a yellow contour The shell geometry is visualized in the lower right quadrant The VOCAL Edit menu appears on the touch panel Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 123 Volume Mode VOCAL Edit Shell mode Inside Outside Rotation Ref 4 a ST Back Next In the VOCAL Edit menu 1 the contours can be manipulated review Modifying a Contour 2 a shell contour is generated review Defining a Shell contour For more information see VOCAL Edit on page 10 123 ____ The shell contour is accepted and stored The VOCAL Static 3D menu see VOCAL Edit Th on page 10 123 appears on the touch panel Ed The shell contour is not accepted and you return to th
109. Topics field and click the Add button You can now view this topic quickly by going to the Favorites help tab Ww ee gt amp Hide Back Forward Pint Options Conterts Index Search Favores 11 5 3 4D Controls To mix between two render modes Mix MIX Function 60 50 The mixing can be done in 2 steps from 0 to 100 by using the lef control below the touchpanel The m ix rato is displayed in For Example To produce a better smoothed surface by midng surface smooth and ght mode To set the Thweshold low Rejech B Disp TH low Normally this fveshold must always be adjusted for a good _Bemove ew 28 appearance of the 30 surface image By changing the Cusrert topic threshold all echoes below the level are enhanced in pink color for a certain interval 1530 Cone _ ss Application With this function small echoes or noise are removed in order to achieve a z 3 7 3 To Exit the Electronic User Manual Touch Exit on the touch panel press the Exit key on the control panel to exit the electronic user manual Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 3 19 Description of the System This page was intentionally left blank Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 3 20 H48691CF Revision 2 Chapter 4 Operating the System Describes powering on the system transducer connection program selection and patient data Sections in this chapter General Remarks on
110. USB Devices button the Windows Unplug or Eject Hardware dialog is started Using this dialog the USB devices can be stopped before they are physically disconnected This button starts the Stop USB process For more information see Remove USB Devices on page 17 4 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 59 Utilities and System Setup 14 2 6 2 Image Archive To load an Archive see below To save an Archive see below 14 2 6 2 1 How to Load an Archive 1 Press the Load button The following menu appears 2 Choose the location by clicking one of the radio buttons 3 Then select the file you desire 4 Confirm your choice with Next The following window appears Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 14 60 H48691CF Revision 2 Utilities and System Setup a Patent view Exam iew Patient ID Patient Hame Birthelate E Sex Last Exar e O 06 05 03 1 0 Mustermann Fritzi D77 1908 3 Fama 072a 2006 e Cs O4 18 1 5 05 31 2008 wf Eri Mister manm Liki oS 1970 z Fema 06 01 2006 r Erz Mister marin Felice Oe 19650 2 Fake 05 05 2006 r MEn eE 1 i OS ft Ants E Er3 Muste Thomas OTSI 2 Hia 05 15 2005 F S559 06 05 l rik i 05 16 aoe fe F599 06 05 ajdksthhgkhadigf 1 05 17 2006 E F999 06 05 GLEAU 1 Fem ae 0517 2006 mO 9399 06 05 Mustermann Sepp 1__ remate a tea I 9999 06 05 Mustermann Sepp 1 Fema Le MEI Eis i BRS Gans Gustav 0S 1380 1 Male
111. User 3 keys to store the adjusted Gray curve Remark A spine algorithm generates the curve through all 5 points eee Gray Press the Gray Map key to return to the submenu Edit Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 6 23 2D Mode 6 5 1 2 Gray Edit Menu Note 6 24 Edit Menu When touching the Gray Edit key the Edit menu appears on the touch panel and the graphic display of the Gray Map is shown on the monitor With the Edit function it is possible to create a Gray Map curve Map position select a Pos 1 Pos2 Pos3 m ao Pos 5 Pos 6 Pos7 Save and Exit Sy se User 1 User 2 User 3 Exit Return to the previous menu Note that changes in the Edit menu will not be stored The gray map valid before entering a new one in Edit mode will be valid again Pos By touching one of these keys you select a certain position on the Gray curve If you Exit now changes in the Edit menu are stored under the selected pos key and the key position remains active in the Gray menu Graphic display in the lower left corner of the screen Operation 1 Select the position to modify by touching one of the Pos 1 to Pos 7 keys on the touch panel 2 The selected point can now be positioned with the trackball in X and Y direction 3 To change the position of the other points proceed as in 1 and 2 4 Touch one of User 1 to User 3 keys to store the adjusted Gray cu
112. a sample image of the currently selected Cardiac Plane The compare window can be enlarged moved around and clicked away like the Compare Window from Archive For more information see Image Area on page 13 25 Press the SRI button to allow for an adjustment in the submenu see Speckle Reduction Imaging SRI Il on page 10 44 Rotary Control Slices Adjust the number of slices by turning the rotary control below Rotary Control Adjust the distance between the slices by turning the rotary control Distance below Flipswitch Previous Switch Flip Switch below up or down to go to the previous slice or Next next slice respectively 10 16 SonoVCAD abor Note SonoVCAD labor is an option This feature allows for supervision of labor using specific measurements aided by on screen orientation marks 10 16 1 Operation Ouwe Dain Click this menu item to align the volume automatically as described in Mark pubis position Auto Adjust on page 10 145 Click this menu item after you have finished aligning the volume as Set Position j described in Mark pubis position manual on page 10 146 Open menu for Show indicators Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 144 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode Cwen mn 4 cor am Click this menu item to set the skull contour as described in Set fetal Contour contour on page 10 147 The check box controls whether or not the contour line is d
113. and therefore responsibility for correct configuration and usage lies with the user Caution When performing a freehand biopsy i e not using a biopsy guide it is the user s responsibility to use appropriate equipment Ensure that the needle especially the needle tip is always visible in the ultrasound image during the whole biopsy procedure 2 5 1 1 Preparing the Patient A A 2 22 Prepare the patient according to the usual procedures for the purpose An ultrasound examination with this system must be performed either under supervision or by adequately trained and qualified medical staff A biopsy must only be performed by physicians with adequate experience Under all circumstances the necessary safety precautions and sterility measures have to be respected It is absolutely necessary to ensure that before performing a biopsy the selected and displayed biopsy line corresponds to the biopsy needle guide mounted to the transducer left right Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Safety and Maintenance Before starting a biopsy please make sure that in case you want to save a study all relevant gN patient information is entered N Do not use needle guide if it appears damaged Cleaning and Sterilization of reusable Biopsy Guides for disposable biopsy guides please regard enclosed manuals After each use remove needle guide from transducer Remove visible contaminants from
114. appears 10 10 2 1 Measurements in the STIC image If a measurement function is activated in mode STIC a yellow caution symbol appears on the screen This symbol reminds the user that UNINTENDED USE of this feature could lead to measurement inaccuracy For more information see Accuracy of measurements on page 11 20 This symbol will also be shown on the patient report in the report header if the performed STIC measurements are stored in the report For more information see Basic Patient Worksheet Functions on page 12 3 10 11 Real Time 4D Biopsy 4D Biopsy introduction Note Real Time 4D Biopsy is an option Before using 4D Biopsy the biopsy lines must be programmed For more information see Biopsies on page 5 8 Before using biopsy equipment read the safety precautions For more information see Biopsy Safety and Maintenance on page 2 22 How to activate 4D Biopsy 1 Press 4D on the user interface 2 To start 4D preparation mode press 4D Biopsy on the touch panel 3 Change Setting Quality Vol Angle or change size and position of the volume box 4 To start run mode press Freeze or the right trackball button 5 When finished press Freeze Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 109 Volume Mode 4D Biopsy screen display Mode Screen display 4D Biopsy preparation mode 4D Biopsy Freehand 4D Biopsy Guided Table 10 1 Screen displays 4D B
115. are created when starting and ending an exam STRUCTURED REPORTING DICOM Configuration IF Addita Prart Storage Comet Combine CE amp OTH Inchide Sean Aaabetardt Daia lf STR REPORT is selected from the Services pull down menu the available fields are Services Alias AE Title IP Address Port Send sequ Storage Commit Combine OB amp GYN and Include Scan Assistant Data The Storage Commit drop down menu contains all currently available storage commit servers The selected storage commit server is used for committing the structured reports sent to this store server The Include Scan Assistant Data drop down menu contains the option no and yes If the checkbox Combine OB amp GYN is enabled the system will combine the OB and GYN data into one file If not enabled the files will be sent individually Note Data that will be transferred OB GYN Vascular and Cardio STORAGE COMMIT Tinim Cerig aiai Services ST COMAHT f pehi Aliz Part AE Title Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 39 Utilities and System Setup If ST COMMIT is selected from the Services pull down menu the available fields are Services Alias AE Title IP Address and Port 14 2 5 4 DICOM Queue Status DICOM Queue Status To open the DICOM Queue Status window press the DICO
116. biopsy line by using the Trackball pos and the left rotary button below the touch panel Line rotate Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 5 11 Probes and Biopsies Press Store MBX 7 to save the MBX 1 line Set the biopsy guide angle to MBX 3 Adjust the position of MBX 3 line and press Store MBX 3 Press Exitto close the Biopsy Setup oo oe ga o Biopsy line MBX 2 will be calculated and stored by the system 5 2 2 3 Biopsy line adjustment for a user defined biopsy guide Adding a biopsy kit 1 Perform steps 1 to 8 see Biopsy setup on page 5 9 2 Press Add Kiton the touch panel 3 Assign a name to the biopsy kit 4 A biopsy kit can have up to 3 biopsy lines Storing a biopsy line Blogsy Setup Manu Probe C4 80 Ling rotaie Figure 5 3 Biopsy Setup Menu User defined biopsy guide 1 Perform steps 1 to 8 see Biopsy setup on page 5 9 2 Select a biopsy kit 3 The biopsy line is shown on the monitor screen 4 Adjust the biopsy line by using the Trackball pos and the left rotary button below the touch panel Line rotate 5 Press Store to save the line 6 Press Exitto close the Biopsy Setup Note Biopsy kits can be deleted Delete Kit or renamed Rename Kit Biopsy lines can be deleted Delete Line or renamed Rename Line Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 5 12 H48691CF Revision 2 Probes and Biopsies 5 2 2 4 Biopsy line adjustment for rectal probe
117. by their aspect ratio by turning the Zoom control Ref Image am Select a reference image A B C or 3D The selected reference image is sectional plane A The spatial position of plane A in relationship to the displayed 3D image is always vertical and also perpendicular to the 3D image display Therefore the position of image A is indicated by means of a vertical green line within the 3D image Adjust the position of the green line within the 3D image Parallel shift control Parallel shift enables a parallel shifting left right of the green line and the corresponding parallel planes of image A will be displayed automatically Adjust the position of image B and C with trackball The position of image B and C in relationship to the reference image A is determined through the Y axis intersection line for image B and through the X axis intersection line for image C By positioning these two axes within the reference image the corresponding parallel planes of B and C images are displayed automatically The selected reference image is sectional plane B The spatial position of plane B in relationship to the displayed 3D image is always horizontal and also perpendicular to the 3D image display Therefore the position of image B is indicated by means of a horizontal green line within the 3D image Adjust the position of the green line within the 3D image Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual
118. cardio acquisition 2 severe fetal arrhythmia Diagnoses made only by assessing this 3D 4D acquisition are not permitted Every diagnostic finding has to be evaluated in 2D as well 1 After obtaining a feasible 2D 2D CFM 2D HD 2D M or 2D PD image of the fetal heart or an artery press the 4D key to activate the Volume mode The 4D Mode menu appears on the touch panel scan mode Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 103 Volume Mode 10 104 Note Note Note 4D VCI vcI Real Time A Plane C Plane Application Gynecology Rout Rend High Res Acqu time Vol Angle 7 5 sec 15 3 Select the STIC Fetal Cardio or STIC Vascular key 5 Select a STIC user setting e g Default The preset values are loaded When using STIC CFM 2D CFM STIC PD 2D PD or STIC HD Flow 2D HD Flow adjustment of the Color settings is possible Adjustment Use 2D Color for STIC For more information see General on page 14 14 For further details review CFM Sub Menu on page 8 13 PD Sub Menu PD Sub Menu on page 8 17 HD Flow Sub Menu HD Flow Sub Menu on page 8 22 STIC can also be used with M Mode 6 Select the desired display format The selected format will be present in freeze mode after the acquisition is done The Dual screen format key Is only available in STIC Render mode 7 Before starting the acquisition set the size of the volume box and the volume
119. coincides with the needle track check in a bowl filled with approx 47 C warm water z The needle used for this alignment verification must not be used for the actual procedure Always use a straight new and sterile needle for each biopsy procedure tissue types in the path of the biopsy needle the actual needle track can deviate from the i Depending on the needle stiffness thickness and the elasticity and composition of the different predicted biopsy line The biopsy needle might bend and not follow a straight line Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 2 23 Safety and Maintenance 2 24 2 6 Manufacturer Responsibility The manufacturer assembler importer or installer considers themselves responsible regarding safety reliability and performance of the instrument under the following conditions ad when assembling the system when adding options when new settings or modifications or repairs were performed by personnel authorized by themselves also that the local electric installation complies with the national regulations and that the equipment is only used according to the User Manual 2 Service Documents The Service Manual supplies block diagrams lists of spare parts descriptions adjustment instructions or similar information which help adequately qualified technical personnel in repairing those parts of the instrument which have been defined repairable by the manufacturer 2 1 Servi
120. column Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 25 Utilities and System Setup 14 26 14 2 3 5 Scan Assistant N 5 RICS 9 D 08 Mi 0 0 Voluson E8 54cm 1 5 32Hz Tis 0 0 2011 02 02 14 23 34 on Asshehonl sve on Factory Soon Aas iiont Mem Seiten oe Caira wie liimi Arietta 8 T babia bopa os bettas palgana a on Hee comin mation a A cece tae Teter batiza AM lyk Bimer Provan Choose the application that is required Shows all created Scan Assistant lists To edit or add Scan Assistant list see 5 Items in the selected Scan Assistant EN Load Factory Load the saved Factory Scan Assistant see Save Factory Load tood Lest saved Last Saved Load the Last Saved Factory Scan Assistant Save as Factory Save current Scan SrA Assistant list as Factory Load all Factory todat Factory Load all saved Factory checklists Add Add a new Scan Assistant list Following dialog will appear A Select which items have to be added to the new Scan Assistant list B Type in a name for the new Scan Assistant Confirm with OK Confirm with PX button Select this option if you want to confirm the Scan Assistant with a programmable button For more information see Chapter 15 Enter key Select this option if you want to confirm the Scan Assistant with the Enter key on the keyboard Activate Measurement with the Freeze key
121. contact the manufacturer Probes and Biopsies 5 3 1 3 RIC5 9 D Endocavity transducer 1 Patient applied part 2 Probe handle Urology e Gynecology Obstetrics 5 3 1 4 RNA5 9 D Neonatal transducer 1 Patient applied part 2 Probe handle Abdomen Small Parts Cardiology Pediatrics Obstetrics 3D 4D Real Time imaging Wide field of view Small probe tip and shaft CFM MCFM HD Flow Power Tissue and PW Doppler Broad bandwidth Multi frequency Biopsy guide available 3D 4D Real Time imaging Wide field of view CFM MCFM HD Flow Power Tissue PW and CW Doppler Broad bandwidth Multi frequency Biopsy guide available Biopsy PEC63 H46721R Biopsy H48681GF H486912Z 134 153 Go Needle diameters lt 1 8mm Material Stainless Steel Sterilization with autoclave possible Needle diameters lt 1mm lt 2 2mm lt 2 9mm Material Stainless Steel Sterilization with autoclave possible Needle diameters gt 1 2mm lt 1 6mm Material Plastic Sterile packaged component Single Use only with latex cover For detailed information please contact the manufacturer Only CIVCO manufacturer needle guides may be used with this biopsy Material Plastic Only the biopsy bracket is reusable For detailed information please contact the manufacturer Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Probes and Biopsies 5 3 1 5 RRE
122. driven with electrical energy that can injure the patient or user if live internal parts are contacted by conductive solution j DO NOT immerse the probe into any liquid beyond the immersion level Probe Maintenance on page 2 18 Never immerse the probe connector or probe adaptors into any liquid DO NOT drop the probes or subject them to other types of mechanical shock or impact f Degraded performance or damage such as cracks or chips in the housing may result E Inspect the probe before and after each use for damage or degradation to the housing strain relief lens and seal A thorough inspection should be conducted during the cleaning process DO NOT kink tightly coil or apply excessive force on the probe cable Insulation failure may result j Electrical leakage checks should be performed on a routine basis by GE Service or qualified hospital personnel Refer to the service manual for leakage check procedures 2 4 4 Mechanical Hazards A defective probe or excessive force can cause patient injury or probe damage Observe depth markings and do not apply excessive force when inserting or A manipulating intracavitary probes Inspect probes for sharp edges or rough surfaces that could injure sensitive tissue i Avoid mechanical shock or impact to the transducer and do not apply excessive bending or pulling force to the cable 2 4 5 Cable Handling Take the following precautions with probe cables sd Keep free
123. echoes within the ROI otherwise these artefacts are displayed in the 3D images s X Ray Mode note that all gray values within the ROI are displayed Therefore in order to enlarge the contrast of the structures within the ROI the depth of the ROI should be adjusted as low as allowable COLOR MODE sd Poor quality of the Color image in 2D mode will lead to poor image quality in 3D color image In Power Doppler mode control PD a pure flow display without directional coding is given Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode 4 Use small VOL box and small sweep angle to reduce acquisition time i Smoothing Filter Rise and Fall in 2D image leads to smoother flow and a good color 3D display of vessels e g filtering of high pulsatile vessels Disadvantage The higher the filter setting the longer the acquisition time gt Surface Mode Displays the surface of the vessels color signals within the tissue volume Note If the Mix control is adjusted to 100 color the gray scale tissue information becomes transparent 10 1 8 1 Examples of Rendered Images Surface mode gray rendering Fetal hand Fetal face and umbilical cord Minimum mode liver vessels 10 2 Volume Acquisition Static 3D Sectional Planes 1 After obtaining a feasible 2D 2D CFM 2D PD HD Flow or B Flow image press the 3D key to activate the Volume mode The 3D Mode menu appears on the touch pane
124. ee Study Cancel 1 Press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the appropriate item For example select Dias V 3 If necessary select the Angle and the Baseline 4 Perform the measurement by using the trackball and the right or left trackball key Set 12 7 6 7 PAP Pulmonary Artery Pressure Measurement To measure the items such as VPD protodiastolic velocity or VTD telediastolic velocity in Spectral Doppler mode eo Ma Sheet VTD i 1 Press the Calc key on the control panel Select the item PAP Select the appropriate measurement parameter For example select VPD A oO UN If necessary select the Angle and the Baseline Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 53 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 5 Perform the measurement by using the trackball and the right or left trackball key Set 12 7 6 8 HR Heart Rate The method of the measurement is the same as that of measuring the Heart Rate in M mode 12 7 7 Cardiology Worksheet Press the Report hardkey on the control panel or touch the Worksheet key on the touch Bi panel to view the report that contains detailed results of cardio calculations Dote ofEzom 07 24 2007 Poge 1 3 Exom Type Nome Dok Henriette Pat ID DO3001 07 07 24 1 Tel ndication _ a ex Female Doppler Measurements Value mi m2 m3 Pulmonary Artery Press VPD 0 64 m s PAPm 11 64 mmHg VT
125. from wheels Do not bend the cable acutely a Avoid crossing cables between probes Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 2 15 Safety and Maintenance 2 4 6 Ergonomics Probes have been ergonomically designed to sg Handle and manipulate with ease Connect to the system with one hand Be lightweight and balanced id Have rounded edges and smooth surfaces Cables have been designed to Connect to system with appropriate cable length 2 Stand up to typical wear with cleaning and using disinfectant agents contact with approved gel etc 2 4 7 Preparing the Transducer natural rubber Operators are advised to identify latex sensitive patients and be prepared to i There have been reports of severe allergic reactions to medical devices containing latex treat allergic reactions promptly Refer to FDA Medical Alert MDA91 1 s Use a sufficient amount of coupling gel ote s Take care to use only reinforced finger cots and probe sheaths normal ones tear very easily Procedure 1 Put coupling gel on the transducer tip and pull the long medical sheath 1 over the shaft 2 Apply a sufficient amount of coupling gel on the area of the acoustic window For example Voluson TRANSVAGINAL TRANSDUCER RIC5 9 D 1 Medical probe sheath 2 4 7 1 Probe Usage For details about connecting activating deactivating disconnecting transporting and storing the probes refer to Probe c
126. i Semeno 150 kHz 80 MHz 3Vrms 80 AM 1kHz Ambient temperature 18 C to 30 C resp 64 F to 86 F operation temp of instrument 10 C to 40 C resp 14 F to 104 F storage and transport temp Barometric pressure e 620 to 1060 hPa operation condition e 620 to 1060 hPa storage and transport condition Humidity e 30 to 80 RH no condensation operation condition 0 to 90 RH no condensation Voluson E8 E8 Expert storage and transport condition Humidity protection covered no humidity protection Maximum operating 4000m depending on the properties of the connected electronic devices the altitude maximum operating altitude is limited to the altitude stated in the corresponding user manual of the connected electronic device Total audible noise lt 55 dB emission Light conditions Natural amp artificial light source Bright light could impact readability of screen 18 2 Physical Attributes 18 2 1 Dimensions Weight Width 580 mm 22 8 in Depth 920 mm 36 in Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 18 3 Technical Data Information Height min 1393 mm 54 8 in max 1583 mm 62 28 in e adjustable with electrical motor basic system without accessories approx 131 kg 18 2 2 Power Supply Power requirements 220V 240V AC 100V 130V AC Frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz 2 Power consumption Max 1000VA including all options typical power consumptio
127. in the area of the measuring volume Angle correction adjusts the Doppler scale and is only necessary for velocity display cm s m s according to the Doppler equation Angie The cursor angle can be changed in 1 increments in both directions continuously By 0 pressing the angle control repeatedly the angle correction is changed from 60 to 0 and to 60 No indication to set the angle correction will appear in the measuring programs Remarks The current angle is displayed on the screen SV Angle Adjusting the angle is always possible in scan mode and freeze mode 8 7 2 Artifact Suppression Artefact suppression reduces of movement artefacts in the image For cardiac application it is recommended to switch off the artefact suppression Switch on off the artefact suppression in the Map section of the Submenu Artefact On 8 7 3 Audio Signal N Le Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 8 27 Doppler Modes 8 7 4 Balance The control button below the right hand side probe holder changes the volume of the audio signal derived from the spectrum Turn clockwise both loudspeakers louder Turn counterclockwise both loudspeakers lower The volume is adjustable between 0 and 96 dB Balance control establishes the amount of Color displayed over bright echoes and helps confine Color within the vessel walls Raising this balance displays Color on brighter st
128. integrated gray value of the tissue contained within the narrow box Omni View improves the contrast resolution and the signal noise ratio and therefore facilitates the detection of diffuse lesions in organs The result is an image with no speckle pattern and a highly improved tissue contrast Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 98 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode The 4D Mode menu appears on the touch panel Scan mode Real Time Biopsy B Setting Application Obstetric Contrast X ray E Bonus Curve race FPS Opt gt Omniv rot Vol Angle n Thickn 1mm 65 1 Select the VCl Omniview key 2 Select a VCl Omniview user setting e g Default The preset values are loaded 3 Move the horizontal green dotted line with the trackball to the desired position of the 1 ultrasound image on the screen 4 Select the Slice Thickness by touching the key on the touch panel Note The actual values for slice thickness may vary trom probe to probe 5 Select the display format desired Note The selected format will be present in freeze and scan mode ERa 6 Select the Quality This function changes the line density against acquisition speed Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 99 Volume Mode low Fast speed low scan density A loss of volume resolution will result This mode is selected only in case of expected movement artefacts mi
129. is equipped with a protection against high voltages used for defibrillation Type CF gt The ECG preamplifier is connected to a connector on the rear panel of Voluson E8 E8 Expert For more information see MAN ECG preamplifier on page 18 34 17 4 1 Handling 1 Press the Utilities key on the User Interface 2 The ECG function is switched on and off by pressing the ECG button in the Utilities menu The ECG menu appears on the touch panel ECG Line ECG ECG Speed 2 Pre Amp 1 Position speed and amplitude of the displayed ECG strip can be altered in the ECG menu on the touch panel of the ultrasound machine The patient cable shall always be connected to the ECG preamplifier With the patient cable belonging to the ECG preamplifier only electrodes for push button connection can be used Depending on requirements commercially available extremity Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 17 12 H48691CF Revision 2 Connections clamp electrodes together with conductive gel or commercially available pre jelled adhesive electrodes can be used preferably the latter should be used e With standard setting of the electrodes red right arm yellow left arm black left leg lead is displayed Other electrode arrangements may be necessary lead Il II if amplitude supplied by lead I is too small 17 4 2 Safety Rules to be followed s The ECG preamplifier is an integral part of the ultrasound scan
130. is more likely to be encountered Method The slice positions are determined depending on the reference distance line the slice number and the percentage of limb and displayed graphically on screen The volume is calculated after the area measurements are done on the slices 100 Limb length 3 Reference distance line reference length Percentage of limb Equidistant Slice positions start end depend on percentage of limb Number of slices fixed to 5 Percentage of Limb fixed to 50 Operation 1 Activate a Fractional Limb study by selecting the measure group Fract Limb in the Calc menu application OB Biometry The Fractional Limb measure items appear on the touchscreen Select the corresponding fetus number if necessary 2 Select the measurement A Vol or T Vol The Fractional Limb edit menu appears on the the touchscreen 3 Define the reference line using the trackball Accept with left or right trackball Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 4 Measure the all areas When the measurement is done the next line will be highlighted If the last area is measured press the Done button 5 If necessary correct the measurements 6 Press Done to finish the measurement 12 6 4 11 Obstetric Subcategory Fetal Echo This subcategory allows you to measure the fetal heart Application Obstetric Factory Sub Category Fetal Echo allows
131. key the Print A or Print B keys Save key etc or not For more information see Global Parameters on page 16 79 Moreover many display properties depend on the setting in the Measure Setup For Example cursor and font of measurement result is displayed in small medium or large size For further adjustments and detailed information review Global Parameters on page 16 19 EREA By means of these keys the mode can be changed and the corresponding measurements will be shown on the touch panel To review modify print etc the application dependent Patient Worksheet touch the Work Sheet key on the touch panel For more information see Basic Patient Worksheet Functions on page 12 3 Using this flip switch control the side to be measured can be changed e g to change from the left to the right Kidney Using this flip switch control the position to be measured can be changed e g to change from mid to proximal or to distal Aorta Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 12 3 Basic Patient Worksheet Functions All calculation results are recorded in the application dependent patient worksheets By pressing the Worksheet key on the control panel or touching the Worksheet key in the Calculation menu the Worksheet of the selected Measurement Application is switched on Always start with first page of workshe
132. left portion of the screen To view the left side of the screen again click the Show icon Show To go back to the previous selected topic 5 To view the topic which was displayed before clicking the Back button Forward To print the selected topic or the selected heading and all subtopics E prit General Optone Setup Features Advanced Select Printer amp ee Sory LPO Stat Ute Punter Offre Pri to jis Lotar Comment FrdFrite Page Hanja A Humba of poper fi iek C Cyment Page C Pager fi B Ender athe a argle page number or a r BUELE page rere Fa a S12 Choose the desired printer select the Page Range and click the Print button Please be aware that changes and modifications which are not related to installing printers and adjusting printer settings may cause system dysfunction gt Do NOT change the Default Printer setting This will change also the Report Printer setting in the System Setup To adjust different functions e g Search Highlight ON OFF Uptions 3 7 2 Help Book Navigation Tools Online Help is organized like a manual with individual chapters sections and pages Click on the Help book navigation tools on the left portion of the screen 3 7 2 1 To View the Contents 1 Click on the sign next to the chapter you want to view to open up that section Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 3 17 Desc
133. left trackball key Set A second line appears 3 Move the second line to the end of the diastole and press Set again 11 1 4 9 Time TEE The measurement procedure of the time in Spectral Doppler mode is the same than the a measurement in M mode Time For more information see M Mode Measurements on page N 77 13 11 1 4 10 HR Heart Rate The measurement procedure is the same than the measurement in M mode HR Heart Rate J For more information see M Mode Measurements on page 11 13 11 1 4 11 PG Pressure Gradient Measurements Generic PG mean 11 1 4 12 PG max Pressure Gradient maximum 1 To measure the maximum velocity and the maximum pressure gradient in Spectral Doppler mode touch the PG max key on the touch panel A cursor appears on the screen Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 11 18 H48691CF Revision 2 Measurements 2 Move the cursor to the pressure gradient point and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker 11 1 4 13 PG mean Pressure Gradient mean 1 To measure the mean pressure gradient in Spectral Doppler mode touch the PG mean key on the touch panel A cursor appears on the screen Move the cursor to the beginning of the waveform Vmax and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker Begin trace Note To re adjust the traced line press the upper trackball key Undo repeatedly 3 Trace to the end of th
134. link layer interface WLAN IEEE 802 11b g Internet Protocol Version IPv4 IP Addressing static or DHCP Enabled Host to Host communication protocols z DNS Only used as client gt DHCP Only used as client i NetBIOS Name Datagram Session services Network file share MS network Only used as client 2 Insite ExC Device servicing by GE Remote Service ACR NEMA Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine DICOM DICOM Conformance Statement http www gehealthcare com usen interoperability dicom products ultrasound_dicom html s IHE Integration Statement http www gehealthcare com usen interoperability ihe html Required IT network characteristics Minimum throughput 100 Mbit sec recommended 1Gbit sec for large image file transfer Ports open to Internet 3003 Insite ExC 1 DICOM is the registered trademark of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association for its standards publications relating to digital communications of medical information Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 2 31 Safety and Maintenance Ports open only to secure LAN closed to Internet H 53 DNS Client 68 DHCP Client a 104 DICOM 137 138 139 445 Netbios Fileshare Potential hazardous situations resulting from failures of the IT network The following general hazardous situations have been identified as potentially arising as a result of the IT network failing to provide the
135. list using the trackball and press the central trackball button Detailed DICOM information is displayed The status of a step can be none not started in progress completed or discontinued Complete Procedure Step Select this button to complete the step by sending a MPPS complete message only possible if status of step is in progress Discontinue Procedure Step Select this button to cancel a step by sending a MPPS discontinue message only possible if status of step is in progress Select Procedure Step Select this button to start the procedure not immediately but only after pressing Start Exam in the patient dialog only possible if no other step is in progress and status of step is not Start Exam amp Procedure Step re 14 Select this button to start exam immediately without returning to the Patient dialog only possible if no other step is in progress and status of the step is not started Return Select this button to return to worklist dialog or to the patient menu depending on where the procedure step was started from Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Operating the System Touch the Exit key on the touch panel Exit from the Worklist search screen No result will be copied Please note The Worklist button can only be selected if a Service WORKLIST DICOM address is specified in the System Setu
136. measurements calculations in 2D 3D mode using various measure items For details about settings review Measure amp Calc on page 16 3 The methods for obtaining measurements e g Aortic Arch View etc in the Obstetric Calculations menu are similar to the generic measurement functions in 2D 12 6 4 11 1 Items of Obstetric Calculations Subcategory Fetal Echo The items of obstetric calculations in each mode are as follows 2D 3D Mode 4 Chamber View Thorax Outflow Tract Aortic Arch Venous MMode 4 Chamber View Outflow Tract Doppler Mode Tricuspid Valve Mitral Valve Main Pulmonary Artery Aorta Ductus Art Umbilical Vein Ductus Venosus For more information see Chapter 19 12 6 4 12 Obstetric Worksheet Press the Worksheet key on the control panel or touch the Worksheet key in the Al Calculation menu to view the report that contains detailed results of obstetric calculations Report Work Sheet The worksheet appears as follows e g summary report Calc Doimo Esm Of fora Pog 1 5 Esam Tpk Nome Test Peri Phys Pot O O10017 09 07 07 1 LH Ref Paps Indecation Sex Female sonog LMP 03 10 2009 GALMFI i7w d EDOILMP 12 15 2003 G Ab DOC GALAUA 19wod EDDIAUA 12 01 2009 P Ec EFW Hadlock Value Range Age Range GP Williams AC EPD FL HC NYA 20 Measurements AVA Value me Meth GP Age BPD Hodbock Si 4 53 cm Kia N Ht 397 7 19w5d OFD HC 5 35 cm avg HE Hodlock 15
137. measurements in the Abdomen Calculations menu are similar to the generic measurement functions in 2D M and Spectral Doppler mode 12 4 1 Items of Abdomen Calculations The items of abdomen calculations in each mode are as follows 2D 3D Mode Liver Gallbladder Pancreas Spleen Left Right Kidney Left Right Renal Artery Aorta Proximal Mid Distal Vessel Port V MMode Left Right Renal Artery Aorta Proximal Mid Distal Vessel Doppler Mode Left Right Renal Artery Aorta Proximal Mid Distal Vessel Portal Vein 12 4 2 Before starting Abdomen Calculations 1 Press the Patient key on the control panel select the ABD page and enter all patient information for Abdomen calculations For more information see Entering Patient Data on page 4 7 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 12 10 H48691CF Revision 2 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports Note To cancel all calculations performed before and to start new measurement press this key and select End Exam or Clear Exam 2 Press Start Exam 3 Make sure that the probe and application are selected properly If another application is selected press the Probe key on the control panel and change it to Abdomen For more information see Probe selection on page 4 5 gt Probe 12 4 3 Abdomen Calculations in 2D Mode ad Distance Measurements like Length Height etc Vessel Area Vessel Diameter s Stenosis Area St
138. memory Scroll to either the appropriate systolic or diastolic image 12 7 3 4 LV Mass This is used for the measurement of the Left Ventricular volume and mass It is correctly measured only during the diastolic phase LV expanded Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 12 42 H48691CF Revision 2 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports Cancel 1 Press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the item LV Mass 3 Select the desired measurement parameter For example select Epi Areal Note Perform the measurement of the Epicardial Area Endocardial Area and Epicardial Length prior to the LV mass measurement 4 When the cursor appears in the image measure the selected item using the trackball and the right or left trackball key Set 5 To obtain the second orthogonal image press Freeze Scan the image and press Freeze again aww A When using Dual 2D mode it is not necessary to unfreeze during measurements 12 7 3 5 LVOT or RVOT Diameter Note This 2D measurement is part of the LVOT RVOT Doppler measurements To calculate the LVOT or RVOT diameter in 2D mode 1 Press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the item LVOT or RVOT 3 Select the corresponding measurement parameter For example select LVOT Diam 4 Use the trackball to move the cursor to the start point of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker A second curso
139. mode After the Static 3D Sectional Planes Acquisition on page 10 17 In CFM CW PD the optimized settings for the 2D image are kept but the auto function is disabled Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 6 5 2D Mode 6 6 6 2 6 Transmit Power The Transmit Power control governs the acoustic output of the transducer It shall be set to the minimum value which still allows well valuable information Always keep the power level and the exposure time AS LOW AS REASONABLY ACHIEVABLE Use the Power control to adjust the amount of acoustic output Remarks sd The current value is displayed in the Image Information area on the monitor The maximum possible acoustic output can be reduced by this control function if certain values of Mechanical and Thermal Indices are exceeded The adjustment of transmit power output changes also the actual output adjustment of all other modes 6 2 7 Transmit Focus The selected focal zone determines the depth range of optimized sharpness of the ultrasound beam The Foc Zones field of the touch panel displays the current number of focal zones for transducers which allow changing the number of focal zones Use the Foc Zones control key to select the number of focal zones The possible number of focal zones depends on the probe in use Arrows at the left side of the 2D image mark the active focal zones by their position To adjust the depth position of
140. more than 16 kg 35 Ibs Use the handle to move the system Be sure the pathway is clear Use slow careful motions Do not let the system strike walls or door frames Always place the system on horizontal ground and engage the caster brakes For more information see Caster Brakes on page 3 6 Handle carefully A drop of more than 5 cm may cause mechanical damages The monitor has to be secured with the monitor transport lock when moving or transporting the system For more information see Mechanical Monitor Adjustment on page 3 4 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Safety and Maintenance Lower the console to its minimal height when moving or transporting the system Move the system forward or backward when going up or down inclines Do not move the system sideways or diagonally User interface adjustment on page 3 5 2 3 3 1 How to lift the system 1 Remove the footrest cover on the front side of the system 2 Passa strap through the openings in the metal sheet 3 Lift the system by the strap Always use a strap to lift the system Do not grasp the metal sheet with your hands gt 2 3 4 Mechanical adjustment safety Make sure that nothing would be jammed when adjusting mechanical parts of the system Never put your hand or fingers between moveable parts of the system when adjusting them Do not put your hand between the control console and the main body when movin
141. needle guide surface thoroughly using a small soft instrument brush Take special care of all narrow areas and tubes Keep needle guide from drying out until complete cleaning can be accomplished After that soak needle guide for minimum of five minutes in neutral pH low foamingenzymatic detergent While immersed use instrument brush to remove trapped contaminants from Surfaces holes and tubes If visible contaminants cannot be easily removed repeat soaking procedure for an additional five minutes Remove needle guide from cleaning solution and remove any remaining residue with dry wipe Follow cleaning solution manufacturer s directions for use and recommendations for concentration Disposable biopsy guides Single use components must be disposed as infectious waste Reusable biopsy guides must be sterilized before they are disposed 2 5 2 Biopsy Lines To achieve the best possible accuracy of the display of the needle path the biopsy lines have to be programmed for each transducer For more information see Biopsy line adjustment for single angle biopsy guide on page 5 11 For more information see Biopsy line adjustment for multi angle biopsy guide on page 5 11 The default biopsy lines provided with the system software must be verified at least once by the user The procedure must be repeated if probes and or biopsy guides are exchanged Before performing a biopsy make sure that the displayed biopsy line
142. of the last menstrual period using the selected format e g mm dd yyyy Note The first day of the last period must be entered a Enter the date of conception Enter the estimated date of delivery GA is calculated automatically Can be changed to 41 weeks GA GA will be calculated automatically after entering the date of the last menstrual period LMP or the estimated date of delivery EDD LMP in brackets denotes that GA was calculated For future exams the GA will be calculated from the LMP When entering the Gestational Age GA EDD and DOC are calculated automatically CLIN in brackets denotes that the GA was tested For future exams the GA will be calculated from the GA Fetus Enter the fetus number e g at twins 2 When entering LMP the GA and EDD fields automatically show the calculation results 2 When entering GA only EDD is calculated when entering EDD only GA is calculated LMP GA d EDD calculation Duration Duration of gestation gestation Duration of gestation 28days 28days days LMP 28d Can be changed to 41 weeks actual date LMP actual date date of Voluson E8 E8 Expert Ge Note For more information see Patient Information screen on page 4 74 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 4 16 H48691CF Revision 2 Operating the System Select this button to invoke the Past exam dialog Only available if application is OB Peat eee dete it ut
143. on page 13 34 5 Exam Review Exam review allows you to view one exam of a particular patient on screen see Exam Review on page 13 35 The images are stored according to the patient s ID If there is no ID assigned to the current N images enter an ID for proper storing The results of calculations are recorded in application dependent patient worksheets By pressing Report the worksheet page is switched on For more information see Exam Menu on page 13 23 Report Please note To Backup or Export exams to DVD CD R W disk please confirm that the DVD CD R W storage medium used is clean and not scratched xi Warning Disk space on drive D is only 750 Mb Please xport bachup or delete Sonoview images or contact your local service department When the hard disk HDD has reached its maximum capacity a message will be displayed on the screen For more information see Backup on page 14 49 It is recommended to copy data stored on a DVD every three years onto a new disc to avoid N data loss Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Archive 13 1 Current Patient Dialog Press this key to shift from scan mode to Current Patient Dialog Press this key to save the temporarily stored images from the Clipboard to the Archive Patient Dialog Touch panel Application Obstetrics Worklist The four parts of the Patient Dialog are 1 Patient Data Area see Pa
144. on the System Setup Check Don t ask this question DVR Do you want to activate the DVR again if the message should not appear again as a recording device And continue with Yes or No 17 3 2 DVD or VCR DVD VCR button or At the first push the DVD or VCR menu programmed P button Q e appears on the touch panel DVD VCR At the second push the DVD or VCR device starts recording DVD Menu VCR Menu omo BEOCOOST RECORD L LE Livia 10 dh Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 17 8 H48691CF Revision 2 Connections 17 3 3 DVD Optional internal DVR The Digital Video Recorder DVR is an option and will be installed instead of the DVD panel Note This option may not be available at the time of release of this Basic User Manual Supported media Media supported for data burning Media supported for video recording DVD R DVD RW formatted for video DVD R e USB stick FAT32 DVD RW DVD RW CD R CD RW Info A DVD RW which was formatted for video recording is not recommended for data burning burning will be slower Data burning 3 4 Insert a CD or DVD Export files from the Archive or save a Backup and select the DVD CD Drive as storage device For more information see Data Transfer Menu on page 13 28 Click Save The data burning process starts To eject the CD or DVD press F4 on the keyboard Video recording on a DVD 1 Insert a DVD RW 2 Press DVD VCR on the user i
145. operations Gate Position and Gate Width Activation of PW Mode PW Gain Control PW Automatic Optimization Sweep Speed on page 8 35 Audio Signal on page 8 27 Invert on page 8 32 Angle Correction on page 8 27 Baseline on page 8 28 Wall Motion Filter WMEF on page 8 36 Velocity Range PRF on page 8 35 Real Time Trace on page 8 33 Freeze PW Cineloop 8 1 2 1 Gate Position and Gate Width In Pulsed Wave Doppler a specific area along the ultrasound beam is sampled This area is called the gate The gate is located on the ultrasound beam and is displayed by two lines perpendicular to the beam line You can change the location and size of the gate The location of the gate can be changed with the trackball the width of the gate can also be changed with Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 8 3 Doppler Modes the trackball press the upper trackball key to change the function of the trackball Location of the gate allows examination of the blood flow at this site When changing the gate size in update or simultaneous mode the current value of it is displayed in millimeters on the left side of the display in the image info Adjust the PW cursor and Gate Position with the trackball on the 2D single image gt PW 1 cursor position t 4 Depth of gate position The gate size can be adjusted in twelve steps 0 7mm 1mm 2mm 3mm 4mm 5mm 6mm 7mm 8mm 9mm 1
146. or more exams from the list 2 To lock exams press the lock button To unlock exams press the unlock button 3 A lock or unlock icon is shown before the entry cee amon Lock button Unlock button Exam locked backup exists Exam not locked backup exists How to sort exams Press the B icon in the first column repeatedly to sort exams in the following sequence All backuped exams a All backuped and locked exams All locked exams ba All other exams System messages If patient s exam s or image s are selected to be deleted the following messages may appear if locked exams are involved Message Description Voluson 8 J Your selection contains Exams that are locked Your selection contains Exams that are locked and cannot be deleted and cannot be deleted Voluson ES J Your selection contains Exams that are locked Your selection contains Exams that are locked and cannot be deleted and cannot be deleted Do you want to delete Do you want to delete the unlocked Exams the unlocked Exams Vohuson E8 J The selected image s belongs to a locked The selected imagets belongs to a locked Exam and cannot be deleted Exam and cannot be deleted 13 3 3 Searching for a Particular Exam The Archive screen is divided into 4 parts Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 13 14 H48691CF Revision 2 faut tocol che a a Foieni E Eons lt Eua Conky I tet I Polemi Mora C 11 HE e 10 LH G D
147. panel the Generic Measurement function is switched on The touch panel display depends on the acquisition mode and the Generic settings in the Measure Setup For more information see Measure amp Calc on page 16 d Positioning of measuring marks is done with the trackball ES Entering and storage of measuring marks is done with the right or left trackball key Set 6a To change measuring marks before completion press the upper trackball key Change If A CY you want to readjust a traced line press the upper trackball key Undo repeatedly The status bar area shows the current function of the trackball To cancel the measurement of the currently selected item touch the Cancel key on the touch panel To delete all measurement results of the selected Study from the monitor as well as from the corresponding Worksheet touch the Clear Study key on the touch panel To erase measurement results Xl e press the Clear Study key on the touch panel Clear orpress the Delete Measurement F6 key on the keyboard or touch Delete Last on the touch panel press the small right trackball button Delete Lasd To exit the Generic Measurement program press the Caliper key on the control panel Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 11 3 Measurements Note Applicat Wen Sheet i To get optimum resolution and accuracy from Doppler measurements the
148. performed before and to start new measurement press this key and select End Exam or Clear Exam Each OB exam supports multiple gestation studies with separate worksheet information for each fetus O For multiple gestation examinations the corresponding Fetus max 4 fetuses must be J entered in this page before measurements are performed If a Fetus number has been entered several fetuses can be measured on one patient mote D Touch this flip switch control below the touch panel to change from fetus A to B or C or fetus A D selected press the Probe key on the control panel and change it to Obstetric For more 2 Make sure that the probe and application are selected properly If another application is information see Probe selection on page 4 5 Probe Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 21 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 12 6 4 Obstetric Calculations in 2D Mode i Distance Measurements BPD FL etc Circumference Measurements HC AC etc i AFI Calculation 12 6 4 1 Distance Measurements Note Gest Bones uterus Uterine Ovary Hadlock Hadlock Hadlock Jeanty Co a es ee Jeanty Hill Jus 1 Press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the study for the corresponding item For example select Fetal Biometry 3 Select the desired measurement parameter For example select BPD 4 Use the tr
149. required characteristics specified above s Delayed or impaired access to images or other exam information or patient data 7 Permanent loss of images or other exam information or patient data 2 Corruption of images or other exam information or patient data In addition to the hazardous situations identified above connection of the Voluson E8 E8 Expert to a network that includes other equipment could result in other unidentified risks to patients operators or third parties The responsible organization should identify analyze evaluate and control these risks on an ongoing basis including after changes to the network such as those listed below which could introduce new risks and require additional analysis changes in network configuration ad connection of additional items to the network disconnection of items from the network update of equipment connected to the network j upgrade of equipment connected to the network Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 2 32 H48691CF Revision 2 Chapter 3 Description of the System Describes the console overview and operator controls Sections in this chapter Product Description on page 3 2 System Assembly on page 3 3 e Mechanical Adjustment on page 3 4 aTa Pk Concept of Operation on page 3 7 Layout of Menus on page 3 7 Button description on page 3 11 Electronic User Manual EUM on page 3 16 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Bas
150. s LVDd Left Ventricle Diameter diastolic sd LVPWd Left Ventricular Posterior Wall diastolic bd IVSs Interventricular Septum systolic LVDs Left Ventricle Diameter systolic LVPWs Left Ventricular Posterior Wall systolic Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 12 7 5 1 2 To measure the Items One by One To calculate the items such as IVSd LVDd LVPWd IVSs LVDs LVPWs and RVDd in M mode 1 Press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select LV and then select the desired measurement item 3 Perform the measurement using trackball and the right or left trackball key Set 12 7 5 2 AV LA Aortic Valve Left Atrium To measure the Aortic Root Diameter the Left Atrial Diameter the Aortic Cusp Separation and the Aortic Root Amplitude in M mode _ LADiam AV Cusp Root Amel Cancel 1 Press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the item AV LA 3 Select the desired measurement parameter For example select Ao Root Diam 4 Use the trackball to move the cursor to the start point of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker A second cursor appears 5 Move the second cursor to the second point of the measurement and press Set again Note To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key Change before completing the measurement This alternates the co
151. select more than one patient After selecting the patients or exams you desire confirm with Next The following dialog appears 5 Firstly choose a destination where to save your backup to by activating one of the radio buttons 6 You can also enter a description for your backup Click into the area designated for Backup Description Now you can start typing 7 Confirm with Next 8 If you have chosen CD DVD as your saving destination then the following dialogue will come up asking you to label your CD or DVD Voluson EB Please insert a blank disk and label it with 20070626_11 9 Confirm with OK 10 Confirm with Yes If you do not want to start the backup now press No The Process bar appears As soon as the saving procedure is finished the following window appears Voluzon EB a Backup successfully completed 11 Confirm with OK You will be returned to the Image Archive tab 14 2 7 How to program the 4DView dongle for options To enable specific options also for 4DView the 4DView dongle can be programmed for these options The programming process will only be successful if the following conditions are met Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 63 Utilities and System Setup The dongle must be a valid 4DView dongle A common Service dongle cannot be used i Programming a dongle is only available if the option is active on the device
152. sheath In some cases they may damage the probe Lubricants in these condoms may not be compatible with probe construction gt amp Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 2 21 Safety and Maintenance DO NOT use an expired probe sheath Before using probe sheaths verify whether the term of validity has expired Probes must be cleaned and disinfected before they are replaced or disposed 2 5 Biopsy Safety and Maintenance 2 5 1 Biopsy Special Concerns Biopsy needles and biopsy guides are not delivered sterile unless it is clearly labeled If biopsy equipment is not sterile it is MANDATORY to clean and disinfect biopsy needles and biopsy guides before the first usage to avoid infections or disease transmissions If available please also consult accompanying documents delivered with the biopsy equipment There may be restrictions on performing IVF CVS or PUBS Please consider the local laws and regulations Caution All biopsy equipment depicted and described in this Basic User Manual has been validated for use with the system and software Biopsy brackets provided by Civco are only validated with needle guides Ultra Pro Il If biopsy equipment which is not listed in this Basic User Manual is used the user has the possibility to configure and store the predicted biopsy line In this case the user has to be aware that the biopsy equipment probe system software combination may not be validated
153. signal and image quality Therefore variations of the reverberation pattern along the transducer cannot be used for judging image and transducer quality The use of a tissue mimicking phantom is strongly recommended to assess image quality 2 4 7 2 Probe Orientation Each probe is provided with an orientation marking This mark is used to identify the side of the probe corresponding to the side of the image having the orientation mark on the display Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 2 17 Safety and Maintenance Transducer Monitor 1 Mark for direction of insonation 1 Shadowing Note The Probe RRE6 10 D orientation mark Is in the middle of the probe and not on the side The green orientation marker on the monitor corresponds to the left side of the probe 2 4 8 Probe Maintenance Only authorized personnel shall perform any type of repair Never attempt to open a transducer or transducer connector This will void the warranty 2 4 8 1 Inspecting Probes After each use inspect the probe s lens cable and casing Look for any damage that would allow liquid to enter the probe If any damage is found the probe must not be placed into any liquid e g for disinfection and must not be used until it has been inspected and repaired replaced by a GE Healthcare Austria GmbH amp Co OG Service Representative Note Keep a log of all probe maintenance along with a picture of any probe malfunction
154. system Source DICOM Server ha Search Patient Nome Patients amp Exams Exams Onby Patients B Potient ID Patient Nome Birthdate 3D 06 3D HD Flow Bouer Andreo Alexandra 12 10 1980 Query Exams Retrieve Images Exorn Dote Exorn Time Exorm Type 26 07 2006 120645 etype2 26 07 2006 1270645 ex limg In the Archive Image part of the menu all buttons are now enabled Go to Data Transfer The Import button is now available Select a patient or exam and press Import to import the selected data into the local archive If the data is not imported it is stored locally until a new exam is started This means that it is possible to switch back and forth between menus and modes without losing the query data until a new exam is started The locally stored temporary data is also deleted upon reboot 13 3 3 7 DICOM Details 13 20 Port 105 is used for retrieving the images This needs to be configured on the remote DICOM server Only DICOM images that are marked as US ultrasound or secondary capture can be retrieved No CT images for example Only data that was requested by the Voluson E8 E8 Expert system is accepted It is not possible to request from a third system data to be sent to the Voluson E8 E8 Expert The port is only open during retrieve During the retrieval the system is locked It is not possible to continue working while retrieving data from a remote server Voluson
155. the Zoom Digipot and the Trackball e Pressing the digipot switches between scan mode and Zoom Pre Mode In Zoom Pre B Mode you can adjust size and position of the ROI box Turning the digipot adjusts the Zoom factor Turn clockwise for enlarging the picture Turn counterclockwise for scaling the picture down Note After changing the Zoom factor pressing the Zoom digipot will reset the Zoom factor to its default value Only pressing the Zoom digipot again will evoke the Zoom Pre Mode Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 2D Mode 6 2 20 Normal Zoom The Image can be magnified in freeze mode and scan mode during the Normal Zoom function Turn the Zoom Digipot to adjust the zoom factor from factor 0 8 to factor 3 4 Press the Zoom Digipot to reset the zoom factor Note If the current Zoom factor is the same as the default Zoom factor the program will switch to Zoom Pre Mode It is also possible if High Resolution Zoom PanZoom or HDZoom is active but it has no influence on the area which is selected in the Overview image Remark In scan 2D mode using 3D probes the Zoom digipot is also assigned to the B View function B View Beta View on page 6 7 Pressing the digipot switches between normal Zoom function and Zoom Pre Mode 6 2 21 High Resolution Zoom The 2D image can be magnified in scan mode The displayed zoom box can be positioned within the entire 2D image area
156. the Print A or Print B keys Save key etc or not For more information see Global Parameters on page 16 19 Moreover many display properties depend on the setting in the Measure Setup For Example cursor and font of measurement result is displayed in small medium or large size For further adjustments and detailed information review For more information see Global Parameters on page 16 19 To change the current measurement application touch the Meas Applicat key on the touch panel For more information see To Change the Measurement Application on page 11 19 To review modify print etc the Generic Work Sheet touch the Work Sheet key on the touch panel For more information see To Review the Generic Work Sheet on page 11 19 11 1 2 2D Mode Measurements 11 4 ad For details about adjusting 2D Measurement settings review Measure amp Calc on page 16 3 id The Factory Generic Sub Category for 2D Imaging Mode see image above supports 4 Study types and following Measure methods Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Generic Distance Measurements a Generic Area Generic Area Measurements eee Generic Volume Generic Volume Measurement arrera Generic Angle Generic Angle Measurement Generic Elastography Measurement 11 1 2 1 Generic Distance Measurements Distance 2 Points Distance 2 Lines Length Trace Stenosis Distance Area Trace Ar
157. the System To return to the previously used active mode menu 2D mode M mode without any changes press the soft key Exit or the hard key Probe This is only possible if no change of a probe or an application was made If a change was made in the Application field the key turns dark disabled In this case an exit is only possible by selecting a setting 4 4 Entering Patient Data Patient Data is to be entered by using a patient data form This information will be used in calculations patient worksheets DICOM settings and is displayed on the screen to identify images All entries into the data fields are stored on the internal database Press the Patient key hard key on the control panel Touch panel and screen change to the Patient Menu If an exam is started For more information see Current Patient Menu on page 4 12 h i f pa T d Image Exam Exam 3 4istory Review ee mme ale pala PS Patient Information screen If no exam is started For more information see Patient Information screen on page 4 14 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 4 7 Operating the System Potent I Lot Morne Midde Nome HEQDIGHOT 10 Li 21 1 2rd Pateni IDE DOB rome yup Ape F Y AAD E oo o WAS gt osmp peo we Perf Physicaanc Ref Payee Sonographer Ectoper Ae Esam Type Fetus a 1 Fa Exam Comment Access i Custom
158. the confidence interval Growth value just too big for the confidence interval Growth value much too big for the confidence interval Worksheet fe GE Exam Comment i Fetal Anatomy veces Transfer Export Print Report Preview Print Report EN With this flip control below the touch panel different worksheet pages can be selected To close the worksheet touch the Exit key on the touch panel Note It is now possible to switch between Gyn and OB worksheets if both worksheets exists For more information see Measure amp Calc on page 16 3 Use following keys to switch between different summary reports directly on Generic Note Display depends on the selected Application E If a patient worksheet contains measurements that were performed in the XTD View mode aE For more information see XTD View Extended View on page 6 27 this symbol will be 3 shown in the worksheet header Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 12 6 H48691CF Revision 2 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 12 3 2 To edit a Worksheet Any stored measurements in a patient worksheet can be edited MALO Page 1 5 Exam Type Heme DOE Manha Parm Piya Dirr Pat 1 wayyy DOB iaiisee Ref Piya Dr DrArn lndicatian Sen Female Senege Kain Arri Li EDDA MF G Dot EDD pALiay EFW fhbrdiicer ke Hrag Aga Range ACBPORFLHE Hadleck Mode Meciuremetats in mS Dir Timi HA Fetal Heart Aste
159. the display in the worksheet and the measure result field Parameter set check mark s individual or all check mark in black box Tool Result shows parameters to measure and items that will be calculated Precision click into the line desired to change the precision after comma Average click into the line desired to change the average display Table Equation Fetal Age select either Table or Equation and then click on New Fetal Growth select either Table or Equation and then click on New 5 To confirm all settings click on the OK button Unit click into the line desired to change the dimension Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 16 7 Measure Setup Fetal Age tables or equations are NOT the same as Fetal Growth tables or equations Fetal Age These are normal ranges for estimating an unknown gestational age from the sonographically measured variable Fetal Growth These are normal ranges for sonographically determined variables as a function of gestational age Therefore the Last Menstruation Period LMP must be entered first otherwise the Growth Curve Graph won t be shown in the worklist 1 New Table e g Fetal Age Edit Table Table Reference Mesure Hame EFW Author s Hana be lable Settings Meas Valuce Table Type Fetal Ape JEG manual predefined Tabe Template Meas imum oer yin o lies Deviation Typa 50 JGP 13 SIG Range Er hd 15
160. the focal zone s flip the Focus switch up or down The depth Focus position is marked by an arrow Moving the flip switch will adjust 2D Focus independent from PW CW and CFM Focus PW CW and CFM Focus will be adjusted according to PW gate CW gate and Color Box respectively Behavior of the Focus In all boxes like Zoom box CFM box CF PD HD Flow or TD the default position of the focus is centered nearest focus position to the middle You can adjust focus position manually using the Focus Depth digipot When you change box position after adjusting focus position the focus will return to its default position Remarks After selection of focal zones the maximum possible acoustic output can be adequately reduced e The more focal zones are set the lower is the frame rate 6 2 8 Receiver Frequency Range The Frequency range function allows for the fast adjustment of high resolution lower penetration mid resolution mid penetration or lower resolution high penetration for the 2D image From the transducer s broadband signal a certain start frequency and start bandwidth is extracted and then continuously changed over depth Every transducer has a set of three fixed receive settings which are easily controlled by switching the Frequency key Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 2D Mode Use the Frequency control to adjust the range of the receive frequency Three positions are norm po
161. the monitor x piy f 2 Start Exam wath previous measurements and old ultrasound image Cre J wo F To quit the dialog Yes The current measurements are dedicated to the Exam No The current measurements and the screen are cleared and 2D starts The Patient procedure is closed and the previous operating state is activated Sd y If no old patient exists no save send in progress and no auto start acquisition the system will a display an info dialog Start Exam with old ultrasound image on the touch panel and on the 3s monitor Note If Auto Start Acquisition is selected the system automatically starts a new acquisition in 2D Mode when Start Exam is pressed without displaying the dialog For more information see General on page 14 14 Voluson e8 Start Exam with old ultrasound image Wo To quit the dialog Yes The exam starts without further action with old image No The screen is cleared and 2D starts The Patient procedure is closed and the previous operating state is activated Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 4 10 H48691CF Revision 2 Operating the System 4 4 3 Ending an exam X End End Exam Exit from the patient procedure to previous operating state Patient and measurement data are stored in the Data manager and all temporary patient and measurement data are cleared It is absolutely necessary to press the End Exam key on the contr
162. the signal input of the ECG preamplifier is defibrillator safe xd When used with the appropriate ECG cable the ECG is protected against the effects of cardiac defibrillator discharge Conductive parts of electrodes and associated connectors for applied parts including the neutral electrode should not contact other conductive parts and earth Note Follow the User Manual of the defibrillator Do not touch the patient during defibrillation 17 4 3 Care and Maintenance Repairs a Electrodes and the cables should be handled with the usual care Refer to manufacturer s instructions in concerns of cleaning and maintenance e Refer to manufacturer s instructions concerning sterilization The ECG preamplifier does not require special maintenance but should be handled with care Do not perform any changes or repairs on the ECG preamplifier the connecting cables or the patient cable A damaged patient cable must be replaced Necessary repairs must be performed by authorized service personnel only Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 17 13 Connections 17 4 4 ECG Display This function inserts an ECG line in the display of the image Condition ECG module ECG preamplifier is connected to the system Operation 1 Press the ECG button in the Utilities menu to switch on off the ECG line ECG The touch panel shows additional functions for the ECG Display ECG Line m ECG ECG Speed
163. the start point press the upper trackball key Change before completing the measurement This alternates the control from one cursor to the other 6 Only if Stenosis Area is selected adjust the width of the ellipse by means of the trackball and then press the right trackball key Set again 7 Perform the measurement of the inner area resp diameter in the same manner as described above The results such as outer and inner area resp diameter and the Stenosis appear automatically 12 4 4 Abdomen Calculations in M Mode Vessel Diameter Stenosis Diameter Time HR Heart Rate 12 4 4 1 Vessel Diameter To measure the Vessel Diameter in M Mode 1 Press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the desired item For example select Left Renal Artery 3 Select the measurement parameter Vessel Diameter 4 Use the trackball to move the cursor to the start point of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker A second cursor appears 5 Move the second cursor to the second point of the measurement and press Set again Note To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key Change before completing the measurement This alternates the control from one cursor to the other 12 4 4 2 Stenosis Diameter To calculate the Stenosis Diameter in M Mode 1 Press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the desired item For example select Left Renal Artery
164. the stroke show the current images and right of a stroke the overall number of images Reload Reload the according data set into the system This button only works with 3D 4D data and raw data see Reload on page 13 39 Image Properties Opens the Image Properties dialog of the according image see Image Area on page 13 25 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 13 37 Archive Ee O Image Comment Adds an image comment to the according image Button looks differently if an image comment already exists for the according image see Commenting on page 13 41 Acquisition Type Displays the acquisition type of the according image and changes it see Buttons on page 13 42 Reload gt 14 Pl Play Buttons Start Stop Step used to navigate through a cines see Buttons on page 13 42 Next Previous 1 View the previous patient Patient 2 View the previous exam 3 View the next exam 4 View the next patient Only if more the one patient has been selected 7 i Full Data Display full image details Button only Full Data visible when Layout format 2x2 or 3x3 is selected Images with a higher version number than the installed software version cannot be loaded The following message will appear on the screen Image data has a higher version number than this System Software Data cannot be displayed 13 5 2 Marking Exams for Deletion CD JOU
165. the system If in doubt verify the measurement results with manual measurement methods The user is responsible for the diagnostic interpretation of measurements Caution The system provides calculations e g estimated fetal weight and charts based on published scientific literature The selection of the appropriate chart and clinical interpretation of calculations and charts are the sole responsibility of the user The user must consider contraindications for the use of a calculation or chart as described in the scientific literature The diagnosis decision for further examinations and medical treatment must be performed by qualified personnel following good clinical practice 2 3 1 Instructions for Use This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for medical devices in IEC 60601 1 2 These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a typical medical installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to other devices in the vicinity However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to other devices which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures
166. to 50 C 10 to 50 C Humidit 30 to 75 non 10 to 85 non 10 to 85 non y condensing condensing condensing 700hPa 3000m to 700hPa 3000m to 700hPa 3000m to 1060hPa 1060hPa 1060hPa Pressure 2 4 8 7 Using Protective Sheaths Probes are not delivered sterile Before the first usage it is MANDATORY to clean and disinfect probes to avoid infections or disease transmissions Protective barriers may be required to minimize disease transmission Probe sheaths are available for use with all clinical situations where infection is a concern Legally marketed sterile probe sheaths must be used for intracavitary procedures Use of legally marketed sterile pyrogen free probe sheaths is MANDATORY Instructions Custom made sheaths are available for each probe Each probe sheath kit consists of a flexible sheath used to cover the probe and cable and elastic bands used to secure the sheath Sterile probe sheaths are supplied as part of disposable biopsy kits for those probes intended for use in biopsy procedures In addition to the sheath and elastic bands there are associated accessories for performing a biopsy procedure which are included in the kit Refer to the biopsy instructions Biopsy Special Concerns on page 2 22 Devices containing latex may cause severe allergic reaction in latex sensitive individuals Refer to FDA s March 29 1991 Medical Alert on latex products DO NOT use pre lubricated condoms as a
167. to adjust the distances between the individual slices The T U I Adjust PSS Slices menu appears Slices Following menu appears TULL Adjust Slices pa Ra Shite Pas Previous Val Cine 0 0 mm Next 12 Touch this key to select the number of slices displayed Previous Next Next Previous plane is moved into view Shift plane inside display area Add Reduce number of planes on the right and or on the left side of the reference image and the adjust the distance between slices 29 possible slices with buttons below the touch panel Slice Pos Previous Vol Cine 0 0 mm Next 12 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 35 Volume Mode Touch the Reset key to reset the position of the last slice Touch the Reset All key to reset all slices Touch this key to exit the T U I Adjust Slices menu Remarks If VCI Static which is a visualization mode was engaged before entering T U I the slices are displayed with VCI rendering The VCI settings cannot be changed in T U lI visualization mode The measurements are possible in the planes but not across the planes and not in the overview image For more information see Generic Measurements on page 11 2 It is possible in TUI to choose between 6 different display formats 2x2 3x3 4x4 1x2 2x3 3x4 10 2 6 Omni View Note 10 36 Omni View Is an option If this option is not installed the Omni Vie
168. to erroneous data transfer and thereby decrease system performance e The Voluson E8 E8 Expert system has been tested for EMC and is compliant with EN 55011 group 1 class A CISPR 11 amendment 1 and IEC 60601 1 2 Main power quality should be that of a typical commercial and or hospital environment If the user requires continued operation during power main interruption it is recommended that the system be powered from an uninterruptible power source UPS 2 3 System Safety and Maintenance zos Federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician 7 Caution This machine should be used in compliance with the law Some jurisdictions restrict certain uses such as gender determination Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 2 7 Safety and Maintenance 2 8 A A A Caution The quality of the image used for diagnosis is essential a Changing the display settings can affect the image quality and compromise the diagnostic quality The user is responsible to use adequate display settings for achieving appropriate image quality If in doubt only the image as displayed on the Voluson ultrasound system with default display settings is to be used for diagnostic purposes gt Do not diagnose based on print outs Caution Features that facilitate measurements e g SonoAVC follicle Vocal SonoNT must be used with extreme care Such measurements are a suggestion of
169. to the number of images available for the selected exam If more than 5 images are available for the selected exam only 5 images are displayed The number of images in total can be seen in the Img column of the Exams table Source DICOM Server ha Search Patient Nome Patients amp Exams J Exams Only Patients fe Patient Ip Patient Name Birthdate Sex LostExom E 3D 06 30 HD Flow Bouer Andrea Alexandra 12 10 1980 f 26 07 2006 Exams B Exom Dote Exom Time om Type H img Exom Comment Exam Comment 26 07 2006 12 06 45 etype2 26 07 2006 12 06 45 ex2 limg g Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 13 19 Archive 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 It is not possible to select a single image and try to retrieve that single image Images can only be retrieved as a batch process by retrieving all images of an exam Press the Retrieve Images button A dialog with a list of images that are retrieved and a status indication is displayed The process of retrieving images can be cancelled by pressing the Cancel button Stop Query Retrieve process at server After the images where retrieved the dialogue vanishes and thumbnails of the retrieved images are displayed instead of the images The image data is now available locally Which means it can be reviewed in the Exam Review and Image History part of the archiving
170. to the second point of the measurement and press Set again Note To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key Change before completing the measurement This alternates the control from one cursor to the other 4 Repeat for the second distance 11 1 2 1 3 Distance 2 Lines 1 To measure the distance between two lines touch the Dist 2Line key on the touch panel A line appears on the screen 2 Move the line to the start point of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set Note To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key Change 3 Move the trackball to adjust the angle and then press Set again A second line parallel to the first one appears 4 Move this line using the trackball to the end point of the measurement and then press Set 11 1 2 1 4 Length Trace 1 To measure the distance between two points using trace touch the Length Trace key on the touch panel A cursor appears on the screen 2 Move the cursor to the start of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker Begin trace Note To re adjust the traced line press the upper trackball key Undo repeatedly 3 Trace to the end and press the Set key again to fix the mark 11 1 2 1 5 Length Point 1 To measure the distance between several points as much as desired touch the Length Point key on the touch panel A cursor appears on the screen 2 Move
171. wall motion filter cutoff frequencies cannot be used with the higher velocity range PRF setting Likewise the highest wall motion filter cutoff frequencies cannot be used with lower velocity range PRF setting The suitable WMF filter is automatically calculated and adjusted when the PRF is changed Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 8 37 Doppler Modes This page was intentionally left blank Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 8 38 H48691CF Revision 2 Chapter 9 Elastography Mode Describes the general functions of the Elastography Mode Sections in this chapter GUI elements on page 9 2 P E N e Elastography Main Menu on page 9 3 Elastography Sub Menu on page 9 4 Elastography Analysis on page 9 5 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 9 1 Elastography Mode General Description Elastography shows the spatial distribution of tissue elasticity properties in a region of interest by estimating the strain before and after tissue distortion caused by external or internal forces The strain estimation is filtered and scaled to provide a smooth presentation when displayed DoS Please be advised that the feature may not be available in some countries due to pending gN regulatory approvals 9 1 GUI elements The Elastography screen 11L D SM F 3 7cm 1 1 15Hz 11 12 2009 7 54 25 AM 1 Elastography imaging 2 Box Frame Ela
172. with OK to reboot the system and start the application again EXIT Exit without saving a backup Remarks It is possible to store more than one backup on a destination The backups reside in subfolders of the main fu backup folder found at the root of the drive e g z fullbackup DO NOT modify this directory structure or any files within otherwise the backup data cannot be restored For further details review Cleaning and Maintenance on page 2 12 The Include Images checkbox is only active if destination Network Drive or Other drive is selected If the destination Other drive is selected the available drives e g external USB memory stick can be chosen from the drop down list Note When the backup is saved to an external USB device the system has to be informed about the removal of the hardware For this purpose every last dialog of Full System Configuration has a Stop USB Devices button Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 55 Utilities and System Setup Load Full System Configuration There are circumstances where it is not possible to load restore all the data The following rules specify the restrictions 1 Generally only restoring data from an older to a newer software version is possible Loading a backup into a system that has a lower software version than the system the backup was created on is prohibited 2 Options can only be
173. y Parameters and possible adjustments depend on the selected Application To view add ria delete reorder edit or when creating a new parameter it is very important that all items are a gt chosen correctly and that the relevant item is highlighted For Example image above 1 Application OB Obstetric Measure Preset User 1 Measure Mode Calc Imaging Mode 2D 3D 2 3 4 Sub Category Biometry 5 6 Study Early Gestation T7 Measure YS is the highlighted relevant item Select a measure setting e g User 1 The terms can be renamed review Application Parameters on page 16 17 Shows the available display modes Adding Deleting Reordering or Editing an Imaging Mode is impossible Shows the available measurement methods Shows the available measure items Auto Sequence Measure Auto Sequence on off If Auto Sequence is On check mark visible select the items that should be measured in an automatic sequence when pressing the Calc key Either select the parameters individual or set only one check mark directly into the black box to mark them all Ad To Add a Sub Category Study or Measure Item on page 16 5 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 16 4 H48691CF Revision 2 Measure Setup Mew To Create a New Measurement or Calculation Item on page 16 ae ee 7 Dete ete To Delete a Sub Category Study or Measure Item on page 16 10 To Rearrange Sub Categori
174. 0 Mean 150 Iniouput Urk 7 5 E r c re j J aa a ee wee ff E Edi Table Values ee C In the displayed screen select resp enter Table Template Select the desired template for the measurement table Author s Name Enter author s name Note Author s Name must be unique if measure Name exists Deviation Type Select the deviation type SD GP Range Choose the desired range for the selected Deviation Type In Output Unit Choose the unit for the selected SD GP Range from the drop down menus Precision Select the precision after comma Meas Value Select either Edit manual or predefined If predefined is selected enter the value for Min Max and Interval Fait Table Values Click on this button to edit the predefined Table values Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 16 8 H48691CF Revision 2 Measure Setup Edit Table Fetal Growth Table G5 Author Heiman d O4 40 Move the mouse pointer to the field desired and press the Set key right trackball key Type in the value and confirm with the Enter or the Tab key keyboard Click to add additional lines Click to delete unwanted lines To save the values click the OK button Cancer To exit without saving click the Cancel button 2 New Equation e g Fetal Growth Edit Equation Move the mouse pointer to the field desired and press
175. 0 3 1 Render View Direction The 3D render box determines the ROI region of interest for the 3D calculation and determines the direction of view through the volume block The adjustment of the render box is done with help of the 3 orthogonal planes A B and C each dividing the box in the center The direction of the view is adjustable For more information see The Render Box on page 10 11 Render View Direction The viewing direction is from top to bottom in plane A The viewing direction is from top to bottom in plane B The viewing direction is perpendicular on plane C bird s eye view The green line of the render box in A and B plane symbolizes the direction of view and the border for starting the analysis Note The Render View Direction keys are not available in Static 3D Sectional Planes mode 10 3 2 3D 4D Info On Off switch to show full or reduced Image Info parameters on screen On full includes 3D 4D 2D amp CFM Mode Off reduced 3D 4D Info only Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 43 Volume Mode Daf alt THF hun high ee ei gt Mikani wr Note If the volume was compressed using lossy image a yellow Wxx where xx stands for the compression quality e g 90 is displayed beneath the type line e g 3D Static A lossy compression can reduce image quality which can lead to a false diagnosis Connectivity on page 14 31 10 3 3 Reverberation Suppressio
176. 0 standard Standard 2 0 Rear panel of main unit 2x Rear panel of user console 2x Left side of user console 2x S Video out Video norm PAL NTSC depending on system setup 1 x Mini DIN for OUT Standard S Video 18 12 2 Connectivity behind rear panel accessible after opening DVI D out e 1x DVI D for OUT e Resolution SXGA S Video out Video norm PAL NTSC depending on system setup 1 x Mini DIN for OUT Standard S Video S Video in Video norm PAL NTSC depending on system setup 1 x Mini DIN for IN Standard S Video C 18 12 3 Peripherals Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 18 33 Technical Data Information 18 12 4 Drives DVD CD R W Drive Read Speed e 16x DVD ROM e 40x CD ROM Write Speed e DVD R 16x e DVD RW 8x e CD R 40x e CD RW 32x Supported Media DVD ROM DVD R DVD RW CD ROM CD R CD RW 18 12 5 MAN ECG preamplifier Patient cable Push button electrode connections 3 leads LHI Technology Code LHGE27 01 Rev 2 Input voltage 1mvV diff Frequency range 30 300 beats per min Rejection filter 50 and 60Hz Distribution voltages 15V provided via special connection may be installed by authorized personnel only Ambient temperature Details on page 18 2 Dimensions L W H 220 150 40 mm Symbols used Insulated patient application part Type CF CAUTION Review user manual for proper operation Improper use may cause JN
177. 0mm and 15 mm The upper trackball key switches between gate position and gate width Press the upper trackball key to change from PW cursor and gate position to gate size Press it once more to O return to the position change t decrease the gate size increase the gate size JOL 8 1 2 2 Activation of PW Mode By pressing the left or right trackball key the screen is divided asymmetrically The 2D image appears on top below the PW spectrum starts running Three display formats are possible For more information see Format on page 8 30 The touch panel shows the PW Main menu a Press the left trackball key to start the spectral display The 2D image will be frozen Press the left trackball key once more the PW spectrum will be frozen and the 2D image returns to scan mode Press the right trackball key and both modes 2D image and PW spectrum are active JO 8 1 2 3 PW Gain Control PW Gain controls the amplification of the incoming Doppler signals The Doppler gain should be adjusted to a level that fills in the gray scale of the spectral analysis waveform without creating noise Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 8 4 H48691CF Revision 2 Doppler Modes PW Mode key Rotation adjusts the amplification brightness of the entire displayed spectrum When the GAIN control is turned clockwise the entire spectrum gets brighter When the GAIN control is turned counterclockwise the entire spectrum gets
178. 2 13 15 Archive Note Note Note 13 16 Source Local Archive Local Archive 4DV Source DICOM Server is only available when a Query Retrieve Server was configured and selected in the DICOM Configuration Dialog see Connectivity on page 14 37 When Source DICOM Server is selected the Archive Screen changes see Searching for a Particular Exam on page 13 14 2 Then you select a search criteria from the list and enter its value in the neighbouring field Search Patient ID Patient ID Patient Name Birthdate Exam Date before Exam Date after Exam Date between Exam Type Image Comment Acquisition Type Accession Number Sex Exam Comment Performing Physician 3 If you want to narrow down your search even more add another search criteria by choosing a connector and or Then you select the second search criteria from the list and enter its value in the neighbouring field search Exam Date before Patient ID v 2006 04 24 Patient ID Patient Name Eirthdate vam Date Exam Date before Exam Date after yam Date between xam Type l Mage C ammer Acquisition Type Accession Number Sex Pregnancy Exam Lomment Last Exam 4 Finally press the Search key to perform the search using the entered criteria You can also start a search from the Current Patient Data Menu For more information see To Search in the Patient List on page 4 25 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Ma
179. 2 Pre Amp 1 2 Adjust the transmission gain of the ECG preamplifier signal 0 1 2 3 Pre Amp 1 ECO 3 Select ECG velocity 0 1 2 3 Speed 2 ECG 4 Set the vertical position on the monitor Pos Eco 5 Adjust ECG amplitude 0 to 100 in 10 steps Amp 100 6 Return to the main menu The ECG function remains active 7 Freeze the image The most recent information is always on the right edge of the image aS When moving the trackball a indicator small vertical line is inserted on the ECG curve and indicates the temporal position of the 2D image in relation to the recorded ECG line In this manner e g diastolic or systolic phase of the 2D mode image can be set without ECG trigger ay nt eee ae Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 17 14 H48691CF Revision 2 Connections Remarks i On the screen the ECG curve starts running from left to right if scan mode is active The most recent information is always on the right edge of the image bd ECG speed adjustment is only possible in scan mode 17 4 4 1 ECG 2D Auto Cine In the ECG memory a longer period than the one displayed on the monitor is stored With the help of the Auto Cine key the previous ECG curve can be scrolled back For more information see 2D Auto Cine on page 6 77 17 4 4 2 ECG Cine Split Function 1 Use the Format keys to change to the next part of frozen image sequence to play back the ECG Cine memory 2 Adju
180. 3 must be followed N Necessary measurements Sketch a b line 1 c d line 2 e f line 3 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 12 62 H48691CF Revision 2 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports Applicat 1 Press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the desired hip For example select Left HIP 3 Select the measurement parameter Hip Joint A cursor appears on the screen A Use the trackball to move the cursor to the start point of the line 1 measurement a b and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker A second cursor appears 5 Move the second cursor to the second point of the line 1 measurement a b and press Set again Note To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key Change before completing the measurement This alternates the control from one cursor to the other 6 Perform the measurement of the second distance line 2 c d in the same manner 7 Perform the measurement of the third distance line 3 e f in the same manner After storing the 3rd line the evaluation appears on the screen alpha beta Type The Type of the hip joint is evaluated according to the following table Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 63 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports Note The Hip Joint measurement must be calculated only with the included measurement software 12 11 4 Pediatric Calculations in
181. 30 Normally this function does not need to be adjusted Note This key is only available if a 3D CFM 3D PD or a 3D HD image Is acquired 10 3 12 Power Threshold This function eliminates low color noise of motion artefact signals in the sectional slices as well as in the rendered 3D image Power Tresh 45 A lower number cuts off fewer signals than a higher number Note This key is only available if a 3D CFM 3D PD or a 3D HD image is acquired 10 4 Volume Acquisition Static 3D Render 1 After obtaining the ROI in 2D 2D CFM 2D PD 2D HD or B Flow image press the 3D key to activate the Volume mode 2 In the 3D Static Menu select a setting and an application key and adjust the settings 3D Static Setting Application Obstetric Surface Skeleton Sectional Planes Quality Vol Angle high2 65 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 49 Volume Mode 3 Select the display format desired Note The selected format will be present in freeze mode after the acquisition is done 4 Place the Volume box over the region of interest S The trackball has 2 functions position and size of the Volume box The activated function is 1 displayed in the status bar area on the monitor Press the upper trackball key to change the function of the trackball from position to size or AO vice versa 5 Change the size of the Volume box by moving the trackball Moving decr
182. 32 H48691CF Revision 2 Routine Har f 100 nid 2D Mode A poor quality XTD image can easily be identified by its rough and curved edge Further there are sections that look like noise next to sections of clear structures If the transducer was tilted during the scan or the scanning plane was lost the image gets curved even if the transducer was moved straight When reviewed with the corresponding 2D images there will be regions where the blue rectangle seems to be stuck in the XTD image In such areas structures that can be seen clearly in the 2D images are very distorted or not shown at all in the XTD view If any of the above descriptions of a poor XTD image apply the scan has to be repeated and the poor image considered as worthless Functions after the XTD acquisition 6 7 4 1 XTD Zoom Use the Zoom digipot to adjust the zoom factor of the XTD image 6 7 4 2 XTD Rotation Use the XTD rot control to rotate the XTD image 0 XTD Zoom XTD Rotation Frame Review XTD Image Size 2D Zoom Ruler Measurement in the XTD image Gray Map Gray Map on page 6 21 Utilties Utilities on page 14 2 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 2D Mode 6 7 4 3 Frame Review Two Split screen display formats are available for reviewing the acquired frames ys Vertical image distribution Logo Patient name a ee E iL EE A Ce STATUS AREA BAR Horizontal image distribution
183. 4 1 Gray Render Mode In Gray Rendering mode only the gray information of the data set is used even if a Color Volume image is displayed In case of a data set without color information this mode is automatically activated Activate Gray Rendering mode if not active Select the render algorithm desired Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 73 Volume Mode Render Mode 1 Render Mode 2 Max Min Max Min Texture A Ray A Ray Light Surface Smooth Surface Smooth The surface is displayed in a smoothed texture mode The gray values of the surface are identical with the gray values of the original scan Surface Texture A surface will be displayed in texture mode The gray values of the surface are identical with the gray values of the original scan Surface Enhanced Surface display is improved by homogenous smoothing while retaining details in the image Transp Max The maximum gray values of the ROI are displayed Application Representation of bony structures Transp Min The minimum gray values of the ROI are displayed Application Representation of vessels and hollow structures Transp X Ray Representation of all gray values within the ROI Application Tissue block with tumor or similar HD ve Surface HD ive Smooth HD ve uses a virtual light source that can be positioned around the rendered 3D object by the user By highlighting structures from the side the three dimensional i
184. 4 Fast Export Note 13 3 7 5 Import Fast export is only possible if an USB storage device is connected and will only save on the last connected USB drive For Fast Export of JPEG images press the Prt Sc key on the keyboard a mport Choose where to import your image from type in a filename or select your file from the displayed ones in your selected folder You can also choose between two file formats 4DV and V730 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Archive Open File Confirm with Open Another dialog appears This dialog has a check box to make it disappear forever After the data has been loaded into archive you can select the exams or images which you want to be imported onto your hard disk Press Import again and the selected exams or images and patients will be copied onto the hard disk 13 3 7 6 Backup Please see Backup on page 14 49 All settings and patient data created since last full backup are NOT backed up It is highly recommended to create a full backup of settings and patient data regularly 13 3 7 7 Delete After selecting the patient s exam s or image s to be deleted by using the trackball and the right trackball key Set click the Delete button Select a patient from the Patient List and the following dialog appears Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 13 33 Archive Delet
185. 43 84 GB Used 1 62 GB Free 142 22 GB Nr of Patients 7 of 29 Selected Patients Selected Exams Selected Images 21 14 53 MB Archive The number of all exams of the exam list the number of currently selected exams the number of images and the capacity of selected exams are displayed automatically at the right and upper part of the Exams List 13 6 3 To Sort the Exams Clicking on the caption of a column the Exams List will arrange the exams on the basis of the selected captions For example select the Patient ID the arranged list will be in the order of the Patient ID B Patient ID Patient Name Birthdate Musiermarin r Huaman Max Test Test Test Doe Max Jobn Tester Test Douglss Douglas Gurav Gans 13 6 4 To Search for Exams There are options to search for a specific exam 1 2 13 7 Settings These topics are sufficiently discussed in Connectivity on page 14 37 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User H48691CF Revision 2 Manual Ls ARA Fa 1300 197011711 LELE HEA Fa 1387 12 21 13861 011 1967 A009 Lazt Exam Pal sty ae aoea AEAT AS 2006 04725 AUS 2006 04725 In Archive see Searching for a Particular Exam on page 13 14 In Patient Data Dialog see To Search in the Patient List on page 4 25 13 45 Archive This page was intentionally left blank Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 13 46 H48691CF Revision 2 Chapter 14 Utilities and System Setup D
186. 6 10 D Multiplane Endorectal transducer Note This probe Is not available in some countries RRE6 10 D Biopsy PEC69 H46721S a i 1 Patient applied part 2 Probe handle Gynecology 3D 4D Real Time e Needle diameters Urology Imaging lt 1 4mm Wide field of view Material Small probe tip and Stainless Steel shaft CFM HD Flow Power and PW Doppler Broad Bandwidth Multi Frequency Sterilization with autoclave possible Biopsy guide available 5 3 1 6 RRE5 10 D Multiplane Endorectal transducer When programming a biopsy on this probe Only heat the water up to 38 C When programming a biopsy on this probe Do not turn on the probe before placing it in the water bath Wait at least 1 minute before turning on the probe after it has been placed in the water bath Probe needs to acclimate This probe has an integrated temperature sensor A temperature safety mechanism will disable the probe if it gets too warm gt gt gt Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 5 17 Probes and Biopsies RRE5 10 D Biopsy PEC84 H48671WT 1 Patient applied part 2 Probe handle e Gynecology Urology 5 3 1 7 RAM3 8 RM6C 3D 4D Real Time Imaging Wide field of view Small probe tip and shaft CFM HD Flow Power and PW Doppler Broad Bandwidth Multi Frequency Biopsy guide available Needle diameters lt 1 4mm Material Stainless Steel Sterilization wit
187. 6 8 3 5 Zoom For more information see Zoom on page 6 12 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 6 38 H48691CF Revision 2 2D Mode 6 8 3 6 Accumulation For more information see B Flow Operation on page 6 26 6 8 3 7 Background For more information see B Flow Operation on page 6 26 6 8 4 Contrast Sub Menu The Contrast Main menu must be active Note Some functions are only available in scan mode Touch the Sub Contrast key The Contrast Submenu appears eS n Contrast Gray Map Tint Vv Clear V Persist Quality norm Enhance SJPRI Z 4 _ 1200 4 Time Delay Accumulation 0 0 The following functions are available Persistence Filter For more information see Persistence and Frame Filter on page 6 20 Line Density For more information see Line Density on page 6 21 Dynamic Contrast For more information see Dynamic Contrast on page 7 7 Enhance For more information see Enhance on page 7 6 Sensitivity PRI For more information see B Flow Sub Menu on page 6 27 Gray Map For more information see Gray Map on page 6 27 bd Utilites For more information see Utilities on page 14 2 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 6 39 2D Mode This page was intentionally left blank Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 6 40 H48691CF Revision 2 Chapter 7 M Mode Describes the general functions of the
188. 691CF Revision 2 Technical Data Information Fetal Weight Estimation Campbell AC Hadlock AC BPD Hadlock 1 AC FL Hadlock 2 BPD EFW AC FL Hadlock 3 HC AC FL Hadlock 4 BPD HC AC FL Hansmann BPD TTD Merz AC BPD Osaka BPD FTA FL Persson BPD MAD FL Persson 2 Schild HC AC FL Shepard AC BPD Shinozuka 1 BPD APTD TTD FL Shinozuka 2 BPD FL AC Shinozuka 3 BPD APTD TTD LV Tokyo BPD APTD TTD FL Growth tables AC ASUM CFEF Chitty Hadlock Hansmann Jacot Guillarmod Jeanty JSUM Johnsen Kurmanavicius Lai Yeo Lessoway Leung Merz Nicolaides Shinozuka Siriraj Tokyo Verburg Medvedev APTDxTTD Shinozuka Tokyo BPD ASUM Campbell CFEF Chitty Eik Nes Hadlock Hansmann Jacot Guillarmod Jeanty JSUM Kurmanavicius Lai Yeo Lessoway Leung McLennan Persson Merz Nicolaides OSAKA Sabbagha Shinozuka Siriraj Tokyo Verburg Medvedev CLAV YARKONI om CRL ASUM Hadlock Hansmann JSUM McLennan Persson Pexsters OSAKA Robinson Robinson 1993 Shinozuka Tokyo Medvedev DV PI DV PLI DV PVIV Baschat DV S a ASUM CFEF Chitty Eik Nes Hadlock Hansmann Jacot Guillarmod Jeanty Johnsen JSUM Kurmanavicius Lai Yeo Lessoway gt J gt BL Leung Persson Merz Nicolaides O Brien OSAKA Shinozuka Siriraj Tokyo Verburg WARDA Medvedev gt CT 1 T OSAKA FIB Chitty Jeanty Siri
189. 7 1 STIC with M Mode For more information see STIC Spatio Temporal Image Correlation on page 10 102 7 8 Anatomical M Mode AMM General Anatomical M Mode is an option If this option is not installed the AMM key is hidden To activate Anatomical M Mode press AMM key on your touchscreen Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 7 15 M Mode Co Press the right or left trackball key to activate the AMM 4Ct S a After pressing the M control adjust the AMM cursor using the trackball in the 2D single f image ED The upper trackball key changes between cursor position and line rotation and vice versa When scrolling through the AMM line the 2D image will always run simultanously The current 2D position is indicated on the AMM line through green arrows 7 8 1 AMM Main Menu The AMM Main functions sd Sweep Speed on page 7 4 Invert on page 7 4 Velocity Range PRF on page 8 35 Wall Motion Filter WMEF on page 8 36 Rotate Setting Application Abdomen Se i Penetration ery eee idi AMM rot Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 7 16 H48691CF Revision 2 7 8 1 1 View Modes Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 M Mode 1 2D Image 2 AMM 3 Motion M Mode 7 18 7 8 1 2 Rotate Rotate the menu control button to set the direction of the AMM line 7 8 2 AMM S
190. 7 21 32 24 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports Y The measurement procedures in Spectral Doppler Mode are the same than in application N Abdomen Review Abdomen Calculations in Spectral Doppler Mode on page 12 14 S than in application Obstetrics Review Obstetric Calculations in 2D Mode on page 12 22 es The measurement procedure of the Fetal Heart Rate in Spectral Doppler Mode is the same Press the Worksheet key on the control panel or touch the Worksheet key in the Calculation menu to view the report that contains detailed results of gynecology Bote affsam of fe 2no Pope 1 2 Eram Type Sey Female Gravida Para re oe ol With this flip control below the touch panel additional worksheet pages can be selected Note It is now possible to switch between Gyn and OB worksheets if both worksheets exist Review First Trimester OB in application GYN Measure amp Calc on page 16 3 To close the worksheet touch the Return key on the touch panel For more information see Basic Patient Worksheet Functions on page 12 5 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 61 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 12 11 Pediatric Calculations Application Pediatrics Factory Sub Category Default allows measurements calculations in 2D 3D mode M mode and Spectral Doppler mode using various measure items For details about settings revie
191. 8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 14 50 H48691CF Revision 2 Utilities and System Setup 1 Click on the Save button of the Small Backup Scan Settings group in the System Setup Backup page The Save window is displayed Choose media w Internal HDD A DVD CD A Network MW Drive 112 otzipfsv01 otzipall P d Wsersettings change folder 2 Choose the media e g DVD CD R W and click the Save button 3 Select an already existing file or click the New File button New file Enter file name without extension 2 2 ES aa cunca 4 Click OK The saving procedure begins Cancel Exit without saving Load Small Backup With the Load function the entire Image Settings or parts of it can be loaded into the database to overwrite restore copy etc the database into the system 1 Click on the Load button of the Small Backup Scan Settings group in the System Setup Backup page The Load Save window is displayed Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 51 Utilities and System Setup Choose media Internal HDD J DVD CD dAUsersettings e aa 2 Choose the media e g DVD CD R W and click the Load button 3 Select the appropriate file and click OK The Load option window appears Choose file z 4 Select the appropriate Backup Data Note In case software version and user program version are not iden
192. 82 omnis 1 53 2 00 13 rls Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 12 66 H48691CF Revision 2 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports me With this flip control below the touch panel additional worksheet pages can be selected To close the worksheet touch the Return key on the touch panel For more information see Basic Patient Worksheet Functions on page 12 5 12 13 MSK Calculations There are no items specified for application MSK 12 13 2 Before starting MSK Calculations 1 Press the Patient key on the control panel select the MSK page and enter all patient information for MSK calculations For more information see Entering Patient Data on page 4 7 Note Start To cancel all calculations performed before and to start new measurement press this key and select End Exam or Clear Exam xy 2 Press Start Exam 3 Make sure that the probe and application are selected properly If another application is selected press the Probe key on the control panel and change it to MSK For details refer to Probe selection on page 4 5 Probe 12 13 3 MSK Worksheet S For application MSK there is no specific worksheet available Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 67 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports This page was intentionally left blank Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 12 68 H48691CF Revision 2
193. Ai ECA Intima With this flip control below the touch panel additional worksheet pages can be selected 113 Vessel Summary Touch the Vessel Summary button or select the corresponding page in the report to access the Vessel Summary This feature makes it possible to select custom Doppler Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 12 58 H48691CF Revision 2 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports values for calculating the ICA CCA value Dote of Emme o7 28 2007 Pope 3 4 3 Ezom Tyge home Dok Henriette Pot iD DOS001 07 07 24 1 Vessel Summery Left Right PS H ED M sD PS B ED H so CCA 78 82em s 46 57em s ECA 20 30em s 7L Scmis 53 74em s To close the worksheet touch the Return key on the touch panel For more information see Basic Patient Worksheet Functions on page 12 5 12 10 Gynecology Calculations Application Gynecology Factory Sub Category Default allows measurements calculations in 2D 3D mode M mode and Spectral Doppler mode using various measure items For more information see Measure amp Calc on page 16 3 The methods for obtaining measurements in the Gynecology Calculations menu are similar to the generic measurement functions in 2D M and Spectral Doppler mode 12 10 1 Items of Gynecology Calculations The items of gynecology calculations in each mode are as follows 2D 3D Mode Uterus UT Trace Left Right Uterine Artery Left Right Ov
194. Artery con ee el an Vertebralis Vessel Gen Artery DEFAULT ae 2D 2D C Beam steering Selectable steering angles Angle 1 Angle 2 Angle 3 Remarks Changing the Gain Quality Wall Motion Filter PRF Invert and 2D 2D C is only possible in scan mode Beam steering is only possible with linear probes and in scan mode 8 3 2 CFM Operation The CFM operations CFM Box Position and CFM Box Size on page 8 12 id CFM Gain Control on page 8 12 Quality on page 8 33 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 8 11 Doppler Modes Wall Motion Filter WMEF on page 8 36 Velocity Range PRF on page 8 35 ad Invert on page 8 32 s 2D 2D C on page 8 12 Threshold on page 8 35 8 3 2 1 CFM Box Position and CFM Box Size In 2D imaging the relationship between 2D frame rate line density and field of view are well known factors to be considered to obtain optimum 2D images Similar relationships exist in Color imaging On the CFM Submenu the selection of the Quality adjusts the balance between the 2D Line Density and the Color mode line density The values available are scan head dependent The ability to change the CFM box size and position provides flexibility in CFM imaging The trackball changes the CFM box size and position Adjust the CFM box position on the 2D image with the trackball in Single Dual or Quad mode gt CFM box horizont
195. Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 4 11 Operating the System Note lf Dont display this message again is checked the message box will not be displayed before printing 4 4 4 Current Patient Menu Current Patient Menu touch panel Ea Archive Archive Switches to Archive For more information see Chapter 13 Start Exam Start Exam Starts an exam with the current patient Exit Patient procedure to previous operating state All patient information which has been entered previously will be cleared Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 4 12 H48691CF Revision 2 Operating the System S earch Search Switches to search mode All other buttons refer to the field of the same name on screen Current Patient menu screen Last home ral r Miekie aii DOA rrara dii Ari Archive Switches to Archive For more information see Chapter 13 Clear Current All temporary patient and measurement data is cleared For more information see Patient Information screen on page 4 74 If MPPS is used and a step is in progress send MPPS discontinue message to cancel the step Hide Patient Info Hides the patient info on screen during an exam Start Exam Starts an exam with the current patient The patient information is temporarily stored This can also be done by pressing the upper trackball key D Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 4 13 Ope
196. CF Revision 2 18 21 Technical Data Information Pulse Repetition 150Hz to 20 5KHz Frequency HD Flow Map 8 different color codes for each probe Frequency Range 1 to 18 MHz depending on the probe adjustable in three steps low mid high Flow Resolution 4 steps low mid1 mid2 high Balance from 25 to 225 Artefact suppression yes 18 10 7 Tissue Doppler Mode TD Display modes Simultaneous dual mode 2D 2D TD Depth range e axial 0 to B scan range Inversion of color direction Smoothing Filter e 12 steps rising time density line Flow Resolution 4 steps low mid1 mid2 high Frequency range 1 to 18 MHz depending on the probe adjustable in 3 steps low mid high Display Mode V velocity Scale kHz cm s m s Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 18 22 H48691CF Revision 2 18 10 8 Volume Scan Module Vol scan size Lines 2D image 2D images volume VOL Frames sec 4D Volume Cine Display of sectional plane images Rotation Magnification Acquisition Modes Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Technical Data Information max 64 MB for gray volumes max 90 MB for color volumes The required memory space depends on scan parameters VOL box size and quality low mid1 mid2 high1 high2 max typical 0 8 5 MB max 1024 typ 80 to 350 max 4096 dependent on acquisition mode max 47 Voluson E8 Expert max 46 Vo
197. CMT OF A 1 Cg er irh j CBOE r a a a Beal Orme L M a WT a a CRUE i WED r r TC r r CELEI g A a L Eo Eoma ar in Tyga DOL AEF Sr FH Lae er toh FH Lite Ae DFA AM Pothent Archies Atha Eco i Dota Tranier 1 Search area 2 Patient table 3 Exam table 4 Exam images 13 3 3 1 Search Area Show all patients and exams Lent oom LL Pa Lay AT LEDT Ay 5 CP holo hos an Fay aia iar T ios AT gT AT oe oT tT say Archive lire Litt Go fof Bitte a Pag Takei Paane E Tapies traj foe Hokie teed baie J wA HO Hapi a biri r T Gape idin Fr K3 p po In the search area you can either display the patients and exams according to your criteria To start a search click on the Search button or press the Return key on the keyboard Using the radio button below you can change the display format You can choose to display Patients amp Exams Exams Only Patients and exams or the exam list only Note In System Setup General Patient Info Display there is a check box Automatically List Patients If this check box is marked all exams will be displayed automatically If this check box is unmarked no exams will be displayed when you press Search until you click the Show All button on the screen 13 3 3 2 How to search 1 Select the source where you want to search Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision
198. Curso Peers Wiri Tobie Poesen LUG DUE se ona El Font Sire Trees CLAW Bor Hiocilck Color when mi Fori Cow ET E Hadiock Tokia Typa Dura fit width iranl Pinu aeii El EIEI erate Des Epis Corey One AOU ves Result Position Mode dependant Da Graph Single Display Eli pres grot Loree y dsploy Caer mibg Ramat Pirin FL EJ Papat magsummani Cireite Parut Po bre H cK Ee D EE 0O 4 Generic default Cursa Typa Lobe Remi Position Toggle 4 El A D s Maum on Aeahire 2L Hami Ciso on Cine A 1 wi bo EDD Thee BDO ooh on papir demsgn AT Tence results on Freene Select the desired combination of measurements that fulfil the needs of the respective country Select to use CUA Composite Ultrasound Age or AUA Average Ultrasound Age as default Select the desired Table Type Select SD Standard Deviation or Select Last or EFW Select Yes or No to add additional week to estimate data of delivery Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 16 19 Measure Setup Meas Clear on Cine Select if the measurement results should be deleted Yes or kept on screen No as soon as cine mode is activated Repeat measurement Select if each measurement should be repeated Generic or Generic amp Calc If each measurement should not be repeated select No Show EDD calc on screen Select if EDD Estimated Day of Delivery should be calculated and displayed on the screen Yes o
199. D Time HR Heart Rate The measurement procedures in Spectral Doppler Mode are the same than in application J Abdomen For more information see Abdomen Calculations on page 12 10 12 8 6 Urology Worksheet Press the Worksheet key on the control panel or touch the Worksheet key in the Calculation menu to view the report that contains detailed results of urology calculations Report Date ofExam 07 24 2007 Page 1 2 Exam Type Name Dok Henriette Perf Phys Pat ID DO3001 07 07 24 1 DOB Ref Phys Indication Sex Female Sonogr 2D Measurements Value mi m2 m3 m4 m5 Meth Right Kidney Length 2 82cm 2 82 avg Width 2 21cm 2 21 avg Height 2 53cm 2 53 avg Volume 8 26cm 8 26 fan 113 With this flip control below the touch panel additional worksheet pages can be selected To close the worksheet touch the Return key on the touch panel For more information see Basic Patient Worksheet Functions on page 712 5 12 9 Vascular Calculations Application Vascular Factory Sub Category Default allows measurements calculations in 2D 3D mode M mode and Spectral Doppler mode using various measure items For more information see Measure amp Calc on page 16 3 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 12 56 H48691CF Revision 2 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports The methods for obtaining measurements in the Vascular Calculations menu are similar t
200. D 0 79 m s PAPd 12 48 mmHg PAPs 9 96 mmHg Aortic Valve Vmax 0 91 m s Peak PG 3 32 mmHg TAmax 0 21 m s Mean PG 0 32 mmHg VTI 0 15 m Acc Time 1033 ms Ejection Time 307 ms AV Regurg Vmax 0 88 m s Page 173 le aol With this flip control below the touch panel additional worksheet pages can be selected To close the worksheet touch the Exit key on the touch panel For more information see Basic Patient Worksheet Functions on page 12 5 12 8 Urology Calculations Application Urology Factory Sub Category Default allows measurements calculations in 2D 3D mode M mode and Spectral Doppler mode using various measure items For more information see Measure amp Calc on page 16 3 The methods for obtaining measurements in the Urology Calculations menu are similar to the generic measurement functions in 2D M and Spectral Doppler mode Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 12 54 H48691CF Revision 2 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 12 8 1 Items of Urology Calculations The items of urology calculations in each mode are as follows 2D 3D Mode Left Right Kidney Bladder Prostate Left Right Testicle Left Right Renal Artery Left Right Dorsal Penile Artery Vessel MMode Left Right Renal Artery Left Right Dorsal Penile Artery Vessel Doppler Mode Left Right Renal Artery Left Right Dorsal Penile Artery Vessel 12 8 2 Before starting Urology Calculations 1 Press the
201. D 4D programs Save a 3D 4D Program Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 17 Utilities and System Setup Enter Overwrite Text Auto Trackball Speed Adjust the Trackball Speed Dialog color Level Select the desired color level for the dialogs of the user interface e g System Setup Worksheet Patient Information Following selection are possible Brightest Bright Standard Light Text Standard Dark Text Dark Default Darkest Menu Brightness The brightness of the menu operating area can be selected From 0 to 90 Doppler 2D Refresh Activates the frozen 2D image in Doppler Mode during movement of the trackball Doppler 2D Refresh Checked In PW mode the 2D scan is updated each time the gate is moved Not checked In PW mode the 2D scan is not updated at all Use 2D Color for STIC If Use 2D Color for STIC is selected check mark visible the system uses the 2D color settings for STIC color If this box is unchecked the system uses the color settings from the STIC user programs Clear on Unfreeze If this check box has been selected all annotation will be cleared when you untoggle the Freeze key Zoom Key While in Zoom Pre Mode select which Zoom Mode Pan Zoom or HD Zoom is activated automatically if the Zoom hardkey is pressed again Message Box Click this button and all hidden message boxes will be displayed again Use Spacebar key to When this check bo
202. D CFM single dual quad Simultaneous dual mode 2D 2D CFM e Triplex mode 2D CFM PW 2D M MCFM e Volume Mode 3D CFM Display modes Color coding steps steps 65536 color steps e Display modes V T velocity turbulence V velocity V P velocity power T turbulence e P T power turbulence Depth range e axial O to B scan range Inversion of color direction Smoothing Filter e 12 steps rising time density Ensemble e CFM 7 to 31 Pulse repetition frequency CFM 150 Hz to 20 5 kHz Scale kHz cm s m s Automatic moving tissue yes suppression Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 18 20 H48691CF Revision 2 Technical Data Information 18 10 5 Power Doppler Screen formats 2D PD single dual quad Display modes e Simultaneous dual mode 2D 2D PD Triplex mode 2D PD PW e Volume Mode 3D PD PD coding steps 256 color steps PD window size e lateral maximum to minimum B mode scan angle Smoothing Filter rising edge 12 steps 18 10 6 HD Flow Mode HDF Display Modes Simultaneous dual mode 2D 2D HDF Triplex mode 2D HDF PW 2D M MHDF e Volume Mode 3D HDF HD Flow Coding Steps 256 color steps HD Flow window size e lateral maximal to minimal B mode scan angle e axial B scan range P Smoothing Filter e 12 steps rising edge HD Flow Ensemble 7 to 31 HD Flow Line Density 10 steps Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691
203. D Screen Controls Trackball speed Dim function Zoom Overview window Patient Info display Title bar settings Start Exam amp End Exam Configuration 18 9 2 Measure Setup M amp A Setup including Add Delete Edit and Reorder of measure items Application Setup including several parameters of Measurement Doppler Trace and Calculation presets Global Setup including several parameters of Measurement Cursor and Result window presets 18 9 3 Biopsy Setup User programmable needle guidelines Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 18 13 Technical Data Information 18 14 18 9 4 Pre Processing B M Mode Write Zoom up to 8x Gain TGC Dynamic Range Acoustic Output Transmission Focus Position Transmission Focus Number Transmission Frequency Edge Enhancement Persistence Control Line Density Control Reject Sweep Speed M Cursor position PW Mode Gain Dynamic Range Acoustic Output Transmission Frequency PRF Wall Motion Filter Sample Volume Gate Length Depth Pos Velocity Scale Sweep Speed Color Flow Imaging Modes CFM PD TD HD Flow Gain Acoustic Output PRF Wall Motion Filter Line density Ensemble Dynamic Smooth Rise and Fall Frequency Balance Line Filter Quality Artifact Suppression Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 18 9 5 Post Processing B Mode Technical Data Information Read Zoom 0 8x 3 4x Zoom with
204. Dialog Semi _ Send Clipboard Content to Destination Lon End Exam _ Send Clipboard Content to Destination 2 on End Exam Send Clipboard Content to Destnaten 3 on End Exam Print _ Print Clipboard Content to Printer 1 on End Exam Sony UP D897 _ Print Clipboard Content to Printer Zon EndExam Sony WP Dear _ Print Clipboard Content to Printer 3 on End Exam Sony LAP DSo _ Print Worksheet to Repent Printer on End Exom Acton after End Exar 2 Show New Patent Screen after End Exam _ Auto Stort Acqursrbon Mama Keyi Ne Acton 1 Archive This check box is set per default If set it moves the complete content of the clipboard to the Internal archive Note If this check box Is not set there is no possibility to save the clipboard content apart from entering Utilities System Setup Connectivity Button Contiguration and setting this check box again 2 Transfer Worksheet There are three check boxes You can choose up to three different destinations where to transfer your worksheet s to Choose the destination of the remote server from the drop down list This option is greyed out if no destinations are available 3 General a Show End Exam Dialog If this check box is checked then the End Exam Dialog will be shown on screen upon pressing the End Exam button Note If both check boxes namely Open Review Page on End Exam and Show New Patient Screen after End Exam are selected then the Exam Revi
205. E E Positioning the Transverse Positioning the Longitudinal Positioning the Horizontal Section Section Section The sectional image A represents that 2D image visible in the Vol preparation area If the VOL start image is a transverse section of the prostate right side of the patient is left side of the screen the following Init positions are obtained Longitudinal Horizontal 3D image Ca Monitor Display 10 2 4 4 A B C Sectional Plane Mode This display mode is active if you press the Quad screen format key The 3 sectional planes A B and C are perpendicular to each other The intersecting lines of the planes are the axes H of the relative coordinate system and they are displayed in colors in the different image planes This Sectional Plane mode is the basis for the other display modes 10 2 4 5 Reference Image Mode Pressing the Single screen format key will magnify x2 and display the reference image A B or C For the REF image plane selection the same rules as for sectional planes mode apply The graphic display of the orientation help is not possible 10 2 4 6 Niche Display Mode Parts of the orthogonal sections A B and C are compiled to a 3D section aspect The name Niche has been chosen because the aspect shows a quasi spatial cut into the volume In the 3D Menu After volume acquisition Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 29 Volume Mode Render planar ta
206. End Exam a Show new patient screen after End Exam After End Exam the New Patient screen will appear to start with a new patient b Auto Start Acquisition New Key After End Exam a new acquisition starts without creating a new patient c No Action Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 15 10 H48691CF Revision 2 Describes the general functions of measure setups Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Chapter 16 Measure Setup 16 1 Measure Setup Introduction Modifications of measurement parameters are done with support of diverse dialog pages and windows on the measurement setup desktop Generally operations are done with the trackball and the trackball keys mouse emulation Trackball mouse position positions the pointing device arrow on the desktop Q left trackball key left mouse button sets fixates markers and activates pages buttons etc OI marked by the pointing device ED upper trackball key right mouse button no function in system desktop right trackball key left mouse button sets fixates markers and activates pages buttons etc OR marked by the pointing device Note There is a National Language Support for the whole measurement package generic and calculation measurements Measurement setup and worksheets reports Supported languages are English German French Italian and Spanish To change the language review General on page 14 74 16 1 To Invoke th
207. F Revision 2 Volume Mode Select the render modes Choose between two render modes Skin Surface or Smooth Selection of single images After touching the Start Stop key move the trackball horizontally and you can select each single image step by step p The displayed number indicate 2 10 image number of the sequence 10 4 2 6 Changing the Kind of Cine Note When you are in the Slice Cine menu Sectional Planes Mode you need to change the visualization mode to be able to change to another kind of cine When in Render Mode e Press New Cine Sequence Cine sequence Change the Kind of Cine The following screen appears on the touch panel 3D Transl Cine gets lost Do you want to continue Press Yes and the menu changes accordingly When in Sectional Planes Mode i Press Exit The menu changes to the 3D or 4D Main menu Change the Visualization mode e Press the Cine Calc key The following screen appears on the touch panel Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 67 Volume Mode 3D Transl Cine gets lost Do you want to continue ee Press Yes and the menu changes to the Cine Calculation menu from where you proceed as described in Cine Calculation on page 10 58 10 4 3 MagiCut This software has the ability to electronically edit the images and makes it possible to cut away structures obstructing the view onto the
208. FM settings For more information see MTD Sub Menu on page 7 12 The MTD Main menu appears on the touchpanel scan mode Application Gynecology ECC OG DEFAULT Remarks Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 7 10 H48691CF Revision 2 M Mode In freeze mode changing the Speed Wall Motion Filter PRF and Gain is not possible In MTD mode only one focus zone is available When the MTD box is moved the focus position is set to the center of the Color box To use special utilities Utilities on page 14 2 and Gray Map on page 6 27 7 5 2 MTD Operation Overview of MTD operations Color Box Size and Cursor Position Activation of MTD Mode MTD Gain Control Invert MTD Wall Motion Filter WMF Wall Motion Filter WMF on page 8 36 Velocity Range PRF Velocity Range PRF on page 8 35 MTD Cineloop M Cineloop on page 7 5 All further image optimizing functions are the same as those of the M mode For more information see M Operation on page 7 3 7 5 2 1 Color Box Size and Cursor Position es After pressing the M and the TD control adjust the Color box size and the cursor position A _ f using the trackball in the 2D single image The upper trackball key changes between cursor position and Color box size and vice versa 7 5 2 2 Activation of MTD Mode Press the right or left trackball key and 2D mode and MTD mode trace are active The screen is divided asymmetrically into two fr
209. GE Healthcare Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual English English C 0123 H48691CF Revision 2 BT 13 EC200 G E imagination at work 2013 by General Electric Revision History Revision MV June 2012 Revision 1 August 2012 Revision 2 January 2013 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Table of Contents Chapter 1 General About this User Manual 1 2 Contacting GE Healthcare Ultrasound 1 3 Chapter 2 Safety and Maintenance Symbols and Labels 2 2 Remarks for Safe Use 2 7 System Safety and Maintenance 2 7 Probe Safety and Maintenance 2 14 Biopsy Safety and Maintenance 2 22 Manufacturer Responsibility 2 24 Service Documents 2 24 Bioeffects and Safety of Ultrasound Scans 2 24 Disposal 2 27 Guidance and manufacturer s declaration 2 28 Network disclosure 2 31 Chapter 3 Description
210. GRAFT Palm A INNOM A UEV JUGUL INNOM V SUBC V AXILL CEPH BASIL BRACH MCUB RADIAL ULNAR LEA COM ILIAC A INT ILIAC A EXT ILIAC A COM FEM A DEEP FEM A SUP FEM A POPL A LEV CD ANT TIB A POST TIB A PERON A DORS PED A GRAFT PROF A IVC COM ILIAC V EXT ILIAC Vein COM FEM GSAPH V FEM V DEEP FEM V POPLIT V L SAPH V ANT TIB V POST TIB V PERON V PROF V Renal RENAL A M RENAL A RENAL V SEGM A INTERLO A ARC A T ACA MCA PCA Basilar A Comb A P Comb A Vertebral Vessel Basilaris all included in Summary Reports Gynecology Uterus Right Left Ovary Right Left Follicle Fibroid Endometrial thickness Dist Double Dist Cervix Length Left Right Ovarian Artery Left Right Uterine Artery Vessels Pelvic Floor FHR all included in Summary Reports Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 18 28 H48691CF Revision 2 Technical Data Information Pediatrics Left Right Hip Joint Pericallosal Artery included in Summary Report Neurology Left Right ACA Anterior Cerebral Artery Left Right MCA Middle Cerebral Artery Left Right PCA Posterior Cerebral Artery Basilar Artery A Com A Anterior Com Artery P Com A Posterior Com Artery Left Right CCA Common Carotid Artery Left Right ICA Internal Carotid Artery Left Right Vertebral Artery Vessels all included in Summary Reports Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 18 29 Technical Data I
211. H48691CF Revision 2 10 93 Volume Mode Note a _ If you want to return to the 3D 4D Mode menu press the right trackball key Volpre displayed in the status bar on the monitor Note The appearance of the Volume Cine read menu depends on the selected probe trackball functionality and the Real Time 4D acquisition mode Some functions will not be available in certain modes To determine the Trackball functionality Start Cine Volpre ROI ROI to change the position and size of the render box Cine to change to the volume cine mode To change the display format Select the desired display format To rotate and shift the reference and 3D image Use the X Y and Z mode controls to rotate around the X Y and Z axis Use the Parallel Shift mode control to shift along the Z axis Y For further controls and possible adjustments For more information see 4D Controls on page s 10 89 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 94 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode 10 7 1 Auto Cine mp 1 Touch the Auto Cine key to display the 4D Volume Cine menu Auto Cine 4D Volume Cine Cine mode Sa Start Stop Start Volume End Volume 0 26 2 Select the Start Volume of the sequence The selected volume is simultaneously displayed on the screen Start Volume ER 3 Select the End Volume of the sequence The volume is displayed 4 Select the review spee
212. HD Zoom functionality up to 22x Zoom 2D Gain Dyn Contr Gray Map Colorized B SRI II Speckle Reduction Imaging M Mode Gray Map Colorized M Display Format Sweep Speed PW Mode Gray Map Baseline Shift Angle Correction Colorized D Scale KHz m s cm s Trace Invert Sweep Speed Color Flow Imaging Modes CFM PD TD HD Flow Color Map Display Threshold Display Mode V V T T P P T CFM only Scale CFM and HD Flow Baseline B Flow Gray Map B Flow e Gray Map e Colorized BF SRI II Speckle Reduction Imaging e Dyn Contr 18 9 6 Image Processing and Presentation Digital Beamformer Signal processing channels 1 979 578 probe dependent Minimum Depth of Field 1 cm Zoom probe dependent Maximum Depth of Field 36 cm probe dependent Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 18 15 Technical Data Information Transmission Focus e 1 5 Focus Points selectable probe and application dependent Focal Zone position up to 7 steps Continuous Dynamic Receive Focus Continuous Dynamic Receive Aperture 256 shades of gray 16 8 Mio Colors 24 bit Dynamic Range 274 dB Image Reverse Right Left Rotation 0 180 18 9 7 2D CINE Features Length Cine Features Dual Quad Image CINE Display CINE Gauge and CINE Image number display CINE Review Loop Selectable CINE Sequence for CINE Review by Start Frame and End Frame Side Change in dual CINE Mode Measurements
213. L x RM6C RNA5 9 D RRE5 10 D RRE6 10 D RSM5 14 X RSP6 16 D KA C Note Only available on Voluson E8 Expert 5 1 4 Features C a C N Probes Imaging Modes norm Virtual Wide BetaView convex 11L D ee O E O S c a a a a E Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 5 4 H48691CF Revision 2 Probes and Biopsies Probes Imaging Modes aae aa convex icc SS e O O E PE ae n Pp oe E ER T e E e EE a e a e Ca ee CE ee E i ee E o we SC e ae e e e D SS Se ee e n T E D e E e C a A a a E a ee d d Cc SS Oe ee ee ee as Ce ee a E ee a ee e Lice CO CE ee a an eee eee ce CD SO ee a ee Lc CS CS ON EO CO pean ee ee Lec a E Re e a a Le AN CS SC CS Lin A A CS SS CS ered ee Pe Lace SS SC S SO a Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 5 5 Probes and Biopsies a e p x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt O OS A E u x x x LL O x x x O x x x x x x x x x TE X N Q JT x xix x x x xixixixi x x x x xix x x x lt 2 D D e gt gt F xixixi xix x x x xixixixi ix x xi x x x x x xxx x x lt HHE Q 5 A xixi x xix xx x xixixixi x x x x x x x x xxx x Oo O Q x x x x x xixixixi x x x x x x gt loz 4 23 S 2 x xix x x x xixixixi x x x x x x alo 2 x xix x x x xixixixi x x x x x x ey x x x e x x me Lf fe fe ie
214. Load Data field Click the Load button The load procedure starts to load the selected item of Backup into the system 3D 4D Programs Select the appropriate group all probes probe amp all applications etc down to the final single program within the displayed tree Click the Arrow button to copy the selected item into the Load Data field Click the Load button The load procedure starts to load the selected item of Backup into the system Checklists Select the appropriate group all checklist scan assistant lists down to the final single program within the displayed tree Click the Load button The load procedure starts to load the selected item of Backup into the system g To return selected items from the Load Data field to the Backup Data field select the lt lt button or click Cancel 14 2 6 1 2 Full System Configuration A full system configuration backup always contains the following data i Patient demographic and exam data database containing the patient data and measurements gt Archive image data NOT available when saving to the internal hard disk or DVD CD User Settings databases and files containing gray curves and the user settings Image transfer settings DICOM settings e g DICOM servers AE Title Station Name etc Measure Setup Settings user specific measure settings Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 53 Utilities and System Setup Vo
215. M Mode There are no specific measurements for application Pediatrics in Doppler Mode 12 11 6 Pediatric Worksheet Press the Worksheet key on the control panel or touch the Worksheet key in the Calculation menu to view the report that contains detailed results of pediatric calculations Report Dote cfExom O7Ff2a 2007 Pope 172 J Exam Type Nome Dok Henriette Fen Frys PotiD D03001 07 07 24 1 DOB Raf Prga Incicotion Se Female Snog 2D Measurements Value mi ma m5 mo Meth Left Hip Joint alpha bata Type last lost 143 With this flip control below the touch panel additional worksheet pages can be selected To close the worksheet touch the Return key on the touch panel For more information see Basic Patient Worksheet Functions on page 12 5 12 12 Neurology Calculations Application Neurology Factory Sub Category Default allows measurements calculations in 2D 3D mode M mode and Spectral Doppler mode using various measure items For details about settings review Weasure amp Calc on page 16 3 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 12 64 H48691CF Revision 2 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports The methods for obtaining measurements in the Neurology Calculations menu are similar to the generic measurement functions in 2D M and Spectral Doppler mode 12 12 1 Items of Neurology Calculations The items of neurology calculatio
216. M Queue Status button on the Device Setup page The Queue Status window displays all DICOM transfers which have not been sent which are being sent at the moment or which failed Successful transfers are deleted from the list DS5061 11 05 0 1 SSO 1 111 DESO 1 110531 DSO 1 1 103 1 om oe me ome Note If the transfer was successful but a storage commitment request was not yet successful the images receive the status sent As soon as the storage commitment was successful the entries both images and storage commit are deleted from the list Retry Select the Retry button to retry selected exam Rety all Select the Retry all button to retry all exams Delete e Select the Delete button to delete selected exam A Hold Select the Hold Queue button Queue Note lf the Hold Queue button is selected the system no longer tries to send the data in the queue e g when the system is removed from the network _ _ _ Select the Delete all button to delete all exams r _ Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 14 40 H48691CF Revision 2 Utilities and System Setup The Queue Status window appears vee x pa IDICOM Transfer Queue Status gt gt gt QUEUE PROCESSING STOPPED lt lt lt Patient ID A Date Time 05500 1 21 05 03 1 05 03 2021 20 04 0S5001 21 05 03 1 05 03 2031 30 04 0S S001 1105 03 1 05 03 2011 30 04 As soon as the Process Queue butto
217. Mode 6 15 2D Sub Menu 6 19 Gray Map 6 21 B Flow 7 77 7 7 7 6 25 XTD View Extended View 6 27 Contrast Imaging 6 35 Chapter 7 M Mode M Main Menu 1 2 M Operation 7 3 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 i iii Table of Contents M Sub Menu 7 6 MCFM Mode M Color Flow Mode 7 7 MTD Mode M Tissue Doppler Mode 7 10 MHD Mode M High Density Mode 7 13 STIC with M Mode 7 15 Anatomical M Mode AMM 7 15 Chapter 8 Doppler Modes Pulsed Wave Doppler Mode PW Mode 8 2 Continuous Wave Doppler Mode CW Mode 8 7 Color Flow Mode CFM 8 10 Power Doppler Mode PD Mode 8 15 HD Flo
218. Mode Calc p ER lt Ref Image 3D Orientation Quality Vol Angle high2 25 To use the controls during the Real Time 4D acquisition For more information see 4D Controls on page 10 89 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 85 Volume Mode 10 5 2 4 Display of 4D Continuous volume sweep Real Time 4D Full size display of a rendered image Render The monitor displays only the 4D image during the acquisition of Real Time 4D EE Sectional Planes _ MagiCut More Render 3D Mode Frame 3D Orientation Quality Vol Angle high 60 To use the controls during the Real Time 4D acquisition For more information see 4D Controls on page 10 89 10 5 2 5 Display of A ROI 4D a Continuous volume sweep Real Time 4D Dual display of a rendered image reference Render image A Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 86 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode The monitor displays the REF and 4D image during acquisition of Real Time 4D co Planes ml MagiCut Render JD Mode Frame Ref Image 3D Orientation Init a gg aro 3 tilt Mix Quality Vol Angle 40 50 4 hight 60 To use the controls during the Real Time 4D acquisition For more information see 4D Controls on page 10 89 10 5 2 6 4D ROI Edit ROI Mode This is the mode for the adjustment of the volume render box The volume render box determines the ROI for the
219. N network connectivity Possible loss of data during transfer via network from the ultrasound system For USB connections a separation device has to be used exceed the limit values as per IEC 60601 resp other valid national or international standards i The leakage current of the entire system including any all auxiliary equipment must not All equipment must comply with relevant UL CSA and IEC requirements Please observe that some printers may not be medical devices If the Bluetooth Printer and or Line Printers are no medical devices they have to be located outside of the typical patient environment Examples for typical patient environments can be found in standard IEC 60601 y see illustrations below Typical Patient Environment Ai he w i O ism i 53 inen 1 j Auxiliary equipment must only be connected to the main console with the special mains outlet provided for the electrical safety of the system O Auxiliary equipment with direct mains connection requires galvanic separation of the signal uf and or control leads The outlets AUX 1 2 3 may be set to 230V or 115V Modification of voltage setting must only be performed by authorized service personnel Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 17 3 Connections The sum of the power consumption of auxiliary equipment connected to these outlets must not exceed 345 VA Do not connect a MULTIPLE SOCKET OUTLET or extensio
220. Only 5 4DView dongles can be programmed per system 14 2 7 1 How to program the dongle Programming is done automatically when a dongle is connected to the system If the dongle programming was successful the following message appears on the screen Option successfully transferred If the maximum of 5 programmed dongles is exceeded the following message appears on the screen Option transfer has already been performed 5 times No further transfer is possible 14 2 8 Measure Setup Press the Measure Setup key to enter the Measure Setup section For more information see Chapter 16 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 14 64 H48691CF Revision 2 Chapter 15 Programmable Keys Describes the general function of the programmable keys Sections in this chapter Where to program the keys on page 15 2 E P keys on page 15 3 Start Exam Button on page 15 8 End Exam Button on page 15 9 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 15 1 Programmable Keys There are three different kinds of keys which are programmable P1 P2 P3 P4 Start Exam and End Exam So there are six keys altogether They are all programmable for printing sending and saving data Freeze aN g o P4 Ba ing EE img E img MIC REC How to use the P1 P2 P3 P4 key ae Use the trackball and the trackball buttons to press a P key The active P key i e the one that can be pre
221. Only the biopsy bracket is reusable For detailed information please contact the manufacturer Probes and Biopsies 5 3 3 6 C4 8 D Curved array transducer C4 8 D Biopsy H48681AT 1 Patient applied part 2 Probe handle Abdomen Obstetrics Gynecology Urology Pediatrics Wide field of view CFM MCFM HD Flow Power PW and CW Doppler Broad bandwidth Multi frequency Biopsy guide available Only CIVCO manufacturer needle guides may be used with this biopsy Material Plastic Multi angle biopsy Only the biopsy bracket is reusable For detailed information please contact the manufacturer Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Probes and Biopsies 5 3 4 2D Probes Linear Array Probes 5 3 4 1 SP10 16 D Linear array transducer Ee 16 D M PEC64 H46721B Biopsy PEC82 H48671MD 2 1 Patient applied part 2 Probe handle Small parts Wide field of view e Needle diameters e Needle diameters Peripheral vascular virtual convex lt 1mm lt 1mm Pediatrics Small and light lt 1 4mm lt 1 4mm MSK weight Breast elo Pangwicin Material Material Multi frequency lt 2 2 mm lt 2 2mm Excellent detail Stainless Steel Stainless Steel resolution Sterilization with Sterilization with en oa CFM HD Flow autoclave possible autoclave possible Power and PW Doppler 5 3 4 2 11L D Linear array transducer 1 Patient applied part 2 Probe handle Small parts
222. PUBLIC OF IRELAND RUSSIA SINGAPORE 1 6 GE Sistemas Medicos de Mexico S A de C V Rio Lerma 302 1 y 2 Pisos Colonia Cuauhtemoc 06500 Mexico D F Phone 5 228 9600 Fax 5 211 4631 GE Healthcare De Wel 18 B 3871 MV Hoevelaken PO Box 22 3870 CA Hoevelaken Phone 31 33 254 1290 Fax 31 33 254 1292 GE Healthcare Victoria Business Park 9 Westbank Road Belfast BT3 9JL Phone 44 28 90229900 GE Medical Systems Ultrasound Tasenveien 71 0873 Oslo Phone 47 2202 0800 Strandpromenaden 45 P O Box 141 3191 Horten Phone 47 33 02 11 16 GE Medical Systems Polska Sp z o o ul Wo oska 9 02 583 Warszawa Poland Phone 48 22 330 83 00 Fax 48 22 330 83 83 General Electric Portuguesa SA Avenida do Forte n 4 Fraccao F 2795 502 Carnaxide Phone 351 21 425 1309 Fax 351 21 425 1343 GE Healthcare Unit F4 Centrepoint Business Park Oak Drive Dublin 22 Phone 353 1 4605500 GE Healthcare Krasnopresnenskaya nab 18 bld A 10th floor 123317 Moscow Russia Phone 7 4957 396931 Fax 7 4957 396932 GE Healthcare Singapure 1 Maritime Square 13 012 HarbourFront Centre Singapore 099253 Tel 65 6291 8528 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 General SPAIN GE Healthcare Espana C Gobelas 35 37 28023 Madrid Phone 34 91 663 2500 Fax 34 91 663 2501 SWEDEN GE Medical Systems Ultrasound PO Box 314 17175 Stockholm
223. Patient name aes aS a LG eS TL a ce Jeet picanfioaapan FT F STATUS AREA BAR Remarks The blue border of the 2D image is displayed for orientation It indicates the position of the 2D image in the XTD image a The blue borders do not change when 2D image is zoomed The trackball has two functions Frame and Position pos Frame move the blue box in the XTD image and Position will move the B image itself The activated function is displayed in the status bar area on the monitor om Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 6 34 H48691CF Revision 2 2D Mode To change the current function press the upper trackball key eo 6 7 4 4 XTD Image Size Two different XTD Image Sizes are possible fit The XTD image fits to the border of the screen which is the default setting eran over scan XTD image fits to an imaginary border 20 larger than screen The blue border of the 2D image is displayed again for orientation It indicates the position of the 2D image in the over scan XTD image 6 7 4 5 2D Zoom For more information see Zoom on page 6 12 6 7 4 6 Ruler m By default the rulers are displayed They can be turned off on by touching the Ruler key 6 7 4 7 Measurements in the XTD image If a measurement function is activated in mode XTD View a yellow caution symbol appears on the screen This symbol reminds the user that UNINTENDED USE of this feature could lead to measur
224. Position Size and Curvature of the Render Box Note The reference image selector will only be displayed if quad screen display is selected Ref Image i 1 Select reference image A B C or 3D The rotary controls and the trackball are assigned to the reference image for the adjustment of the render box functions image position size of volume box and render start curvature 2 By means of the trackball place the information to be rendered into the box The selected C image A B or C is positioned in relation to the render box Important Structures which obstruct the free sight to the object can be positioned out of the box 3 Press the upper trackball key to change the function from image position to size of the er render box ROI Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 53 Volume Mode e 4 Adjust the horizontal and vertical dimension of the render box Note Benefit of a bigger box higher resolution Benefit of a smaller box faster calculation time 5 Press the lower left trackball key again to change the function from ROI of the render box 0 to render start curvature 6 Move the trackball to adjust the bending curve of the green render start line 1 A 7 The magnifier Zoom button varies the size of the contents of the box within image A B and C in relation to the render box Note The magnification of the entire 3D image without changing the contents o
225. Px button or else all changes will be lost when a other image is reloaded There are 3 different possibilities to save a reloaded image depending on the System Setup options 2 Immediate overwriting of the original file Immediate save as a copy of the original file s Choose from dialog box Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 13 8 H48691CF Revision 2 Archive Voluson E8 Replace reloaded image T Overwrite existing file Yes or save as copy No In System Setup can be defined where the reload image will be saved in clipboard only works with copy replaced images will always be saved on the same place bd On the first free slot in the clipboard Right behind the reloaded data Note Existing Image Data informations must not be lost When a Volume Cine is saved as Singe Volume the Volume Cine will not be overwritten The saved Single Volume will be saved to the end of the Clipboard independent if behind or end of clipboard is activated If a 2D cine is saved as Single the 2D Cine will not be overwritten but the saved Single image will be saved to the end of the clipboard independent if behind or end of clipboard is activated All screenshots are saved to the end of the clipboard independent if behind or end of clipboard is activated TUI one by one does not replace the reloaded Volume but will be saved to the end of the clipboard independe
226. Request Comment Prnt Generol Cine Capturing in Run Mode v Use Report Printer for Reports TUE One by one Retrospective Worksheet All Poges Prospective 3 Detailed Settings Adjust the key actions 15 2 P keys There are 4 different actions which can be programmed onto a P key Each P key P1 P4 can be programmed to perform several actions except when you choose 4 Record ona DVD VCR Recorder 1 Save to Clipboard If the P Button is configured to save the image to the clipboard the current image or cine depending on the settings in the button configuration page is moved to the clipboard Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 15 3 Programmable Keys The format of the stored file can be configured in System Setup Archive Configuration page see Connectivity on page 14 37 2 Send If the P Button is configured to send the image to a DICOM destination the current image or cine is sent to a DICOM server In this case a separate association is used for each image If the images are sent on end exam a single association is used for all images No image is moved to the clipboard except when the P Button is configured to save as well The format of the stored file can be configured for each destination separately in the System Setup DICOM Configuration page see Connectivity on page 14 37 If the P Button is pressed in write mode the system continues in write mode
227. Result Position M Choose the position from the pull down menu Result Position of Doppler Choose the position from the pull down menu Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 16 20 H48691CF Revision 2 A Chapter 17 Connections Describes the safety precautions for external devices the connection between internal and external VO and the ECG Sections in this chapter How to Connect Auxiliary Devices Safely on page 17 2 Connection between Internal I O and External I O on page 17 5 Recorder type on page 17 8 ECG Preamplifier on page 17 12 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Led Connections 17 2 17 1 How to Connect Auxiliary Devices Safely Note Peripherals that have been ordered simultaneously with the Voluson E8 E8 Expert are usually already mounted and connected The first mounting and connecting will usually be performed by a GE system technician How to connect peripheral devices 1 Ensure that the console is switched off 2 Connect the peripheral device to the console 3 Switch on the peripheral device by pressing the Power ON button 4 Switch on the circuit breaker of the console and press the standby button 5 The connected peripheral device will be supplied with power Always observe the instructions given in the manual of the peripheral auxiliary device Basic Concept The Voluson E8 E8 Expert is equipped with an isolation transformer to pro
228. SW ContrastSW ElastoSW norm CFM X X x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt lea 5 Zz y x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt x lt o w TI Be sure to have read all biopsy safety informations before proceeding Biopsy Safety and Maintenance on page 2 22 de mounting All biopsy needle guides can easily be mounted to the transducer Biopsy guides have a special stop or handle to guarantee a good fix into the notch of transducers Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User H48691CF Re ECG W Manual vision 2 Probes and Biopsies DoS For some probes it is recommended to add some coupling gel to the biopsy notches on the N probe shaft to ensure easy placement of the biopsy guide For detailed information on a biopsy guide please contact the respective manufacturer Ensure the correct position and optimal fit every time before using a biopsy guide The stainless steel tube and the bore inside of the biopsy needle guide must be sterile The cold sterilized transducer can be kept sterile by placing a sterile sheath over the shaft sterile coupling gel between transducer and sheath Technical data The reusable biopsy needle guides are of stainless steel type 301 303 and 304 AISI No Sterilization for reusable biopsy needle guides Autoclaving moist heat 121 C for 20 minutes 3 Pre Vacuum cycles or 134 C for 5 minutes Recommended minimum sterilization leve
229. Some functions are only available in scan mode The following functions are available Format on page 8 30 CFM Map on page 8 14 Frequency on page 8 37 Flow Resolution on page 8 29 Scale on page 8 34 Balance on page 8 28 Smoothing on page 8 34 Ensemble on page 8 29 Line Density on page 8 32 Artifact Suppression on page 8 27 Baseline on page 8 28 Line Filter on page 8 32 Gray Map on page 6 21 Utilities on page 14 2 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Doppler Modes 8 14 8 3 3 1 CFM Map Note This function allows selection of the color coding for the blood flow display similar to the post processing curves with gray scale 2D It is useful especially with low flow rates It may be altered in real time or Freeze mode respectively Velocity display Display V velocity turbulence display Display V T and velocity power display Display V Pow each have different color pattern maps available for selection Selection of a CFM Map curve Touch CFM Map key and select the desired CFM Map curve by touching key 1 to 8 f desired activate Gently Colors For more information see Gently Colors on page 8 37 8 3 4 CFM 2D Spectral Doppler Triplex Mode Note Triplex mode is the simultaneous real time display of 2D mode Color Doppler and Spectral Doppler There are two possibilities to combine Color Flow Mod
230. The following menu appears and you can choose from the following options The Reference line can be deactivated by pressing the Omni View Line button the submenu When deactivated the line will disappear from the screen but short lines will still be shown Cc Tr i Polyline Curve race 1 Line change the line in the usual way 2 Curve add a curve to the starting line of the render box 3 Polyline add multiple angles to the starting line of the renderbox 10 2 6 3 After the VCl Omni View Acquisition After Freeze the system switches automatically to freeze mode and the Vol Cine menu appears The selected format and the last acquired volume will be present on the monitor Upon Freeze a certain number of volumes will be stored in the cine memory The sequence can be reviewed volume by volume For more information see Volume Cine on page 10 92 The Slice key allows you to select the slice you wish to examine Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 39 Volume Mode gt The Cine key allows you to select the image from the stored cine you wish to assess To readjust the Slice Thickness touch More on the touch panel to enter the submenu Note The actual values for slice thickness may vary trom probe to probe 10 2 6 4 Omni View Ref Line Omni View Ref Line shows any 3 slices on a reference image simultaneously on the screen Press the Quad sc
231. Touch the Save as key on the touch panel 3 Save the entered comment as Comment A Comment B or Comment C 4 Touch Return To delete all entered comments touch the Clear key on the touch panel 12 3 5 To transfer a Worksheet Click this key on the touch panel to transfer the patient worksheet data to the selected IP address or to a PC that is connected via serial port Transfer Data Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 12 8 H48691CF Revision 2 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports Note lf a Structured Report Server exists the data is transferred using DICOM Structured Reporting independent of whether there are other report servers network serial available Note The Transfer Data key can only be selected if a Service REPORT destination is specified in the System Setup To specify a DICOM Address Connectivity on page 14 37 Note Receiving Report Data An example for software that can receive and store reports is the PIA documentation system for medical diagnostics and digital image archiving trom ViewPoint www viewpoint online com 12 3 6 To print a Report 1 Select the Summary report pages for the printout are Pe rm Camm Anatomy Compare canin Comment Note Display depends on selected Application The selection will be stored DoS A check mark marks each summary report that is included in the printout report To include N exclude
232. User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 2D Mode ira trackball key changes between Cine and 2D image position of the actual 2D Freeze key Real time mode The Freeze key freezes the real time 2D image in the actual display position Freeze mode The Freeze key activates real time mode of the frozen 2D image in the current display position The last real time settings will be employed again in the new selected display position Operation 1 Select Dual display mode 2 Freeze the image 3 Select the next display position by using the format key 4 Freeze the next image If the image is frozen and you use Update 2D the right trackball key the same image is selected and active If the image is active in real time mode by pressing the Update 2D the right trackball key the next image is selected and active Press the Single key to return to Single display mode 6 2 18 2 Quad Screen Format Quad Screen Format key hard key Press this key to change from Single or Dual display mode to Quad mode Real time mode scan mode The Quad mode key freezes the real time 2D image in the actual display position and shows the real time 2D image live in the next display position Next Position Quad 1 gt 2 gt 3 gt 4 gt 1andsoon Freeze mode read mode The Quad mode key selects the next display position without activating the real time mode to allow for post processing freeze magnifying cine etc of a frozen image
233. View function allows the adjustment of the Volume O Axis position of 3D probes in 2D mode The green line in the displayed symbol indicates the position of the acoustic block and defines the corresponding sweep direction on the Touch screen ly Rotating the control changes the position of the acoustic block Pressing the control moves Mees the acoustic block back to 0 which is the central 2D mode plane Remarks The Beta View function is only available with certain 3D probes The symbol is only displayed when the position is not 0 i A short beep sounds if the min or max axis position is reached Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 6 7 2D Mode 6 2 11 Focus and Frequency Composite FFC Focus and Frequency Composite FFC technology utilizes two different transmit frequencies and two different focal ranges in the 2D image This function combines a low frequency to increase the penetration and higher frequency to keep a high resolution It reduces speckle and artefacts in the 2D image to facilitate the examination of difficult to scan patients Switch on off the FFC Focus and Frequency Composite function in 2D mode 6 2 12 Virtual Convex Mode Advantage of the Virtual Convex Mode The scan area is increased in relation to the linear display by steering the ultrasound lines on the edge of the probe This mode is only available for linear probes Selection of Linear or Virtua
234. Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 82 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode Turn the Zoom control to adjust magnification Press the Zoom control to return to the default value 10 5 2 1 Display of Sectional Planes Continuous volume sweep Display of sectional planes without rendered 3D image sectional Planes The monitor continuously displays the sectional planes during the acquisition of Real Time 4D Render Orient Help Ref Image B c Quality Vol Angle high1 60 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 83 Volume Mode To use the controls during the Real Time 4D acquisition For more information see 4D Controls on page 10 89 10 5 2 2 Display of REF Image e In continuous 4D volume acquisition it is possible to display the reference sectional plane in i full screen format Planes The monitor displays only the REF image plane during a Real Time 4D Ref Image Quality Vol Angle high1 60 To use the controls during the Real Time 4D acquisition For more information see 4D Controls on page 10 89 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 84 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode 10 5 2 3 Display of ROI 4D Continuous volume sweep Real Time 4D Quad display of a rendered 3D image sectional Render planes The monitor displays the ROI and 4D image during acquisition of Real Time 4D Planes tation MagiCut
235. You can mark more than one image 3 Double click an image to view it in Exam Review Single Screen Mode Once you have found the exam you were looking for you can manipulate it or its saved data in the following Menus Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 13 17 Archive 13 3 3 6 DICOM Server Query Retrieve Exams Patients and Images from a DICOM Server can be imported after a Query Retrieve was performed It is only possible to select complete exams or patients It is not possible to Note Note Note 13 18 import selected images from a given exam It is only possible to import an exam after the images of this exam were retrieved If no images are available the Import Button is greyed Given that no previous query was performed no stored data from this DICOM Server is available At first the Patient list Exam list and Image lists are all empty The system automatically changes to the Patients amp Exams View i The Buttons Query Exams and Retrieve Images are disabled S0aTCe DICOM Server feorch Potient Nome a Query Patients Potent amp Eroma i Exons Ory Potients B Potient 10 Patient horme je Enom Dote Eum Time Exam Type img Exam Comment Exum Comment Operation 1 Select search criteria category from the reduced search drop down 2 Enter search criteria Searching with or is not possible in this mode 3 Pres
236. a report from the printout touch the Include in Report key on the touch panel i ii i 3 Print the patient report of the currently selected Measurement Application on the Report PGO printer which is selected in the System Setup To select the desired Report printer review Peripherals Connectivity on page 14 37 D 4 To verify your selection and to preview the report pages that will be printed touch this key Print on the touch panel Preview Following window appears Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 9 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports Worcs Select whether to print only the current report or all available reports x all applications Selection also affects Print Button in Worksheet Menu w Current Report All Reports Print all Print Print all available reports or just the currently displayed report Depends on setting above Display previous report page 12 3 7 Save data as PDF 1 Select Export Report 2 The Export Dialog is displayed 3 An automatic file name will be generated 4 Choose a location to save the file to 5 The Report will be saved as a PDF file 12 4 Abdomen Calculations Application Abdomen Factory Sub Category Default allows measurements calculations in 2D 3D mode M mode and Spectral Doppler mode using various measure items For more information see Measure amp Calc on page 16 3 The methods for obtaining
237. aat Poteeats 14 2 3 4 1 Costumize Exam Columns Use the trackball to choose the contents of the last two columns of the Exam table Depending on the view either Patients amp Exams or Exams Only one or two custom columns can be defined Select the information you wish to be displayed from the drop down lists 14 2 3 4 2 Drop Down Management The Drop Down Management window allows you to create and edit drop down lists Drop down lists that can be edited are Referring Physician Performing Physician Sonographer Exam Type s Exam Comment Select the drop down list you want to edit Then add delete or move entries up or down using the available buttons 14 2 3 4 3 2nd Patient ID If a second patient ID is required activate the Activate 2nd Patient ID check box and choose from the drop down menu Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 14 24 H48691CF Revision 2 Utilities and System Setup 14 2 3 4 4 Various Check boxes Calculate DOC by GA Calculate Day Of Cycle by LMP Capitalize Letter in Patient Names Worklist Auto Query Hide Patient Info Name only Auto Start Worklist If selected check mark visible DOC is automatically calculated when GA is entered in the Patient Information screen For more information see Patient Information screen on page 4 14 If selected check mark visible the day of cycle DOC is automatically calculated when the last menstrual per
238. ackball key Set 11 1 2 3 4 1 Distance 1 To measure volume of a globe like volume using one distance touch the 1 Dist key on the touch panel A cursor appears on the screen 2 Use the trackball to move the cursor to the start point of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key to fix the marker A second cursor appears 3 Move the second cursor to the second point of the measurement and press Set again Note To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key Change before completing the measurement This alternates the control from one cursor to the other 11 1 2 3 5 Multi plane This measuring program allows for volume determination of any organ which was stored by a volume scan Several parallel planes are laid through the organ and the areas of these planes are determined A measuring program calculates the volume from the measured areas and the distance between the areas The larger the number of areas the more exact the volume calculation result will be Condition a stored volume scan Sectional Planes view To measure volume using the Multiplane method in 3D Mode 1 Select the reference image in which the measurement is to be performed A B or C 2 Activate the Multiplane volume measurement by touching the Multiplane key Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 11 10 H48691CF Revision 2 Measurements The touch panel changes to the Multiplane menu Measured planes Next
239. ackball to move the cursor to the start point of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker A second cursor appears 5 Move the second cursor to the second point of the measurement and press Set again To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key Change before completing the measurement This alternates the control from one cursor to the other 12 6 4 1 1 To calculate GS Gestational Sac Note 12 22 For the GS Gestational Sac calculation 2 methods are possible 1 measurement of 3 Distances mean value GS diameter 2 measurement of 1 Distance value GS diameter To select the desired calculation method For more information see Measure amp Calc on page 16 3 Method 1 Triple Caliper requires 3 measurements D1 D2 D3 length width height before it shows age The age is derived from the mean value of all three measurements 1 Touch Early Gestation and then GS on the touch panel A cursor appears 2 Select Triple Calliper by turning the left rotary control below the touch panel Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 3 Use the trackball to move the cursor to the start point of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker A second cursor appears 4 Move the second cursor to the second point of the measurement and press Set
240. active Compression 3D 4D and MagiCut 4D see c a Advanced 4D includes 4D Real Time VCI TUI 4D Biopsy b Advanced STIC includes Basic STIC STIC M Mode STICflow SonoVCAD heart c Can be used for 3D and with the additional Option Advanced 4D also for 4D d Can t be used without the additional Option Advanced 4D e Only available for specific probes 18 8 2 VE8 Peripherals and hardware External patient monitor A4 letter size paper printer Connection Module report data Additional information If the option Digital Video is ordered the DVD CDRW Writer will be replaced Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 18 12 H48691CF Revision 2 Technical Data Information 18 9 System Parameters 18 9 1 System Setup Pre programmable Categories date format User Programmable Preset Capability User program etc Languages English French German Spanish Italian Danish Dutch Finnish Norwegian Swedish Chinese Japanese Russian EUM Languages English German Spanish Italian French Russian Up to 400 Programmable Annotations organized in 10 anatomical groups Free programmable Scan assistant lists including Add Delete Edit and Reorder of checklist items Four programmable Px buttons for documentation preferences like Save DICOM Send Print Check Cine length etc Several user configurable functions Clinic Name Display TGC curve Screen Lock Screensaver Auto Scan Stop Beeper 3D 4
241. adjust the defined contour Ref Image To choose the Reference image The rotary buttons and the trackball are assigned to the selected reference image for adjusting the position magnification and rotation of the shell image To rotate and shift the reference and VOCAL 3D image Use the X Y and Z mode controls to rotate around the X Y and Z axis Use the Parallel Shift mode control to shift along the Z axis Depending on the Render Mode setting the skin of the shell contour or the rendered volume image within the shell contour is displayed in the lower right quadrant Render Mode and Display of the Shell Geometry For more information see VOCAL Edit on page 10 123 Depending on the Render Mode setting the skin of the shell contour or the rendered volume image within the shell contour is displayed in full size format Render Mode and Display of the Shell Geometry For more information see VOCAL Edit on page 10 123 The surface of the shell contour is cut up and the slices of the 3D image and the surface of the shell contour is displayed in one image Touch exit the VOCAL Niche menu touch the Niche key again review Render Mode and Display of the Shell Geometry For more information see VOCAL Edit on page 10 123 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 127 Volume Mode ETTE Threshold Volume Threshold Volume For more information se
242. after the files have been added to the DICOM queue If DICOM send jobs are marked as failed in the DICOM queue following temporary message is displayed in the message area Note If DICOM spooler is opened and closed the message will be shown again when a new job fails to send 2 Print Images can be printed on various printers USB or Video Printers line printers DICOM printers Depending on format configuration DICOM and line printer images are intermediately stored until a whole page is filled and then printed automatically Note There will be no DICOM print dialog If the P Button is pressed in write mode the system will continue in write mode after the files have been added to the DICOM queue have been printed or stored 4 Record on a VCR DVD Recorder Note No other action can be programmed for a P key if Record on a VCR DVD Recorder was selected Note When a DVD has reached its maximum capacity a message will appear on the screen DVD full please change In this case change the DVD to a new blank one Explanation of Icons Copies a 2D image onto the clipboard Copies a 2D cine onto the clipboard Copies a single volume onto the clipboard Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 15 4 H48691CF Revision 2 Programmable Keys Copies a volume cine onto the clipboard Sends a 2D image to external destination Sends a 2D cine to external destination Sends a single volume to external desti
243. again Note To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key Change before completing the measurement This alternates the control from one cursor to the other 5 Measure the second distance as described above 6 Perform the measurement of the third distance in the same manner Method 2 The result is displayed immediately after the measurement of the 1 Distance 1 Touch Early Gestation and then GS on the touch panel A cursor appears 2 Select Distance by turning the left rotary control below the touch panel 3 Use the trackball to move the cursor to the start point of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker A second cursor appears 4 Move the second cursor to the second point of the measurement and press Set again The distance between the two points is displayed Note To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key Change before completing the measurement This alternates the control from one cursor to the other 12 6 4 2 Circumference Measurements SS A Early Long Fetal AFI Gest Bones Cranium oo Meas Applicat Right Right Ovary Uterine Nork Sheet BPD AG ITE FL n Hadlock Hadlock Hadlock Jeanty Clear Study QOFD Jeanty Cancel 2DAreaPoints 1 Press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the study for the corresponding item For example select Fetal Biometry 3 Select the desired measure
244. al i Abnormal s Seen Not seen The Summary Report Calc is always included in the report printout For further details review Basic Patient Worksheet Functions on page 12 3 12 6 4 12 2 Summary Report Fetal Anatomy 12 34 The first page of an Anatomy checklist of the Fetus e g Fetus A is displayed Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports Dote o Eam off 13 2000 Pog 2 4 Exar Typi Mame Pat iD Fetal Brain Hamal oe Fatol Description Lateral Ventriches Fetal Position Cerebellum Fetal Spine Cist Magma Placenta Grade Cord Insertion Fetol Heart Face 4 Chamber Fetal Head Left Outflow Tract Flocenta Location Right Outflow Tract 3V Cord 3 Vessel Amniotic Fluid Aortic Arch Cardiac Rhythm Ductal Arch All values set to Normal If the a item is filled out manually the Default button changes to Normal if not active Cardiovascular Profile Score CVS Hydrops Heart Size Cardiac Function Venous Doppler Arterial Doppler Total Cardiovascular Profile Score Requirements 1 CVP Items Hydrops Heart Size Cardiac function Venous Doppler Aterial Doppler 2 The score values must be 0 worst case 1 or 2 best case 3 The total number addition of scores will be displayed when all values are entered 12 6 4 12 3 Summary Report Graph By touching this key on the tou
245. al H48691CF Revision 2 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 12 7 4 Cardiology Calculations in CFM Mode 12 7 4 1 PISA To measure the PISA Radius of the Mitral Valve MV Tricuspid Valve TV Aortic Valve AV and Pulmonary Valve PV in Color Flow Mode LVMass LVOT Meas Applicat lt Work Sheet p Dist A Dist B Area 1 After obtaining a feasible Color Doppler image press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the appropriate item For example select MV 3 Select the measurement parameter PISA The cursor appears on the screen 4 Perform the distance measurement using the trackball and press the right or left trackball key Set 5 Move the second cursor to the second point of the measurement and press Set again 12 7 5 Cardiology Calculations in M Mode s LV Left Ventricle AV LA Aortic Valve Left Atrium i MV Mitral Valve HR Heart Rate 12 7 5 1 LV Left Ventricle There are two methods to calculate the Left Ventricle in the M mode To measure all Items at a Time To measure the Item One by One Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 45 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 12 46 12 7 5 1 1 To measure all Items at a Time Note To calculate all the items of the Left Ventricle in M mode at a time IVSd LVDd LVPWd RVDd esr _ LVDs LVPWs 1 Press the Calc key on the c
246. al position t 4 CFM box vertical position The box is adjustable within the entire 2D image area The upper trackball key changes between CFM box position and CFM box size and vice versa t decrease the vertical CFM box size increase the vertical CFM box size gt increase the horizontal CFM box size decrease the horizontal CFM box size 8 3 2 2 CFM Gain Control CFM Gain must be adjusted properly to ensure that continuous flow is displayed CFM Gain should be set as high as possible without displaying random Color speckle If you set the CFM Gain control too low the lack of sensitivity will make it difficult to detect small abnormalities in flow and will possibly result in an underestimation of the large flow disturbances C Mode key When the GAIN control is turned clockwise the Color gets more intense When the GAIN control is turned counterclockwise the Color gets less intense 8 3 2 3 2D 2D C 8 12 The 2D 2D C function changes the single image display to two simultaneous half frames The left frame shows only the 2D mode image The right frame shows the 2D mode image also with color information Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 2D 2D C 8 3 3 CFM Sub Menu Main CFM menu has to be active Doppler Modes m Switch on off this mode by touching the 2D 2D C key Touch the Sub CFM key The CFM Submenu appears mpm mamn E E E Fall 3 cmisec Note
247. alc Generic or Bodymark Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 16 17 Measure Setup On freeze D start Select the status on freeze in Doppler mode None Calc Generic or Bodymark one PI calc Method Vol flow Method Keep Result Window Select if all previously set measuring marks are erased when starting a new scan unfreeze gt Run mode or if the results will be kept on screen HR Cycles Select the number of heart rate cycles for measurements Manual Trace Method Select if the Spectral Doppler envelope curve should be performed with a continuous trace line or by setting points Show Author s Name at Select if the measurement items in the OB Calculation Menu will be shown Measure Menu with or without the Author s name Auto Manual Trace Select the Doppler measuring results which should be displayed after each Auto Trace Manual Trace and Real Time Trace measurement Calculation Ratio Select either Off or On If Ratio is On check mark visible select the desired ratio calculations that should be displayed in the Patient worklist Either select the ratios individual or set only one check mark directly into the black box to mark them all OB Table Select either Off or On If OB Table is On check mark visible select the desired tables that should be displayed in the Patient worklist Either select the tables individual or set only one check mark directly into t
248. am x Gray Color Angia Color CFM MG 0 100 26 448 Gray Color Angia Color CFM Ad gt Whean Gray Value Vapor stor redex Flow ries WF Vasculaneation Flow Index If a she is defined the histogram is calculated from the content of the shell If a contour without a shell is defined the histogram is calculated from the content of the contour Select the Return key on the screen or touch the Exit key on the touch panel to exit the J Volume Histogram function Note The Volume Histogram is not possible after 3D CFM acquisition 10 13 SonoAVC follicle Note SonoAVC follicle is an option Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 130 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode 10 13 1 General Information This feature helps to detect low echogenic objects eg follicles in an organ eg ovary and analyzes their shape and volume From the calculated volume of the object an average diameter will be calculated All objects detected that way will be listed according to size 10 13 2 Operation 1 Create a 3D Static Volume of the desired Organ see Volume Acquisition Static 3D Render on page 10 49 2 Select a Region of Interest or create a VOCAL see After the Static 3D Render Acquisition on page 10 57 3 Press the SonoAVC Follicles Button Note Ifa 4D Volume cine is present the system will automatically switch to 3D Static when SonoAVC is pressed Lj Render Sectional TUI Planes ana a
249. ames The 2D image appears in the top frame The M mode trace appears in the lower frame The touchpanel shows the MTD Main menu Three display formats are possible For more information see Display Format on page 7 7 The Freeze key stops the 2D image and MTD mode trace Note By pressing the Freeze key again the MTD cursor appears on the active 2D image Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 7 11 M Mode 7 5 2 3 MTD Gain Control The adjustment of the Gain control determines the amount of amplification applied to the received echoes All received echoes are amplified with the same gain value regardless of the scan depth Rotate the M Mode key and or the PD Mode key to adjust the gain brightness of the entire image Note The M Gain function influences the M trace brightness only Note The PD Gain function influences the color saturation only Remarks The current gain value is displayed on the screen GN 7 5 2 4 Invert MTD This function inverts the color display in the MTD mode image The color of the color wedge inverts around the baseline key unlit MTD color display normal t yellow red 4 blue green key lit MTD color display inverted t green blue 4 red yellow 7 5 3 MTD Sub Menu The MTD Main menu has to be active Touch the key Sub MTD key The MTD Submenu appears MTD Map Scale 1 Q cmisec Flow Res high Ee Baseline m l
250. an image use the trackball Position the cursor over the desired image and click the left right trackball key A green frame appears around the image To unmark the image click again You can mark more than one image at a time Note It is not possible to double click an image in the image history Therefore it is also not possible to load an image into Exam Review To mark an exam click one of the buttons in the area marked You can mark one exam only 13 5 Exam Review 13 5 1 Opening Exam Review Press the Review hard key to open the exam review screen of the current exam Review or Press the Patient hard key to open the current patient screen In the Current Patient Archive or Image History Mode select an exam and press Exam Review to switch to the Exam Review Mode or Configure the End Exam buttons hard and soft key to display the current exam in Exam Review Mode before ending the exam see End Exam Button on page 15 9 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 13 35 Archive 13 5 1 1 Exam Review Touch panel 13 5 1 2 Exam Review Screen OWT wre Rasa O08 wiz Tiem io uu Tho 00 2007 GClsos2 PH bertoce il J AT Doon g i Current Patient Opens Current Patient Screen see Current Patient Dialog on page 13 3 Archive Opens the Archive Screen see Patient Archive on page 13 11 Image History Opens t
251. ance is observed additional measures may be necessary such as reorienting or relocating the Voluson E8 E8 Expert b Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz field strengths should be less than 3 V m In the working frequency range of the ultrasound system from 1 to 30 MHz an influence on the ultrasound image can be visible in the presence of electromagnetic radiation at 200 to 5 010mV m depending on the probe connected Recommended separation distances between portable and mobile RF communications equipment and the Voluson E8 E8 Expert The Voluson E8 E8 Expert is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbance are controlled The costumer or the user of the Voluson E8 E8 Expert can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications as recommended below according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment Rated maximum output Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter m ft itter W E 150 kHz to 80 Mhz 80 MHz to 800 Mhz 800 MHz to 2 5 GHz ee d 1 17xNP d 1 17xJP_ d 2 33 xP 0 233 For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above the recommended separation distance d in meters m can be estimated using equation applicable to the frequency of transmitter where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts W according to the transmitter manufacturer
252. anced contrast resolution with better tissue differentiation and clear organ borders Also vessel walls and tissue layers are emphasized for easier recognition Switch on the XBeam CRI function in 2D mode and change the level of the contrast resolution using the and keys Remark i If the XBeam CRI function is enabled in 2D Mode it is also used in 3D preparation mode and during a Static 3D acquisition The CRI can also be used in Virtual Convex Mode 6 2 16 Speckle Reduction Imaging SRI II For more information see Speckle Reduction Imaging SRI II on page 10 44 6 2 17 Image Orientation Left Right Up Down With this function the image orientation on the screen in relation to the patient is alternated between left and right without rotating the scan head itself The orientation marker shows the current orientation For the relationship between marker and design of the probe Chapter 5 Touch the left right key on the touch panel 2D main menu to alternate between left and right image orientation Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 6 9 2D Mode Touch the up down key on the touch panel 2D main menu to alternate between up and down image orientation Remark s The Orientation marker is green in an active 2D image and white in a frozen Dual or Quad image The Orientation of RRE6 10 probe is different to all other probes Preparing the Transducer on page
253. and HD Flow Box size Press the upper trackball key to change from HD Flow Box position to HD Flow Box size Press it once more and it returns to the position change t decrease the vertical HD Flow box size 4 increase the vertical HD Flow box size increase the horizontal HD Flow box size lt decrease the horizontal HD Flow box size 8 5 2 2 HD Flow Gain Control HD Flow Gain must be adjusted properly to ensure that continuous flow is displayed HD Flow Gain should be set as high as possible without displaying random Color speckle If you set the HD Flow Gain control too low then the lack of sensitivity will make it difficult to detect small abnormalities in flow and will possibly result in an underestimation of the large flow disturbances C Mode key Rotating adjusts the intensity of the HD Flow signal When the GAIN control is turned clockwise Color becomes more intense When the GAIN control is turned counterclockwise Color becomes less intense Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 8 21 Doppler Modes 8 5 2 3 2D 2D HD The 2D 2D HD function changes the single image display to two simultaneous half frames The left frame shows only the 2D mode image The right frame shows the 2D mode image with color information Switch on off this mode by touching the 2D 2D HD key 2D HD 8 5 3 HD Flow Sub Menu The HD Flow Main menu has to be active Touch the Sub HD Flow
254. angle to contain all structures of the heart including the big vessels However the box should be small enough to contain only the heart not the whole thorax 7 1 Place the Volume box over the region of interest Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode The trackball has two functions position and size of the Volume box The activated function is displayed in status bar area on the monitor Q 6a Press the upper trackball key to change the function of the trackball from position to size or f vice versa 7 2 Change the size of the Volume box by moving the trackball Moving decrease the box size in vertical direction increase the box size in vertical direction increase the box size in horizontal direction decrease the box size in horizontal direction Note Change the settings in order to get a 2D frame rate of at least 25 frames per second Normally a frame rate between 25 and 30 frames per second is recommended f Vol Angle J 8 Set the volume sweep angle by using the control below the touch panel 25 Please note that depending on the selected acquisition time and the detected heart rate the volume angle of the resulting STIC sequence will be smaller than the set angle 9 Select the Acquisition time Acqu time 7 5 sec Note In order to archive a good result try to adjust the volume box and the sweep angle to be as small as possible The longer the acquisition time
255. anual H48691CF Revision 2 Operating the System A disconnection of an active probe is permitted in freeze mode frozen image If a probe is J disconnected while running scan mode a software error can occur 4 3 2 Probe selection The probe selection menu shows the connected probes The denomination of each transducer connected to the system appears in the corresponding touch key soft key Probe selection is done by touching the corresponding key The key with the selected probe is illuminated At the same time the available applications of the selected probe are displayed in the application field Upon selection of an Application a maximum of 7 User program buttons appear in the Settings field and a Default Setting The Default Setting is not user definable Program selection is done by pressing the corresponding keys For each probe up to 7 programs can be stored The Probe Program Selection Menu enables speedy adjustment of the system for different fields of application To store a user setting under an application review General on page 14 14 Probe selection menu on the touch panel D Probe Probe key hard key This key activates and deactivates the probe select menu Behavior of probe select function when connecting disconnecting a probe review Probe connection and selection on page 4 4 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 4 5 Operating the System Probe Sele
256. application Gyn 16 3 1 10 EFW Estimated Fetal Weight Select the section Fetal Weight Settings on the Measure amp Calc page Fetal Weight Settings Agebyerpw efwersp Rd Brenner X EFW GP SD eae Fetal Estimation Select the EFW Formula Click on this field to create a New Weight or Edit the setting Settings Ing es ie Select the output unit for EFW Age by EFW Select Table Formula for calculating the ce from the EFW EFW GP SD Select Table Formula for calculating the Growth from the EFW a Click on this field to create a New or Edit the setting 16 3 1 10 1 Estimation 1 Click on Estimation the display is illuminated and the display about New key shows Estimation Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 16 15 Measure Setup 2 Click on New key Following window appears Reference a Available Symbols E PLABS SORT LN LOG EXP SIN COS TAN AD AC APAD APTD BOD BPD Cereb CLAY CM CRL EAR FIB FL Foot FTA GS HC HEM Ya Vp HL IOD LY OFD OOD RAD TAD TIB TTD Ulna YS NF NT MAD AXT NBL TC CC Note The procedure Is the same as in New Equation Measure amp Calc on page 16 3 except that Author s name cannot be edited 16 3 1 10 2 Age by EFW 1 Click on Age by EFW the display is illuminated and the display about New key shows Age by EFW 2 Click on New key Following window appears Hew EFW Table Equation
257. apter is connected or the hardware is defect the following dialog appears Carer EB 4 Cannot open WLAN configuration Please check WLAN adapter connection If the Software is not loaded the following dialog appears Voluson Eg x Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 45 Utilities and System Setup 14 46 14 2 5 9 Network profiles 14 2 5 9 1 Introduction Define and switch between different network settings for all your work environments to further improve Voluson E8 E8 Expert s portability The following settings are stored in a network profile All DICOM settings and configurations Static IP address gateway network mask DNS y Button configuration ad Hospital name Network drive mappings active after system restart 14 2 5 9 2 Network profiles dialog Hetwork Profiles Click the Network Profiles button in the network tab of the system setup The following dialog Hetwork Profiles Use Network Profiles Current Profile Standard Defaut Profile Profile Standard box appears To start using network profiles set the Use Network Profiles option in the upper section of the dialog The current used profile is displayed in the Current Profile text box In the Default Profile section click the check box next to the profile name which should be active from boot up If no default is set the system requests the desired network profile every time a
258. aptured cine Display of frozen cine length in length in seconds Number seconds depending on current captured length Maximum possible cine capture length in seconds Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 6 15 2D Mode Cine bar display increasing from Display of the acquired clip left to right showing the current extended to whole clip area when captured cine length entering Freeze mode Currently captured cine length in Displayed frame corresponding frames to the image marker Image Marker on page 6 76 Cine Split Function for Dual and Quad format Cine Split Function on page 6 77 2D Auto Cine for Single Dual and Quad format 2D Auto Cine on page 6 17 Remarks The number of stored images depends on the number of scan lines scan depth and magnification In freeze mode the length of the sequence is indicated on the status bar Display Cine xxx Starting the Cine mode erases measuring marks and measuring displays ad The Cine Function operation and storage is identical in 2D mode and CFM mode 6 3 1 Image Marker When in freeze mode a marker indicates the current image on the cine bar This marker can be moved using the trackball The marker is green as long it is inside the save clip section Outside of the save clip section it turns red 6 3 2 Retrospective and Prospective Cine Mode is Retrospective Cine When the cine clip is saved in r
259. ardiology Calculations Urology Calculations Vascular Calculations Gynecology Calculations Pediatric Calculations Neurology Calculation MSK Calculations To change the current measurement application and or the Sub Category press the Calc eas hardkey and touch this key on the touch panel Applicat For more information see Basic Calculation Functionality on page 12 2 The system supports following application oriented Patient Worksheets Reports Abdomen Worksheet Small Parts Worksheet Obstetric Worksheet Cardiology Worksheet Urology Worksheet Vascular Worksheet Gynecology Worksheet Pediatric Worksheet Neurology Worksheet MSK Calculations For more information see Basic Patient Worksheet Functions on page 712 5 12 2 Basic Calculation Functionality Calculation key hard key By pressing on the Calc key the Calculation function is switched on and a caliper appears within the frozen image area Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports Note Measurements are possible in freeze mode only 1 Positioning of measuring marks is done with the trackball Entering and storage of measuring marks is done with the right left trackball key Set To change measuring marks before completion press the upper trackball key Change If you want to readjust a traced line press the upper trackball key rep
260. arge angles A the surface temperature on some handle regions in contact with the user might get warmer l than limits requested by regulations for continuos operation Note Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Temperatures at the patient contact area remain within required limits 5 21 Probes and Biopsies RM14L Biopsy PEC80 H48651PP 1 Patient applied part 2 Probe handle Small Parts 3D 4D Real Time e Needle diameters Peripheral vascular imaging lt 1mm Paediatrics Wide field of view lt 1 4 mm Musculoskeletal Small probe tip and lt 2 2 mm superficial maal Material Breast CFM MCFM HD Flow Power and PW Doppler Sterilization with autoclave possible Broad bandwidth Multi frequency Stainless Steel 5 3 2 3 RSM5 14 A If the probe is continuously operated for longer than 10min in fast 4D mode at large angles the surface temperature on some handle regions in contact with the user might get warmer than limits requested by regulations for continuos operation Note Temperatures at the patient contact area remain within required limits Note This probe ts only available on Voluson E8 Expert Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 5 22 H48691CF Revision 2 Probes and Biopsies RSM5 14 Biopsy PEC80 H48651PP 1 Patient applied part 2 Probe handle Small Parts Peripheral vascular Pediatrics MSK 3D 4D Real Time imaging Wide field of vi
261. arks The current sampling frequency is displayed on the screen PRF The maximum clearly measurable flow velocity Nyquist Limit is determined by the measuring depth of the sample volume and the related run time of the ultrasound By a further increase of the Doppler PRF High PRF mode HPRF the Nyquist Limit can be increased Thus in addition to the main sample volume one or more sample volume gates appear along the D cursor During examinations make sure that these additional sample volumes virtual gates do not interfere with echo rich areas as these lead to interferences in the Doppler signal Further it has to be noted that blood flows recorded by these virtual gates are overlaying the actual Doppler signal of the main sample volume When the maximum PRF is exceeded the HPRF mode is automatically switched on Virtual gates are being displayed and the HPRF appears on the monitor Changing of the velocity range display from kHz to m s or cm s is to be performed in the PW Sub Menu For more information see PW Sub Menu on page 8 6 Remarks The current sampling frequency is displayed on the screen PRF respectively HPRF The HPRF mode does not work in simultaneous Duplex and Triplex mode i The HPRF mode is not possible with linear array probes 8 7 22 Wall Motion Filter WMF C e a Wall motion filters are used to eliminate vessel wall motion noise that is low in velocity but high in intensity U
262. ary Left Right Follicle Fibroid Pelvic Floor Early Gestation MMode Left Right Ovarian Artery Left Right Uterine Artery FHR Fetal Heart Rate Doppler Mode Left Right Ovarian Artery Left Right Uterine Artery FHR Vessel Note For some gynecological measurements there are different methods how perform these These different methods can be selected by the rotary control which is on the left side below the touch panel Which method is currently active is shown in the lower left corner of the touch panel Press or turn the digipot to change trom one method to the other Paean rotation r thick desc max BSc rest stress max AreaEllipse Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 59 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 12 10 2 Before starting Gynecology Calculations 1 Press the Patient key on the control panel select the GYN page and enter all patient information for Gynecology calculations e g expected Ovulation For more information see Entering Patient Data on page 4 7 Note To cancel all calculations performed before and to start new measurement press this key and select End Exam or Clear Exam gt 2 Press Start Exam sires selected press the Probe key on the control panel and change it to Gynecology For more 3 Make sure that the probe and application are selected properly If another application is information see Probe se
263. ary to prevent the risk of injury through explosion hazards Moving Hazard Describes precautions necessary to prevent the risk of injury through moving or tipping hazards Mechanical Hazard Describes precautions necessary to prevent the risk of injury through mechanical hazards Radiation Hazard Laser radiation Orientation Lists all major sections in the chapters for orientation purposes Some symbols used with electrical medical equipment have been accepted as standard by IEC They serve for marking connections accessories and as warnings Main power switch ON Main power switch OFF System stand by switch Potential equilibrium connection Protection against the effects of immersion in water probes Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Insulated patient application part Type BF Protective earth ground connection ECG symbol Defibrillation proof CF applied part No protection against ingress of water IPXO0 system Laa Safety and Maintenance 2 4 VE8 HLA BTO9 7 Be KTI300730_28 3143 1013 0954 Dangerous electric voltage This symbol is followed by the manufacturing date of the device in the form YYYY MM This symbol is followed by the serial number of the device Pictogram on Probe Care Card Use care when handling ultrasound probes and protect the probe head from damage Pictogram on Probe Care Card Describes precautions necessar
264. ates the B Flow function Functions depend on current probe Operation For more information see B Flow on page 6 25 Report Worksheet Activates the Patient worksheet of the currently selected application For more information see Chapter 77 Bodymark Activate to use Bodymark symbols on the screen For more information see Pictogram on page 4 37 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Automatic Optimization in 2D Mode Press this key to use automatic optimization on the gray scale to enhance the contrast resolution For more information see 2D Automatic Optimization on page 6 5 in PW Mode Press this key to use automatic optimization on the PRF and the Baseline Operation For more information see PW Operation on page 8 3 in 3D 4D Mode Press this key to activate Sono Render Start For more information see Sono Render Start on page 10 92 Pointer Single click Brings up an arrow shaped cursor for menu and image operations Double click Activates the Indicator menu For more information see ndicator on page 4 30 Exit Press the Exit key on the control panel to exit the current menu Calculations Allows measurements calculations in 2D 3D mode M mode and Spectral Doppler mode using various measure items for different applications For more information see Chapter 77 3D Activates 3D mode Volume Mode Chapter 10 P2 Programmable key For more inform
265. ation Te EEE EEE EEE aes a eee r Jen le Use the keyboard to type the patient information Enter Upon pressing the Enter key on the keyboard the data is entered and the next input field is selected Note If the Capitalize Letter in Patient Names field in the System Setup is marked by a check mark the first letter in the Name fields will be automatically capitalized For more information see General on page 14 14 Remarks The system automatically creates a Patient Identification ID number To create your own ID number overwrite the automatic ID number using the keyboard s Patient data on different systems are only distinguished by the patient Identification ID field If you do not use the default auto generated ID please make sure that this Identification ID is unique on all systems for the same patient 4 4 2 Starting an exam To start an exam press Start Exam on the touch panel see Current Patient Menu on page 4 12 Start Exam is also possible by pressing the 2D key the Freeze key on the control panel or the upper trackball key Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 4 9 Operating the System Freeze Sd y If temporary measurements exist no old patient exists and no save send in progress and no a auto start acquisition the system will display an info dialog Start Exam with previous G a measurements on the touch panel and on
266. ation see P keys on page 15 3 P4 Programmable key For more information see P keys on page 715 3 Acoustic Output digipot Adjusts the Ultrasound emission power of a probe Transmit Power on page 6 6 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Description of the System Clear To erase graphics measurements and annotations on the screen depending on the currently used function If image annotation is active then only text will be erased If the measurement function is active then only measurements will be erased If bodymark is active then only bodymarks will be erased If none of the three above functions is active all graphics measurements and annotations will be erased Coded Harmonic Imaging Pressing activates deactivates the Coded Harmonic Imaging For more information see Harmonic Imaging HI on page 6 7 Caliper For more information see Generic Measurements on page 11 2 Real Time 4D Mode Activates the Real Time 4D mode continuous volume sweep For more information see Real Time 4D Acquisition on page 10 79 P1 For more information see P keys on page 15 3 P3 Programmable key For more information see P keys on page 15 3 Freeze Scan Read Write When bright image is frozen freeze mode When dark real time scan scan mode For more information see Probe selection on page 4 5 Dual Screen Format vertical dist
267. audal Resulting orientation of sectional planes freeze mode Longitudinal Plane cranial l caudal Sra dorsal T Horizontal Plane K yp h cranial caudal B image orientation down gt up Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Transverse Plane dorsal tT 10 7 Volume Mode Dorsal Cranial Ventral Resulting orientation of sectional planes freeze mode Longitudinal Plane Transverse Plane E ial right caudal pe 74 crania g a wentral wentral t Horizontal Plane G Yan cranial 10 1 6 Orientation help for 3D 4D data sets Probe Orientation In order to simplify orientation in a 3D or 4D data set the user can activate the display of directions like cranial caudal left right anterior posterior at the border of the 3D or 4D data set The user has to select the position and the rotation of the probe in respect to the patient or in obstetrics in respect to the fetus at the time of acquisition Then the actual display of the directions has to be activated manually When the volume is rotated the orientations at the border of the image are automatically adjusted accordingly The display remains active until a new acquisition is performed or until it is turned off by the user If the display is activated and the data set is saved the probe orientation settings are stored in the data set If the display is turned off however probe orie
268. ave amp Exit to save the new password disable Lock Screen and return to the previous operating state If you want to discard your new password press Exit and return to the Lock Screen dialog 14 2 System Setup Introduction Diverse dialog pages and windows on the system setup desktop support modifications of system parameters When System Setup is activated the Biopsy Setup button is displayed on the touch panel Biopsy setup on page 5 9 The System Setup desktop offers different Pages i General on page 14 14 Administration on page 14 27 Connectivity on page 14 31 Backup on page 14 49 System setup desktop for example the opened page General Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 11 Utilities and System Setup tient inko Dispio Dobe Format FAR ala jE r HMP YY OOHH YY In general operations are done with the trackball and the trackball keys mouse emulation Trackball mouse position positions the pointing device arrow on the desktop JOL left trackball key left mouse button sets fixates markers and activates pages buttons etc 4 CY marked by the pointing device 6a upper trackball key right mouse button no function in system desktop right trackball key left mouse button sets fixates markers and activates pages buttons etc A OR marked by the pointing device pte The status bar shows the current trackball functionality
269. ay of the current software version of the system System Info Hardware Display of the current hardware version of the system Patent Applications Opens an additional window showing all applications patents the Voluson E8 E8 Expert system is protected with Move the scroll bar downwards to review additional information about installed software In case software version and user program version are not identical the following message will be displayed Incompatibility of user programs and software version may lead to reduced image quality This can be solved by loading the latest available backup Small Backup which is compatible with the software version Utilities System Setup Backup This page shows all available system options and their states Demo Option is activated for demo and expires on the date shown in the Valid column I inactive Option is not activated P Permanent Option is permanently activated purchased Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Utilities and System Setup Serial Number Shows the serial number of the System Demo Key This field is used to enter and show the demo key all options are available for a certain period of time from OKOS Permanent Key This field is used to enter and show encoding key for permanent available options Operation for installing a Demo Key or a Permanent Key 1 Position the cursor inside the input field de
270. ball to move the cursor to the start point of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker A second cursor appears 5 Move the second cursor to the second point of the measurement and press Set again Note To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key Change before completing the measurement This alternates the control from one cursor to the other 6 Only if Vessel Area is selected adjust the width of the ellipse by means of the trackball and then press the right trackball key Set again 12 4 3 3 Stenosis Area Stenosis Diameter To calculate the Stenosis Area or the Stenosis Diameter in 2D mode een Li Gall Right ver bladder Pancreas Spleen Aorta Vessel orta esse ram Sheet Kidney eas Applicat mr amp a Area Diam Diam 1 Press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the desired item For example select Left Renal Artery 3 Select the appropriate measurement parameter Stenosis Area or Stenosis Diameter Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 12 12 H48691CF Revision 2 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 4 To measure the outer area resp outer diameter use the trackball to move the cursor to the start point of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker 5 Move the second cursor to the second point of the measurement and press Set again Note To re adjust
271. ble pages The current cursor position is stored as home position Touch an application key to select different application related terms Note The main application chosen in the Probe Selection menu does not change After touching the Appl key the touch panel changes to the Application Select menu When a main application in the Probe Selection menu is selected the text application is set changed to this application Remarks Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 4 29 Operating the System The position of the cursor Home position can be changed by either Trackball a Arrow keys left right up down s Enter key next line or s Backspace key deletes the last character The Trackball the Home key or the arrow keys on the keyboard can set the left margin of the image annotation 4 5 3 Indicator Indicator menu Last All Rotate Operation 1 Press the F7 key or double click the Pointer key to activate the Indicator menu on the touch panel The last selected indicator appears in the middle of the annotation area Select the type of indicator you want or use the current indicator Position the indicator using the track ball Adjust the direction of the indicator digipot 360 rotation possible Enter the indicator by pressing the right or left track ball key Set Oo Dk ge oS K A new indicator is set by repeating pr
272. cat Work Sheet 11 1 4 2 Auto Trace 1 To trace the Doppler spectrum automatically and to display the results according to the setting in the Measure Setup touch the Auto Trace key on the touch panel 2 Select the sensitivity of the envelope curve to eliminate artefacts Sensitivity 60 3 Select the Trace Mode channel of the envelope curve upper both lower both 4 If necessary select the Angle and the Baseline A green line appears at the left of the spectrum Press the upper trackball key Change to move the line and readjust the start cycle the line changes to yellow Press the right or left A trackball key Set to fix the line A green line appears at the right of the spectrum Press the Change key again line changes to yellow move the line to readjust the end cycle and fixate it with Set Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 11 16 H48691CF Revision 2 Measurements The status bar shows the current function of the trackball 5 Press the right or left trackball key Set to finish the measurement Remark To select the Doppler measuring results which should be displayed after an Auto Trace measurement The determination of the envelope curve requires a clear and low noise recording of the Doppler spectrum Otherwise the reliability of the displayed measurement results may not be ensured 11 1 4 3 Manual Trace Note 11 1 4 4 Velocity 1 To trace the Doppl
273. category Default The items of small parts calculations in each mode are as follows 2D 3D Mode Left Right Thyroid Left Right Testicle me es 12 5 2 Items of Small Parts Calculations Subcategory Breast The items of small parts calculations in each mode are as follows 2D 3D Mode Left Right Lesion 1 Left Right Lesion 2 Left Right Lesion 3 Left Right Lesion 4 Left Right Lesion 5 ods es 12 5 3 Before starting Small Parts Calculations 1 Press the Patient key on the control panel select the SM P page and enter all patient information for Small Parts calculations For more information see Entering Patient Data on page 4 7 Note To cancel all calculations performed before and to start new measurement press this key and select End Exam or Clear Exam 2 Press Start Exam Start Ea selected press the Probe key on the control panel and change it to Small Parts For more i 3 Make sure that the probe and application are selected properly If another application is information see Probe selection on page 4 5 Probe Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 12 18 H48691CF Revision 2 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 12 5 4 Small Parts Calculations in 2D Mode Distance Measurements like Length Height etc Vessel Area Vessel Diameter i Stenosis Area Stenosis Diameter Sd 7y The measurement procedures in 2D Mode are the same than in application Abdo
274. ce Software Remote Access Note By using the remote access feature a GE field engineer can access the ultrasound system via a modem connection The field engineers are required to contact call the affected site in advance prior to establish a connection to the system Disruptive Mode If the field engineer requires unrestricted access to the ultrasound system the field engineer requests to create a disruptive mode on the system A message appears on the screen asking for permission to switch to disruptive mode GE Service is requesting permission to diagnose the system remotely Normal system operations might be disturbed during this period Click on YES to allow GE Service to continue system diagnostics If disruptive mode is accepted work on the system can be severely affected Therefore it is not allowed to perform an exam or make a diagnosis using the ultrasound system while being in disruptive mode A remote connection can affect the system s performance e g in 3D 4D or Doppler mode Therefore it is recommended to cease work on the system as soon as the field engineer contacts the site and announces the remote connection Network Security The remote access features enables after checkout has been performed network services like ftp or telnet on the ultrasound system Therefore it is advisable to restrict network access to system for unauthorized personnel It is strongly recommended to use a firewall to restrict netw
275. ced acquisition speed If you are unsure whether you made a mistake during the XTD scan relax and repeat the scan 6 7 3 Using XTD View 1 Perform a detailed examination of the anatomy pathology and optimize parameters for tissue texture and visible window PRIOR TO activating XTD View 2 Press the XTD key on the control panel A blue box is displayed at the border of the 2D image 3 Select the desired Acquisition Display among centered or moving The current 2D scan is placed in the middle of the screen The resultant XTD image scrolls centered to the left or right of the screen depending on the transducer orientation ne The acquired 2D image moves until it reaches the edge of the s creen Further scanning moving causes the acquired image to scroll in the opposite direction Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 2D Mode 4 To start acquiring the image press the right trackball key Start During the acquisition the following message will be displayed on the touch panel XTD View acquisition exit stop acquisition If you touch the Exit Stop acquisition key the recorded information will be cleared 5 To complete the scan press the right trackball key again Stop or press the Freeze key or allow the scan to auto complete The XTD View is then displayed scaled to fit entirely on the screen For more information see After the XTD View Image Acquisition
276. ch image takes only one quarter of the memory i The Cine Split function multiple format is also possible with 2D Auto Cine 2D Auto Cine on page 6 17 6 3 5 2D Auto Cine With the 2D Auto Cine function the user can review a defined sequence start end of Single Dual and Quad format 2D and 2D Color images Review speed and read zoom are available Operation 1 Store a 2D image or a CFM image Note In dual and quad formats select the desired image using the Format keys 2 Touch the 2D Cine key The 2D Cine menu appears on the screen Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 6 17 2D Mode Cine Menu Cine Edit Cine Replay Save Send Cine FP Decimation Loop Mode a g P1 Clip 2D Cine Run Stop atarustop Start Image End Image 0 T12 3 Select the starting image of the sequence The selected ultrasound image is Start Image i 0 simultaneously displayed on the screen ema 4 Select the final image of the sequence The image is displayed on the screen End Image 712 5 Select the review speed 100 corresponds to the recorded speed real time Speed 100 6 Select the read zoom factor 0 8 to 3 4 by turning the Zoom rotary control 7 Select the Cine Mode review direction Images are only displayed from Start to End BSA Images are displayed from Start to End and back SET Start Stop the 2D Auto Cine function With dual and m
277. ch mode are as follows 2D 3D Mode Long Axis Aortic Arch Short Axis Obl Short Axis 4 Chamber View me owe Description of Abbreviations For more information see Chapter 19 12 6 4 10 2 To obtain Z Scores The Z scores compare either GA BPD or FL with any fetal echo parameter i e Aortic valve RV area LV area So in order to obtain Z scores on your report you either need to measure BPD or FL or have the GA calculated from your LMP and measure any parameter from fetal echo To obtain Z scores use measurements from the subcategory Z scores Note As LV area and RV area are the biggest parameters they are the parameters of your choice to keep measurement inaccuracies at minimum level The Z scores will be displayed on the worksheet Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 12 6 4 10 3 Echocardiac views Figure 1 Fetal echocardic views from which the cardiac structures can be measured a Long Axis view of the left ventricel showing the aortic valve 1 and ascending aorta 2 b Aortic arch view showing the aortic valve 1 ascending aorta 2 descending aorta 3 and inferior vena cava 4 c Short axis view showing the pulmonary valve 1 main 2 right 3 and left 4 pulmonary arteries d Oblique short axis view showing the pulmonary trunk and arterial duct 5 e Four chamber view showing the tricuspid valve 1 right ventricular e
278. ch panel any stored measurement can be viewed in a Graph Graph display e g Single Display Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 35 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 12 36 Note Data ol isome off ma nooT Page 3 8 Ene Type Nome Dok Hans PoLIC DOSOOL 07 07 24 1 EPA DAMI arn BPD Hodlock Current GAILMP EFW GA G4 Reference Plat W canr grade To view the stored measurement graphs select the desired item using the trackball and trackball keys In multiple gestations the growth of each fetus is indicated with a different mark Print a Graph v EFW Williams v BPD Hadlock The check marks indicate the measurement graphs which will be printed Use the trackball and the trackball keys to select deselect the graphs The print selection will be stored Before printing the report check your selection review Basic Patient Worksheet Functions on page 12 5 and all its previous measurements Pier Chk one Feat buton 1o range te Print Format tthe Gaps GA Reference Select either GA LMP or GA AUA Select either Current or Trend review Patient Information screen on page 4 14 For multiple gestations only To change the graph display touch the Bar Single or Quad key on the touch panel Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Note Calculations and Patient Worksheets Rep
279. chive Cenfiguratian X moge JPEG Quality img Cine JPEG Quolity Volume Wovelet Quality Soe 0 Cine s Save S040 Cine ms Utilities and System Setup Row arto Rmt Wrba Data Multiframe or Screenshot Multiframe is a DICOM compatible format which allows 2D Cine review on most DICOM platforms oe 2D JPEG Qualityselect the desired JPEG compression factor Img Cine JPEG Qualityselect the desired JPEG compression factor Volume Wavelet Quality Select high mid or low Save 2D Cine asselect Raw Data or Multiframe Save 3D 4D Cine asselect Raw JPEG compression method can be applied to the images to reduce their size When selecting the JPEG compression less than 100 a message appears Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 43 Utilities and System Setup Note Volume Wavelet Quality is only enabled if Volume Compression is wavelet lossy Whenever lossy compression is activated the following dialog appears Volusion E amp If the volume contains color information the color part of the volume is compressed with a setting that is 5 points better than the selected setting e g Setting 90 gt color compression 95 grey compression 90 Default Th28 Qual hight iJ ATA ETI ba M ERIIIFAI w90 If a volume is compressed using lossy wavelet compression a yellow sign Wxx xx compression factor e g W9 is added when reloading the image J A lossy compres
280. ciple M Mode Application Obstetric Fetal Head In freeze mode frozen image changing the Gain Speed and Frequency is not possible The M mode display is derived from a 2D image display When switching on the M mode the M cursor line is inserted into the 2D image It symbolizes the ultrasound beam and defines the position of the M mode trace The M mode trace is initialized with the right or left trackball key Simultaneous mode With electronic probes the 2D and the M trace will be displayed simultaneously The M mode trace is displayed in scroll mode the most recent information is always shown at the right part of the trace 7 2 M Operation The M operation See informations Cursor Position on page 7 4 Activation of M Mode on page 7 4 M Gain Control on page 7 4 Sweep Speed on page 7 4 Invert on page 7 4 Frequency on page 7 5 TGC Slider Controls on page 7 5 Transmit Power on page 7 5 M Mode Depth on page 7 5 M Cineloop on page 7 5 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 3 M Mode 7 2 1 Cursor Position 1 7 2 2 Activation of M Mode After pressing the M control adjust the M cursor using the trackball in the 2D single image Press the right or left trackball key and 2D mode and M mode trace are active The screen is divided asymmetrically into two frames The 2D image appears in the top frame The M mode trace appears in the low
281. cline the monitor Move back and forth Move up and down 3 3 1 1 Lock monitor parts Lock height adjustment Lock arm rotation Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 3 4 H48691CF Revision 2 Description of the System Rotate the arm to center position and turn the knob 1 clockwise till the rotation is locked Release by turning the knob counterclockwise 3 3 1 2 Preparing for transport To ensure that no part of the monitor can be damaged when transporting or moving the system the monitor has to be in a secure position 1 Lock all monitor parts 2 Incline the monitor to horizontal position The system can now be safely transported Nevertheless be careful when transporting or moving the device 3 3 2 User interface adjustment The user interface can be rotated moved forward and backward and adjusted in height Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 3 5 Description of the System Moving the user interface 1 Press UI Brake Release on the user interface to release the brake 2 Grab the front handle and move the user interface to the desired position 3 Press Ul Brake Release again to lock the brake Note The brake can be released for a maximum of 30 seconds Then the brake hardware needs a recovery time of about one minute The following message will be shown on screen Brake recovery required Floating of the keyboard will be available again after a short re
282. continuous update of the M mode display allows you immediately to recognize changes in anatomical position relative to the M cursor With this instant information you can immediately aim the M line to the structures of interest by adjusting the probe or the M cursor The description of M mode is subdivided in two groups In these groups you will see how to use M mode and how to adjust the M settings To use the M mode M Main Menu on page 7 2 To adjust M setting M Sub Menu on page 7 6 To use special utilities Utilities on page 14 2 and Gray Map on page 6 27 M mode is also possible in combination with CFM mode TD Mode and HD Mode For more information see MCFM Mode M Color Flow Mode on page 7 7 For more information see MTD Mode M Tissue Doppler Mode on page 7 10 7 1 M Main Menu M Mode key hard key By pressing the M control the M mode is switched on in the preparation mode only the M cursor appears on the active 2D image To start and use the M mode For more information see M Operation on page 7 3 To adjust the M settings For more information see M Sub Menu on page 7 6 This hard key is also the Gain control for the M mode only in scan mode For more information see M Gain Control on page 7 4 The M Main menu appears on the touch panel scan mode Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 7 2 H48691CF Revision 2 Setting 1 Trim Rout Fet Cardio 1 Remarks 7 1 1 Prin
283. control below the 2 touch panel 6 If necessary adjust the Angle and the Baseline 7 Press the right or the left trackball Set key again The Heart Rate is displayed 12 6 4 9 Obstetric Calculations in Spectral Doppler Mode 2 Auto Trace Manual Trace Measurement of Each Item s Measurement of PSV EDV RI SD s HR Heart Rate Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 29 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 12 30 ae The measurement procedures in Spectral Doppler Mode are the same than in application Abdomen For more information see Abdomen Calculations in Spectral Doppler Mode on s page 12 14 bs FHR Fetal Heart Rate For more information see Obstetric Calculations in M Mode on page 12 29 12 6 4 10 Obstetrics Subcategory Z Scores This subcategory contains measurements that help you to obtain the Z scores needed for analysation of the fetal heart Application Obstetric Factory Sub Category Z Scores allows measurements calculations in 2D 3D mode using various measure items For details about settings For more information see Chapter 16 The methods for obtaining measurements e g Aortic Arch View Short Axis View etc in the Obstetric Calculations menu are similar to the generic measurement functions in 2D 12 6 4 10 1 Items of Obstetric Calculations Subcategory Z scores The items of obstetric calculations subcategory z scores in ea
284. covery interval Adjusting the user interface in height 1 Press Ul Elevation on the user interface and keep it pressed The Elevation menu appears on the touch panel 2 Press up or down on the touch panel and keep the button pressed to adjust the user interface The user interface moves in the desired direction 3 Release the touch panel button to stop at the desired position 3 3 3 Caster Brakes Never move the system with blocked wheels but block the wheels in the proximity of stairs and ramps There are 3 casters that can be braked The following positions are available Front casters Position 1 2 3 Rear caster Position 1 2 Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Middle position caster Lower position Top position steering freely movable steering blocked blocked brake engaged The steering will only be blocked when the wheel is in center position Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 3 6 H48691CF Revision 2 Description of the System 3 4 Concept of Operation The control center of the Voluson E8 E8 Expert is the console with the digipot controls the hard keys and the trackball The console controls frequently used functions e g Freeze Run change of modes etc Additional functions are controlled via the touch panel 3 4 1 Touch panel The touch panel consists of the flat control monitor Note The touch panel could be blocked by direct sunlight avoid full sunlight The touch panel
285. cquisition Static 3D Sectional Planes on page 10 13 Sub Menus on page 10 42 Volume Acquisition Static 3D Render on page 10 49 Real Time 4D Acquisition on page 10 79 Sono Render Start on page 10 92 Volume Cine on page 10 92 Volume Contrast Imaging VCI A Plane on page 10 96 VCl Omniview on page 10 98 STIC Spatio Temporal Image Correlation on page 10 102 Real Time 4D Biopsy on page 10 109 VOCAL II on page 10 111 SonoAVC follicle on page 10 130 SonoAVC general on page 10 136 SonoVCAD heart Volume Computer Aided Display on page 10 139 SonoVCAD labor on page 10 144 HDlive Mode on page 10 149 System messages on page 10 157 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 1 Volume Mode General Description The Volume mode allows for scanning a tissue volume and subsequent analysis of sections of the volume in 3 dimensions The liberal selection of sections within the volume and the simultaneous real time 4D display of three orthogonal planes and a rendered 3D image represents a new dimension for e g the diagnosis of fetal abnormalities The Volume mode provides access to sections un achievable by the 2D scan technique A parallel interface provides the possibility to save volume data on a hard disk drive for repeated analysis anytime Example of fetal facing in multiplanar sections and surface rendering The
286. cription Seriala Date bel pozgg1 2007 oF foo Test DOS001 2007 07 123 Cancel 2 Choose the destination e g HDD 3 Click on the backup to be deleted additional information is displayed in the table 4 Select the Delete button Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 14 58 H48691CF Revision 2 Utilities and System Setup 5 Confirm with Yes to start the deletion process System Configuration Delete Q Do you want to delete the selected backup Working with external USB Devices Note When an external USB storage device is connected to the system such as a memory stick or a hard disk Windows detects the device and automatically installs a driver Afterwards the device is accessible using the drive letter the system assigned to it e g G Before an external USB device e g USB memory stick can be disconnected the system has to be informed about the removal of the device For this purpose every last dialog of Full System Configuration Save and Full System Configuration Delete has a Stop USB Devices button This button can also be found on the Backup filing card in the System setup Full Backup Delete A Backup successfully deleted Please stop USB Devices before unplugging Stop USE Devices be USB devices can also be stopped by pressing the Remove USB devices key on the keyboard For more information see Remove USB Devices on page 17 4 By clicking the Stop
287. ct FE RAB25 0 RSP6 16 D Application Ura Gyn Settings 4 Trim Rout Fet Cardio Fetal Head Penetration 4 Trim 1 Default Probe window Shows all connected probes the active one is highlighted if one is active Application window Shows all applications for the active probe The last active application is highlighted Settings program window Shows all settings for the active application The last active setting is highlighted To load a setting touch the corresponding setting key The probe is initialized the main menu 2D mode appears on the touch panel and the ultrasound image appears on the monitor in scan mode real time display Alternatively pressing the Freeze key also causes loading of the selected highlighted setting The probe starts real time display Selecting a probe Touch the corresponding probe key Each touch key shows the name of the responding probe and a picture The selected probe is indicated when its key is highlighted At the same time the Application fields appear Upon selection the programmed Settings come into view 8 setting keys for selection of the desired setting Freezing an image Freeze Run key hard key Freeze the image by pressing the Freeze key Bright key freeze mode image is frozen probe deactivated Dark key scan mode real time is on probe activated Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 4 6 H48691CF Revision 2 Operating
288. cted E 3 5 cm s 5 0 cm s 7 5 cm s 10 0 cm s in relation to the system s monitor 8 7 20 Threshold C CS e a After Freeze you can adjust the Color Threshold This function eliminates small color noise or motion artefact signals in the Color image or alternatively can be viewed as similar to the gain control in scan mode Switch on off this mode by touching the 2D 2D C key Threshold 45 A small number cuts off fewer signals than a higher number 8 7 21 Velocity Range PRF The displayed velocity range is governed by the pulse repetition frequency PRF As you increase PRF the velocity range increases As the display scale increases the maximum Doppler shift information that can be displayed without aliasing also increases Aliasing is where the blood velocity exceeds the maximum measurable velocity causing the displayed flow within the vessel to portray flow in the wrong direction The disadvantage of using a higher PRF is a loss of sensitivity to low flow velocities Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 8 35 Doppler Modes 8 7 21 1 HPPRF Use the PRF control to adjust the velocity range Touching up increases the PRF Touching down decreases the PRF If a selected PRF is unavailable for the selected depth the PRF will be automatically reduced Changing the PRF display unit from kHz to m s or cm s be done in the For more information see CFM Sub Menu on page 8 73 Rem
289. ctions Basic Patient Report Functions For more information see Basic Patient Worksheet Functions on page 712 5 11 1 7 Accuracy of measurements The possible accuracy of geometric flow speed or other measurements with this ultrasound system is a result of various parameters that shall be equally considered The used images shall be optimized and scaled to provide the best view of the examined structures To ensure this the correct choice of the ultrasound probe and imaging mode for a certain application plays an essential role Despite the high theoretical accuracy of the scan geometry and the measuring system of the Voluson ultrasound system it is important to be aware of increased inaccuracies caused by the ultrasound beam travelling through the inhomogeneous human tissue Therefore differences between operators shall be minimized by standardization of procedures For more information see Advanced Acoustic Output References Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 11 20 H48691CF Revision 2 Chapter 12 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports Describes the general functions of calculations and patient worksheets Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 1 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 12 2 12 1 Calculation Packages The Calculation function supports calculation packages for following applications Abdomen Calculations Small Parts Calculations Obstetric Calculations C
290. ctive of system and design are sensitive to shock and shall be treated with care Pay attention to cracks which may allow conductive fluids to leak in Do not squeeze kink bend or twist probe cables and protect them against mechanical damage The probes must not be exposed to mechanical shock e g by dropping Any damage caused in this will void the warranty Have the scanner system and the transducers regularly checked for faulty cables housing etc by authorized personnel Damage to transducer or cable may lead to a safety hazard therefore have them repaired immediately Before plugging in or unplugging a transducer activate the FREEZE mode A specialist familiar with the handling and use of the system shall perform installation and first switch on and check up of the system For safety reason avoid handling fluids in the vicinity of the system Fluids leaking into the disk drive can damage the drive Never remove the storage shelf above the probe connectors it helps to protect the system from fluids The user manual must always be with the scanner system It is the user s duty to ensure this sd Only probes conforming to type BF requirements may be used with the Voluson E8 E8 Expert See the probe s label In case of doubt ask authorized service personnel Do not install software on the system that has not been released by GE Healthcare Austria GmbH amp Co OG as this may lead
291. culation on page 10 108 10 10 1 STIC M Mode Note STIC M is an option If this option is not installed the STIC M key is hidden 10 10 1 1 General With STIC M it s possible to show a M spectrum of a STIC acquisition 10 10 1 2 Operation To activate STIC M Mode in STIC application press the M Mode hardkey on the user interface or the STIC M Mode on the touch panel Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 106 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode PCS SO Mi aS Liens LO apHr Tis 0A LV 065r Cre fata in Depr TEF ce 6 2 STIC M main screen Render Analysis planar View STIC M touchscreen Speed of the motion image Rotate the STIC M Use the trackball to draw the M line on the STIC image an press the left trackball key to start The arrow indicates the direction of the motion image After activating the STIC M the STIC cine is running and the STIC M spectrum will be shown in motion the red orientation marker is fixed by 1 sec Trackball controls Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 107 Volume Mode Use trackball to rotate or set position Start new line Change between moving or rotating Activate Volpre Activate line control e Activate image control Activate cine control 10 10 2 After STIC Calculation After the calculation the Estimated Heart Rate is shown on the touch panel The previously selected format and the last acquired 4D
292. d Play loop in both directions first volume last volume last volume first volume etc Play loop in one direction first volume last volume first volume last volume etc By touching the Start Stop key the Cine is active By touching this key again the selected volumes of a Real Time 4D sequence can be displayed volume by volume with the trackball By touching Exit the touch panel changes to the Vol Cine menu Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 95 Volume Mode 10 8 Volume Contrast Imaging VCI A Plane Note Volume Contrast Imaging is an option If this option is not installed the VCI A Plane key Is hidden By setting a small volume sweep angle you scan a limited number of slices with a relatively high volume rate The render box is very narrow and so you can visualize the tissue information of a thick slice A mixture of surface texture and transparent maximum or X ray rendering modes 70 30 plus a low setting of surface transparency 20 50 is used The resulting image shows the average integrated gray values of the tissue contained within the narrow box Volume Contrast Imaging VCI improves the contrast resolution and the signal noise ratio and therefore facilitates the detection of diffuse lesions in organs The result is an image with no speckle pattern and a highly improved tissue contrast 1 Activate Volume mode hard key 2 Select the VCI A Plane key
293. d Standard VOL scan medium scan density high Slow speed high scan density J 7 Set the volume sweep angle by using the right control below the touch panel 8 OmniV rot Rotate the Omni View line gt OmniV rot een Thickn Select the VCI thickness Change between both function by pressing the hardkey 9 To start the VCl Omniview acquisition press the Freeze key or the right trackball key Start gt displayed in Status bar area on the monitor JOR The volume acquisition starts and the acquired images are displayed 10 Press the Freeze key again to stop the acquisition For more information see After the VCl Omni View Acquisition on page 10 101 n FPS Optimization Optimizes frame rate in Omni View run mode by ignoring information on below the current Omni View line 10 9 1 VCl Omni View Controls Use the upper trackball key to switch between moving or rotating the VCI line with the 16 rackbal Move or rotate the VCI line es Use the left trackball key to start a new VCI line Use the Z rotary control to rotate the VCl Omni View position line 45 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 100 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode For further controls and possible adjustments For more information see 4D Controls on page gN 10 89 10 9 2 VCl Omni View Curve Line To adjust the VCl Omni View Curvature Line press the Omni View Curve Line button on the touch pane
294. d System Setup 14 2 3 3 Clipboard Clipboard Reload Save Copy Save an additional copy Save as a copy Choose whether the file should be saved to the end of the Clipboard or right after the reloaded image Note This option locked if Overwrite is selected Overwrite reloaded image Overwrites the reloaded image with the new one Show dialog Copy or overwrite When saving the reloaded image a dialog will pop up and let the user choose between copy or overwrite Clipboard Dim Function Clipboard dim function deactivated Choose the desired dim percent in the drop down menu Show Clipboard at Measurement Activate if the clipboard should be visible during a measurement at AutoText Activate if the clipboard should be visible when using AutoText Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 23 Utilities and System Setup 14 2 3 4 Patient Info Display Clipboand Patient info Display Tithe Bor Settings fed Pothent ID Collculobe DOC by GA Foni sire w Activate 2nd Patient ID a Pest normal r NHS Numb Copitoline first kette in patient mams enler iaa ASA Font Brighten AAS Avie Letie G Mumiler Amg Hide Pot infix Hone onky Br Bor kit Aio Display DOB Age Ato Stort Wtorklst OUE Drop Deen Momagement Archive atomine Emon coburn Pothents amp Emoens float fac coduemnsk Exam Comenerit App cotion Enorma Onhj koet Cokirmenk Erom Tyg lt Autor ically L
295. d low velocity flow at the same time To use the B Flow B Flow Main Menu on page 6 26 To adjust the B Flow settings B Flow Sub Menu on page 6 27 To use special utilities Utilities on page 14 2 and Gray Map on page 6 21 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 6 25 2D Mode 6 6 1 B Flow Main Menu B Flow Mode key hard key Press the BF control to activate the B Flow mode To use B Flow B Flow Operation on page 6 26 To adjust the B Flow settings B Flow Sub Menu on page 6 27 The B Flow Main menu appears on the touch panel scan mode Remarks B Flow is an option If the option is not installed the BF key is not active B Flow is also available in 3D Volume acquisition mode 4D acquisition is not possible The B Flow function is not available for phased array probes In B Flow only one focal zone is available When activating B Flow current 2D settings are memorized After deactivating B Flow these settings are restored 6 6 2 B Flow Operation The B Flow operation consists of B Flow Gain Background bd Image Orientation All further image optimizing functions are the same as in 2D mode For details 2D Operation on page 6 3 6 6 2 1 B Flow Gain 2D The adjustment of the Gain control determines the amount of amplification applied to the received echoes All incoming echoes are amplified with the same gain value regardless of depth It
296. d the shortest scan time consistent with acquiring the required diagnostic information This is the ALARA principle i e As Low As Reasonably Achievable It is acknowledged that in some situations it is reasonable to use higher output or longer examination times than in others for example the risks of missing a fetal anomaly must be weighed against the risk of harm from potential bioeffects Consequently it is essential for operators of ultrasound scanners to be properly trained and fully informed when making decisions of this nature Guidelines for the safe use of diagnostic ultrasound equipment Safety Group of the British Medical Ultrasound Society 2010 Special care regarding ALARA should be taken with obstetric examinations as any potential bioeffects are likely to be of greatest significance in the embryo or fetus It is strongly recommended to consider ALARA when undertaking ultrasound scans 2 8 2 Bioeffects Thermal effects refer to heating of soft tissue and bone The thermal indices Tls soft tissue Tlb bone near focus and Tic bone near surface were introduced to provide the operator a relative potential for a tissue temperature rise According to the Standard for Real time Display of Thermal and Mechanical Acoustic Output Indices on Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment 2004 those thermal indices shall be displayed by this ultrasound console It should be noted that a TI of 1 does not necessarily mean that tissues being scann
297. d to a battery or its packaging to advise you that the battery must be recycled or disposed of in accordance with local or country laws The letters below the separate collection symbol indicate whether certain elements Pb Lead Cd Cadmium Hg Mercury are contained in the battery To minimize potential effects on the environment and human health it is important that all marked batteries that you remove from the product are properly recycled or disposed For information on how the battery may be Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 2 27 Safety and Maintenance safely removed from the device please consult the service manual or equipment instructions Information on the potential effects on the environment and human health of the substances used in batteries is available at this url http www gehealthcare com euen weee recycling index html 2 10 Guidance and manufacturer s declaration Guidance and manufacturer s declaration electromagnetic emissions The Voluson E8 E8 Expert is intended for use in electromagnetic environment specified below The customer or the user of the Voluson E8 E8 Expert should assure that it is used in such an environment Emission test Compliance Electromagnetic environment guidance RF emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 The Voluson E8 E8 Expert uses RF energy only for its internal function Therefore its RF emissions are very low and are not likely to cause any interference in
298. darker Remarks e The actual gain value is displayed on the screen GN e Changing the PW gain is only possible in scan mode independent from additional modes such as Color 8 1 2 4 PW Automatic Optimization This function will optimize the following settings PRF automatic detection of highest flow velocities and adjustment of the velocity scale PRF Baseline will be shifted so that the flow spectrum is centered Pressing the auto key enables automatic optimization of the PRF and Baseline When the key is pressed again the optimization will be updated Double click the auto key to switch off the Automatic Optimization in PW mode Remarks When the Automatic Optimization function is active the auto key is brightly illuminated The PRF and Baseline can always be changed manually 8 1 2 5 Freeze The Freeze control starts and stops the 2D image and PW Doppler spectrum For more information see Probe selection on page 4 5 The baseline can be shifted up in 8 steps or down in 8 steps 8 1 2 6 PW Cineloop Several 2D image frames and the Doppler Spectrum information can be recalled When freezing a certain time frame D spectrum of the last examination sequence is stored in the loop memory The sequence can be reviewed frame by frame Display 2D image cine and Loop or Cursor for Doppler spectrum D Loop Trackball moves the whole M Mode area D Cursor Trackball moves a cursor within the M Mode area
299. data Sequence of Bitmaps BMP AVI MOV DICOM Files DCM DICOM Files with DICOMDIR 3D Raw Data conversion to Cartesian format possible MPEG 4 MS Video 1 FullFrames DVD R W CD R W Network USB devices available for the following image types AVI MOV BMP TIFF JPEG DVD R W CD R W Network USB devices Repro function Exam History Harddrive storage size Ethernet network connection USB for USB devices DICOM support option Verify Print Store Modality Worklist Structured Reporting Storage Commitment Settings recall e g Geometry Gain Colormap etc from a stored or reloaded picture direct access to images from previous exams direct access to Measure Reports images from previous exams Image compare window on screen to compare images from previous exams with current exam image about 450 GB MPPS Modality performed procedure step Media Exchange Off network mobile storage queue Query Retrieve 18 10 Scanning Parameters 18 10 1 B Mode Acc power range 1 100 Scan angle max 360 depends on used probe Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 18 17 Technical Data Information 18 18 GAIN range Gray scale values SRI CRI CRI filter CE FFC Persistence filter Line filter Line density Reject Enhance Gray maps high 25 50 25 8 steps pre off low 12 5 75 12 5 12 different dynamic curves C1 C12 Di
300. de The following functions are available i TD Map Frequency on page 8 37 id Flow Resolution on page 8 29 i Scale on page 8 34 Balance on page 8 28 Smoothing on page 8 34 Ensemble on page 8 29 Line Density on page 8 32 s Baseline on page 8 28 Line Filter on page 8 32 Gray Map on page 6 21 Utilities on page 14 2 This function allows to select the color coding for an optimization of the display of motion similar to the post processing curves with gray scale 2D It may be altered in real time or Freeze mode respectively Selection of a TD Map curve Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Doppler Modes Remark If desired activate Gently Colors on page 8 37 8 Doppler Mode Functions and Filters Description of all mode adjustments functions and filters 8 7 1 Angle Correction To get optimum resolution and accuracy from Doppler measurements the angle that exists between the ultrasound beam and the blood flow should be maintained between 0 and 20 degrees However due to anatomical limitations an angle of 55 to 65 degrees is common in peripheral vascular applications The blood flow velocity calculation based on the incident angle of the ultrasound beam to the axis of the vessel can be determined this way The vessel must be displayed in longitudinal section and the angle cursor must be positioned parallel to the vessel axis
301. de which combines only with Surface display Always select 2 modes 10 4 4 5 Threshold Control in Color Render Mode In case Surface mode is selected it will normally be necessary to adjust the low threshold for the border recognition of the surface These threshold values do not apply for the Transparent modes Threshold low Reject Normally this threshold always has to be adjusted properly for a good appearance of the 3D surface image By changing the threshold all echoes below the level are enhanced in pink color for a short interval All color values below this level pink in B scan will be disregarded for calculation of the surface 10 4 4 6 Transparency in Color Render Mode Transparency small number low transparency A higher number makes the gray scale information more transparent If a 3D CFM 3D PD or a 3D HD image is acquired the controls for the Balance and the Power Threshold are displayed after touching the Sub Menus key For more information see Balance on page 10 49 For more information see Power Threshold on page 10 49 10 4 4 7 Glass Body Render Mode In Glass Body Render mode the color and the gray information are processed into a 3D PD 3D HD or 3D CFM volume Activate Glass Body Render Mode if not active Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 76 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode Select desired render algorithm Gray Mode Color Mode Transp Texture
302. defined semi automatically Contour Finder manually or by an automatic sphere The rotation step for each contour plane depends on the VOCAL Mode and on the selected rotation steps The Surface Geometry is defined by 3D triangularization of the 2D contours meaning each point of the 2D contour in plane N is connected via a triangle mesh to corresponding points in plane N 1 and plane N 1 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode Definition of a Shell Contour Geometry The basic idea of a Shell Contour is to define a thickness of the reference surface geometry Surface fipl p2 p3 T hic kness The parallel contours shown in the image define the parallel surface geometry describing the shell The parallel contours are either defined symmetrically to the reference contour or limited to one direction inside or outside The She Geometry consists of one outside and one inside surface and therefore it is possible to distinguish between points enclosed by the shell geometry and points outside of it A She Contourrepresents all points enclosed by the inner and outer surface geometry If no She Contour is defined explicitly the She Geometry consists of the reference surface outside surface and an inner point the inside surface being degenerated Display of a Shell Geometry contour rendering The shell geometry can be visualized as Skin or Wire Mesh
303. displayed in the Status bar area on the monitor The volume acquisition starts then the acquired images are displayed d R For more information see During 3D Acquisition on page 10 16 Note If CRI is enabled in 2D Mode it is also used in 3D STIC pre mode and during 3D STIC acquisition The settings CRI value are taken from the 2D settings Use of CRI is indicated in the info block It is also possible to combine CRI with 3D STIC Color 10 2 1 3D Acquisition During Active High Resolution Zoom a 1 Press the Zoom button while still in 2D 2 Place the zoom box over the region of interest The trackball has 2 functions adjusting position and size of the zoom box The activated function is displayed in the status bar area on the monitor Press the upper trackball key to change the function of the trackball from position to size or f vice versa 3 Change the size of the zoom box by moving the trackball Moving Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 15 Volume Mode decrease the box size in vertical direction increase the box size in vertical direction increase the box size in horizontal direction decrease the box size in horizontal direction 4 Activate Zoom by either selecting PanZoom or HDZoom with the left or right trackball key 5 The overview window appears To readjust overview window settings For more information see General on page 14 14 6 Press the
304. e 1 This filed shows the number and type of items you have selected to delete Choose your desired answer Press Delete Images Only to delete the images of the selected patient i Press Delete All Data to delete the whole Patient including patient data and measurements R Press Cancel to cancel the deletion It is not possible to go back to start after deleting a patient Everything you choose to delete will be deleted permanently 13 4 Image History 13 34 Image History allows you to skim through all the pictures in all the exams of a single patient You can also mark images for deletion or move the marked images to the history clipboard pee Current Patient Current Patient Opens Current Patient Screen see Current Patient Dialog on page 13 3 Archive Archive Opens the Archive Screen see Patient Archive on page 13 11 Eam Review Opens the Exam Review Screen see Exam Review on page 13 35 Exit Close the Exam Review dialog and return to the running exam Exam Buttons Used to select an exam and indicate the Current Exam selected exam button pressed Displays iat the Exam Date and Time and the string Current Exam to mark the current Exam Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Archive Left Right Arrows Used to scroll through the individual images Up Down Arrows Used to scroll through the individual exams To mark
305. e Exam Review dialog and return to the running exam Search Search To conduct a search enter the required i criteria and press the Search button see Searching for a Particular Exam on page 13 14 Show All Shows all Patients see Searching for a Show All 5 Particular Exam on page 13 14 13 3 4 1 Use as Current Pressing the Use as current key uses the selected patient as the current patient This action is also performed if a patient is double clicked Note The Use as current key is greyed out and cannot be used while there is an exam running Please end the running exam and then select your patient 13 3 4 2 Edit Data Menu Edit Data Allows you to edit the data of the currently selected patient The Current Patient Data Screen opens and you can edit and amend the previously typed Data All other functions see Current Patient Dialog on page 13 3 For easy navigation the Edit Data menu has been designed to look just like the Current Patient screen except there is no exam table Middle Name Use the Filing Card tabs to navigate between the application areas see Application Area on page 13 4 To exit the Edit Data Menu press either Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 13 22 H48691CF Revision 2 Archive 1 Save amp Return to save the modified data and return to previous operating mode 13 3 5 Exam Menu To evoke the exam menu click an exam from the exam table Wh
306. e VOCAL Modes menu where you New can define a new contour ROI 10 12 5 1 Modifying a Contour When moving the trackball the dots change to yellow with respect to the position of the cursor If the cursor is positioned close to the contour line only one dot is yellow By increasing the distance more dots become yellow 6a 1 Press the upper trackball key and move the yellow dots by using the trackball Press the A CY upper trackball key again to store the modified contour 2 Repeat these steps if necessary All relevant results shell contour volume etc are updated automatically 3 Select the next image plane by using the Next or Back key of the Rotation Ref function 4 Select the desired Shell mode For more information see VOCAL Edit on page 10 123 ___ 5 After you have modified the contours in the selected image planes touch the Accept ROI key The shell contour is accepted and the result is displayed The VOCAL Static 3D menu ROI VOCAL Edit on page 10 123 appears on the touch panel Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 124 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode 10 12 5 2 Defining a Shell contour shell geometry Shell OFF The outside surface 1 is equal to the generated contours reference surface geometry The inside surface 1 is represented by an inner point the inside surface is degenerated Selection of other She states mean Shel
307. e CFM with Spectral Doppler Information 1 CFM 2D Mode PW Doppler Pulsed Wave Doppler In scan mode it is possible to switch between CFM menu PW menu and the Submenus to readjust settings The color box position is not changing when activating the PW mode 2 CFM 2D Mode CW Doppler Continuous Wave Doppler In scan mode it is possible to switch between CFM menu CW menu and the Submenus to readjust settings Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Doppler Modes 8 4 Power Doppler Mode PD Mode Sonographic diagnostics can be greatly extended by Color Doppler sonography Still Color Doppler sonography has deficits especially when displaying very slow flow velocities like neovascularization found in malign tumors The Power Doppler intends to erase this deficit by displaying such slow flow velocities In gynecologic and obstetric applications the advantages can be clearly seen in the display of placenta blood circulation With eutrophic fetus the blood flow can be seen over the total width of the placenta In the radiology field too advantages with slow flows can be seen e g kidney liver prostate etc This new technique is not intended to replace established sonographic techniques but to complete them especially in the above mentioned fields Advantages when compared to Color Doppler i less dependent on the incident angle no aliasing s less dependent on the direction whe
308. e amp Growth Fetal Weight etc in the Obstetric Calculations menu are similar to the generic measurement functions in 2D M and Spectral Doppler mode 12 6 2 Items of Obstetric Calculations Subcategory Biometry The items of obstetric calculations in each mode are as follows 2D 3D Mode Fetal Biometry BPD HC AC FL HL OFD APAD TAD CEREB NF Early Gestation CRL GS YS BPD FL NT Fetal Long Bones HL RAD ULNA TIB FIB CLAV Fetal Cranium CEREB CM BOD IOD NT Va Vp HEM C S P NF AFI Uterus Left Right Ovary UT Trace Intercranial Translucency MMode FHR Fetal Heart Rate Doppler Mode Umbilical Artery Ductus Venosus Left Right Uterine Artery Left Right MCA Middle Cerebral Artery Left Right Carotid Ao Aorta FHR Fetal Heart Rate Umbilical Vein Ductus Art For more information see Chapter 19 Note For some obstetric measurements there are different methods how perform these These different methods can be selected by the rotary control which ts on the left side below the touch panel Which method is currently active is displayed in the lower left corner of the touch panel 12 6 3 Before starting Obstetric Calculations 1 Press the Patient key on the control panel select the OB page and enter all patient information for Obstetric calculations e g LMP and Fetus For more information see Entering Patient Data on page 4 7 Note To cancel all calculations
309. e amplified converted and then mapped to an image processing curve that relates each echo s intensity to a shade of gray The greater the echo intensity the brighter the shade of gray As each echo is received it is arranged along a line within the ultrasound image display The location along the line that is displayed is related to the depth at which the echo occurs To use the 2D mode 2D Main Menu on page 6 2 To adjust 2D settings 2D Sub Menu on page 6 79 and Gray Map on page 6 27 To use special utilities Utilities on page 14 2 To use special 2D display modes and functions review Harmonic Imaging HI on page 6 7 B View Beta View on page 6 7 Focus and Frequency Composite FFC on page 6 8 Coded Excitation CE on page 6 8 i CrossBeam Compound Resolution Imaging XBeam CRI on page 6 9 gt Speckle Reduction Imaging SRI II on page 6 9 To use additional optional operating modes review B Flow on page 6 25 s XTD View Extended View on page 6 27 z Contrast Imaging on page 6 35 6 1 2D Main Menu 2D Mode key hard key Press this key to change from another mode to 2D mode display To use the 2D mode 2D Operation on page 6 3 To adjust the 2D settings 2D Sub Menu on page 6 79 This hard key is also the Gain control for the 2D image 2D Gain on page 6 4 The 2D Main menu appears on the touch panel scan mode me m Setting Application Gynecology
310. e Range 0 9 step size 1 Screen Formats e Single 2D Elasto e Dual 2D Elasto 2D Elasto e Quad 2D Elasto 2D Elasto 2D Elasto 2D Elasto 18 11 Generic Measurements and Measurements Calculations 18 11 1 Generic Measurements 2D Mode and 3D Distance Distance Point to Point Distance Line to Line 2D Trace Trace Length amp Point Stenosis Dist Ration D1 D2 Area Circumference Ellipse Trace Line amp Point Area 2 Dist Stenosis Area Ratio A1 A2 Volume 1 Distance 1 Ellipse 1 Dist Ellipse 3 Distances Multiplane planimetric volume 3D only Angle 3 Point Angle 2 Line M Mode Generic Distance Slope Time HR Heart Rate Stenosis Dist IMT Vessel Diam Stenosis Diam Time HR Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 18 26 H48691CF Revision 2 Technical Data Information Doppler Mode Generic Lt Rt Gen Vessel Single Measurements e Velocity Acceleration RI Pl PS ED PS ED Time HR Auto amp Manual Trace measurements dependent application e PS Peak Systole ED End Diastole MD Mid Diastole PS ED Ratio PI Pulsatility Index RI Resistance Index TAmax Time avg max Velocity Tamean Time avg mean velocity VTI Velocity Time Integral Heart Rate Vol Flow 18 11 2 Calculations Abdomen Liver Gallbladder Pancreas Spleen Left Right Kidney Left Right Renal Artery Aorta Proximal Mid Distal Portal Vein Vessel all includ
311. e Setup Procedure 1 Touch the Utilities hardkey Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 16 2 H48691CF Revision 2 Measure Setup 2 In the Utilities menu touch the Measure Setup key Lock 3 Screen Setup Histogram Monitor TFET 7 TI select Setup Tis 7 Guided Biopsy Biopsy Kit PEC 63 134 153 Biopsy Line Touch Ser Brightn 90 Console Keyboard Beeper gt Backgr 10 Brightn 100 Brightn 100 Volume 50 16 2 To Exit from the Measure Setup Select the Exit button on the screen touch the Exit key on the touch panel or press Exit on the control panel Setup changes are cancelled and not saved Select the Save button with the mouse pointer arrow and press Set right trackball key to save the settings and exit the Measure Setup 16 3 The Measure Setup Pages The Measure Setup desktop offers different pages Measure amp Calc on page 16 3 Application Parameters on page 16 17 Global Parameters on page 16 19 16 3 1 Measure amp Calc This page shows all settings which are used for generic measurements Generic Measurements on page 11 2 as well as calculations Chapter 16 in different applications Application e g Obstetric Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Measure Setup Feia Welghl Settings ACISPOFLING Hadodhd reve Aad Willams Bd oS C pre y k Taui 2001 Shinozks Taaka E ooo ia Sd
312. e Smooth HD ve Surface and Smooth Surface Enhanced max min and X ray average intensity projection Gradient Light Light Inversion Glass Body Mix Mode of two Render Modes Display graphics Rotation axis center point ROI box 3D Frame temporary display of on screen controls rotation translation Gray maps Slices 21 18 basic curves and 3 User defined pre post 3D Image one general map adjustable with Low Tones 50 bis 50 amp High Tones 50 to 50 Tint maps e Slices 15 e 3D image 15 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 18 24 H48691CF Revision 2 Technical Data Information 18 10 9 BF B Flow single BF dual BF BF quad BF BF BF BF Display modes BF Update BF PW 1 00 1 50 2 00 3 00 4 00 ccccccccssee 5 00 12 different dynamic curves C1 C12 Off 0 20 0 35 0 50 0 75 1 00 1 50 Infinite 18 10 10 Contrast Agent Screen formats Code PI Single B Dual B B Quad B B B B CIS Dual simultan 2D Coded PI CCIS Single B Dual B B Quad B B B B Display modes Coded PI Coded PI CIS e Coded PI CCIS 1 00 1 50 2 00 3 00 4 00 cccccsssee 5 00 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 18 25 Technical Data Information Dynamic 12 different dynamic curves C1 C12 Accumulation Off 0 20 0 35 0 50 0 75 1 00 1 50 Infinite Background Time delay 18 10 11 Elastography Elasto Maps Persistanc
313. e VOCAL Edit on page 10 123 EATE review Volume Histogram Volume Histogram For more information see Volume Histogram on page 10 130 10 12 5 5 Render Mode and Display of the Shell Geometry 1 Touch the Render Mode key Render Mode Gray Color Body Inversion 2 Select the desired Render Mode e g Inversion If you have select Vocal Surface Render Mode you can change the display of the Shell Geometry among Skin or Wire Mesh eects Touch this key to change the Surface Color of the Shell Geometry Surface Color 10 12 5 6 Threshold Volume After volume calculation via the VOCAL program it is possible to display an automatically calculated Threshold volume EITT Touch the Threshold Volume key in the Vocal menu Threshold Volume Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 128 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode The touch panel shows the calculated Threshold volume according to the monitor display Monitor display e g Hydronephrosis Threshold Volume Below Threshold pink 36 29 em Above a 10 51 em Volume by Histegrami 46 79 em Vocal shell Wo 7 eee 5041 77 cm out of velumelest rrors 852 97 em at MPM SACS Uf pene ee eee 0 00 em Volume ee ee 46 79 em Threshold 20 Touch panel display volume calculation of Hydronephrosis Adjust the threshold value
314. e Wide field of view Only CIVCO manufacturer needle guides may Peripheral vascular virtual convex be used with this biopsy Pediatrics CFM HD Flow Material MSK Power and PW Plastic Breast JOPPET Multi angle biopsy Small and lightweight Only the biopsy bracket is reusable For detailed information please contact the manufacturer Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 5 27 Probes and Biopsies 5 3 4 3 9L D Linear array transducer 1 Patient applied part 2 Probe handle Small parts Wide field of view Only CIVCO manufacturer needle guides may Obstetrics virtual convex be used with this biopsy Peripheral vascular CFM Power and PW Material Pediatrics Dopper Plastic MSK Small and lightweight steerable CW Doppler Multi angle biopsy Only the biopsy bracket is reusable For detailed information please contact the manufacturer 1 Patient applied part 2 Probe handle Small parts 3D 4D Real Time Only CIVCO manufacturer needle guides may Peripheral vascular Imaging be used with this biopsy Pediatrics Wide field of view Material MSK Small probe tip and Plastic Brede shaft Multi angle biopsy CFM HD Flow Power and PW Doppler Broad Bandwidth Multi Frequency Only the biopsy bracket is reusable For detailed information please contact the manufacturer Biopsy guide available Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 5 28 H48691CF Revision 2 Pr
315. e line to adjust the angle and then press Set again Note To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key Change before completing the measurement This alternates the control from one cursor to the other 11 1 2 5 Generic Elasto Measurement Note This measurement Is only possible if the option Elastography is installed Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 11 12 H48691CF Revision 2 Measurements Wok Meas Cs Sheet Applicat EXE Generic Generic Generic Generic Dist Area Volume Angle Lt Gen Vessel mE Ratio Ref Cancel ROI 1 2 3 Meas Method Trace Using Generic Elasto Measurement 1 Select a valid Elastography frame Hint Activate the Quality Curve display in the Sub Menu The curve will be displayed in the lower right section of the monitor display Peaks in the curve indicate valid Elastography frames represented by green sectors in the Quality Bar on the left 2 Press Caliper 3 Select Generic Elasto on the touch panel 4 Select Elasto Single RO or one of the available E astography Ratio options Elasto Single ROI Elasto Single RO measures the strain of a single Region of Interest ROI The strain shows the color distribution within the measured ROI trace or circle Elastography Ratio Ref ROI 1 E Ratio Ref RO 7 measures the strain of two Regions of Interest Ref and ROI 1 and calculates the Ratio of Ref to ROI Elastography Ratio Ref ROI 1 2 E Ratio Ref RO 7 2
316. e of Structure Note This selection ts only available in Sub menu and if Contour Finder Semi auto Trace generation mode Is selected It offers three structure specitic presets differing in their contour detection algorithm Hypo Typically for hypo echoic lesions breast Type of structure tumors irregular shaped internal structures _ not surrounded by fluid Hypo Cystic Typically for all fluid filled structures like gallbladder urinary bladder cysts etc Hyper Iso Typically for solid lesions and structures such as uterus endometrium kidney prostate thyroid fibroadenoma lymph nodes etc The selection of the reference image defines the image plane s to generate the contours Touch the respective key to select the reference image To generate the contours the reference image is rotated via the vertical axis for reference image A or B horizontal axis for reference image C in the center of the image red dotted line Selection to the Sensitivity Adjust the sensitivity of the Contour Finder algorithm Tips and Tricks For very irregular shapes of the target structure use a low Sensitivity setting 1 3 for symmetric shapes with good contrast such as a simply cyst higher values may be applied 4 8 Selection of the Aspect Ratio Zoom The 3D image as well as the sectional image can be varied by their aspect ratio by turning the Zoom digipot Voluson E8 E8 Expert Bas
317. e waveform Vd and press the Set key again to fix the mark 11 1 5 To Change the Measurement Application em 1 Touch this key on the touch panel to change the currently used application Meas Applicat gt Return 2 Select another application Note If desired change also the Preset and Sub Category nerd 3 Press Return to return to the Generic Measurement menu without a change Return When changing to another measurement application the main application chosen in the R a Probe Selection menu does not change When a main application in the Probe Selection A menu is selected the Generic measurement menu is automatically set changed to this application 11 1 6 To Review the Generic Work Sheet 1 Touch this key on the touch panel to review the current application worksheet ork Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 11 19 Measurements Meas Worksheet OB Sn Applicat Sti Ea Exam Comment Anatomy de iy Print Transfer Export Data Report Preview Print Report The display of the worksheet depends on the currently selected measurement application N e g Worksheet Obstetric 2 Touch the Generic key to review all previously calculated generic measurement results Pics By means of this flip control below the touch panel additional worksheet pages can be 415 selected For further descriptions possible adjustments and fun
318. ea Point Area 2 Distance Ellipse Stenosis Area 3 Distances Ellipse 1 Distance Ellipse 1 Distance Multiplane Angle 3 Points Angle 2 Lines Elasto Single ROI E Ratio Ref ROI 1 E Ratio Ref ROI 1 2 E Ratio Ref ROI 1 2 3 Area Volume Clear Study 2 Line Distance Trace Cancel Measurements Note When a measurement is complete the final result ration will be seen on the screen automatically Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 11 5 Measurements 11 1 2 1 1 Distance 2 Points 1 To measure the distance between two points touch the Dist 2Point key on the touch panel A cursor appears on the screen 2 Use the trackball to move the cursor to the start point of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker A second cursor appears 3 Move the second cursor to the second point of the measurement and press Set again Note To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key Change before completing the measurement This alternates the control from one cursor to the other 11 1 2 1 2 Double Distance 1 To measure two single distances touch the Double Distance key on the touch panel A cursor appears on the screen 2 Use the trackball to move the cursor to the start point of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker A second cursor appears 3 Move the second cursor
319. ease the box size in horizontal direction Vol Angle 20 6 Set the volume sweep angle by using the right control below the touch panel 7 Select the Quality This function changes the line density against acquisition speed Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 50 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode low Fast speed low scan density This mode is selected only in case of expected movement artefacts A loss of volume resolution will result Standard VOL scan medium scan density Slow speed high scan density 8 To start 3D acquisition press the Freeze key or the right trackball key Start gt displayed in Status bar area on the monitor The volume acquisition starts then the acquired images are displayed R For more information see During 3D Acquisition on page 10 16 C For more information see 3D Acquisition During Active High Resolution Zoom on page 10 15 The 3D menu appears on the touch panel scan mode Planes TU tation i MagiCut Mode Cale Ref Image 2D Onentation 90 Quality Vol Angle high2 25 9 Touch the Render key Condition to activate 3D Image Rendering 1 A Static 3D Sectional Plane volume scan is performed and in freeze mode After the 3D Image Acquisition In the 3D 4D Mode menu you can change to different Visualization modes 2 A volume scan is performed with Static 3D Rendering 10 4 1 After the Static 3D
320. easurement C Se ee a The max Velocities are displayed above and under the color scale in KHz cm s m s Touch the Scale key and select the scale display as desired kHz Doppler shift frequency cm s Flow velocity m s Flow velocity 8 7 18 Smoothing E ee Smoothing performs is a temporal averaging which improves the appearance of the color images Different amounts of smoothing can be selected for rising velocity and falling velocity EETA Touch on the Smooth Fall key to select the fall filter Smooth Ss Fall 4 FALL This filter leads to prolongation of the displayed flow Usage with quick pulses short color flashes prolongates them for better evaluation on the monitor Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Doppler Modes a Touch on the Smooth Rise key to select the rise filter Sitesi RISE Filtering of the rise velocity leads to noise suppression To be used with small laminar flows Avoid quick movements of the probe because the flow is built up slowly When displaying pulses the Rise Filter must be set low 8 7 19 Sweep Speed ee The Speed control allows selection of variable sweep speeds The faster sweep speed may be useful to analyze flow curves For example to calculate a mean pressure gradient then it will be much easier to do this on a fast speed trace than on a low speed trace a By touching or three different sweep speeds can be sele
321. eatedly Undo After choosing a measurement the status bar area shows the current function of the trackball as a E g To cancel the measurement of the currently selected item touch the Cancel key on the touch panel To delete the results of the last measured item touch the Delete key on the touch panel IE Delete Last To delete all measurement results of the selected Study from the monitor as well as from Clear the corresponding Worksheet touch the Clear Study key on the touch panel To erase results press the Clear Study key on the touch panel i or press the Delete Measurement F6 key on the keyboard A Q om or touch Delete Last on the touch panel To exit the Calculation program press the Calc key on the control panel or touch Exit on the touch panel Depending on the setting in the Measure Setup also the Freeze key can be used for confirming the last measuring mark of the currently performed measurement Freeze bd To get the best resolution and accuracy from Doppler measurements the Angle correction cursor must be positioned parallel to the vessel axis in the area of the measuring volume j When the result display is full max 8 the first measurement will be overwritten first Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 3 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports Note 12 4 i If more meas
322. ed AN Shutdown is currently nok possible because 1 After the system is fully powered off you may switch OFF the Main switch at the rear of the system Remarks bd The main outlets of the system for peripheral equipment are commonly switched with the Standby switch So the auxiliary equipment need not to be switched on off separately sd After turning off the system wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again The system may not be able to boot if power is recycled too quickly 4 3 Probe connection and selection 4 3 1 Probe connection Prior to connecting or disconnecting a probe freeze the image It is not necessary to switch off the system If a probe is disconnected while running Scan mode a software error may occur In this case switch OFF the system and after an interval of 10 seconds switch it ON again perform a reset If the cable spout on the right hand door is missing do not pull on the probe cable the probe cable can be damaged Please insert the spout in the destined place or call the Service Department Connecting a probe 1 Plug the probe connector into a free socket 2 Turn the probe lock lever to vertical position Ensure that the probe sits tight 3 Place the probe cable in the cable holder Disconnecting a probe 1 Freeze the image by pressing the Freeze key 2 Turn the probe lock lever to horizontal position Si Remove the probe Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User M
323. ed Array Convex Probes on page 5 14 Press Util on the user interface 5 6 Press System Setup on the touch panel 7 Press Biopsy Setup on the touch panel 8 The Biopsy Setup Menu is displayed on the touch panel Note A water bath alignment verification is also necessary before performing freehand biopsy procedures Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 5 10 H48691CF Revision 2 Probes and Biopsies 5 2 2 1 Biopsy line adjustment for single angle biopsy guide Storing a biopsy line Probe 5P10 16 0 Biopsy Setup Ment Exk l Kit PEC 64 al Blapay Kit Biopsy Line store Figure 5 1 Biopsy Setup Menu Single angle biopsy guide 1 Perform steps 1 to 8 see Biopsy setup on page 5 9 2 Select a biopsy kit 3 The biopsy line is shown on the monitor screen 4 Adjust the biopsy line by using the Trackball pos and the left rotary button below the touch panel Line rotate 5 Press Store to save the line 6 Press Exitto close the Biopsy Setup 5 2 2 2 Biopsy line adjustment for multi angle biopsy guide Storing a biopsy line Biopsy Setup Manu Protec C4 D Blapsy Kit Step 1 Store HEX 1 Bhopay Line Step 2 Line rotate Figure 5 2 Biopsy Setup Menu Multi angle biopsy guide Set the biopsy guide angle to MBX 1 x a Perform steps 1 to 8 see Biopsy setup on page 5 9 2 Selecta biopsy kit 3 The MBX 1 biopsy line is shown on the monitor screen 4 Adjust the
324. ed fer pleetins on the betel trend graph only It is possible to switch between fetus tables if more than one fetus is entered in the patient dialog page Note This dialog is used to enter data from previous ultrasound exams performed on other systems This data can then be used for fetal trending graphs Which measurements are listed depends on the current measure setup settings On all further pages the measurement columns change but the exam date column remains the same If no LMP is available the system uses the current date the length of pregnancy used for calculations Fast Exam Data shown from 2005707 193 to 2006 04 25 af curent date 1 This field shows the start and the end date of the Exam Exam Date A005 12 12 Create a new entry by entering an exam date values between actual date and LMP are possible BPD HC AC FL HL Hadlock Hadlock Hadlock Hadlock Jeanty cm cm cm cm 2 00 3 00 4 00 Enter measurement data from previous exams performed on different systems Use the Up Down arrows to scroll through the list if the list is longer than the available amount of lines Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 4 17 Operating the System Note Use these buttons or the Prev or Next keys on the touch panel to go to previous or next page Use this button to delete the entry Following message appears amp Are you sure you want to delete the
325. ed in Summary Reports Bladder Volume Small Parts Default Left Right Thyroid Left Right Testicle Vessel all included in Summary Reports Small Parts Breast Left Right Lesions 1 5 all included in Summary Reports Obstetrics Fetal Biometry Early Gestation Fetal Long Bones Fetal Cranium AFI Uterus Left Right Ovary Left Right Uterine Umbilical Vein Fract Limb Vol NT method auto manual Generic FHR FHR Atrial FHR Doppler Ductus Art Ductus Ven Ao Carotid MCA Celiac Artery Superior Mesenteric Artery Umbilical Art Umbilical Vein Uterine Art Umbilical Vein FHR Gestational Age Calculation Gestational Growth Calculation Fetal Weight FW Estimation Fetal Trend Graph Multi Gestational Calculation amp Fetal Compare Calculation and Ratios Fetal Qualitative Description Anatomical survey Fetal Environmental Description Biophysical profile all included in Summary Reports Obstetrics 2D 4 Chamber view Thorax Outflow Tract Aortic Fetal Echo arch Venous LVOT RVOT Doppler Tricuspid valve Mitral Valve Aortic Valve Main Pulmonary Artery Pulmonary Valve Aorta Ductus Art Umbilical Vein Ductus Ven FHR LVOT RVOT Pulmonary Veins TEI Index Rt Lt UMA IVC Carotid all included in Summary Reports 4 Chamber view Outflow tract FHR FHR Atrial FHR Obstetrics Z Scores Calculation of Z Scores for Long Axis Aortic Arch Short Axis Obl Short Axis 4 Chamber all included in Summar
326. ed in real time or Freeze Mode respectively The color is coded in a color wedge cyclamen gray green brown dark red red violet red red orange pink orange light red yellow light yellow yellow yellow Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Doppler Modes cyclamen violet dark blue dark gray light red light violet light blue light gray orange orange cyan white light yellow yellow Strong echo lighter hue high brightness Weak echo darker hue low brightness Selection of a PD Map curve Touch the PD Map key and select the PD Map curve by touching 1 to 8 Note lf desired activate Gently Color For more information see Gently Colors on page 8 37 8 4 4 PD 2D Spectral Doppler Triplex Mode Triplex mode is the simultaneous real time display of 2D mode Power Doppler and Spectral Doppler There are two possibilities to combine Power Doppler PD with Spectral Doppler Information 1 PD 2D Mode PW Doppler Pulsed Wave Doppler In scan mode it is possible to switch between PD menu PW menu and the Submenus to readjust the settings 2 PD 2D Mode CW Doppler Continuous Wave Doppler In scan mode it is possible to switch between PD menu CW menu and the Submenus to readjust the settings 8 5 HD Flow Mode Bi directional Angio Mode Directional Power Doppler HD Flow is a Power Doppler mode incorporating the flow direction much like Color Doppler into the di
327. ed will increase in temperature by 1 C almost every scanning situation departs from the assumed model conditions such as tissue type blood perfusion mode of operation and actual exposure time of the scanned area However the thermal indices provide information regarding the possible increase in the risk of potential thermal bioeffects and it provides a relative magnitude that can be used to implement ALARA In addition to tissue heating due to the generated ultrasound field the temperature of the probe head itself can also increase during the examination The operator shall be aware that in the tissue region near the ultrasonic transducer there will be a superposition with the heating due to the ultrasound field which is not considered by the TI values Nonthermal effects refer to mechanical phenomena such as cavitation Nonthermal bioeffects are caused by the interaction of ultrasound fields with very small pockets of gas stabilized gas bodies i e the generation growth vibration and possible collapse of microbubbles within the tissue This behavior is referred to as cavitation Medical Ultrasound Safety 2nd Edition AIUM 2009 American Institute of Ultrasound in Medicine Consensus Report on Potential Bioeffects of Diagnostic Ultrasound AIUM 2008 Guidelines for the safe use of diagnostic ultrasound equipment Safety Group of the British Medical Ultrasound Society 2010 The potential of cavitation increases with Voluson E8 E8 E
328. em MV and then select Manual Trace A cursor appears on the Doppler spectrum 3 Move the cursor to the start point of the period and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker Begin trace Note To re adjust the traced line press the upper trackball key Undo repeatedly 4 Trace to the end of the period and press the Set key again to fix the mark Remark To select the Doppler measuring results which should be displayed after the measurement Auto Manual Trace and to select if the envelope curve will be performed with a continuous trace line or by setting points Manual Trace Mode For more information see Application Parameters on page 16 77 12 7 6 1 2 To measure the Items One by One 1 Press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select MV and then select the appropriate item 3 Perform the measurements by using the trackball and the right or left trackball key Set Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 12 7 6 2 AV Aortic Valve 2D Exit MV TV PV LVOT Meas Applicat RVOT PAP HR Sheet Vmax Acc Time AR Trace Time Study Trace Angle Baseline There are different methods to perform measurements and calculations of the Aortic Valve in the Spectral Doppler mode The measurement methods are similar to those of the Mitral Valve For further details re
329. ement inaccuracy For more information see Accuracy of measurements on page 11 20 This symbol will also be shown on the patient report in the report header if the performed XTD View measurements are stored in the report For more information see Basic Patient Worksheet Functions on page 12 3 Situations that could lead to problems during measurements Pulsing object Deformation of the object during scanning id Long images long scanning distance error propagation with increasing the number of images i Out of plane scanning curved track 6 8 Contrast Imaging Injected contrast agents re emit incident acoustic energy at a harmonic frequency much more efficiently than the surrounding tissue Blood containing the contrast agent stands out brightly against a dark background of normal tissue Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 6 35 2D Mode Possible clinical uses are to detect and characterize tumors of the liver kidney and pancreas and to enhance flow signals in the determination of stenosis or thrombus The Contrast Imaging is subdivided in two groups To use Contrast Imaging Contrast Main Menu on page 6 36 To adjust the Contrast Imaging settings Contrast Sub Menu on page 6 39 To use special utilities Utilities on page 14 2 and Gray Map on page 6 27 6 8 1 Contrast Main Menu This mode only works with selected probes For more information see Chapter 5 Contras
330. ements e g Flow Diameter Vessel Area Vessel Diameter i Stenosis Area Stenosis Diameter O The measurement procedures in 2D Mode are the same than in application Abdomen For N more information see Abdomen Calculations on page 12 10 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 65 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 12 12 4 Neurology Calculations in M Mode gt Vessel Diameter Stenosis Diameter Time gt HR Heart Rate zon The measurement procedures in M Mode are the same than in application Abdomen For J more information see Abdomen Calculations on page 12 10 12 12 5 Neurology Calculations in Spectral Doppler Mode Auto Trace Manual Trace ad Measurement of Each Item Measurement of PS ED RI SD Time HR Heart Rate a The measurement procedures in Spectral Doppler Mode are the same than in application MX Abdomen For more information see Abdomen Calculations on page 12 10 12 12 6 Neurology Worksheet Press the Worksheet key on the control panel or touch the Worksheet key in the Calculation menu to view the report that contains detailed results of neurology calculations Dris aiim OMDAT Pegs 1 5 Eran ype ome Dok Harireatba Pot DOL 47 407 24 1 Ferree 20 Mano sunenmeanis Pier i mr md Left ACA Al 34 02 em Ves rey Flaw Bam TTi cm Deanar hanneman Eae Catt ACA 31 92 omis ED ELA eme A BL amwa af
331. emplate on the monitor you can start adjusting If you cannot see the heart template on the monitor press the Plane Graphic button The heart template appears Adjust the US image using the X Y Z rotary controls and the zoom button so that it fits the template To adjust the center of rotation see Principle of Sectional Image Analysis on page 10 20 Press the Set Starting Plane button If you have not been in TUI mode the monitor will switch to TUI mode now The following menu will appear on the touch panel p Render Sectional Planes amame a TUI Standard Set New Plane a Start Plane Cardiac 7 Cardiac 2 Cardiac 3 SS D Cardiac 4 Cardiac 5 Slices Distance Yol Cine i 1 0 Ti Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode 5 Now select the view you desire Press Cardiac 1 to view the left outflow tract RABAF DIOE Mi 1 2 S6em 1 6 136Hz Tis 0 1 Oriap200s 11 44 21 AM RAB4 B MW0OB Mi 1 2 B6cmi161135Hz7 Tis 0 1 RABAS DIDOB Ml 1 2 66cm 16I 135H7 Ts 0 1 070006 11 44 21 AM 5 Le or press Cardiac 6 to view the fetal aortic arch Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 141 Volume Mode RABA DIOE Mi 1 2 b6em 1 6 136Hz Ts 0 1 OFOR008 11 44 21 AM 10 15 2 Before VCAD Operation Pear feo ee oe Planes re More Ea Breech Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 142 H48691CF Revi
332. en z p a dara Histogram Monitor TI select Tis 7 Biopsy Kit PEC 63 134 153 Line Guided Biopsy Touch Ser Brightn 30 Console Keyboard gt Backgr 10 Brightn 100 Brightn 100 Beeper Volume 50 Press Lock Screen to activate the Lockscreen function 14 1 7 2 Emergency Mode When Lock Screen is active there are two possibilities to enter the system again Firstly you can gain full access by typing in the password or secondly you can click the Emergency soft key to enter in Emergency Mode Emergency Emergency Mode allows you to scan a new patient and to save his her data but you will not have access to the last patient previous exams or the worklist Click the Lock Screen soft key in the Utility menu to leave Emergency Mode and obtain full access again You will be prompted to enter your password Screen 14 1 7 3 Changing Password When Lock Screen is active you can also change the existing password Press the the Change PWD button The following dialog appears Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 10 Utilities and System Setup Change Screenlock Password SEE HE EE 1 Enter the current password 2 Then enter and retype the new password Note A valid password must be at least 6 characters long and has a maximum length of 80 characters A password must contain at least 2 non letter characters 0 9 or 3 Press S
333. en an exam is selected from the exam list the left margin of the screen and the touch panel show the exam menu Archive Exam e _ Patient Opens Current Patient Screen see Current Patient Dialog on page 13 3 mage History istory mage History ee 29 History Opens the Image History Screen see Image History on page 13 34 Exam Review Opens the Exam Review Screen see Exam Review on page 13 35 Reopen Exam Allows you to reopen old exams see Exam Menu on page 13 23 pom exam Detals pom exam Detals ATE Exam Details Allows you to view the Exam Details see Exam Menu on page 13 23 Edit Data Opens the Edit Data menu and allows you to edit the data of the selected patient see Patient Menu on page 13 21 Worksheet m Worksheet Press the Worksheet button if you want to enter or review data and comments into the worksheet of the currently selected exams see Exam Menu on page 13 23 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Tsa Archive Delete Deletes the currently selected Exam see Data Transfer Menu on page 13 28 Exit Close the Exam Review dialog and return to the running exam Search To conduct a search enter the required criteria and press the Search button see Searching for a Particular Exam on page 13 14 Show All Shows all Patients see Searching for a Particular Exam on page 13 14 13 3 5 1 Reopen Exam This button allow
334. enosis Diameter 12 4 3 1 Distance Measurements To measure a distance in 2D mode a a a ea bladder Pancreas Spleen Kidney Right Aorta Vessel Port V aren RenalA Work Sheet Applicat Length Height Width V Diam Study Last 1 Press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the desired item For example select Liver 3 Select the desired measurement parameter For example select Length 4 Use the trackball to move the cursor to the start point of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker A second cursor appears 5 Move the second cursor to the second point of the measurement and press Set again Note To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key Change before completing the measurement This alternates the control from one cursor to the other 12 4 3 2 Vessel Area Vessel Diameter To measure the Vessel Area or the Vessel Diameter in 2D mode Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 11 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports a as eS a a Liver Pancreas Spleen Kidney bladder Vessel Port V a Work Area Area Clear Study Diam Diam Meas Applicat Last 1 Press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the desired item For example select Left Renal Artery 3 Select the appropriate measurement parameter Vessel Area or Vessel Diameter A Use the track
335. entire 2D image area The upper trackball key changes between TD Box position and TD Box size and vice versa t decrease the vertical TD box size 4 increase the vertical TD box size A gt increase the horizontal TD box size decrease the horizontal TD box size 8 6 2 2 TD Gain Control TD Gain must be adjusted properly to ensure that continuous flow is displayed TD Gain should be set as high as possible without displaying random Color speckle If you set the TD Gain control too low the lack of sensitivity will make it difficult to detect small abnormalities in flow and will possibly result in an underestimation of the large flow disturbances C Mode key adjusts the TD Gain When the GAIN control is turned clockwise the Color gets more intense When the GAIN control is turned counterclockwise the Color gets less intense 8 6 2 3 2D 2D TD The 2D 2D TD function changes the single image display to two simultaneous half frames The left frame shows only the 2D mode image The right frame shows the 2D mode image also with color information Switch on off this mode by touching the 2D 2D TD key 2D 2D TD 8 6 3 TD Sub Menu The TD Main menu must be active Touch the Sub TD key The TD Submenu appears Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 8 25 Doppler Modes Note 8 6 3 1 TD Map cmisec Rise 6 a Quality norm Some functions are only available in scan mo
336. enu Press the left trackball key once more the spectral display will be frozen and the 2D image returns to scan mode The Track Ball functions are displayed in the Status Bar area on the monitor and you see which function is active Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Doppler Modes 8 2 2 3 CW Gain Control CW Gain controls the amplification of the incoming Doppler signals The Doppler gain should be adjusted to a level that fills in the gray scale of the spectral analysis waveform without creating a noise The PW Mode key adjusts the CW Gain Rotation adjusts the amplification brightness of the entire displayed spectrum When the GAIN control is turned clockwise the entire spectrum gets brighter When the GAIN control is turned counterclockwise the entire spectrum gets darker Remarks e The current gain value is displayed on the screen GN e Changing the CW Gain is only possible in scan mode independent from additional modes such as Color 8 2 3 CW Sub Menu The CW Main menu must be active Press the Sub CW key The CW Submenu appears Display Format ggr 40 Off Scale Unit cmis Dyn Contr 30 i PRF Baseline 12 0 kHz Note Some functions are only available in scan mode The following functions are available 8 2 3 1 View Modes For more information see AMM Main Menu on page 7 76 8 2 4 CW 2D Color Information Triplex Mode Triple
337. er frame The touch panel shows the M Main menu Three display formats are possible For more information see Display Format on page 7 7 The Freeze key stops the 2D image and M mode trace and automatically switches to Calculation Mode Menu For more information see Chapter 77 Note By pressing the Freeze key again the M cursor appears on the active 2D image The image automatically switches to Loop 7 2 3 M Gain Control With the Gain control the overall brightness of the M mode trace can be adjusted The adjustment of the Gain control determines the amount of amplification applied to the received echoes All received echoes are amplified with the same gain value regardless of the scan depth The M Gain function influences the M trace only M Mode key rotate it to adjust the gain brightness of the entire image When the GAIN control is turned clockwise the entire image gets brighter When the GAIN control is turned counterclockwise the entire image gets less bright M Remark The current gain value is displayed on the screen GN 7 2 4 Sweep Speed On the M Main menu you will find the Speed key For more information see M Main Menu on page 2 By touching or six different sweep speeds can be selected 7 2 5 Invert This function inverts the M mode image from Up to Down in the M mode display area Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 7 4 H48691CF Revision 2 M Mode
338. er information can be retrieved from Bioeffects amp Safety of Diagnostic Ultrasound AIUM 1993 and Evaluation of Research Reports Ultrasound Bioeffects Literature Reviews 1992 2003 2 8 5 Reporting Tables Acoustic output reporting tables according to the below cited standards are provided in the Advanced Acoustic Output References Particular requirements for the basic safety and essential performance of ultrasonic medical diagnostic and monitoring equipment IEC 60601 2 37 2nd Edition 2007 Information for Manufacturers Seeking Marketing Clearance of Diagnostic Ultrasound Systems and transducers FDA Guidance 2008 Ultrasonics Field characterization Test methods for the determination of thermal and mechanical indices related to medical diagnostic ultrasonic fields IEC 62359 1st Edition 2005 2 9 Disposal This symbol indicates that the waste of electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed as unsorted municipal waste and must be collected separately Please contact the manufacturer or other authorized disposal company to decommission your equipment according to local regulations 2 9 1 Battery disposal Replace only with same type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used battery Lithium battery included with this device Do not puncture mutilate or dispose of battery in fire according to manufacturers instructions and in accordance with your local regulations The separate collection symbol is affixe
339. er spectrum manually and to display the results according to the Auto Trace setting in the Measure Setup touch the Manual Trace key on the touch panel A cursor appears on the Doppler spectrum 2 Move the cursor to the start point of the period and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker Begin trace To re adjust the traced line press the upper trackball key Undo repeatedly 3 Trace to the end of the period and press the Set key again to fix the mark Remark To select the Doppler measuring results which should be displayed after the measurement Auto Manual Trace and to select if the envelope curve will be performed with a continuous trace line or by setting points Manual Trace Mode 1 To measure the velocity in Spectral Doppler mode touch the Vel key on the touch panel A horizontal line appears on the screen Z Move the line to the velocity point desired and press the right or left trackball key Set 11 1 4 5 Acceleration Note 1 To measure the accelerated velocity in Spectral Doppler mode touch the Accel key on the touch panel A cursor appears on the screen 2 Move the cursor to the start point of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker A second cursor appears 3 Move this cursor to the second point of the measurement and press Set again To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key Change be
340. erial number ad Probe designation provided on the top of the connector housing so it is easily read when mounted on the system and is also automatically displayed on the screen when the probe is selected Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Probes and Biopsies Note Symbols used on the label Description of symbols and labels on page 2 3 GE Healthcare REF Has65 IHW EY IPM C ae aBa TD 7 0 a LONTTEEUNUNR GE reseed Auriria T R ED iil rele 1 Probe type A RAB25 DIGYN Mi 12 ISOcmii1 36Hz Tie 02 OSNTMO0G 10 47 55 PN Displayed Probe Information 1 Probe Information Location 5 1 3 Applications The manual refers to probes that can be connected to the device It might be possible that some probes options or features are NOT available in some countries Below is a list of all probes and their intended applications GYN CARD BREAST URO NEURO X X ee C Se ee O a a a a e C eS a a a C Se ee a C a e Ce E C Se SS ee a ES Ce ce fF FF C ee ee ee LS CS C Cs r Ca Le Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 5 3 Probes and Biopsies 2D Probe ABD SMP Applications PA6 8 D GYN CARD BREAST URO NEURO an ae NEURO SP10 16 D 4 10 D lt 09 CARD BREAST URO 3D 4D Probe ABD Applications RAB2 5 D pe RAB4 8 D pe RAB6 D ee RAM3 8 Pe RIC5 9 D pa RIC6 12 D ee RM14
341. erver from the list The following dialog will appear DicomConfig Confirm this dialog with OK 14 2 5 3 4 To Specify a DICOM Address Dicom Configuration To open the DICOM Configuration window press the D COM Configuration button on the Device Setup page Add To add a new DICOM node click on the Add button Edit To edit or view data of a DICOM node select one and click the Edit button Delete To delete a DICOM node select one and click the Delete button After clicking the Add or Edit button the DICOM Device Setup window appears e g PRINT DICOM Configuration Services IP Address 492 168 1 1 Alias ViewPoint Port 104 AE Title ViewPoint Storage Commit Color Color Image Size Original 2D Compression JPEG 2D JPEG Quality high Cine Compression JPEG Cine JPEG Quality high Volume Compr jossy Volume Compr Quality high Send image as image Send 2D Cine as Multiframe Send 3D Volume aS DICOM Volume Send 4D Cine as DICOM Volume DICOM Image Type default Multiframe FPS Limit Unlimited KA KI K K K K K K KN Kn Ke EKER ES KN KR KR Send Measurements as SR mo Include Scan Assistant yes Data To specify a DICOM address define the following fields Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 35 Utilities and System Setup Services Select STORE to send screen images 2D cine sequences and 3D 4D data toa DICOM server e g Radworks Server Select STORE 3D to send
342. es Studies or Measure Items on page 16 10 To Edit a Sub Category Study or Measure Item on page 16 11 Fetal Weight Settings Estimation Shows the current selection Click on this field to create a New or Edit the setting Age by EFW Shows the current selection Click on this field to create a New or Edit the setting EFW GP SD Shows the current selection Click on this field to create a New or Edit the setting Create a new Fetal Weight setting Edit a Fetal Weight setting 16 3 1 1 To Add a Sub Category Study or Measure Item 1 Select the relevant item in all the digest column s and then highlight the one where you want to add an entry For example Biometry 2D 3D Early Gest Measure column where you add an entry Fetal Biometry CRL Hadlock Early Gest GS Hellman Long Bones YS Fetal Cranium BPD Hadlock AFI FL Hadlock Uterus NT Ovary 2 If necessary mark an item in the selected digest column e g YS 3 Select the Add button Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 16 5 Measure Setup Add Subcategory Position i Ae Sub Category Add New 4 Select a position field It is also possible to replace an existing item Add To add an existing preset select the desired entry marked blue from the sub window and d then click on the Add button and then click on Close New To create a new entry click on the New button
343. es All Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 13 25 Archive Current Patient Opens Current Patient Screen see Current Patient Dialog on page 13 3 Image History Opens the Image History Screen see Image History on page 13 34 _ Exam Review Opens the Exam Review Screen see Exam Review on page 13 35 Image Properties Allows you to view the Image Properties see Image Area on page 13 25 This button is only available if exactly one image is selected ue Delete Deletes the currently selected Image see Data Transfer Menu on page 13 28 Exit Close the Exam Review dialog and return to the running exam Search To conduct a search enter the required criteria and press the Search button see Searching for a Particular Exam on page 13 14 Show All 13 3 6 1 Exam History Exam History Date 06 25 2007 Note Exam History is only available when a new exam has been started 06 25 2007 Date Selector Selection of previous exams After selecting a date from the pull down menu the thumbnail images from the corresponding exam will be displayed Note If more than one exam is available for that date the latest will be displayed Image thumbnail gt Show next page of thumbnails controls gt gt Show last page or thumbnails lt Show previous page of thumbnails lt lt Show first page of thumbnails Measurement Ope
344. escribes the general functions of the utilities and system setup like setup procedures and backups Sections in this chapter oa Utilities on page 14 2 System Setup on page 14 11 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 1 Utilities and System Setup 14 1 Utilities Utilities hardkey After touching Utilities the touch panel changes to the Utilities menu Guided Biopsy Biopsy Kit select Biopsy Line select sed H48681AT hra MEX 1 MBA 2 MBX 3 Touch Ser Brighi 41 Console Keyboard Backgr TA Brightn 100 Brightn 100 In the Utilities menu you find keys for programming the System and keys to switch on functions To leave the Utilities Menu for the previous operating state press the Exit key For programming review System Setup on page 14 11 Chapter 16 For switching on functions review i Monitor on page 14 3 od Histogram on page 14 3 External Video on page 14 6 s Thermal Indices on page 14 7 i Guided Biopsy on page 14 7 sd Lock Screen on page 14 8 14 1 1 Changing Brightness of the UI and Master Volume There are three rotary controls on the lower edge of the touch panel which change the brightness of different parts of the User Interface Brightness of the Touchscreen Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 14 2 H48691CF Revision 2 Utilities and System Setup Touch Ser Brightn 92 Console Br
345. ess Set again The distance between the two points is displayed To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key Change before completing the measurement This alternates the control from one cursor to the other 5 Press Freeze to return to the scan mode record the next image and then press Freeze again Press the Calc key on the control panel select the Q2 item and then perform the measurement using the trackball and the right trackball key Perform the distance measurement of Q3 and Q4 in the same manner Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 25 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 12 26 12 6 4 5 Early Gest NT To calculate NT the Nuchal Translucency Note Sheet Applicat Fetal Long Fetal Biometry Bones Cranium AFI a m P po i P3 Umbilical Lt Fract Clear Uterus Lt Ovary Vein Uterine Limb Vol Study me ee acs es ve FP er Hadlock Hellman Hadlock Hadlock p Cancel NT Methode E Sonat Manual NT Same as standard distance measurement For more information see 2D Mode Measurements on page 77 4 SONONT Switch to SonoNT by using the NT Method flipswitch and follow the instruction Press the Calc key on the control panel and choose Early Gest Touch the NT key Use the trackball to move the cursor to the start point of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set
346. et To view a Worksheet To edit a Worksheet To change the Application Exam Comment To transfer a Worksheet To view previous Worksheets To print a Report The Obstetric Worksheet provides some additional functions For further details review Obstetric Calculations in 2D Mode on page 12 22 12 3 1 To view a Worksheet Press the Report key on the control panel or touch the Worksheet key in the Calculation menu to view the patient worksheet that contains the result of calculations The worksheet appears as follows e g Obstetrics summary report Calc Nome Test Poll DLO 7 09 07 07 1 Inceooten LHP 03 10 2003 GAILMP DOC GALAUAJ EFW Hodlock Value me 20 Measurements ALA Value BPD Hodbock a 4 53 cm OFD HC 5 35 cm HE Hodlock 15 21 cm HC Hodbock 15 55 cm 20 Calculations Cl BPD OFD 8596 70 BEW Growth Percentile GP bars Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Cote ci Eam GPON D Poge 1 5 Enam THp Peri Phys LAGE Ref Paps Sex Female SO et EDO LMP 12 15 2009 G Ab 190d EDDIAUA 12 01 2009 P Ec Range Age Range GP Williams HIA Heth GP Age avg Ht gt O7 7 19wSd avg i i 922 lowed 96 1 lowd Growth value position within the confidence interval Growth value just too small for the confidence interval 12 5 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports Growth value much too small for
347. etrospective cine mode all frames that have been captured will be saved when the Freeze key or the Px key are pressed Then the cine clip will be saved time adjustable Prospective Cine When saving the cine clip in prospective cine mode all frames will be saved beginning at the moment of activating the cine time adjustable 6 3 3 Edit Clip After the cine has been stored it can be edited Ta Press the upper trackball key to enter the Edit Clip mode The stored cine clip can be cropped by defining a start and a end image Use the trackball to scroll through the images To define a start image use the left trackball key Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 6 16 H48691CF Revision 2 2D Mode To define a end image use the right trackball key QL To exit the Edit Clip mode press the upper trackball key iC 6 3 4 Cine Split Function After Freeze of a sequence in Multi format 2D mode two or four different images of the sequence can be displayed simultaneously in Dual or Quad display mode Move the trackball horizontally to display the 2D images of the stored sequence aa You can also use the flipswitch below the touch panel Using the Format keys you can change to the next part of frozen 2D image sequence to play back the cine memory Remarks In Dual image mode 2D cine each image takes half of the memory as in Single mode s In Quad image mode 2D cine ea
348. etry Interval Time pause in minutes between two attempts to establish a non successful DICOM connection Test Connection Test the connection to a DICOM station This test may take up to 30 seconds First select the station to test with the right or left trackball key then click the Test Connection button If the TCP IP connection to the remote station is active OK will appear in the Ping line If the DICOM server on the remote station is active OK will appear in the Verify line This button appears only if Service Report and Transfer via serial port is selected 14 2 5 3 1 Add a server Press the Add button to add another server to the list The following menu will appear Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 33 Utilities and System Setup DICOM Configuration Services IP Address 192 168 1 1 Alias ViewPoint Port 4104 AE Title ViewPoint Storage Commit Color Color Image Size Original 2D Compression JPEG 2D JPEG Quality high Cine Compression JPEG Cine JPEG Quality high Volume Compr lossy Volume Compr Quality high Send image as Image Send 2D Cine as Mulitiframe Send 3D Volume aS DICOM Volume Send 4D Cine as DICOM Volume DICOM Image Type default Multiframe FPS Limit Unlimited K KO KO KOKU KKK KN KR KN KS KR KN KR KR Send Measurements as SR mo Include Scan Assistant yes Data Remarks It is possible to add more than one STORE STORE 3D
349. ew Small probe tip and Needle diameters lt 1mm lt 1 4 mm lt 2 2 mm shaft CFM HD Flow Power and PW Doppler Broad bandwidth Multi frequency Material Stainless Steel Sterilization with autoclave possible 5 3 3 2D Probes Curved Array Convex Probes 5 3 3 1 AB2 7 D Curved array transducer AB2 7 D Biopsy PEC71 H46721D Biopsy PEC83 H48671ME 1 Patient applied part 2 Probe handle Abdomen e Obstetrics e Wide field of view ba Biopsy guide available CFM MCFM HD Flow Power Tissue and PW Doppler Broad bandwidth Multi frequency Needle diameters Needle diameters lt 1mm lt 1mm lt 1 4mm lt 1 4mm Gynecology Pediatrics lt 2 2 mm lt 2 2mm Urology Material Material Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Sterilization with autoclave possible Sterilization with autoclave possible Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Probes and Biopsies 5 3 3 2 4C D Curved array transducer 1 Patient applied part 2 Probe handle Obstetrics Wide field of view Only CIVCO manufacturer needle guides may e Abdomen Biopsy guide be used with this biopsy CFM MCFM HD Plastic Flow Power Tissue and PW Doppler Broad bandwidth Multi frequency Multi angle biopsy Only the biopsy bracket is reusable For detailed information please contact the manufacturer 5 3 3 3 M6C Curved array transducer DP 1 Patient applied part 2
350. ew page will be shown first The next step Is closing the Exam And finally the Current Patient page will be displayed b Request Exam Comment on End Exam If this check box is checked you will be prompted to enter an Exam Comment upon pressing the End Exam button Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 15 9 Programmable Keys c Show New Patient Screen after End Exam If this check box is checked an empty Current Patient screen is automatically opened upon pressing the End Exam button Note If both check boxes namely Open Review Page on End Exam and Show New Patient Screen after End Exam are selected then the Exam Review page will be shown first The next step is closing the Exam And finally the Current Patient page will be displayed 4 Send There are three check boxes You can choose up to three different destinations where to send your images or cine data to Choose the destination from the drop down list To alter the drop down list see Connectivity on page 14 37 5 Print There are three check boxes You can choose up to three different destinations where to print your images or cine data or reports Choose the destination from the drop down list To alter the drop down list see Connectivity on page 714 37 Print Worksheet to Report Printer on End Exam If this check box is set worksheets will only be printed at an assigned report printer 6 Actions after
351. ex Wide Angle Beta View Inversion Real time automatic Doppler calculations Patient information database Image Archive on hard drive 3D 4D data compression lossy lossless Annotation text tool Two independent text layers A B Auto text memory max 400 terms with 12 characters 40 terms for each application 10 applications available Body pattern tool 117 types organized in 10 anatomical groups Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 18 10 H48691CF Revision 2 Technical Data Information Measurement amp Including worksheets reports for Calculation tools OB GYN Vascular Cardio Abdominal Small Parts Urology Pediatrics MSK Neurology Multi gestational Calculations and Fetal Trending User programs max 35 settings per probe 5 applications per probe each application max 7 Program presets 10 default programs one for each application not programmable by the user possibility to have special user programs marked with the graphical FMF Logo 3D 4D sub programs max 105 settings per probe 5 applications per probe 3 sub application max 7 Programs 18 8 System Options 18 8 1 VE8 Software Coded Contrast Imaging Contrast Option ma Media Additional Information Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 18 11 Technical Data Information 3D 4D Options e g Advanced STIC Advanced VCI SonoAVC are only available if Advanced 4D is
352. eys mouse emulation Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 5 14 H48691CF Revision 2 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Trackball mouse position positions the cursor arrow on the desktop Upper trackball key right mouse button no function in system desktop are HHA 35 5 Ba TTET s zanda DICOM Spooler Opens the DICOM job spooler window on screen Connectivity on page 14 31 Remove USB Devices Opens a dialog window with all medias that can be unplugged For more information see Remove USB Devices on page 17 4 Set Home Home An image annotation function For more information see Annotation on page 4 27 Text A Text B Switch to the Image annotation menu For more information see Auto Annotation on page 4 27 Description of the System Left trackball key left mouse button sets fixates markers and activates pages buttons etc marked by the cursor Right trackball key left mouse button sets fixates markers and activates pages buttons etc marked by the cursor Opens a dialog window with all medias that can be ejected Delete Measurements Deletes all measurements Delete Abc Deletes all image annotations in the preselected layer Arrow lIndicator Toggles the shape of the cursor You can choose between 2 shapes hand arrow For more information see Auto Annotation on page 4 27 Description of the System EUM
353. f neighboring pulses are less weighted for the image which improves detail resolution and signal to noise ratio Eight steps are provided Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 8 32 H48691CF Revision 2 Doppler Modes Touch the Line F key and select the filtering 8 7 15 Quality ES Ss ee ee This control improves the Color Resolution by reducing the image frame rate respectively it reduces the Color Resolution by increasing the image frame rate era cnc a Quality control digipot There are three steps for the Color Quality uail norm high higher color resolution lower frame rate normal normal color resolution medium frame rate low lower color resolution higher frame rate Remarks The current quality status is displayed on the touchpanel and on the screen Qual 8 7 16 Real Time Trace With the Real Time Auto Trace function the envelope curve of the Doppler spectrum maximum velocities and the corresponding evaluation is automatically displayed on the monitor 1 Touch the RT Trace key to display the curve for the maximum velocities envelope curve simultaneously with the Doppler spectrum key unlit Real Time Trace is switched off key lit Real Time Trace is switched on When starting the Doppler spectrum the results according to the Auto Manual Trace setting in the Measure Setup are displayed and updated every time a new heart cycle is detected a 2 Touch this
354. f the box is only possible in 3D Pictogram Accept ROI Mode chapter 3D Pictogram Accept ROI Mode on page 10 54 8 The Rotation controls rotate the contents of the box relative to the render box Important With the rotation controls the direction of view of the 3D image is selected 10 4 1 3 3D Pictogram Accept ROI Mode Condition A 3D image being useful for a pictogram has to be displayed on screen otherwise adjust a useful 3D image before Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 54 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode Disable the Edit ROI key the green frame disappears in the Static 3D Render menu and select the Quad screen format key In this mode the rendered 3D image is used as a pictogram for the adjustment of the 2D sectional planes A B and C A green line inserted on the 3D image marks the position of image A B or C in relation to the rendered 3D image 3D Full size Display eS Single screen format key is illuminated The rendered 3D image is magnified and displayed in a full size format without the sectional planes A B and C To change the view of the rendered 3D image xX Rotation around X axis Y Rotation around Y axis Rotation around Z axis Adjust the magnification of the rendered 3D image For orientation P Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 55 Volume Mode 10 56 The 3D image as well as the sectional image can be varied
355. ference measurement of the left ventricle by using the trackball key and then press the right or left trackball key Set 5 Move the trackball to the longitudinal axis of the left ventricle and press Set to fix the endpoint 12 7 3 3 LV Left Ventricle To calculate the distances IVSd IVSs LVDd LVDs LVPWd LVPWs and RVDd in 2D mode Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 41 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports LV Simps MV TV PV RVOT AVLA Vol AL LV Mass LVOT ee Applicat Work Sheet LVDd LVPWd RVDd a LVDs LVPWs ance 1 Press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the item LV 3 Select the desired measurement parameter For example select IVSqd 4 Use the trackball to move the cursor to the start point of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker A second cursor appears 5 Move the second cursor to the second point of the measurement and press Set again Note To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key Change before completing the measurement This alternates the control from one cursor to the other 6 Measure the next distance in the same manner and so on ly Finish either all of the diastolic or all of the systolic measurements first and deactivate the cursor by pressing the Pointer hardkey Pressing the upper trackball key allows for accessing Ss the cine
356. following functions are available Persistence and Frame Filter on page 6 20 Line Filter on page 6 20 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 6 19 2D Mode CRI Filter on page 6 20 ad Dynamic Contrast on page 6 27 Optimized Tissue Imaging OT 1 on page 6 27 Enhance on page 6 21 i Reject on page 6 21 Line Density on page 6 27 Gray Map on page 6 21 Utilities on page 14 2 6 4 1 Persistence and Frame Filter Persistence is a frame averaging function that allows elimination of image speckle from 2D meer images With a higher persistence setting more frames are averaged Persistence 1 to 8 can f be set in the 2D Sub menu in scan mode The Persistence filter is displayed in the Image Info area on the screen Remark This function is not available if CrossBeam Compound Resolution Imaging XBeam CRI is switched on CrossBeam Compound Resolution Imaging XBeam CRI on page 6 9 Frame Filter is a frame averaging function that allows elimination of image speckle from 2D images If CRI is activated the Frame Filfer button is available Frame Filter 6 4 2 Line Filter The Line Filter smoothens the image in the direction parallel to the probe surface or in a curve How much filtering is used can be adjusted by the user more filtering reduces noise at the expense of detail in the image Line Filter Three steps are provided off low hig
357. fore completing the measurement This alternates the control from one cursor to the other 11 1 4 6 RI Resistivity Index 1 To measure the resistivity index as well as the peak systolic and end diastolic velocity in Spectral Doppler mode touch the RI key on the touch panel A horizontal line appears on the screen 2 Move the line to the peak of the systole and press the right or left trackball key Set A second line appears Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 11 17 Measurements 3 Move the second line to the end of the diastole and press Set again 11 1 4 7 PI Pulsatility Index 1 To measure the pulsatility index the time averaged maximum velocity as well as the peak systolic and end diastolic velocity in Spectral Doppler mode touch the PI key on the touch panel A cursor appears on the screen 2 Move the cursor to the beginning of the waveform Vmax and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker Begin trace Note To re adjust the traced line press the upper trackball key Undo repeatedly 3 Trace to the end of the waveform Vd and press the Set key again to fix the mark 11 1 4 8 PS ED Peak Systole End Diastole Ratio 1 To calculate the Peak Systole End Diastole ratio in Spectral Doppler mode touch the PS ED key on the touch panel A horizontal line appears on the screen 2 Move the line to the peak of the systole and press the right or
358. format will be present in freeze and scan mode ERA 6 Select the Quality This function changes the line density against acquisition speed Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 37 Volume Mode low Fast speed low scan density A loss of volume resolution will result This mode is selected only in case of expected movement artefacts Standard VOL scan medium scan density Slow speed high scan density To start the VCI C acquisition press the Freeze key or the right trackball key Start gt displayed in Status bar area on the monitor T The volume acquisition starts and the acquired images are displayed Press the Freeze key again to stop the acquisition For more information see After the VCI Omni View Acquisition on page 10 101 10 2 6 1 Omni View Controls Use the upper trackball key to switch between moving or rotating the Omni View line with the 16 rackbal Move or rotate the Omni View line cs Use the left trackball key to start a new Omni View line Use the Z rotary control to rotate the Omni View position line 45 DoS For further controls and possible adjustments For more information see 4D Controls on page gN 10 89 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 38 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode 10 2 6 2 VCl Omni View Curve Line To adjust the Omni View Curvature Line press the Omni View Curve Line button on the touch panel
359. formation With Gently Color the embedding of the color into 2D mode is performed smoothly with less color flash Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 8 31 Doppler Modes Switch on off the Gently Color function 8 7 12 Invert This function inverts the spectrum display in relation to the direction of flow The displayed spectrum is inverted around the baseline The velocity or frequency scale changes accordingly Use Invert when necessary to change the spectral display orientation It is possible in both freeze and scan mode Forward flow indicates Blood flow towards the transducer RED spectrum above baseline Reverse flow indicates Blood flow away from the transducer BLUE spectrum below baseline Invert key on the touchpanel key unlit Normal Forward flow above the baseline RED Reverse flow below the baseline BLUE invert key lit Inverted Reverse flow above the baseline BLUE Forward flow below the baseline RED 8 7 13 Line Density This function determines the line density within the TD box The lower the line density the greater the distance between lines and the size of the color pixels Touch or on the Line Dens key and adjust the line density 7 max value 10 min value 1 step size 1 8 7 14 Line Filter X E Especially the lateral resolution can be optimized with this correlation algorithm With this process the signals o
360. fter boot up Click the New button to set up a new profile For more information see Network profiles on page 14 46 Click the Rename button to rename the highlighted network profile Click Switch fo to change the currently active network settings to the ones stored in the highlighted network profile Click Delete to delete the highlighted network profile Click OK to confirm changes or Cance to abort the operation Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Utilities and System Setup 14 2 5 9 3 How to set up network profiles After clicking the Mew button the following dialog appears Add Hetwork Profile Profile Mame Private practice Copy Settings from a Current Settings amp Standard Specify a name for the network profile in the Profile Name text field There are two options to Copy Settings from Current Settings The current network setup of the system is stored in the network profile The drop down field lists all stored network profiles Choose this option and the desired source profile to copy the settings to the new profile Click OK to save the network profile or press Cancel to abort the operation 14 2 5 10 Button Configuration For more information see Chapter 15 14 2 5 11 Drives Note When mapping a network drive or USB drive following message my appear Getting Volume Information of attached devices This may take some time Window Number 1 contain
361. g environment Electrical contacts and connectors must not be cleaned Do not use any other cleaning agents than listed in the table below Do not spray any liquid directly on the system Probe holder Probes daily or after Wipe gently with a damp IPA solution 70 IPA 30 each non abrasive cloth water examination Sani Cloth Active disinfecting wipes Acryl des daily or after See Probe Care Card and Probe Maintenance on page 2 18 each examination Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Safety and Maintenance User interface daily or after Wipe gently with a damp Spiritus dilutus 70 ethanol each non abrasive cloth 30 water examination e Acryl des Touch panel daily or after Wipe gently with a damp Spiritus dilutus 70 ethanol 30 each non abrasive cloth water examination Monitor display daily or after Wipe gently with Petroleum benzene each absorbent cotton or other examination soft material like chamois Housings daily or after Wipe gently with a damp IPA solution 70 IPA 30 each non abrasive cloth water examination Sani Cloth Active disinfecting wipes Acryl des et anaes e g Clean according to the instructions of the peripheral manufacturer printers 2 3 6 1 Safety Test Scan time limits According to respective national regulations and according to the manufacturer recommendations for the medical technical system Range Visual inspection
362. g it to the 0 position Danger of injury Do not lift the system with the front handle of the user interface Be gentle and careful when adjusting the monitor or locking monitor parts gt BD b 2 3 5 ECG preamplifier MAN The ECG preamplifier type MAN is an option of the ultrasound scanner system used to obtain an ECG signal to mark the systolic and end diastolic moments in M mode and Doppler evaluations Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 2 11 Safety and Maintenance 2 12 s The ECG preamplifier MAN is not intended for ECG diagnosis It must not be used for an intra operative application of the heart ia Monitor Not for use as a cardiac monitor z Only the patient cable supplied by GE Healthcare Austria GmbH amp Co OG and only recommended electrodes must be used Take care that neither bare parts of one of the three electrodes nor the patient comes into contact with conductive parts e g metal parts of the examination bed trolley or similar z If the use of a HF surgical system with simultaneously connected ECG electrodes becomes necessary a large distance of ECG electrodes from the surgical field and a perfect position of the neutral electrode of the HF surgical system must be observed avoiding burning risk s If the use of a defibrillator becomes necessary there must be no ECG adhesive electrodes and no conductive paste between the correct positions of the defibrillator plate
363. ge 14 49 The directory structure of the full backup data is as follows Address gt z fullbackup Folders a ga My Computer a E E Test 21 bA Fl Fbi f 3 Data H Files H Data C Files Every Full Backup resides in a sub folder of the main fu backup folder found at the root of the drive For example Z fullbackup The sub folders have the names fbX where Xis a number e g Z fullbackup fb1 The data resides within a directory structure within these sub folders It is possible to move the fOX sub folders even leaving gaps in the numeration sequence However NO change MUST be made to the contents of the bX folders itself otherwise the backup data cannot be restored 2 4 Probe Safety and Maintenance 2 4 1 Handling Precautions A In case HF surgical equipment is used in combination with an ultrasound probe placed on the patient the following protective measures have to be taken to avoid the risk of burns to the patient 7 Keep a large distance between the HF surgical field and the applied ultrasound probe i Ensure that the neutral electrode of the HF surgical equipment is correctly positioned Ultrasound probes are highly sensitive medical instruments that can easily be damaged by improper handling Use care when handling and protect from damage when not in use DO NOT use a damaged or defective probe Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious injury and equipment da
364. ging etc For 3D Gray Map selection 3D Gray Chroma Map on page 10 45 1 Touch the Sub xx key regardless which mode is active and then the Gray Map key The Gray Map menu appears key bright The Gray map selection assigned to this mode 2 Select either a predefined Gray Curve 1 18 or a user definable Gray Curve User1 3 6 5 1 1 Gray Edit Menu Edit menu When touching the Gray Edit key the Edit menu appears on the touch panel and the graphic display of the Gray Map is shown on the monitor With the Edit function it is possible to create a Gray Map curve Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 6 22 H48691CF Revision 2 2D Mode Map position select Save and Exit Exit Return to the previous menu Note that changes in the Edit menu will not be stored The gray map valid before entering a new one in Edit mode will be valid again Pos By touching one of these keys you select a certain position on the Gray curve Note If you Exit now changes in the Edit menu are stored under the selected pos key and the key position remains active in the Gray menu BRIGHT GRAY F graphic display on screen Operation 1 Select the position to modify by touching one of the Pos 1 to Pos 7 keys on the touch panel 2 The selected point can now be positioned with the trackball in X and Y direction 3 To change the position of the other points proceed as in 1 and 2 4 Touch one of User 1 to
365. gs from the database Save To save settings with the active Settings select menu Return Back to the User Setting main menu Default A change of the default setting is protected by a password The User cannot change the label Default Note Buttons which will activate HDlive Mode are marked with the HDlive logo 14 2 3 2 3 To Adjust the Trackball Speed Trackball speed 1 Select the Trackball speed button in the System Setup General User Settings page The Trackball Speed menu appears on the monitor Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 14 20 H48691CF Revision 2 Utilities and System Setup Caliper Motion Cursor H Boo pen fsire Coke Woie HO oom R barn peri tinny TO image fois pavion 2 Cina Folunf images Cake Cire Defneli Settings iam meum 2 Adjust the desired Trackball Speed for each function low high using the trackball and the right or left trackball key Set 3 Select Save or Save amp Exit The trackball speed settings are saved in the database Exit Back to the last active menu without saving Save To save the current Trackball Speed settings Return Back to the User Setting main menu Default Settings A change of the default setting is protected by a password The User cannot change the Default Settings 14 2 3 2 4 To Enter Overwrite Text Auto 1 Select the Text auto button in the System Setup General User Se
366. h Yes to overwrite the existing follicle or press No to cancel Trackball controls in SonoAVC general Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 137 Volume Mode Cut Split With this function a follicle can be separated in to two follicles Or two overlapping follicles can be seperated Procedure Cut Use the trackball to move to the cut start 0 position Press Cut Split and define the cut trace line using the trackball gt gt Press Cut Split again Procedure Split Double click Cut Split for splitting two overlapping follicles Repeat if required Merge With this function two follicles can be merged to a single follicle Procedure Use the trackball to move to the merge start position Press Merge and define the merge trace line Mi OR using the trackball lt Press Merge again Add Remove With this function follicles can be added or removed Use the trackball to move over a segmented follicle and press Add Remove the follicle will S be removed Procedure Add Use the trackball to move over a not yet segmented follicle and press Add Remove the follicle will be added AO Merge With this function two follicles can be merged to a single follicle Procedure Remove 10 14 2 2 SonoAVC general sub menu Enter the sub menu by pressing More gt on the touchscreen Following menu appears SonoAVC Sub Menu 3D Bright 3D Contrast Background
367. h off no filtering low filtering of two lines 12 5 75 12 5 high filtering of three lines 25 50 25 Remark This function is not available if CrossBeam Compound Resolution Imaging XBeam CRI is switched on CrossBeam Compound Resolution Imaging XBeam CRI on page 6 9 6 4 3 CRI Filter If this filter is set to high the XBeam CRI image is smoothed CRI Filter setting off leads to a sharper impression of the XBeam CRI image Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 6 20 H48691CF Revision 2 2D Mode Four settings are provided off low mid and high OFF Remark This function is not available if CrossBeam Compound Resolution Imaging XBeam CRI is switched on CrossBeam Compound Resolution Imaging XBeam CRI on page 6 9 This process smoothens the final image structures can be smeared out For diagnosis the Region of Interest must be viewed without CRI filter as well A smoothed i image could lead to false diagnosis 6 4 4 Dynamic Contrast For more information see Dynamic Contrast on page 7 7 6 4 5 Optimized Tissue Imaging OTI The function OTI allows the examiner to fine tune the system for scanning different kinds of tissue 3 Use the OTI control to adjust the respective parameter Four positions are possible Ye adipose solid cystic or normal tissue Remark Setting the relevant parameter can improve image quality 6 4 6 Enhance For more i
368. h autoclave possible Note This probe ts only available on Voluson E8 Expert RAM3 8 RM6C Biopsy PEC81 H48651PN 1 Patient applied part 2 Probe handle Abdomen Obstetrics Gynecology Urology Pediatrics 3D 4D Real Time Imaging Wide field of view Small probe tip and shaft CFM MCFM HD Flow Power Tissue and PW Doppler Broad Bandwidth Multi Frequency V SRI Biopsy guide available Needle diameters lt 1mm lt 1 4mm lt 2 2mm Material Stainless Steel Sterilization with autoclave possible Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 9 3 1 8 RIC6 12 D Note This probe ts only available on Voluson E8 Expert Biopsy PEC63 H46721R RIC6 12 D 1 Patient applied part 2 Probe handle Applications Obstetrics e Gynecology Urology Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 3D 4D Real Time imaging Wide field of view Small probe tip and shaft CFM MCFM HD Flow Power Tissue and PW Doppler Broad bandwidth Multi frequency Needle diameters lt 1 8mm Material Stainless Steel Sterilization with autoclave possible Probes and Biopsies Biopsy H48681GF H48691Z 134 153 a N Needle diameters gt 1 2 mm lt 1 6 mm Material Plastic Sterile packaged component Single Use only with latex cover For detailed information please contact the manufacturer Probes and Biopsies 9 3 1 9
369. h resolution LCD display with DVI interface High brightness 220 cd m Tilt Rotate ba J Controls tilt 40 90 rotate 90 Digital brightness amp contrast adjustment OSD remote controlled by the system three default settings available Dark Room Semi Dark Room and Bright Room Safety classification IEC60950 and IEC60601 1 1 18 3 System overview Applications Scanning methods Transducer types Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 OB GYN Vascular Cardio Abdominal Small Parts Urology Pediatrics MSK Neurology Electronic Sector Electronic Convex Electronic Linear Mechanic Volume Sweep Sector Phased Array Convex Array Micro convex Array Linear Array Active Matrix Convex Array 1 25 1 5D Active Matrix Linear Array 1 25 1 5D Volume probes 4D Convex Array Micro convex Array Active Matrix Convex Array 1 25 1 5D Linear Array Active Matrix Linear Array 1 25 1 5D Pencil probe CW Technical Data Information Operating modes 18 4 Screen Formats 2D Imagine TL Imaging 3D 4D Imaging 2D Mode M Mode conventional M Mode AMM Anatomical M Mode PW Doppler Mode CW Doppler Mode High PRF Doppler Mode Color Flow Doppler Mode CFM Power Doppler Mode PD HD Flow Doppler Mode HD Flow Tissue Doppler Mode TD B Flow Mode BF XTD Mode Contrast Agent Mode Contrast M Color Flow Modes M CF M HD Flow M TD Ela
370. h the Vocal key The VOCAL settings menu appears on the touchpanel VOCAL Settings Manual Trace Contour Mode renee Finder Sphere 9 15 Rotation Step 30 Type of structure Ref Image E seen Hypo B Start Cc Sensitivity 5 3 Select the desired contour generation mode For details see Selection of a VOCAL Generation Mode on page 10 117 Note lf desired change the VOCAL Settings of the chosen VOCAL Generation Mode For details see VOCAL Settings on page 10 115 4 To start defining a new contour touch the Start key 10 12 3 VOCAL Settings Selection of Rotation Steps The Rotation Steps define how many contours have to be generated The decision which rotation step should be chosen depends on the shape of the ROI Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 115 Volume Mode For example An angle setting of 30 means that after the fist trace has been done the volume data set is rotated 30 and then the next trace has to be performed and so on With rotation step 30 6 traces have to be done Se Man Rotation Step 6 30 9 20 15 12 and 30 6 traces Tips and Tricks For symmetrical roundish structures a 30 rotation step is fine for all generation modes For irregular shapes select 15 for Manual Trace and Contour Finder Trace and 9 for Contour Finder Semi auto Trace generation mode Selection of Typ
371. he Image History Screen see Image History on page 13 34 Exam Details Opens the Exam Details dialog see Exam Menu on page 13 23 Worksheet Opens the Worksheet see Exam Menu on page 13 23 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 13 36 H48691CF Revision 2 Archive Picture Exam Comment Opens the Exam Comment dialog see Commenting on page 13 47 Delete Deletes the currently selected Patient see Data Transfer Menu on page 13 28 Reproduce a scan Repro For more information see Repro on page 13 40 End Exam Closes the active exam This button is only available if the exam displayed in Exam Review Mode is the currently active exam Exit Close the Exam Review dialog and return to the running exam The exam can also be close by pressing the Exit or the Freeze keys on the User Interface Layout Use the drop down menu to select how many images of the selected exam you wish to view see Formats on page 13 42 Double Click on Display the image that was double Image clicked as Full Screen Arrow Keys Use the arrow keys 2 and 3 to navigate through the exam row by row and turn pages when the end of a page is reached or use the upper 1 and the lower 4 arrow key to go to the first respectively the last image Layout 243 Image The image numbering allows you to Numbering navigate through exams easily The numbers left of
372. he black box to mark them all Calculate Z scores based on Check the appropriate check marks BPD FL GA Sono AVC Graph The Sono AVC graphs can be edited in millimeters or in cubic centimeters Data Check DICOM SR if Sono AVC data has to be sent via DICOM Cut off follicles Defines the follicle cut off range for SonoAVC Follicles are separated in SonoAVC and in the report Data Transfer Choose between Voluson format or DICOM SR Data will be sent in the chosen format Transfer all values On default All follicle values will be transferred including the cut off follicles Off The cut off follicles will not be transferred all other follicles will be transferred Sono NT IT Defaults Default Tool Default NT IT measurement tool Note If Aiton SonoNT is not available 1 Manual radio button is selected 2 The whole Default a Change Control lt gt Yes No Enable or hide the algorithm switch on the touch panel Switch between i i or i m Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 16 18 H48691CF Revision 2 Measure Setup Magnification Hint Clear SonoNT Graphics If the checkbox is ticked the SonoNT ROI Clear IT Graphics and NT border will be cleared after the SonoNT measurement has been accepted Checkbox Combined BPD HC Radio button BPD method outer outer or outer inner HC Checkbox on off ee ee 16 3 3 Global Parameters Global Praameters Menenerment
373. he DICOM Send button DICOM Send a a ae ce S he following window appears Select the destination from the drop down list using trackball and buttons The selected images of the exam s will be sent to the selected DICOM storage destination Press DICOM Config to customize your DICOM server For more details see Connectivity on page 14 37 After selecting the exam s to be printed using the trackball and the left or right trackball key Set click the Print button All selected images of the exam s will be printed at the selected printer be it a local or DICOM printer Although the menu looks the same as the menu in System Setup this Printer Settings menu Is solely for print jobs initiated with the Px buttons or from Archive If you want to edit printer settings for print jobs initiated with the End Exam button please refer to Connectivity on page 14 37 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 13 29 Archive 13 30 Note 13 3 7 3 Export Note Printer Settings Printer atzipFsvO1 doku lpr 4 Portrait Landscape Format ll Y Layout Preview __ Include Image Comments __ Include Page Numbers _ Include Header Lal White Bac kg round 1 Firstly select the printer from the pull down menu 2 Then choose the format Portrait Landscape by selecting the correct radio button Watch Layout Preview for the effects of your selections Set the Include Image Com
374. he shell can be defined The shell can be imagined as a layer of tissue around the lesion where the tumor vascularization takes place j Automatic calculation of the vascularization within the shell by 3D color histogram by comparing the number of color voxels to the number of gray scale voxels The follow up control of tumor volume and vascularization delivers information on the proper dose of medication or radiation and is therefore a measure for the success of treatment After definition of a contour in 3D space a wide range of functionality is given definition of a shell contour visualization of a shell contour as a surface or wire mesh volume calculation of a shell contour histogram calculation of ultrasound tissue inside a shell contour visualization of ultrasound tissue inside a shell contour as a rendered image niche presentation of contour and slices cine rotation calculation The basic idea behind VOCAL II is the combination of 3D ultrasound tissue presented as voxels and the geometric information of surfaces in a 3D data set The main interest of VOCAL II is the volume calculation of tumors or lesions The principle operation steps are given in this diagram 10 12 1 Definitions 10 112 Definition of the Surface Geometry The Surface Geometry is defined by rotation of an image plane about a fixed axis main contour axis and the definition of 2D contours in each plane The 2D contours can be
375. he Exams List To Select the Exams To Sort the Exams To Search for Exams To Review the Exams For more information see Exam Review on page 13 35 To Delete Exams To Send Exams To Print Exams To Export Exams To Backup the Exams To Restore the Backup Exams 13 6 1 To Use the Exams Only List Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 13 43 Archive Click the Archive button Patients amp Exams Exams Only Click the ExamsOnly radio button and the display format is changed to a list of exams only Show All Click the Show All button and the complete list of exams is displayed Source Local Auchive hud Seach Patert ID a Palarii amp Erant e Esami ri Ensen E Patient I gt Patient Hame Ezom Ome ExamTime ExamType Sey Fa Douga Douglas E E EEH bee Free Mi of Erami Seledied Ersatt Selecied Imager Z To change the display of the Exams List review Searching for a Particular Exam on page 13 14 13 6 2 To Select the Exams Select the Exam desired using the trackball and the right trackball key Set Remarks For selecting multiple exams hold down the Ctrl or Shift key on the alphanumeric keyboard and select the desired exams using the trackball and the right trackball key Set i The user can confirm the capacity of an appropriate medium Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 13 44 H48691CF Revision 2 Capacity 1
376. he cut The region underneath the eraser will be cut from the 3D rendered image Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 70 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode 4 Cut Type This selection is only possible in render mode Glassbody Gray and color Gray only Color only 5 Cut Depth Cut Depth D efined To finish Full The entire depth of the selected region in the 3D rendered image will be cut Define Select the cut Depth you desired with the Depth control below the touch panel Press the right or left trackball key Done The region underneath the trace will be cut from the 3D rendered image 6 Perform the next cut Rotate rendered image to another position and continue with points 2 to 4 again Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 71 Volume Mode 7 Cut Undo Cut Undo E All Erases all cuts performed Last Erases the last cut done one after the other All Switch off MagiCut mode The Static 3D Render menu appears Note If the Edit ROI button is pressed while a cut 3D image Is displayed a message Is displayed on the touch panel MagiCut changes get lost Do you want to continue 10 4 4 Render Mode Image Type and Render Algorithm For a good 3D image please note the following application hints 1 Surface Modes Adjust the render box in a way to have free sight from the render start area to the surface to be displayed S
377. he printer queue Selection of the appropriate function For each Foot Switch only one selection is possible Load the default printer settings 14 2 5 3 DICOM Configuration DICOM is the abbreviation of Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine This is the industrial standard for communication of images and other information between medical devices on the network Using the DICOM option you can send or print images after connecting your ultrasound equipment and PACS This dialog section is used to set up details of all of your DICOM target nodes image servers Once you have set up a DICOM node properly data can simply be transmitted by selecting the appropriate target node Dicom Configuration 14 32 To open the DICOM Configuration window press the D COM Configuration button on the Device Setup page Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Utilities and System Setup DICOM Configuration AE Title Station Name Retry Count Retry Intervak Timeout s 45 Sound Notification a Color Original AE Application Entity Title Please enter the Application Entity Title under which your DICOM application is known to other DICOM applications required For setting the correct AE Title please contact your DICOM network administrator Station Name Please enter the name of the hospital or institute V Retry Count Number of retries to establish a non successful DICOM connection R
378. he same manner ene 6 After you have defined the contours in all image planes touch the Done key The result Done is displayed on the monitor and the VOCAL Edit menu appears on the touch panel To edit the contour review VOCAL Edit on page 10 123 1 Return to the VOCAL Modes menu Return Clear 10 12 4 4 Contour Finder Semiauto Trace This function allows you to outline any lesion by tracing the object on the touch panel with your finger or using a stylus for touch screen input Same as used for PDA s DO NOT use any spiky object Compared to Contour Finder Trace only 2 planes one at the initial position the other one at 90 rotation have to be traced The boundary of the ROI at all other rotation steps is found by means of the contour detection algorithm via automatic interpolation We recommend to select 9 or 15 rotation step For details review VOCAL Settings VOCAL Settings on page 10 115 Finder tee nini Finder 1 In the VOCAL Modes menu touch the Contour Finder Semiauto Trace contour mode key 2 To define the contour touch the Start key 3 Outline the first contour on the touch panel VOCAL Creation wry Contour Finder Semiauto Trace etum Clear Modify Selection Sensitivity 5 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 121 Volume Mode 4 Select the next image plane by means of this control below the touch panel o
379. he user is interested in the bubble wash in characteristics of the anatomy being scanned Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 2D Mode aoerreve Touch Enhance Max to set the acoustic output to its maximum setting 100 On Touch Enhance it again to reset the acoustic output to its previous setting Off ax 6 8 3 2 Speckle Reduction Imaging SRI Touch the SRI key to activate the SRI function and change the level of smoothing using the and keys on the touch panel For more information see Speckle Reduction Imaging SRI II on page 6 9 6 8 3 3 Contrast Clock The Contrast Clock measures the time since injection perm Touch the Contrast Clock button to activate it at the time of injection On Touch it again to SEO deactivate it at the end of the exam Off Clock P3 i Ed z Ai 10 00 Contrast Clock Contrast Clock T2 is displayed in the lower left corner of the image It will continue to display during a freeze probe change mode change multi image and zoom 6 8 3 4 Time Delay Time Delay scans images at set intervals delaying imaging according to the time delay specified Time Delay can be controlled by turning the digipot Values are 0 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Time Delay 0 0 and 10 seconds Press the digipot to change between 0 and the last selected value Remark The Time Delay is deactivated if you exit Contrast
380. he virtual light source and the surface color The position of the virtual light source is indicated by a graphical icon located at the bottom right corner of the rendered 3D or 4D image Figure 10 1 HDlive Mode Controls The two new controls on the touch panel HDlive Surface and HDlive Smooth can be activated in Render Mode Both controls are active at the same time and cannot be combined with other modes 10 17 2 How to activate HD ve 1 Activate 3D or 4D volume mode 2 Select the preset HDiive 3 Activate 3D or 4D acquisition mode Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 149 Volume Mode 4 Select Render Mode on the touch panel and press More VCI 4D hanay Omni View Shia Biopsy gt ai Setting Application Obstetric renee a a Surface Surface big Skeleton Fet Cardio Fet C fast TUI DEFAULT Sectional Tul Planes Table 10 3 How to activate HDlive 10 17 3 How to position the virtual light source There are two ways to position the virtual light source 1 Touch the Edit Lightbutton and move the trackball to the desired position 2 Hold the small center button below the trackball _ to activate the Virtual Light function Then move the trackball to the desired position 10 17 3 1 How to edit presets Presets can be activated or stored by pressing the Edit Light button in Render Mode The button is only available if HDiive Surface HDlive Smooth or Grad
381. he volume box is important for a good render result After freezing the image size can be adjusted manually if desired or play back the Volume Cine Condition for Real Time 4D Software option Real Time 4D is installed A Real Time 4D probe is connected and selected Operation 1 Activate Volume mode hard key Following menu appears on the touchpanel Planes tation BAURAN MagiCut arora wae Mode Calc Ref Image 3D Orientation B 90 tilt 180 270 Mix 100 0 T tow 25 2 Select a 4D user setting e g Default The preset values are loaded Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 79 Volume Mode 3 Select the display format desired Note The selected format will be present in freeze mode after the Real Time 4D acquisition is done The Dual screen format key is only available in Real Time 4D Render mode 4 Place the Volume box over the region of interest The trackball has two functions position and size of the Volume box The activated function is displayed in status bar area on the monitor Press the upper trackball key to change the function of the trackball from position to size or 16 eet 5 Change the size of the Volume box by moving the trackball Moving decrease the box size in vertical direction increase the box size in vertical direction increase the box size in horizontal direction decrease the box size i
382. ht Testicle Length T T cem Width 4 52 cm Height 3 51cm Volume 64 13 cm the BIRADS Page With this flip control below the touch panel additional worksheet pages can be selected e g 113 Date ofExam 18 06 2007 Page 2 4 Exam Type Name sopiuid Pat ID DO3003 07 06 18 3 l Breast Checklist Left Shape _ Round Oval irregular Orientation Vertical axis Margin i Smooth Spiculated angulated Lesion boundary _ Hyperechog rim sign Echogenicity _ Isoechogenic to fat _ Hypoechogenic Posterior echo _ Hyperechogenic _ Hypoechogenic C Plane Compression pattern _ Retraction star pattern Perfusion _No perfusion _ Hyperperfusion Vessel architecture Irregular Summary for Lesion Position Lesion BI RADS Category ultrasound adapted Axillary lymphn iNormal Multiple Lesions J No To close the worksheet touch the Return key on the touch panel For more information see Basic Patient Worksheet Functions on page 12 5 12 6 Obstetric Calculations 12 6 1 Obstetric Calculations Subcategory Biometry Application Obstetric Factory Sub Category Biometry allows measurements calculations in 2D 3D mode M mode and Spectral Doppler mode using various measure items For more information see Measure amp Calc on page 16 3 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 12 20 H48691CF Revision 2 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports The methods for obtaining measurements e g Gestational Ag
383. iam AV Cusp Separation Ao Root Ampl MV D E E F Slope A C Interval E EPSS E S Dist HR Heart Rate Doppler Mode MV Mitral Valve AoV Aortic Valve TV Tricuspid Valve PV Pulmonary Valve LVOT amp RVOT Doppler Left amp Right Ventricle Outflow Tract Pulmonic Veins PAP Pulmonary Artery Pressure measurement HR Heart Rate Other measurements amp Diast Vol Bi Syst Vol Bi Stroke Volume Volume Flow calculations Cardiac Output Ejection Fraction Fractional Fract Shortening Myocardial Thickness LA Ao Ratio E A Peak Gradient Peak Gradient Acceleration Mean Gradient Mean Gradient Acceleration VTI TVA PG PHT MVA AVA ERO etc For more information see Chapter 7 12 7 2 Before Starting Cardiology Calculations 1 Press the Patient key on the control panel select the CARD page and enter all patient information for Cardio calculations For details refer to Entering Patient Data on page 4 7 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 39 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports Note To cancel all calculations performed before and to start new measurement press this key and select End Exam or Clear Exam ss 2 Press Start Exam Start SEL 3 Make sure that the probe and application are selected properly If another application is selected press the Probe key on the control panel and change it to Cardiology For more information
384. ic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 3 1 Description of the System 3 1 Product Description The Voluson E8 E8 Expert is a professional innovative most versatile real time scanning system It opens new sonographic possibilities with the 3D 4D VOLUME scanning technique The vast array of probes makes it suitable for many applications Diagnostic possibilities 2D Mode Additional Operating Modes B Flow XTD View M Mode M Color Flow Mode Spectral Doppler Pulsed and Continuous Wave Color Doppler Velocity Power Tissue imaging and HD Flow Volume Mode 3D sectional image analysis interactive 3D rendering and Real Time 4D Note The application fields are dependent on the selected probe The system is designed for follow up expansion Operable probes Multi element probes linear array curved array phased array and pencil probes Real Time 4D Volume probes The operation is designed for the specific clinical requirements and ensures simple and efficient handling Vast ranges of measuring and evaluation programs as well as many special functions enable comfortable working The interface with interface software provides quick digital archiving of images and or volume data sets on mass storage medium A network interface Ethernet provides documentation in DICOM standard Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 3 2 H48691CF Revision 2 Description of the System 3 2 System Assembly 1 Monitor
385. ic User Manual 10 116 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode Selection of two contour points on the rotation axis main contour axis Pole 1 Pole 2 Note This selection is only available if generation Mode Automatic Sphere is selected Selection of VOCAL Generation Mode Start defining the contour generation mode appears For details review Selection of a VOCAL Generation Mode on After touching the Start key the VOCAL Generation menu of the selected contour page 10 117 Touch this key to choose another VOCAL Generation Mode For details review Selection of a VOCAL Generation Mode on page 10 117 iret 10 12 4 Selection of a VOCAL Generation Mode The main contour axis should pass the center of the 3D lesion The 3D object should be centered with respect to the rotation axis All defined contours in different planes cross the main contour axis at the position of the green arrows If not change the position of this line by using the trackball There are three major possibilities to generate a shell contour s Manual Trace gt Contour Finder Contour Finder Trace Contour Finder Semiauto Trace Automatic Sphere 10 12 4 1 Manual Trace This function allows you to manually outline any lesion by means of the trackball Alternatively trace the object on the touch panel with your finger The number of manually generated contours depends on the selected rotation step For detai
386. icates that the device is A Indicates a connector that allows for CWYy equipped with hardware for using CW Q e output only Doppler Indicates a connector that allows for input Indicates a connector that allows for in only _ and output Indicates a USB connector Indicates a network connector Connect the monitor cable to this Connect the monitor cable to this connector One cable used for power connector One cable used for power one cable used for signal one cable used for signal D x g pvisvea_ Indicates a DVI VGA output connector Indicates an S Video output connector Out O Push this button to eject a CD DVD from 22 am These symbols indicate that the DVD the drive drive can read and write DVDs O Use this button to change brightness and Use these buttons to navigate in the eee contrast of the monitor monitor menu bce Indicates the power connection for the lift Lock Unlock of wheels cylinder Batch or lot number Catalog or model number LOT Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 2 5 Safety and Maintenance Do not reuse This symbol indicates that the item device is for single use only Dedicated USB port on optional Digital Video Recorder DVR record to USB stick These symbols indicate that at least one of the six hazardous substances of the China ROHS Labelling Standard is above the ROHS limitation The number inside the circle is referred t
387. ication Pediatric Abdomen Abdomen 1 DEFAULT Threshold 40 Remarks In freeze mode changing the Speed Wall Motion Filter PRF and Gain is not possible In MHD mode only one focus zone is available When the MHD box is moved the focus position is set to the center of the Color box To use special utilities Utilities on page 14 2 and Gray Map on page 6 21 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 7 13 M Mode 7 6 2 MHD Operation The MHD operation consists of Color Box Size and Cursor Position Activation of MHD Mode MHD Gain Control Invert For more information see nvert on page 8 32 s Wall Motion Filter WMF For more information see Wall Motion Filter WMF on page 8 36 Velocity Range PRF For more information see Velocity Range PRF on page 8 35 bd MHD Cineloop For more information see M Cineloop on page 7 5 All further image optimizing functions are the same as those of the M mode For more information see M Operation on page 7 3 7 6 2 1 Color Box Size and Cursor Position a After pressing the PD and the M control adjust the Color box size and the cursor position A f using the trackball in the 2D single image The upper trackball key changes between cursor position and Color box size and vice versa 7 6 2 2 Activation of MHD Mode Press the right or left trackball key and 2D mode and MHD mode trace are active A The sc
388. ient Lightis activated In total there are 10 presets available 1 Touch the Edit Light button the Edit Light menu appears Position the virtual light source by using the trackball or the available preset buttons 2 3 Tosave the current virtual light position touch the Save button 4 To exit the menu touch the Exit button or press the trackball button Done Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 150 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode 10 18 System messages Probe motor control unit System message Message text HRS Motor Control Unit No probe reference position signal Motor Control Unit No probe reference position signal detected detected Action Confirm the message by pressing the Action Confirm the message by pressing the OK button and restart the system Check functionality with a different 3D 4D probe If the message appears again please contact the technical support OK button and restart the system Check functionality with a different 3D 4D probe If the message appears ox again please contact the technical support Error Motor Control Unit RS232 communication Error Motor Control Unit RS232 communication timeout timeout Action Confirm the message by pressing the Action Confirm th ss b ssing the OK butt d restart th k A OK button and restart the system If problem persists please contact the technical support If problem persists please contact technical support Voluson E8
389. ightn 87 turn counterclockwise less bright Brightness of the Console Keyboard Brightn 65 turn counterclockwise less bright Brightness of the Keyboard turn counterclockwise less bright Master Volume To adjust the Beeper Volume of the Voluson E8 E8 Expert flip the flip switch accordingly Beeper Volume 45 14 1 2 Monitor 1 Press Monitor on the touch panel The Monitor Menu appears Factory A Factory B Dark Room Dark Room Monitor Menu Monitor Settings Se mi Dark Room 2 Select the appropriate Setting Light Room Light Room Note Only a specific monitor type is supported by the system If a different type is detected during startup the following message will be displayed Wrong monitor tyoe or monitor firmware detected The installed software supports monitor type MDM100 MDM95 only If MDM100 or MDM95 is already installed the monitor firmware needs to be updated If MDM90 is installed the monitor needs to be replaced by MDM100 to avoid image quality issues 14 1 3 Histogram With this function the gray scale or color distribution within a marked Region of Interest ROI will be graphically displayed Three histograms may be shown on the screen simultaneously There are three possibilities to calculate the gray scale or color distribution Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 3 Utilities and System Setup s 2D Histogram e 3D Hist
390. ightness in depth Slide a slide control to the left to decrease the gain in the corresponding specific 2D depth Slide a slide control to the right to increase the gain in the corresponding specific 2D depth Remarks The standard adjustment of the sliders is the central position because of the preset time gain compensation for each scan head id The slider setting is not stored in a user program because of the absolute position of the sliders 6 2 5 2D Automatic Optimization This function will optimize the contrast resolution according to the histogram of the scan area The shape of the ROI will depend on the probe scan depth and scan angle The primary result is a value for the lower and upper endpoint of the histogram Pressing the auto key causes automatic optimization of the gray scale to enhance the contrast When the key is pressed again the optimization according to the histogram will be updated and remain active Double click the auto key to switch off the Automatic Optimization of the 2D mode image Remarks When the Automatic Optimization function is active the auto key is brightly illuminated When Automatic Optimization is active an asterisk nearby the Gray map number is displayed in the B mode Image Info area For example C5 M7 The Automatic Optimization is also possible in Pulsed Wave PW Doppler mode PW Operation on page 8 3 The Automatic Optimization is also possible in 3D 4D
391. image e g A turn the X rotary control counterclockwise By the clockwise rotation of the volume body relative to the screen plane as shown the new sectional planes are calculated in real time and displayed on screen For rotation around the Y axis of a reference image e g A turn the Y rotary control counterclockwise Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 22 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode wy W By the clockwise rotation of the volume body in relation to the screen plane as shown the new sectional planes are calculated in real time and displayed on screen For rotation around the Z axis of a reference image e g A turn the Z rotary control clockwise By rotation of the volume body in relation to the screen plane as shown the new sectional planes are calculated in real time and displayed on screen Important notes for the user sf Rotation should be performed slowly to understand the orientation For faster rotating push the rotary controls toggle switch slow rotation fast rotation Press again to return to slower rotation Do not rotate by large angles except when the orientation left right or up down is to be changed At 90 rotation around an axis the sections A B C will change 2 Reference image e g A X axis A C Y axis A B Z axis B C Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 23 Volume Mode Before performing a rota
392. inder is a tool that supports the physician by accelerating and simplifying the creation of a VOCAL contour Depending on the contents and quality of the ultrasound image the accuracy of the object boundaries found by the algorithm can vary It is essential for a correct diagnosis that all boundaries found by the algorithm are checked thoroughly in VOCAL Edit mode VOCAL Edit on page 10 123 before accepting the contour via the Accept ROI key Only well trained users who can judge the accuracy of the boundaries may use this feature for diagnosis Guidance and precautions for using VOCAL Contour Finder s The accuracy of the VOCAL volume calculation is dependent on the accuracy of every single VOCAL boundary The resulting VOCAL contour must be reviewed and checked by comparing the actual US image on the monitor to the boundaries displayed in each rotation slice Only the US image on the monitor may be used for diagnostic purposes The US Image on the touch panel is considered a part of the user interface only The image on the touch panel is not in any way suited for diagnostic purposes Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode There are two possibilities to generate a shell contour via the VOCAL Contour Finder function 1 Contour Finder Trace Finder Finder The actual line drawn on the screen is slightly modified to better fit the borders of the structure in the ultra
393. information see General on page 14 14 Note For more information see Keyboard keys on page 3 15 4 5 2 Auto Annotation This function is provided to rapidly insert terms into the displayed image 40 words for each application are user programmable Programming of the TEXT AUTO function For more information see General on page 14 14 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 4 27 Operating the System Layer B Layer A B Text Gyn Left Right Cranial Caudal Anterior Posterior Amnion Umbil Uterus Placenta Bladder oO Douglas Follicle Uterine A wary as a ae Cyst reer Tumor Grab Del Menu Page AiR bi Touchscreen RAB4 8 D ABD MI 12 18 9em 11 25Hz Tis 0 1 07 09 2007 08 27 29 AM Default 5 60 1 60 100 k d Gn 2 crime PS IED I Screen 1 Activate the Annotation Mode with the ABC key or Space bar The auto annotation menu appears on the touch panel and on screen 2 Touch a word button or select the same word from the screen using the trackball The selected word appears at the cursor position Select a new word a blank is inserted between the prior and new word or enter a character using the keyboard a blank is inserted between the prior word and the new character Text function is switched off but the entered text is not cleared Return to the last active menu Pressing the Text La
394. ing Elastography Analysis 1 2 10 If not yet in Elastography Mode press E asto on the user interface Perform the scan Proper manual compression decompression is indicated by a fully green quality bar See Figure Elastography monitor display on page 9 8 Press Freeze Press Elastography Analysis on the touch panel see Figure Touch panel Elastography Main Menu on page 9 6 The Elastography Analysis touch panel menu appears see Figure Touch panel Elastography Analysis on page 9 7 and the monitor screen shows the E astography Analysis display The valid Elastography frames are marked green See Figure Elastography Analysis monitor display example on page 9 10 Adjust start and end of the Cine Loop within the green frames using the rotary buttons below the touch panel Start Frame End Frame Press Setto confirm See Figure Touch panel Elastography Analysis on page 9 7 Activate the cursor and move it over the Elastography image on the top left side of the screen A yellow Region of Interest ROI appears By default this ROI is a circle It will be the reference ROI and should be placed in the normal breast tissue Position this reference ROI and press Set A yellow plot curve displays the strains over time on the right side of the monitor screen Move the trackball again A new ROI appears ROI 1 which should be placed in the lesion Position the ROI and press Set A second plot curve is displayed blue cur
395. ing read zoom has not effect whatsoever on the zoom box in the overview image i The overview window is available in Full Screen Quad Screen and Dual Screen and in the following modes B Mode CFM mode PD mode HD Flow B Flow and Contrast The overview window is not displayed in following modes PW mode CW mode M Mode and 3D 4D Mode If one of these modes is activated the overview window is hidden If the mode is deactivated again the overview window appears again All adjustments Zoom on off Overview Image size and position Zoom Box pos size etc are only applied to the currently active screen green Voluson E8 E8 Expert Logo and to all new screens updated after adjustment In Power Doppler Color Doppler and HD Flow mode the box size and the box position of Zoom box Is the same as the Color box size 10 When the box size or box position Is changed the Color box and zoom box are adjusted so that above relation remains constant The Zoom box is linked with the color box changes caused by steering such as steering angle or box size cause the same changes in the zoom box Color is only visible in the overview window if it was turned on before HD Zoom was activated Color does not move in the overview image In HD Zoom the overview image is not updated It is the last image before HD Zoom was activated In Pan Zoom the Overview image is updated with every frame Gray Chroma adjustment also affects Overview Image V
396. ing the measurement This alternates the control from one cursor to the other 12 7 3 8 AV LA Aortic Valve Left Atrium To measure the Aortic Diameter or the Left Atrium Diameter in 2D mode 1 Press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the item AV LA and then the desired measurement parameter Ao Root Diam or LA Diam 3 Use the trackball to move the cursor to the start point of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker A second cursor appears 4 Move the second cursor to the second point of the measurement and press Set again Note To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key Change before completing the measurement This alternates the control from one cursor to the other 12 7 3 9 PV Pulmonary Valve To measure the Diameter of the PV Pulmonary Valve in 2D mode 1 Press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the item PV and then the measurement parameter PV Diam 3 Use the trackball to move the cursor to the start point of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker A second cursor appears 4 Move the second cursor to the second point of the measurement and press Set again Note To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key Change before completing the measurement This alternates the control from one cursor to the other 12 44 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manu
397. iod LMP is entered in the Patient Information screen For more information see Patient Information screen on page 4 14 If Capitalize Letter in Patient Names is selected check mark visible the first letter in the Name fields Last First and Middle Name in the Patient Information screen will be automatically capitalized For more information see Entering Patient Data on page 4 7 If this check box is checked the worklist is automatically queried with the entered Patient ID or Patient name and the date of today when the worklist button is pressed in the Current Patient Screen If this box is not checked the worklist is only queried after the Search button is pressed in the worklist dialog If this box is checked only the patient name will be hidden If this box is unchecked all patient data will be hidden If this box is checked the worklist dialog will automatically appear when the Patient key IS pressed 14 2 3 4 5 Patient Listing Setting this check box automatically displays all available patients when opening the Current Pati ent Search or the Archive dialog If this box is not checked the patients are only listed after the Show all button has been pressed in the worklist dialog 14 2 3 4 6 Archive customize Exam columns Customize the patient exam tables It is Th possible to change columns in The Patient amp Exams menu last two columns e Exams only menu last
398. ion allows the user to save and work with the acquired Volumes Depending on the memory and volume size up to 128 volumes can be displayed The advantage of working with 4D VolCine is that during the acquisition the user can concentrate on the acquisition itself After acquisition the user has the possibility to review and work on the acquired volumes After Freeze the system switches automatically to freeze mode and the Volume Cine menu appears The selected format and the last acquired Volume will be present on the monitor Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode Planes p m MagiCut TP m Calc m aa Ref Image 3D Orientation ss ER el B 90 tilt awe A Quality Vol Angle TH low 25 39 t high2 25 Upon Freeze a certain number of volumes will be stored in the cine memory The sequence Freeze can be reviewed volume by volume To Display Auto Cine Touch this key to display the 4D Volume Cine menu To review the Volume Cine Sequence For more information see Auto Cine on page 10 95 Press the left trackball key to Start Stop the stored cine sequence 100 Move the trackball to display the volumes of the stored sequence one by one number will be displayed also in the monitor s status bar area Alternatively use the Vol Cine control to select the desired volume The selected Volume 85 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual
399. ion can lead to reduced image quality a See Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 37 Utilities and System Setup 14 38 Ultrasound images are consuming a lot of the system s memory resources Therefore the JPEG compression method can be applied to the images to reduce their size When selecting the JPEG compression less than 100 a message appears 1 Default single frame images will be sent as normal US DICOM files screen captures e g Patient ID report will be sent as secondary capture 2 second capture all single frame images and screen captures will be sent as secondary capture Voluson E8 E8 Expert Format is an internal format that provides full functionality upon reloading into the PC software 4D View Multiframe is a DICOM compatible format which allows 2D Cine review on most DICOM platforms Note PRINT By selecting Service PRINT the Printer Setup fields are available to adjust the printer configuration WORKLIST With a WORKLIST service a filter mask can be selected especially for patient data marked with Modality Ultrasound Enable Private Tags for communication with a ViewPoint system The Merge option determines if data from a worklist server should be merged with locally stored patient data Set this option to Yes to allow merging of worklist data or to No to discard worklist data The Ask setting causes a dialog box to pop up whenever
400. iopsy touch panel menus This section only describes 4D biopsy specific buttons on the touch panel For more information see Chapter 10 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 110 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode Mode Touch panel 4D Biopsy specific buttons Description Rectal Biopsy Mode for rectal probe Freehand No predefined biopsy line visible Guided Predefined biopsy line visible Mirror View Changes the view direction of the render box green i line on the screen to the opposite side For more information see Chapter 10 For more information see Chapter 6 4D Biopsy preparation mode for rectal probe 4D Biopsy preparation mode for other probes 4D Biopsy write mode 4D Biopsy read mode Table 10 2 Touch panel menus 10 12 VOCAL II Note VOCAL II is an option If this option is not installed the VOCAL key is hidden VOCAL II Imaging program opens up completely new possibilities in cancer diagnosis therapy planning and follow up therapy control It offers different functions Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 111 Volume Mode Manual or Semi automatic Contour detection of structures such as tumor lesion cyst prostate etc and subsequent volume calculation The accuracy of the process can be visually controlled by the examiner in multi planar display Construction of a virtual shell around the contour of the lesion The wall thickness of t
401. isplayed in the ultrasound image on Click this menu item to set the head direction as described in Set head ree direction on page 10 147 The check box controls whether or not the line is displayed in the ultrasound image Click this menu item to set the mid line as described in Set midline on page 10 147 The check box controls whether or not the line is displayed in the ultrasound image Click this menu item to measure the progression of the fetal head as described in Head progression distance on page 10 148 The check box controls whether or not the line is displayed in the ultrasound image Click this menu item to measure the progression of the fetal head as described in Head progression angle on page 10 148 The check box controls whether or not the line is displayed in the ultrasound image Click this menu item to delete all measurements for the current volume Skull Contour Set a new anchor point Head Direction Set start end point Mid Line Set start end point Progression distance Set end point Progression angle Set end point SonoVCAD abor main menu No function assigned Skull Contour Finish drawing Head Direction No function assigned Mid Line No function assigned Progression distance No function assigned Progression angle No function assigned SonoVCAD abor main menu Change between axis and image Skull Contour Undo last anchor point setting Head Direction Undo last
402. ist To alter the drop down list see Connectivity on page 14 37 5 Print There are three check boxes You can choose up to three different destinations where to print your images or cine data or reports Choose the destination from the drop down list To alter the drop down list see Connectivity on page 14 37 15 2 2 Detailed Setup Peripherals Dreice Setup Button Configuretion o a T Fa PA Stort Exom End Esam Overview Detailed Satup Chaboard Send max Cine Lergth Pik Swe Single T kend Sige r 20 Sawa Sane DiM Sow Single F DiM Send Siigie r DPE amel Send J0 Send 4D Sove ingie Volume ha 40 Send Screenshot 4D Sawefsend Orig imax fd maja Goma Request Comment imaga Comment Regus Comment Prnt Gann Line Caplurag ini Ran hoe Use Raport Printer for Reports TUE Gine by one Retrospective Worksheet All Poges 4 Prospective Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 15 6 H48691CF Revision 2 Programmable Keys 1 Clipboard a For each different mode 2D Doppler 3D 4D you can assign a saving format for saving onto clipboard see b Max Cine Length If you save a cine you can adjust its running time here If you chose an image this option is grayed out c Request Comment check box If marked an image comment will automatically be requested upon pressing the respective key 2 Send a For each different mode 2D Doppler 3D 4D you can assign a format for sending to your des
403. item in all the digest column s For example Biometry 2D 3D Early Gest GS Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 16 10 H48691CF Revision 2 Reorder Select the Reorder button Fetal Biometry Early Gest Long Bones Fetal Cranium AFI Uterus Ovary Select the item that has to be moved Measure Setup Measure I CRL Hadlock GS Hellman S BPD Hadlock FL Hadlock NT By means of these buttons you can change the position of the selected item To finish click the OK button 16 3 1 5 To Edit a Sub Category Study or Measure Item 1 Select the relevant item in all the digest column s and then highlight the entry to be edited For example Biometry 2D 3D Early Gest GS A Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 2 Select the Edit button Fetal Biometry Early Gest Long Bones Fetal Cranium AFI Uterus Ovary Imaging Mode ae Se ai miami ee Se cm tii m GS Hellman YS BPD Hadlock FL Hadlock NT 16 11 Measure Setup Reference Table Equation Fetal Age Fetal Growth Measurement Tool If available choose the desired Measurement Tool For example Select if the GS Gestational Sack is to be measured using one Distance value GS diameter or by using 3 Distances mean value GS diameter Selection Field Adjust the display in the worksheet and the measure result field Parameter set check mark
404. ition starts and the acquired images are displayed 10 Press the Freeze key again to stop the acquisition For more information see After the VCI A Acquisition on page 10 98 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 97 Volume Mode 10 8 1 VCI A Controls For further controls and possible adjustments see 4D Controls on page 10 89 sP For Inversion Render mode see Render Mode Image Type and Render Algorithm on page 10 72 10 8 2 After the VCI A Acquisition After Freeze the system switches automatically to freeze mode and the Vol Cine menu appears The selected format and the last acquired volume will be present on the monitor VCI A Volume Cine Render Auto Mode Cine Slice Thickness Vol Cine 31 Upon Freeze a certain number of volumes will be stored in the cine memory The sequence can be reviewed volume by volume For more information see Volume Cine on page 10 92 10 9 VCl Omniview Note Omni View Is an option If this option is not installed the Omni View key is hidden By setting the necessary sweep angle for the desired ROI the system provides a coronal plane Omni View The rendering box is very thin and so you can visualize the tissue information of a thick slice A mixture of surface texture and transparent maximum or X ray rendering modes 70 30 plus a low setting of surface transparency 20 50 is used The resulting image shows the average
405. izing the contour inside method 10 5 3 1 MagiCut 4D Operation enemas 1 Touch the MagiCut key to switch on the MagiCut function MagiCut Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 88 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode The following menu appears on the touchpanel 3D MagiCut Main Cut Mode Cut Type Cut Depth Cut Undo Trace All Outside ee A Box Box Defined GACE Outside n 2 Use the controls to rotate the rendered 4D image to a position where 4D artefacts or undesired information can be cut Note For faster rotation press on the rotary controls switch function slow rotation fast rotation If a contour is left open the program will automatically close the contour with a line directly from the end point to the start point For more information see MagiCut on page 10 68 10 5 4 4D Controls 10 5 4 1 Available Controls before the acquisition eh Press the lower left trackball key to adjust the render start curvature Press the lower middle trackball key to adjust the ROI 10 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 89 Volume Mode 10 90 Depth t Note To return to the 4D Mode menu press the right trackball key Volpre displayed in the status bar on the monitor Image Position Size of the Volume box and Curved render start The trackball has 3 functions Move the trackball to change the image position the size of the volume b
406. kes it easier to display pathology It adjusts the displayed cutoff of the Doppler analysis waveform to decrease brightness more gray shades less contrast to increase brightness fewer gray shades more contrast m max range 40 min range 10 step size 2 8 7 7 Ensemble C e A This function controls the number of pulses for one displayed line Since several pulses are to be evaluated for displaying a result the color display quality increases with the number of evaluated pulses With increasing Ensemble the frame rate decreases Touch on the Ensemble key and select the number of pulses per color line 7 max value 31 min value 7 step size 1 8 7 7 1 Ensemble for TD Touch on the Ensemble key and select the number of pulses per color line 7 max value 31 min value 3 step size 1 8 7 8 Flow Resolution This function controls the axial resolution of color in the display It adjusts the axial sample depth of color pixels high color samples in axial direction shorter low color samples in axial direction larger Touch the Flow Res key and select the axial resolution Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 8 29 Doppler Modes There are four steps for Flow Resolution low mid1 mid2 and high The keys serve for selection of either one of three formats 60 40 50 50 and 40 60 for display rra UD 60 40 _ 17 10 01 11 03 08
407. key repeatedly to select the Trace Mode channel of the envelope curve upper Trace M both lower upper 3 Select the sensitivity of the envelope curve to eliminate artefacts Sensitivity 60 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Doppler Modes 8 7 17 Scale Important note The determination of the envelope curve requires a clear and low noise recording of the Doppler spectrum Otherwise the reliability of the displayed measurement results may not be ensured Remarks Activating the Real Time Trace is only possible in scan mode How to assign a measurement study Condition In Measurement Setup Global Parameters the item Assign RT Trace results on Freeze must be set to Yes For more information see Global Parameters on page 16 79 If RT trace is on and Freeze is activated and condition above is true then the Calc menu appears with all functions disabled grayed apart from all study elements which can have a auto trace measurement The Application and Exit button are also available Operation 1 Before selecting a study adjust Angle Baseline Side and Position if necessary or cancel the assignment by pressing Exit or change Measurement Application or Study by pressing Meas Applicat 2 Select a study for example Mid ICA Standard Calc Menu appears and measurement item Auto Trace is active 3 Workflow now is identical with a standard Auto trace m
408. keyword to find Real Tene 4D a Tees l Touch the Render Mode key _bat Toxics The Render Mode menu appears on the touchpane Select Topic to deplay For details review Render Mode image Type and Algorithm 11 Vokme Mode chapter 11 6 4 11 1 Volume Acquisition with Volum 11 1 1 Princighe of Volume Acquisiti To invoke the Sub Menus 11 10 Real Tene 40 Biopsy 11 10 1 Real Tene 40 Biopsy Cort 11 10 2 Altes the Real Teme 40 Bio Touch the Sub Menus key ey ery bas ta EA The Sub Menu appears on the touchpanel 11 10 3 1 2 Raster Real Time 4D For further details review Sub Menus chanter LLI 11 5 Real Time 40 Acquistion 11 5 2 Real Teme 4D Acquistion D To change between differen Visualization modes 11 6 Volume re 11 6 1 Auto ne 11SSTIC Fetal Cardo Spato T Touch the 20498 Mode key during ater EENET 15 2 Image Review Acaisiion mai etree In the 20A Mode menu you can change to different 20 13 4 30 40 Probes Visualization modes 3 1 1 Product Descaption 3 3 2 Optional Modules 355 Hard k gt si GE Medical Systems Kretztechnik bet Aine cape dical comm Voke 43 2682 32000 Fux i 0682 O47 Dao Ewn kotsend p com 3 7 2 4 To Save a Favorite Topic You may find that there are topics you need to refer to often In this case it is a good idea to save these topics as Favorites 1 To save a topic as a favorite click on the Favorites tab 2 Highlight the topic in the
409. l H48691CF Revision 2 13 27 Archive 1 Now you can easily compare the image from the current exam with the old one from the Compare Window 2 Press the Close key again to close the History Clipboard 13 3 6 3 Image Properties Image Properties are similar to Exam Details Image Properties Allows you to view the Image Properties Click the buttons of the upcoming window to view image details study details series details equipment details regional calculation details patient details and as seen below file details HEr Gr ARCHIVE IPE aaeoa der MID Eeee Na ea A E 8 a PS Toa 2 4 00 E 13 3 6 4 Data Transfer Menu The options in the data transfer menu depend on what is selected on screen The options available when the image area is active are listed below For a detailed account of functionality please refer to Data Transfer Menu Data Transfer Menu on page 13 28 DICOM Send od Print Export Import Return 13 3 7 Data Transfer Menu The data transfer menu also depends on what is selected on screen All possible options are described in this chapter e DICOM Send Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 13 28 H48691CF Revision 2 Archive Print Export Import Return Returns to the menu where you came from 13 3 7 1 DICOM Send 13 3 7 2 Print Note After selecting the exam s to be sent using the trackball and the left or right trackball key Set click t
410. l Inside The outside surface 1 is equal to the reference surface geometry surface f p1 p2 p3 s The inside surface 1 is the surface geometry of the inner parallel contours with distance Shell Thickness 2 in mm If one of the inside contours is not valid the inside surface will not appear A contour is only valid if the rotation axis is crossed exactly twice Shell Outside The outside surface 1 is the surface geometry of the outer parallel contours with distance Shell Thickness in mm The inside surface 1 is equal to the reference surface geometry Shell Sym symmetric The outside surface 1 is the surface geometry of the outer parallel contours with half distance Shell Thickness in mm gt The inside surface 1 is the surface geometry of the inner parallel contours with ha f distance Shell Thickness in mm If one of the inside contours is not valid the inside surface is represented by an inner point the inside surface is not visible A contour is only valid if the rotation axis is crossed exactly twice Thickness 10 mm Be The thickness of the shell can be adjusted by using the left control below the touch panel To activate the selected shell thickness touch the Activate key Then the new shell Activate thickness is calculated Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 125 Volume Mode S The shell contour is accepted and stored
411. l The following menu appears and you can choose from the following options The Reference line can be deactivated by pressing the Omni View Line button the submenu When deactivated the line will disappear from the screen but short lines will still be shown Polyline 1 Line change the line in the usual way 2 Curve add a curve to the starting line of the render box 3 Polyline add multiple angles to the starting line of the renderbox 10 9 3 After the VCl Omni View Acquisition After Freeze the system switches automatically to freeze mode and the Vol Cine menu appears The selected format and the last acquired volume will be present on the monitor Upon Freeze a certain number of volumes will be stored in the cine memory The sequence can be reviewed volume by volume For more information see Volume Cine on page 10 92 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 101 Volume Mode The Slice key allows you to select the slice you wish to examine a gt The Cine key allows you to select the image from the stored cine you wish to assess To readjust the Slice Thickness touch More on the touch panel to enter the submenu Note The actual values for slice thickness may vary from probe to probe 10 9 4 Omni View Ref Line Omni View Ref Line shows any 3 slices on a reference image simultaneously on the screen Press the Quad screen format button
412. l scan mode Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 13 Volume Mode 3D Static Setting Application Obstetric Surface S keleton Sectional Planes Quality Vol Angle high2 65 2 Select a 3D user setting e g Default The preset values are loaded 3 Select Render or Sectional Planes 4 Select the display format desired Note The selected format will be present in freeze mode after the acquisition is done 5 Place the Volume box over the region of interest The trackball has 2 functions position and size of the Volume box The activated function is 1 displayed in the status bar area on the monitor 6a Press the upper trackball key to change the function of the trackball from position to size or AO vice versa 6 Change the size of the Volume box by moving the trackball Moving decrease the box size in vertical direction increase the box size in vertical direction Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 14 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode increase the box size in horizontal direction decrease the box size in horizontal direction Fast speed low scan density This mode is selected only in case of expected movement artefacts A loss of volume resolution will result Standard VOL scan medium scan density Slow speed high scan density 9 To start 3D acquisition press the Freeze key respectively the right trackball key Start gt
413. l Convex Mode display Virtual Convex Remarks id These keys appear automatically in the 2D mode menu if the selected probe is capable of Virtual Convex Mode Virtual Convex Mode is also possible in Doppler and Color mode without restrictions 6 2 13 Wide Sector Wide Sector is the equivalent of Virtual Convex Mode for curved array transducers Advantage of the Wide Sector The scan area is increased in relation to the curved display by steering the ultrasound lines on the edge of the probe Selection of Curved or Wide Sector display Remarks These keys appear automatically in the 2D mode menu if the selected probe is capable of Wide Sector mode Wide Sector mode is also possible in Doppler and Color mode without restrictions 6 2 14 Coded Excitation CE Coded Excitation CE improves image resolution and penetration in the far field This allows to use a higher frequency on technically difficult patients Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 6 8 H48691CF Revision 2 2D Mode Switch on off the CE function in 2D mode CE Remark Activating CE lowers the frame rate 6 2 15 CrossBeam Compound Resolution Imaging XBeam CRI In this special 2D mode pulses are transmitted not only perpendicularly to the acoustic window but also in oblique directions 3 5 7 9 or 11 angles are correlated for one frame The advantages of CrossBeam Compound Resolution Imaging XBeam CRI are enh
414. l SAL 10 5 2 2 Biopsy setup Y Before starting a biopsy please make sure that in case you want to save a study all relevant N patient information is entered Programming of Biopsy lines is done in the Biopsy Setup To invoke the Biopsy Setup Condition To invoke the Biopsy Setup 2D mode must be active 1 Press the Utilities button 2 Press the System Setup button on the touch panel 3 Press the Biopsy Setup button on the touch panel Note Biopsy Line buttons are greyed if needle path was not calibrated once Biopsy Setup Biopsy kit name and the Biopsy Line buttons are dependent on the selected probe Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 5 9 Probes and Biopsies Preparation for biopsy line adjustment Read all safety relevant information before performing and programming a biopsy The needle used for water bath alignment must not be used for a biopsy performed on a patient Always use a straight new and sterile needle for each biopsy procedure 1 Water 2 Biopsy needle Water bath about 47 C 1 Mount the desired biopsy guide to a probe and attach the needle 2 Connect the probe and select it on the touch panel Sp Press 2D on the user interface to activate B Mode 4 Place the probe into a water bath about 47 C set OTI to Normal and display the exact position of the needle on the active B image Details for RRE5 10 D probe 3D 4D Probes Curv
415. l a new printer and opens the Windows Add Printer Wizard Printer Settings Select a printer from the drop down menu and then press Edit to edit the printer settings under Windows Properties If you want to restore default values select the printer and press the Default button DICOM Print Job Manual the print job has to be started manually by the user Auto page full the print job starts automatically when a page is full Note These printer settings solely refer to printing jobs initiated with the End Exam button If you want to change the settings for print jobs initiated with the Px buttons or from Archive please refer to Data Transfer Menu on page 13 28 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 31 Utilities and System Setup Report Printer Printer Queue Foot Switch Right Foot Switch Left Foot Switch Middle Default 14 2 5 2 Device Setup Select the desired Report Printer from the drop down menu Only one selection is possible The selected printer is used for printing reports and images from Archive Select a printer from the drop down menu and press Clean Print Queue to delete all jobs on the selected printer If you select the check box Select All Printers the drop down menu will no longer be available Press Clean Print Queue to delete all jobs on all printers installed on the system You will be asked to confirm whether you want delete t
416. l echoes or noise is removed to have a clear sight from the start border of the render box to the desired Surface 10 4 4 3 Transparency in Gray Render Mode Transparency small number low transparency A higher number makes the gray scale information more transparent 10 4 4 4 Color Render Mode In Color Rendering color information of Color or Power Doppler signal is used for the 3D display Activate Color Rendering mode if not active Select the render algorithm desired Color Mode 1 Color Mode 2 Transp Max Transp X Ray Surface Mode Surface display of color information of blood flows Light Mode Light A surface will be displayed in light mode Structures close to viewer are displayed bright structures distant to the viewer are darker Maximum Mode The maximum gray values of the ROI are displayed Application Representation of all vessels in the ROI 3D impression can be improved by a Rotation Cine X Ray Mode All color values in the ROI are used for the calculation and are averaged impression will be an X Ray image The following Rendering combinations are possible Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 75 Volume Mode e Surface Light e Surface Maximum e Surface X Ray The software module allows selection from 2 modes which are simultaneously calculated Modes can be selected without restriction except with the Light mo
417. l vary depending on the processes that may be active during shutdown Normal shutdown Shut Down Go you want the system to shut down or testart Press the Shutdown soft key or press the Standby switch to switch off the system Press the Restart soft key to restart the system Press the Cancel soft key the Exit button on the touch panel or the Exit hard key to return to the previous operating state sd If you are currently saving images the following dialog appears Caution Shut down is currently not recommended because images are being transferred at the moment Bata might be lost iF the system is switched of now Do wou really wank to shut down or restart e If a service technician is currently remote servicing your system the following dialog appears Shut Down Caukior Shut down is currently not recommended because the remote service is enabled Do vou really wank to shut down or restart Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 4 3 Operating the System 4 4 If the current Exam is not finished the following message will be displayed Exam not finished X p4 Exam will be closed automatically after 10sec if no button is pressed Do you want to close the Exam during shutdown During Full Backup or Image Backup a shutdown is not possible If you press the Standby switch the following dialog appears Warning a non interruptible job is execuk
418. le BMP 2 files Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 15 7 Programmable Keys 3D Automatic Basically save the data that is displayed on screen In 3D Rot Cine Mode save Static Rot Cine In normal 3D Mode save Single Volume without Rot Cine Single Volume Always save a Single Volume Never include a rot Cine Static Rot Cine Include a Rot Cine if available 4D Single Volume Always save a Single Volume regardless of the selected mode 4D Cine Always save a 4D cine In Write and Freeze Mode save Cine according to max Cine Length setting 15 3 Start Exam Button Automatic Basically save the data that is displayed on screen In Freeze Mode save a Single Volume In Auto Cine Mode save a Volume Cine as defined in the Auto Cine Menu In Write Mode save Cine according to max Cine Length setting t e On Stort Exam octreate Auto Start Acquisition setting e Auio Start Aoqueatan J Probe Program Menu Save Potent Dialog on Start Exam Sova to Clipboard Send to Destinotion 1 Print to Printer 1 VEG Lr 1G SI F vany UP Seared to Destino 2 Prnt to Printer 2 VER 172 168 9795 Sony UP DE47 Sand to Destination 3 Print to Printer Web Dt Se F Hony UP 1 Auto Start Acquisition If this check box is checked the system automatically starts a new acquisition in 2D Mode when Start Exam is pressed without displaying the dialog Start Exam with old
419. le in scan mode 6 6 3 1 Persistence Filter For more information see Persistence and Frame Filter on page 6 20 6 6 3 2 Line Density For more information see Line Density on page 6 27 6 6 3 3 Dynamic Contrast For more information see Dynamic Contrast on page 7 7 6 6 3 4 Enhance For more information see Enhance on page 7 6 6 6 3 5 Sensitivity PRI The Sensitivity PRI pulse rate interval is used to adjust the sensitivity of the B Flow image By increasing the sensitivity you lower the frame rate by decreasing the sensitivity you raise the frame rate By using S PRI the sensitivity can be changed for each anatomy of interest LEE Sixteen steps are possible 6 7 XTD View Extended View XTD View provides the ability to construct and view a static 2D image which is wider than the field of view of a given transducer This feature allows for viewing and measurement of anatomy that is larger than a regular screen XTD View constructs an extended image from individual image frames as the operator slides the transducer along the surface of the skin The probe is oriented parallel to the direction of motion throughout the scan The quality of the result is user dependent and requires some additional skills and practice to develop proper technique and become fully proficient Examples include scanning of vascular structures and connective tissue in the arms and legs Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User
420. lected Patient Only active if no exam has been started yet Continue Exam Returns to scanning mode and continues alternative 2 the exam with the currently selected patient Only active if an exam has been started Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 13 5 Archive End Exam Ends the current exam saves and sends alternative 2 data Only active if an exam has been started Add Exam Ends the current exam saves and sends alternative 2 data and adds an new exam to the current patient Only active if an exam has been started Closes the Exam Review dialog and returns to the running exam without saving any changes Search To conduct a search enter the required Search a Ee criteria and press the Search button or the Return key on the keyboard see Searching for a Particular Exam on page 13 14 13 1 4 Exam Display The Exam Display area displays previous exams of the selected patient These exams can be organized according to Exam Date Exam Time Exam Type Mode Number of Images Exam Comment or one of the customer adjustable fields simply by clicking the caption of the respective field 13 2 Clipboard The Clipboard displays stored US data of the current exam as preview images 1 Pressing one of the P buttons P1 P4 stores active image information and displays a preview on the clipboard 2 This implies that you have already configured the respective buttons I
421. lection on page 4 5 Probe 12 10 3 Gynecology Calculations in 2D Mode id Distance Measurements like Length Endo Thickness etc Angular Measurements like urethal rotation Area Measurements like Levator hiatus stress The measurement procedures in 2D Mode are the same than in application Abdomen N Review Abdomen Calculations in 2D Mode on page 12 11 12 10 4 Gynecology Calculations in M Mode Vessel Diameter s Stenosis Diameter e Time i HR Heart Rate The measurement procedures in M Mode are the same than in application Abdomen JN Review Abdomen Calculations in M Mode on page 12 13 12 10 5 Gynecology Calculations in Spectral Doppler Mode s Auto Trace Manual Trace Measurement of Each Item Measurement of PS ED RI SD Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 12 60 H48691CF Revision 2 Time HR Heart Rate FHR Fetal Heart Rate 12 10 6 Gynecology Worksheet calculations lome Dok Henriette Pot I DOSOOL 07 07 24 1 emm Day of Cycle Day of stim Expected Ovul 2D Measurements Value Pelvic Froor Bladder Height 4 00 om Bladder Depth 2 79 em Residual Urine 50 94 ml Detr Wall th 42 27 mm Blad neck stress 26 26 mim Uterine desc max 47 46 mm Rect c desc max 47 21mm Lev hiat stress 32 24 om Pelvic Floor funneling yes urethral kinking yes Page 173 mI 4 00 279 50 94 A227 26 28 47 46 4
422. lilites charter 12 The 20 display consists of the ultrasound image an orientation marker patent data 11 Voimme Mode image information a Gray scale pattern a depth scale with focal Zone markers and an The uRrasound image is derived from the tissue echoes hai return to the scan head 15 Sonowew They are amptfied converted and then mapped to an image processing curve hat 16 Printing Recerding Sa relates each echo s intensity to a shade of gray The greater the echo intensity the 17 Systems Setup brighter the shade of gray As each echo is received Ais arranged along a line within 18 Measueemert Setup the ultrasound image display The location along the line that is displayed ts related to 13 Biopsy Setup the depth at which the echo occurs 20 Probes and Biopsy 21 Connections The 20 mode chapter ts subdivided in two groups in which you will see how to use 20 22 MAN ECG preampllies mode and how to adjust the 20 settings To adjust 20 setting review 20 Sub Meny chapter 5 21 and Gray Chroma Map 1 Navigation Tools on the top left portion Hide Back Forward Print Options 2 Help Book Navigation Tools on the left portion of the screen Contents Index Search Favourites 3 Content portion on the right side of the screen where help topics are displayed Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Description of the System 3 7 1 Navigation Tools Hide the Help book navigation tools on the
423. ll appear saying It is highly recommended to use complete erase mode to avoid problems with the DVD CD Do you really want to use the fast erase mode The Backup function is the only tool to backup and reload the Image Archive and System Configuration Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 49 Utilities and System Setup am a se HI 0O Voluson EA Fac J 5 32Hz Te 00 raah ik Peri 07 30 14 2 6 1 System Configuration The System Configuration page is subdivided in two main groups r 7 Sater Configuration Imo Archive Ti Da Small Backup Scan Settings Full System Configuration gt Small Backup Scan Settings Full System Configuration The Small Backup and or Full System Configuration can be saved to the following destinations s D partition of internal hard disk DVD CD R W id Mapped Network Drive Z Any other drive connected to the system e g an external USB hard disk Note This function is only available in the Full Backup utility Do not disconnect an external USB device without stopping it Disconnecting without stopping can lead to data loss on the external device 14 2 6 1 1 Small Backup Save Small Backup With this function the internal database is saved to the selected read write device The Small Backup contains Image settings Auto Text Setup settings language date format screensaver on off etc Scan assistant templates Voluson E
424. loaded image have to be moved too 13 2 2 4 Repro function in Clipboard Activate the Repro function by pressing the lower right trackball key For more information io see Repro on page 13 40 13 2 2 5 Deletion from the Clipboard ED Position the cursor over an image and press the upper trackball key to mark an image for AN deletion The deletion mark a red cross appears across the image Note The image s will be deleted after ending the exam There will be no confirmation dialog Note Deletion using the trackball also works in the Exam Review 13 2 3 Saving Files to Archive In Standard Configuration the images and cines on the clipboard are automatically saved to Archive upon ending an exam However you can easily alter this To alter see End Exam Button on page 15 9 Press the End Exam hardkey to save an exam and all its images End 13 2 4 Image Indices Icons and indices indicate the following conditions Cine Display Raw Data or Bitmap Cine gt Image Clip was copied onto an external device CD DVD Image marked for deletion id Image is open loaded ad Acquisition Mode with Tool tip Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 13 10 H48691CF Revision 2 Archive 13 2 4 1 Indices Bitmap Cine Symbol The Cine symbol denotes a saved Cine sequence and shows in the lower right corner of the screen The two different symbols denote two different file types 13 2 4 2 Export Symbol
425. ls review VOCAL Settings on page 10 115 ee or 1 In the VOCAL Modes menu touch the Manual Trace contour mode key Manual Trace 2 To define the contour touch the Start key 3 Position the cursor for starting the contour with the trackball and press the right or left trackball key Set Outline the first contour by means of the trackball To fix the contour gt press the right or left trackball key Set again Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 117 Volume Mode The two green arrows of the contour points are automatically positioned on the main contour axis The outlined contour is only valid if the rotation axis is crossed exactly twice VOCAL Creation Contour Finder Semiauto Trace Rot Ref 1 Sensitivity Next J Back 4 Select the next image plane by means of this control below the touch panel or touch the Next key The contour is copied to the next image plane and can be redefined by drawing a new contour Every time you start to outline a contour the new contour in this image plane replaces the old one 5 Trace all remaining contours in the same manner 6 After you have defined the contours in all image planes touch the Done key The result is displayed on the monitor and the VOCAL Edit menu appears on the touch panel To edit the contour review VOCAL Edit on page 10 123 10 12 4 2 Contour Finder 10 118 VOCAL Contour F
426. lume Cine 3D Static STIC and Static VCI Mode During 4D Volume Acquisition 1 Touch this key to display the TUI menu on the touch panel 2 Press the Freeze key TUI menu appears Ref Image mol Slices Distance Previous 2 0 Next Press the upper trackball key to change the function of the trackball from image position to er axis position or vice versa The activated function is displayed in the status bar area on the monitor Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 33 Volume Mode Add Reduce number of slices and the distance between slices with digipots below the touch panel Previous Vol Cine Next 64 3 Touch this key to select the number of slices displayed er rama 4 Touch this key to display the 4D Volume Cine menu For more information see Auto Auto Cine on page 10 95 Cine 5 Touch this key to return into the initial position Ref Image 6 Touch this key to select the reference image plane The display on the monitor changes accordingly 7 Next Previous plane is moved into view Shift plane inside display area Previous Next Start Cine Volpre axis 8 Touch the small keys below the trackball to select the trackball function It activates the respective function Axis or Cine Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 34 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode wearer 9 Touch this key
427. luson E8 typ 4 8 The frame rate depends on scan parameters VOL Box size quality and probe up to 128 volumes synchronous with control setting arbitrary movement in volume monitored position in volume 360 1 3 increments X Y and Z axis adjustable from 0 3 to a factor of 4 00 J 3D Static 3D 2D incl CRI 3D PD incl CRI 3D CFM incl CRI 3D HD FLow incl CRI 3D B Flow 3D Contrast 3D Contrast Coded PI CCIS 4D Real Time 4D Biopsy VCI A VCI OmniView STIC Fetal Cardio STIC Angio B Power Doppler incl CRI STIC CFM B Color Doppler incl CRI STIC HD FLow B HD Flow incl CRI STIC B Flow STIC TD 18 25 Technical Data Information Render Visualization Modes e 3D Rendering diverse surface and intensity projection modes SonoRenderStart Sectional Planes Multiplanar OmniView actual and projected view Option e Niche SonoVCAD labor TUI Tomographic Ultrasound Imaging overview image parallel slices e TUI Standard e VCAD Heart Volume Analyses e VOCAL semi auto manual segmentation tool segmentation using touch screen 3D Static only Threshold Volume measure volume below and above a threshold SonoAVC Follicles Sono Automated Volume Count SonoAVC Generic VCI Volume Contrast Imaging free moveable light source for 3D objects e 3D Rendered Image e VOCAL object SonoAVC object Render Mode Surface texture Surfac
428. luson E8 E8 Expert settings general settings such as language time date format and the enabled options Windows Network Settings network settings including the computer name Service platform state of the service platform VP additional system data All settings and patient data created since last full system configuration backup are NOT backed up It is highly recommended to create a full system configuration backup of settings and patient data regularly Save Full System Configuration Saving procedure 1 Click on the Save button of the Full System Configuration group in the System Setup Backup page The Full System Configuration Save window is displayed System Configuration Save Destination Internal ADD 7 DYDICD l Webwork _ External USB Drive a Enter Description lt gt Image data will not be backed up Free Space Needed Space 10 ME 2 Choose the destination e g Network Drive 3 Enter description of the Full System Configuration 4 If desired and possible activate Include Images check mark visible Note This can be a large amount of data up to 70 gigabytes 5 Select the Next button 6 Confirm with Yes to start the backup process Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 14 54 H48691CF Revision 2 Utilities and System Setup System Configuration Save Q Start Backup now 7 After copying the data confirm the next message
429. m 3 8 Main group 1 Main menu keys for Presets Sub window probe dependent functions Image up down Image left right Virtual Convex Mode FFC Focus and Frequency Composite XBeam CRI CrossBeam Compound Resolution Imaging CE Coded Excitation SRI Speckle Reduction Imaging Image Angle B View Beta View Focal ZonesOTI Optimized Tissue Imaging Frequency Menu Utilities keys for System Setup Biopsy Histogram etc Main group 4 Change from write only functions to read only functions when changing read write Freeze Scan Remarks Selecting a new mode displays a new Main menu with the operating functions of this mode The keys for the functions Focus OTI B View Frequency Angle Virtual Convex Mode FFC CE XBeam CRI and SRI only appear on the touch panel if they are available for the selected probe 3 5 2 Changing of Menus Each menu has its own menu key with a topic name By touching the menu key the referring menu appears on the touch panel The keys for the different sub menus can be found next to the Main menu key on the touch panel Remark If no probe is selected the PROBE PROGRAM menu is displayed Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Description of the System 3 5 3 Position of Display Annotation 2 Patient Name Last First 17 P Buttons Middle Name Depth scale markers 3 Patient ID number GA 18 Run Freeze
430. m Heart Rate HR on the touch panel A vertical line appears on the screen 3 Move the line to the start point of the period and press the right or left trackball key Set The second line appears HR Cycles 4 Select the number of heart rate cycles necessary for measurement with the rotary control below the touch panel 5 Move the second line to the end point of the period according to the selected number of heart rate cycles to be measured 6 Press the right or the left trackball Set key again The Heart Rate is displayed 12 7 6 Cardiology Calculations in Spectral Doppler Mode MV Mitral Valve AV Aortic Valve i TV Tricuspid Valve s PV Pulmonary Valve LVOT or RVOT Doppler Pulmonary Veins PAP Pulmonary Artery Pressure Measurement HR Heart Rate 12 7 6 1 MV Mitral Valve There are different methods to perform measurements and calculations of the Mitral Valve in the Spectral Doppler mode e Manual Trace Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 49 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 12 50 To measure the Items One by One 12 7 6 1 1 Manual Trace EA rr Wore Miers 2D Sheet Applicat AV LVOT TV PV eee a saana Pulmonary HR RVOT Veins Peak E A Dec Time MR Trace MR Vmax Angle 0 Baseline 1 After obtaining a feasible Doppler spectrum press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the measurement it
431. mage Transducer damage can result from contact with inappropriate coupling or cleaning agents Do not soak or saturate transducers with solutions containing alcohol bleach ammonium chloride compounds hydrogen peroxide or incompatible solutions as shown on the Care card Avoid contact with solutions or coupling gels containing mineral oil or lanolin Inspect the probe prior to use for damage or degeneration to the housing strain relief lens and seal If a probe has dropped on the floor or on any other hard surface immediately disconnect the probe from the ultrasound system Do not use the probe any more There is a risk of electric shock due to damaged electrical insulation Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Safety and Maintenance Note Sporadically silicone grease can leak in small amounts from the probes cable bushing This leakage Is not a failure or harmful to the human body Silicone grease does not contain any hazardous substances and Is only used to seal the cable bushing In case of a leakage wipe the grease with a Cloth 2 4 2 Watertightness cable strain relief If the probe is not explicitly marked as IPX7 the probe up to a minimum of 5 Attention All probes labeled IPX7 are watertight up to a minimum of 5 cm above the probe cm above the probe strain relief fulfills IPX1 according to IEC60601 2 37 Probe Maintenance on page 2 18 2 4 3 Electrical Shock Hazard The probe is
432. mage Type select either Default or Secondary capture Send Image as Send 2D Cine as Raw Data or Image only Raw Data Multiframe or Screenshot Send 3D Volume as Send 4D Cine as Select either Raw Data Image or DICOM Select either Raw Data Multi Frame Image Volume or DICOM Volume Send Measurements as Choose between Multiframe FPS Limit Blank No measurements will be sent Set the frames per second for stored 3D 4D Internal Format 4DView Measurements noose Pewee and Patientinfo data e g LMP EDD will Unlimited be sent in internal format transferring data 5 to PC with 4Dview program SR xxxx Measurements will be sent in SR Structured Report Format xxx Server destination Alias transferring data to DICOM Viewpoint station etc Note all available configured SR services added in the DICOM configuration are shown in the pull down window Note to transfer the measurements an exam or patientmust be selected Sets the entire STORE STORE 3D settings to their pre defined values which are optimal for transmitting to PC with software 4D View Sets the entire STORE STORE 3D settings to their pre defined values which are optimal for transmitting to other DICOM stations Sets the entire STORE STORE 3D settings to their pre defined values which are optimal for transmitting to ViewPoint Volusion Ef es y I NOTE Using lossy fless than 100 JPEG compress
433. mage will undergo a parallel X or Y shift accordingly IMPORTANT Positioning the center of rotation in the reference image marks that point which will not get lost during the rotation It is recommended to use the Parallel Shift rotary control together with the reference selection for the performance of parallel sections In this mode only one image is concerned by changes System feature The center of rotation cannot leave the display field A B or C In case an intersection line reaches the volume border the line will stay there and the image with further shift will continue to move in the shift direction This is especially helpful when due to magnification the display field is small compared with the area of the plane to be observed 10 2 4 3 Initial Condition of different Probes a Touch this key on the touch panel to reset the rotations and translations of a volume section Init to the initial start position Directions A anterior ventral P posterior dorsal Cr cranial Ca caudal R right L left Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 25 Volume Mode Init condition of an abdominal probe If the VOL start image is a longitudinal section Cr on the left of the screen below the following Init positions are obtained A A Cr Longitudinal Ca R Transversal L P P L Cr Horizontal Ca R The sectional image A represents that 2D A anterior ventral
434. mages of other patients will not be saved onto clipboard If you reopen and continue an old exam then the images of this exam will be displayed on the clipboard 3 For more detail an image will be enlarged in a special preview window which is activated by positioning the mouse cursor over the respective image BEHI GEL be Th GT WOTE Gohin Goel or r maj n i Appearances of the Clipboard see Appearances of the Clipboard on page 13 7 Saving onto Clipboard see Appearances of the Clipboard on page 13 7 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 13 6 H48691CF Revision 2 Archive id Manipulating Files on the Clipboard see Manipulating Files on the Clipboard on page 13 8 Saving Files to Archive see Saving Files to Archive on page 13 10 13 2 1 Appearances of the Clipboard There are three different appearances of the clipboard each can display a different number of images on one page Press the respective button to change to the desired appearance Appearance 1 holds 4 images Appearance 2 holds 10 images Appearance 3 holds 21 images 13 2 1 1 Changing pages You can save a number of images onto clipboard that is only limited by the hardware However a maximum of 21 images can be displayed on one page of the clipboard If a page is full Archive automatically opens another page To change between the pages EF T Page 1 2 yY 1 Press the Pointer hardkey if the cursor is inac
435. measures the strain of three Region of Interests Ref ROI 1 ROI 2 and calculates the Ratio of Ref to ROI 1and Ref to ROI 2 Elastography Ratio Ref ROI 1 2 3 E Ratio Ref RO 1 2 3 measures the strain of four Regions of Interests Ref ROI 1 ROI 2 ROI 3 and calculates the Ratio of Ref to ROI 1 Ref to ROI 2 and Ref to ROI 3 11 1 3 M Mode Measurements as For details about adjusting M Mode measurement settings review Measure Setup Measure amp Calc on page 16 3 s The Factory Generic Sub Category for M Mode see image above supports 1 Study type and following Measure methods 2 Reference Region of Interest Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 11 13 Measurements eee Generic Measurements Distance 2 Points Generic Slope Time Stenosis Distance HR Heart Rate 11 1 3 1 Generic Measurements Meas Applicat Work Sheet anonn Dist Stu dy Clear Distance Cancel 11 1 3 1 1 Distance 2 Points This measures the vertical distance tissue depth between two points The measurement Na procedure is the same as the distance measurement in 2D Mode review Distance 2 Points in a gt 2D Mode Measurements on page 11 4 11 1 3 1 2 Double Distance 1 To measure two single distances e g for Endometrium touch the Double Distance key on the touch panel A cursor appears on the screen 2 Use the trackball to move the cursor to the start point of
436. men Abdomen Calculations in 2D Mode For more information see Abdomen Calculations on page N 12 10 12 5 5 Small Parts Calculations in M Mode e Vessel Diameter Stenosis Diameter Time HR Heart Rate Sly The measurement procedures in M Mode are the same than in application Abdomen Abdomen Calculations in M Mode For more information see Abdomen Calculations on page N 12 10 12 5 6 Small Parts Calculations in Spectral Doppler Mode s Auto Trace Manual Trace j Measurement of Each Item ad Measurement of PSV EDV RI SD Time HR Heart Rate J The measurement procedures in Spectral Doppler Mode are the same than in application Abdomen Abdomen Calculations in Spectral Doppler Mode For more information see D Abdomen Calculations on page 12 10 N 12 5 7 Small Parts Worksheet Press the Report key on the control panel or touch the Worksheet key in the Calculation menu to view the report that contains detailed results of small parts calculations Report Were Sheet Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 19 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports DoteofEzom o7 24 2007 Poge 1 4 Exom Type Name Dok Hans Perf Phys Pat ID DOSO01 07 07 24 1 i OB Ref Phys _ Indication Sex Other Sonor 2D Measurements Value 11 m3 m4 Left Thyroid Length 8 66cm Width 4 22 em Height 6 51 em Volume 124 57 em Rig
437. ment parameter For example select HC Note If HC or AC have been selected you can select the desired way to perform the measurement using the left rotary control below the touch panel Select from 2DAreaPoints 2DArea Trace AreaEllipse 4 Using the trackball position the cursor on the perimeter of the shape to be measured Press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the mark A second cursor appears 5 Move the second cursor to form an appropriate ellipse and press Set again Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 23 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports Note To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key Change before completing the measurement This alternates the control from one cursor to the other 6 Adjust the width of the ellipse by means of the trackball and then press the right trackball key Set 12 6 4 3 SonoBiometry SonoBiometry is a software option SonoBiometry is an alternative to the common fetal biometry measurements It provides system suggested measurements for BPD HC AC and FL which need to be confirmed by the user or can be changed manually Using SonoBiometry Preparation 1 Press Util on the user interface to open the Utilities menu 2 Press Measure Setup on the touch panel 3 Select the tab Application Parameters 4 Select the application OB 5 Check the desired boxes under SonoBiometry Configuration to enable system suggested measu
438. ments check box to include image comments 3 4 Set the Include Page Numbers check box to include page numbers 5 Set the Include Header check box to include a Header 6 Set the White background check box to save ink or toner The black frame around the sector of the US image which contains information will be set to white Press Print to print the selected image s Properties will open the DICOM printer configure menu This enables the export of images in BMP JPG TIFF Cines in AVI MOV or MPG Images and Cines can be exported in PC format JPG amp AVI or MAC format JPG amp MOV and Volumes in VOL or RAW to a DVD CD R W an mapped Network drive To save all Patient Data and images use either compressed or un compressed 4DV Export After selecting the exam s to be exported using the trackball and the right trackball key Set click the Export button Data saved as JPEG or AVI will be automatically anonymized If a 3D Volume image is selected the complete data set can be exported in Volume file format The stored Volume files can be reviewed with the PC program 4D View Stored images in BMP JPEG TIFF can only be reviewed on an external PC When exporting an AVI file there is a 4th progress bar regarding each single frame Therefore it is now possible to cancel an export any time The following window will be shown on the screen Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Ma
439. minate artefacts 60 Sensitivity 4 Select the Trace Mode channel of the envelope curve upper both lower both 5 If necessary adjust the Angle and the Baseline A green line appears at the left of the spectrum Press the upper trackball key Change to move the line and readjust the start cycle the line changes to yellow Press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the line A green line appears at the right of the spectrum Press the Change key again line changes to yellow move the line to readjust the end cycle and fixate it with Set The status bar shows the current function of the trackball 6 Press the right or left trackball key Set to finish the measurement Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 15 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 12 16 A Remark To select the Doppler measuring results which should be displayed after an Auto Trace measurement see Application Parameters on page 16 17 The determination of the envelope curve requires a clear and low noise recording of the Doppler spectrum Otherwise the reliability of the displayed measurement results may not be ensured 12 4 5 2 Manual Trace Note 1 After obtaining a feasible Doppler spectrum press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the desired measurement item and then select Manual Trace A cursor appears on the Doppler spectrum 3 Move the cursor to the
440. mode it is possible to switch between PW menu CFM menu and the Submenus to readjust the settings 2 PW 2D Mode Power Mode PD In scan mode it is possible to switch between PW menu PD menu and the Submenus to readjust the settings 8 2 Continuous Wave Doppler Mode CW Mode The CW mode is subdivided in two groups In these groups you will see how to use CW mode and how to adjust the CW settings To use the CW mode For more information see CW Main Menu on page 8 7 To adjust CW setting For more information see CW Sub Menu on page 8 9 To use special utilities Utilities on page 14 2 and Gray Map on page 6 27 8 2 1 CW Main Menu Note This mode only works with selected probes For more information see Chapter 5 CW Mode key hard key Press the CW key to activate the CW mode in the preparation mode First only the CW cursor appears on the active 2D image To start and use the CW mode CW Operation on page 8 8 To adjust the CW settings review CW Sub Menu on page 8 9 The CW Main menu appears on the touch panel scan mode MARS Setting Application Obstetric Sensitivity Angle 60 0 18 0 kHz Baseline PRF Remarks Changing the Gain Speed CW cursor position CW Focus Wall Motion Filter and the PRF is not possible in freeze mode Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 8 7 Doppler Modes 8 2 2 CW Operation The CW operations Curs
441. motion modes Sections in this chapter M Main Menu on page 7 2 M Operation on page 7 3 M Sub Menu on page 7 6 MCFM Mode M Color Flow Mode on page 7 7 MTD Mode M Tissue Doppler Mode on page 7 10 MHD Mode M High Density Mode on page 7 13 STIC with M Mode on page 7 15 Anatomical M Mode AMM on page 7 15 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 ved M Mode M mode imaging provides Time and Motion echo information derived from a stationary ultrasound beam M mode is used along with a 2D image A straight line running through the 2D image called the M cursor identifies the position of the stationary ultrasound beam from which the echo information is being gathered The motion or change that occurs at this position over time is used by the system to generate the scrolling M mode display M mode is primarily a cardiology mode M mode records moving anatomical structures and produces subtle patterns of motion These patterns allow you to plot temporal relationship between events in the cardiac cycle Precise measurements of structures are possible with M mode M mode also provides textural information that permits discriminating between normal and abnormal tissue The M mode display contains system information a depth scale a time scale a TGC curve and a gray map pattern There are three M mode display format options For more information see Display Format on page 7 7 The
442. mpression is improved and the surface does not appear flat anymore A surface will be displayed in light mode Structures close to the viewer are displayed bright structures more distant from the viewer are shaded The surface to be displayed has to be surrounded by hypo echoic structures e g liquids Gradient Light The surface will be displayed as if being illuminated from a spot light SOUICe The surface to be displayed has to be surrounded by hypo echoic structures e g liquids The software module allows selection of 2 modes which are simultaneously calculated Always the actual selected mode is displayed with 100 With the Mix key one can mix between the chosen modes Modes can be selected without restriction except the Light mode which combines only with Surface display Always select 2 modes 10 4 4 2 Threshold Control in Gray Render Mode Function of the threshold values Surface Mode only In Surface mode it will normally be necessary to adjust the low threshold for the border recognition of the surface These threshold values do not apply for the Transparent modes Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 74 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode Threshold low Reject Normally this threshold always has to be adjusted for a good appearance of the 3D surface image By changing the TH low all echoes below the level are enhanced in pink color for a short interval Application With this function smal
443. munication error occurred Please retry in a few seconds DVR is not responding Please shut down the system and restart If the problem persists please contact a service technician Tips and recommendations While auto formatting of a DVD is in process it is possible to enter patient name and patient information and start an exam i Videos are recorded in MPEG2 standard DVDs are playable on the following devices PC MPEG driver required with Windows Media Player s Blu Ray DVD Players MAC VLC Media player is required install drivers or a conversion to MOV It is not possible to record on USB and DVD simultaneously For large backup data Voluson format uncompressed Full Back Up it is recommended to use an external USB hard disk Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 17 11 Connections 17 4 ECG Preamplifier s The ECG module consists of an ECG preamplifier type MAN hardware part and a patient connection cable LHI Technology Code LHGE27 01 Rev 2 The connector of the patient connection cable is on the front cover of the hardware section which is placed in a drive slot in the front of the ultrasound machine i s A 0 Z The ECG preamplifier type MAN is used for acquiring an ECG signal to be displayed with the ultrasound image The ECG preamplifier must not be used for ECG diagnostics It is not intended for use as a cardiac monitor The signal input of the ECG preamplifier
444. n Activate this function to suppress unwanted reverberation echoes 10 3 4 3D Color Off Off On Off switch to show an acquired 3D CFM 3D PD or 3D HD image with or without the color information 10 3 5 Speckle Reduction Imaging SRI II Speckle Reduction Imaging SRI can be activated to reduce speckle Note If selected in System Setup User Settings SRI affects slices and rendered image Therefore it is also active in Full Screen mode In addition if SRI is activated in 2D mode it is automatically activated in 3D 4D pre mode and automatically affects the image after during acquisition This filter smoothens the final image structures can be smeared out For diagnostic the Region of Interest must be checked without SRI filter A smoothed image could lead to false diagnosis Activate the SRI function and change the level of smoothing in the sectional planes using the and keys on the touch panel Use of SRI is indicated in the info block To adjust SRI go to the Sub menu Following menu will appear Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 44 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode SRI 3D Image Filter takes effect on 3D rendered images only id SRI Slices Filter takes effect on slice images only e 3D Brightness Rotate button to set value 0 100 pres button to set value to 50 3D Contrast Rotate button to set value 0 100 pres button to set value to 50 10 3 6 Volume SRI V SRI
445. n The maximum strain value in human tissue can be up to 2 j The ratio value indicates how many times the tissue of a ROI is harder or softer than the tissue of the Reference ROI Elastography gt Analysis Application SmallPart EE Small Parts Small P cont Breast 2 Breast Gen Breast Pen DEFAULT SS A Elasto Off B pa 7 Transparency 125 Figure 9 3 Touch panel Elastography Main Menu Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Elastography Analysis Sample Area Method ED Trace Delete Sample Area a T Selected All Elastography Mode Plot Mode m Ratio Scale Range a Ce Auto Frame Select Smoothing Disable Enable Start Frame 0 Function Sample Area Method Delete Sample Area Frame Select Plot Mode Scale Range Smoothing Cine Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 nents Off Vv End Frame Loop Speed Hor Sweep 0 Os Figure 9 4 Touch panel Elastography Analysis Button Circle Trace Selected All Disable Enable Enable All Strain Ratio Strain amp Ratio Auto Off Average ms Average Samples Set as Default Cine Run Stop Frame by Fr 140 Description Activates the circle drawing tool Activates the trace drawing tool Delete selected Region of Interest ROI Delete all Region of Interests ROIs Disable or enable selected frame invalid
446. n cord to the ultrasound system There is an increased risk of electric shock due to increased leakage current when the secondary monitor is connected to AC mains directly via a wall outlet instead of utilizing the isolation transformer There is an increased risk of electric shock due to increased leakage current when connecting devices not explicitly recognized by the system manufacturer GE Healthcare Austria GmbH amp Co OG to the ultrasound system e g via the auxiliary power supply gt bP gt Only accessories explicitly recognized by the system manufacturer GE Healthcare Austria Jis GmbH amp Co OG may be used in connection with this ultrasound system sL Only use cables delivered with the system or the accessories J as a USB devices must be stopped before they are unplugged N 1 Press F5 to enter the USB and Network Drives Dialog in Sas parar Eyi i a Stic l m Sony Storage Media USB Dew Stek 2 Select the device you want to unplug using Trackball and Trackball keys 3 Press Stop Device Then a progress bar appears The following dialogue appears Stop Device Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 17 4 H48691CF Revision 2 Connections 4 Confirm with OK You can now remove the USB stick safely 5 Press Close to close the USB and Network Drives dialog and return to the previous operating state 17 2 Connection between Internal I O and Exter
447. n horizontal direction 6 Set the volume sweep angle by using the right control below the touch panel 25 7 Select the Quality This function changes the line density against acquisition speed high2 low Fast speed low scan density This mode is selected only in case of expected movement artefacts A loss of volume resolution will result ax Standard VOL scan medium scan density Slow speed high scan density Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 80 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode 8 To start Real Time 4D acquisition press the Freeze key or the right trackball key Start gt displayed in Status bar area on the monitor The volume acquisition starts the corresponding 4D menu appears on the touch panel and OL the acquired images are displayed Cmm Cm 9 Press the Freeze key again to stop the acquisition For more information see Volume Cine on page 10 92 The 4D Mode menu appears on the touch panel scan mode Sectional Tul Segmen Planes tation i MagiCut Romer Cine eTe Cale a ers em pep Ref Image 3D Orientation SRI init 3D meres a B 30 Dnt a p tilt siai Quality Vol Angle TH low 25 high 95 10 Touch the Render Sectional Planes or TUI key 10 5 1 Possible Display Adjustment before a Real Time 4D Acquisition Planes Display of Sectional Planes Display of REF Image Display of ROI 4D
448. n is selected the system continues to send the data Show Info Imation Show Information With this function more information about the failed DICOM transfer can be requested This button is enabled if a failed DICOM transfer is selected in the Queue list and than the following window pops up if the button is pressed Information If Image is store in archive the additional button Go to Archive is available Pressing the Go to Archive button opens the archive in Review Mode and the failed image is shown Close Select the Close button to close the DICOM Transfer Queue Status window 14 2 5 5 Network Configuration Network Configuration Select the Network Configuration button in the System Setup Device Setup page to perform Network IP Address Configuration Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 41 Utilities and System Setup Before configuring the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties the following message appears Network Configuration Please be aware that changes and modificabons which are not related to network configuration may cause system dysfunction Please continue only if you are familiar with this task Dio you want to continue Click Yes to continue but only if you are familiar with this task 14 2 5 6 Network Adapter Configuration Network Adapter Configuration Select the Network Adapter Configuration button in the Sys
449. n see 2D Gain on page 6 4 Single Screen Format Select the display format Single screen display in 2D and 3D image mode For more information see Multi Format on page 6 10 Focus flipswitch Select position of transmit focus using the flip switch For more information see Transmit Focus on page 6 6 Ul Brake Release Locks and unlocks the user interface brake User interface adjustment on page 3 5 Motion Mode on off Pressing activates deactivates the M mode Functions depend on current probe Rotating allows setting of the M mode gain within the probe defined range For more information see Chapter 7 Color Mode on off Pressing activates deactivates the Color mode Functions depend on current probe Rotating allows setting of the CFM mode gain within the probe defined range For more information see Color Flow Mode CFM on page 8 70 Trackball and Trackball keys trackball positions cursors Cine loop position and size of the box etc upper trackball key changes the actual trackball function left right trackball key sets fixates cursors and activates pages buttons etc Double click functions are displayed in brackets 3 6 1 Function of the Trackball at Diverse Dialog Pages In general operations at diverse dialog pages and windows on the system desktop e g Patient Data Entry Usage of EUM System Setup Measurement Setup etc are executed by trackball and the trackball k
450. n with 500VA load approx 1 75 A at 230V 50 Hz without peripherals Thermal output 3446 BTU h Perceived noise level max 47 dB A Mains outlets Accessories all mains outlets are co switched by the system mains switch via a built in isolation transformer Output voltage 115V or 230V Modification of voltage settings only by an authorized service person Output power max power of all connected accessories must not exceed 345VA 18 2 3 Keyboard Floating keyboard adjustable in three dimensions Rotation adjustable 38 from center Extension 195 mm 7 9 in Alphanumeric keyboard Full sized backlit Hard key buttons Ergonomic layout Interactive back lightning Touch panel 10 4 LCD screen VGA Recording keys Integrated for remote control of up to 4 peripherals or DICOM devices one dedicated DVD recording key 18 2 4 Console Design Probe ports 4 ports 3 active ports 1 none active port a oe ac Hard disk Integrated HDD 500 GB DVD Integrated DVD R W CD R W drive Peripherals On board storage for peripherals black white printer color printer DVR Wheel diameter 150 mm integrated locking mechanism that provides rolling lock Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 18 4 H48691CF Revision 2 Technical Data Information Integrated cable management Front and rear handles Interactive dynamic software menu Brightness adjustable 18 2 5 Monitor Flat panel monitor 19 hig
451. n worksheet of the selected exam Report date Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 13 26 H48691CF Revision 2 Archive es Set Confirm the current selection and start action Compare Start the Compare Window OD 13 3 6 2 Compare Window Close Button Use the Close Button to close the compare window 1 To close the Compare Window press the Close key Now you can select a different image 2 Let the cursor hover over a thumbnail to obtain a preview 3 Select the thumbnail to open the compare window You can freely enlarge and move around the Compare Window using the trackball and the left trackball key To Move around the Compare Window 1 If there is no cursor press the Pointer hardkey The cursor will appear as the usual me q CY white arrow 2 Move the cursor to the header of the window until it becomes a white hand Press the Left Trackball key and keep it pressed to move the window around To Change the Size of the Compare Window 1 If there is no cursor press the Pointer hardkey The cursor will appear as the usual 4 CY white arrow 2 Move the cursor to the top edge of the window until it becomes a two tipped black arrow Press the Left Trackball key which you keep pressed and move the trackball to increase or decrease the size of the window Note There is a minimum and a maximum size of the Compare Window see below Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manua
452. nal I O Peripherals F Power Supply rear side on page 17 5 u Power Supply for auxiliary equipment on page 17 6 s Connector Panels on page 17 6 17 2 1 Power Supply rear side Mains IN Mains voltage according to information plate Modification of voltage setting only by authorized service person Possible mains voltages 100V 107V 115V 107V 120V 120V 130V 225V 220V 235V 235V 250V AC only Input range Information plate for the adjusted voltage setting Modification of voltage setting only by authorized service person Possible mains voltages 100V 115V 130V 225V 240V AC only Note This is NOT a voltage selection switch Potential equilibrium connection Protective earth ground connection Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 17 5 Connections 17 2 2 Power Supply for auxiliary equipment There are two connectors 2 3 for auxiliary equipment in the shelves 4 of the respective auxiliary equipment Wp The outlet voltage can be set to 115V or 230V independent from the mains voltage 17 2 3 Connector Panels For more information see External Inputs and Outputs on page 18 33 17 2 3 1 Rear Panel The rear panel can be found on the rear side of the body of the system VGA Out Connector for external Monitor NETWORK DICOM Input Output twisted pair RJ 45 10 100 megabits S Video OUT PAL NTSC depending on system setup
453. nation Sends a volume cine to external destination Sends the selected item to a black amp white printer Sends the selected item to a color printer Sends the selected item to a VCR DVD Recorder Confirm Scan Assistant fa If an option is not possible a little red cross is displayed in front of the icon e g when a 2D Cine can not be saved as a 3D Volume With P keys there are two different tabs 1 Overview tab In the Overview Tab you select which basic actions you want to be performed when pressing a particular P key 2 Detailed Setup tab In the Detailed Setup tab you can choose what exactly happens at the pressing of a P Key i e If in the overview tab you choose to save an image to a particular location then in the detailed setup tab you choose which format you want to save Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 15 5 Programmable Keys 15 2 1 Overview tab Button Configuration Stort Exam End Dom 1 Clipboard To copy images or cines to the clipboard check this check box 2 Export Check the box to export images as jpg or avi 3 Recorder To record images or cine data to an external recording device VCR DVD check this check box Note If this check box is marked no other functions are available 4 Send There are three cheekbones You can choose up to three different destinations where to send your images or cine data to Choose the destination from the drop down l
454. nd Copy To 3 Choose Application 4 To copy the settings click OK 16 3 1 8 To Change the Report Order Report rder 1 Select the Report Order button in the Measure amp Calc page Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 16 13 Measure Setup Report Order Use Report Order BPD D F Hi TTD APTE AD AC TA MAD APAD FTA Ulna Cereb Ch 2 If itis desired select Use Report Order check mark visible 3 Choose the desired measurement parameter e g BPD 4 Use Move Up and Move Down 5 To finish click the OK button 16 3 1 9 First Trimester OB in application GYN Additional study Early Gestation in Factory Presets in application GYN contains the same items as study Early Gestation in application OB Measure items are dependent on table preselection in Global Parameters menu For more information see Global Parameters on page 16 79 SP6 12 Tast VAS Bem i1 0149Hr Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 16 14 H48691CF Revision 2 Measure Setup Following Add Measurement menu appears in Gyn application It is possible to select the application OB from the pull down menu and add OB measurements to the Gyn measurements menu Note Results of OB measurements taken in the application Gyn are still displayed in the OB Report There are two Reports when measuring Gyn and OB items in the
455. nd diastolic dimension 2 right ventricular inlet length 3 right ventricular area dashed line 4 mitral valve 5 left ventricular end diastolic dimension 6 left ventricular inlet length 7 and left ventricular area dotted line 8 Ao aorta Desc Ao descending aorta IVC inferior vena cava LA left atrium LPA left pulmonary artery LV left ventricle MPA main pulmonary artery RA right atrium RPA right pulmonary artery RV right ventricle REFERENCE Schneider C et al Development of Z scores for fetal cardiac dimensions from echocardio graphy Ultrasound Obstet Gynecol Vol 26 2005 pages 599 605 Fomulas Z scores In actual In predicted cardiac dimensions Root MSE In predicted cardiac dimensions m In FL GA or BPD c FL femur length GA gestational age in completed weeks BPD biparietal diameter m multiplier c intercept 12 6 4 10 4 Fractional Limb This measurement is for calculating the fetal limbs Based on this partial volume calculation the fetal weight can be estimated Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 31 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 12 32 Figure Fractional limb volume Fractional Arm AVol and Thigh TVol volumes are based on 50 of the humeral A or femoral B diaphysis length Mid limb measurements eliminates the need for tracing soft tissue borders near the ends of the bone shaft where acoustic shadowing
456. nd press the central trackball button Detailed DICOM information is displayed Patent DDR Properties MODALITY 21 4 Prizi 19000A ul MELL FREDERICK P R ESTRADA JAIME P DA om I os ced Patient SOP Clase LID ond Patient SOP Instance LUID I B40 10005 3 1 2 1 1 RP10DZ Procedure 4 F 1 113654 3 13 1002 Pa ERL_ MESA Procedure 4 L280 10008 3 122 521 Referenced Sudy SOF Instance WE 1 7 13654 5 13 1002 Scheduled Procedure Shep IO Scheduled Procedure Sten Desorption Modality Scheduled Performing Priysician s Mame Scheduled Station AE The a Shen Stark DatajTime Select one of this buttons to navigate through the detailed DICOM information of the relevant procedure steps Close Select the Close button to return to worklist 2 Highlight an entry from this list using the trackball and press the Select button The Procedure Step dialog is displayed Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 4 23 Operating the System 4 24 Note Paier Daia e H Refeming Fipan MELL PREDEN P DA Bidas Oe Aon E MOPS Bepsie Fr r a aa Code biem Phea Grbetided Fraea Shep Dara Code Haning SP Aster Rem paa A Stat Tamer eN Oerd Proceches Shop el hae TT a The procedure step dialog lists all procedure steps belonging to the selected procedure The header section displays the most important information of the selected step Highlight an entry from this
457. ner unit The system may only be operated in places that go conform with the rules for medically used locations 4 The power cable of the ultrasound scanner system must not be connected to a damaged socket The socket must be equipped with a grounded conductor If necessary a potential equilibrium must be connected Only the patient cable provided by GE Healthcare Austria GmbH amp Co OG may be used Consequently only push button electrodes may be used s Take care that neither bare parts of one of the electrodes nor the patient can get in contact with conductive parts e g metal parts of the examination bed trolley or similar This device must not be used for an intra operative application on the heart If the use of a HF surgical unit with simultaneous connected ECG electrodes becomes necessary a maximum distance of ECG electrodes from the surgical field and a correct position and contact of the neutral electrode of the HF surgical unit must be observed avoidance of burning risk Note that stimulation current devices can influence the ECG signal If several instruments are simultaneously used on the patient all these instruments must be connected to an appropriate potential equilibrium avoidance of lead currents yi If the use of a defibrillator becomes necessary there must be no ECG adhesive electrodes and no conductive paste between the contact positions of the defibrillator plates avoidance of current bridges
458. nformation 18 11 3 OB Tables O Age tables ASUM CFEF Chitty Hadlock_82 Hadlock_84 Hansmann Hobbins Jeanty JSUM Kurmanavicius Leung Merz Nicolaides Shinozuka Siriraj Tokyo BPD ASUM ASUM old Campbell CFEF Chitty outer outer outer inner Eik Nes Hadlock_82 Hadlock_84 Hansmann Hobbins Jeanty Johnsen JSUM Kurmanavicius Kurtz McLennan Leung Persson Merz Nicolaides OSAKA Rempen Sabbagha Shinozuka Siriraj Tokyo Verburg outer outer CLAV YARKONI CRL ASUM ASUM old DAYA Eik Nes Hadlock Hansmann JSUM McLennan Persson Nelson OSAKA Rempen Robinson Robinson BMUS Sahota Shinozuka Tokyo Verburg le 9 w O z FL ASUM ASUM_OLD CFEF Chitty Eik Nes Hadlock_82 Hadlock_84 Hansmann Hobbins Hohler Jeanty Johnsen JSUM Kurmanavicius Leung Persson Merz Nicolaides O Brien OSAKA Shinozuka Siriraj Tokyo WARDA OSAKA gt T FIB Jeanty O ep Hansmann Hellman Hollander Rempen Tokyo ASUM CFEF Chitty Hadlock_82 Hadlock_84 Hansmann Jeanty Johnsen Kurmanavicius Leung Merz Nicolaides Siriraj ee L ASUM Hobbins Jeanty Merz OSAKA Tokyo MAD Eik Nes Kurmanavicius OFD ASUM Chitty Hansmann Jeanty Kurmanavicius Merz Nicolaides TIB Jeanty Merz TAD CFEF Merz Chitty Goldstein HILL Hobbins Nicolaides Jeanty Merz O O Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 18 30 H48
459. nformation see Enhance on page 7 6 6 4 7 Reject For more information see Reject on page 7 6 6 4 8 Line Density The Line Density setting allows the user to make a trade off between image resolution and frame rate ED high higher resolution lower frame rate Line Dens lt 2 norm normal resolution medium frame rate low lower resolution higher frame rate 6 5 Gray Map The gray map determines the displayed brightness of an echo in relationship to its amplitude The Tint Map determines the displayed Color of an echo in relationship to its amplitude Depending on individual requirements a harder or softer image can be obtained with this Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 6 21 2D Mode function and can be adjusted in freeze and in scan mode post processing The displayed gray scale wedge corresponds to the adjusted gray map curve Different gray map curves can be associated with different imaging modes To select a 2D Gray map 2D Gray Map on page 6 22 To select a Tint map Tint Map Tint 2D on page 6 25 For 3D Gray Map selection 3D Gray Chroma Map on page 10 45 6 5 1 2D Gray Map This defines the relation between echo amplitude input and brightness output in a look up table In total 9 predefined and 3 user Gray Maps are available You can select a certain map independently for each one of the imaging modes e g Map 5 for 2D and Map 2 for M ima
460. ng to the rotation of the slices Following orientation markers are available Pp Postion There are also combinations thereof possible e g AL PRCa etc Note The orientation marks are visible if slices are present in T U mode not in Render Full Screen They are visible as long as they are not turned off by pressing Off key in Probe Orientation Menu For more information see Tomographic Ultrasound Imaging TUI Parallel Slices on page 10 33 Touch the Off key to return to 3D 4D menu without applying changes The orientation marks in 3D 4D mode are hidden Reset of probe orientation setting to default values This key is only available if probe orientation menu has been activated once Touch the Exit key to return to 3D 4D menu without applying changes 10 1 7 The Render Box To obtain a good 3D picture the following three points are very important similar to a photography i the direction of view the area size of view gt unobstructed view of the object surface mode This has to be adjusted with the render box The render box determines the size of the volume to be rendered Therefore objects that are not inside the box will not be included in the render process and cut out important for the surface mode to cut off objects which obstruct the view of the object The positioning of the box inside the scanned volume is performed by trackball and selection of a sectional plane A B C Voluson
461. ngle by using the control below the touch panel Set the Zoom control The sectional images A B and C and the 3D image will be magnified from the center of rotation Select Image Orientation of the Real Time 4D image With this function the image orientation of the rendered image can be changed The image orientation of the sectional planes is not changed The 3D image orientation can be changed in freeze or scan mode Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode Ref Image Select a Reference Image Selecting a reference image automatically determines the control functions of the controls and the trackball for the free adjustment of a sectional plane The one chosen for reference is marked by the lit key Reset the render curve to its default position Press the upper trackball key to reset the render start curve to its default start position Note If the ROI key ts highlighted you have to press Curve key first and then Reset Select the Init position This key resets the rotations of a volume section to the initial start position The center of rotation is in located in the center of the scanned volume Select the Render Mode The Render Mode menu appears on the touch panel For details Render Mode Image Type and Render Algorithm on page 10 72 Invoke the Sub Menus The 3D 4D Sub Menu appears on the touch panel For further details Sub Menus on page 10 42
462. ns in each mode are as follows 2D 3D Mode Left Right ACA Anterior Cerebral Artery Left Right MCA Middle Cerebral Artery Left Right PCA Posterior Cerebral Artery Basilar Artery A Com A Anterior Common Artery Left Right P Com A Posterior Common Artery Left Right CCA Common Carotid Artery Left Right ICA Internal Carotid Artery Left Right Vertebral Artery Vessel Left Right ACA Left Right MCA Left Right PCA Basilar Artery A Com A Left Right P Com A Left Right CCA Left Right ICA Left Right Vertebral Artery Vessel Doppler Mode Left Right ACA Left Right MCA Left Right PCA Basilar Artery A Com A Left Right P Com A Left Right CCA Left Right ICA Left Right Vertebral Artery Vessel 12 12 2 Before starting Neurology Calculations 1 Press the Patient key on the control panel select the NEURO page and enter all patient information for Neurology calculations For details refer to Entering Patient Data on page 4 7 Note To cancel all calculations performed before and to start new measurement press this key and select End Exam or Clear Exam 2 Press Start Exam he Strrexan selected press the Probe key on the control panel and change it to Neurology For details 3 Make sure that the probe and application are selected properly If another application is refer to Probe selection on page 4 5 Probe 12 12 3 Neurology Calculations in 2D Mode ad Distance Measur
463. nt if behind or end of clipboard is activated 13 2 2 2 Export from the Clipboard 1 Press the right trackball key to mark an image for export onto an external device NOL The Export Index appears in the lower left hand corner of the image 2 The next step will happen after pressing the End Exam hardkey The export dialog will pop up see Data Transfer Menu on page 13 28 Should you choose to cancel the export you will be asked to confirm this with Yes 13 2 2 3 Move Clipboard images The Move function is used to change the order of the Clipboard images Move is active if more the one image is stored in clipboard Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 13 9 Archive Activate the Move function by pressing the lower right trackball key The trackball changes 1 to the Move functions When a image is selected with Move it is framed with a red frame Use the cursor to move the selected image to any position in the clipboard When pressing Insert on the trackball the image is placed on this position If any blank slots are in between the inserted image will be automatically placed behind the last clipboard image Stop moving the image by pressing Cancel on the trackball When the image is moved or the movement is canceled the trackball changes back to the Clipboard trackball Image annotations like the Export or the Delete symbol as well as the green frame for a re
464. ntation settings are not stored Start desired 3D Mode or 4D Mode Acquisition It is absolutely necessary to ensure that the Probe position exactly corresponds to Probe orientation adjustment Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 8 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode Special accuracy is required if the selected acquisition Mode is 4D Moving the probe can gN cause variations with probe orientation adjustment Touch the More key at the top right corner of the touch panel The 3D 4D Sub Menu appears Tint Maps Ice Candle Sepia Blue Clear Off Copper Additional Depth Colouring Blue Blue 3D Contrast Background 50 0 Touch the Probe Orientation key to activate the Probe Orientation menu Probe Orientation The Probe Orientation menu appears and the system automatically switches to Quad Screen display a Off Activate Probe Orientation Menu Body Probe Rotation Rotation Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 9 Volume Mode ete Bais Hi 11 finn Le ee Te ol The lower right quadrant displays the body pattern and the probe marker independent of the selected visualization mode Position of body pattern body view and body rotation and probe marker are stored in the 3D 4D user program The green point on the probe marker indicates the rotation of the probe like Voluson E8 E8 Expert Logo on 2D image Touch
465. nterface The DVR Menu appears on the touch panel 3 Select DVDon the touch panel 4 Select FORMAT for video on the touch panel The DVD RW will be prepared for video recording 5 To start and pause recording press the programmed P button or use the according DVR Menu controls For more information see Chapter 15 6 To finish recording open the DVR Menu and press STOP on the touch panel 7 To eject the DVD press F4on the keyboard or Eyecfon the touch panel Info Video recording is only possible on a UDF formatted DVD RW If a new DVD RW should always be UDF formatted select Auto format DVD RW for video recording in System Setup Connectivity Peripherals Video recording on a USB stick 1 2 3 4 Connect a USB stick FAT32 Press DVD VCR on the user interface Select USB on the touch panel To start and pause recording press the programmed P button or use the according DVR Menu controls For more information see Chapter 15 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 17 9 Connections 5 To finish recording open the DVR Menu and press STOP on the touch panel 6 To eject the USB stick press F4 on the keyboard or Eyecton the touch panel DVR controls Control Description DVD VCR button Opens the DVR menu Programmed P button Starts or pauses recording Record or Pause Hardkey F4 Media will be ejected Auto format DVD RW for video _ lf the box is checked every time a new DVD RW rec
466. ntrol from one cursor to the other Aortic Root Diameter distance between the anterior aortic wall and the posterior aortic wall Left Atrial Diameter distance between posterior aortic wall echo and posterior left atrial wall Aortic Cusp Separation distance between the coronary cusp and the non coronary cusp 12 7 5 3 MV Mitral Valve There are two methods to calculate the Mitral Valve in the M mode To measure all Items ata Time bd To measure the Item One by One Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 47 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 12 7 5 3 1 To measure all Items at a Time To calculate all the items of the Mitral Valve in M mode at a time Meas Applicat a HR aoe mere 1 Press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the item MV and then touch All 3 The cursor appears on the M mode image Move the cursor to the D point and press the right or left trackball key to fix the mark 4 The E cursor appears on the screen Move the cursor to the E point and press the right or left trackball key to fix the mark 5 The cursor appears on the screen Move the cursor to the F point and press the right or left trackball key to fix the mark 6 The cursor appears on the screen Move the cursor to the A point and press the right or left trackball key to fix the mark 7 The cursor appears on the screen Move the cursor to the C point and press the righ
467. nual H48691CF Revision 2 Archive ovo rec EF IMG _20110201_1 PC Format Files jpg avi __ Create Patient Exam Folders Used Space 0 GB Size 640x430 Bd Avi Codec MFEG4 Anonymize __ Patient Data _ Ginic Data Quality High Indude Report Data __ Save Cine SE JES 1 Assign the desired Drive DVD CD or Network from the pull down menu Save in 2 Entera File name If multiple files have been selected the file name applies to all and is automatically extended by _x Whereby x is a variable for the number or the file 3 Select the appropriate File Format MAC Format Files jpg mov Soult EE Veluson Format compressed 4dv gt Voluson Format uncompressed 4dv mpa Volume Files Raw Data vol raw DICOM Files dan DICOM Files with DICOMDIR Depending on the file format the image size quality and AVI codec can be adjusted The AVI will be saved as a loop start gt end gt start 4 Set the Anonymize check box to hide patient information date and time from the header of US images Note The Anonymize function only works with US images i e It does not work with archive screenshots Note Compare the Estimated File Size with the Free Space on disc before exporting Do not export unless the capacity of the storage volume is bigger than the Estimated File Size 5 Click the OK button to export all the images of
468. nual H48691CF Revision 2 Archive 13 3 3 3 Patient Table The Patient table shows all the patients that fulfil your search criteria TB Patient ID r Patient amp Bi CE Tj a E 143 84 GE BRI Mustermann ni 13022 d F imad Used 1 24 GB Free 142 60 GB Nr of Patiente 113 Selected Patent Selected Exams 0 Selected Imager 1 13 65 Me If you mark a patient his or her exams will be displayed in the exam table Sort these patients according to Patient ID Patient Name Birth date Number of Exams Sex Date of Last Exam simply by clicking the caption of the respective column 13 3 3 4 Exam Table The Exam table displays all the exams of a particular patient B Exam Date Exam Time Exam Type I Sort these exams according to Exam Date Exam Time Exam Type Mode Number of Images Exam Comment or one of the customer adjustable fields simply by clicking the caption of the respective column s If you select an exam all its images will be displayed in the Exam Image area To select more than one patient hold down the Ctrl key on the keyboard and select the patients with the left trackball key 13 3 3 5 Image Area B Exam Date gt Date Exam Time Time Exam Exam Type i Img Exam Comment Custom Field os 20050414 ase 4 aOR 20 26 32 f tl 1 Use the arrow keys on the right side margin to skim through the images 2 Click the right or left trackball key to mark an image
469. o as the Environmental Friendly Use Period EFUP It indicates the number of years that the product under normal use will remain harmless to health of humans or the environment EFUP 10 for Short Use Products EFUP 20 for Medium Use Products Product was refurbished remanufactured by GE Healthcare Austria GmbH amp Co OG INPUT dumper Used for EPI ppa Oe TE eee ASSEMBLED IN ITALY SM ROME PrP WO U RMP TTT a F i Da RGM PN vV32204010 REW gi OUTPUT RGM MODEL GEKOI oz Sach H i Las Ads ra Contimous mad graer EE consumption 100A iil Company Bonuletured fer GE Healthcare Austria GmbH amp Co OG RTH RoHS REF KTI xxxxXKx_K KARRI KEKE KKK 2 6 Information on internal power supply Assembled in XXXXXXXXX S N RGM xxxxx RGM xxxxx RGM P N xxxxxxxxx Rev xx RGM MODEL xxxxx D C xXxxxx eon 100V 100V 11A 115V 110V 10A 115V 10A 120V 9A 127V 8 7A 130V 8 5A 220V 5A 230V 5A 240V 4 5A 250V 4 5A max 23A max 3A 1 5A Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Safety and Maintenance 2 2 Remarks for Safe Use Get acquainted with the transducers and the ultrasound system read the user manual thoroughly Misinterpretation of an Ultrasound Image can lead to false diagnosis Follow all safety instructions as well as the clinically adopted precautions and measures for hygiene Observe all warning labels Any ultrasound transducers irrespe
470. o the generic measurement functions in 2D M and Spectral Doppler mode 12 9 1 Items of Vascular Calculations The items of vascular calculations in each mode are as follows 2D 3D Mode Left Right CCA Common Carotid Artery Left Right ECA External Carotid Artery Left Right ICA Internal Carotid Artery Left Right Bulb Left Right Vertebral Artery Left Right Subclavian Artery Vessel Left Right CCA Left Right ECA Left Right ICA Left Right Bulb Left Right Vertebral Artery Left Right Subclavian Artery Vessel Doppler Mode Left Right CCA Left Right ECA Left Right ICA Left Right Bulb Left Right Vertebral Artery Left Right Subclavian Artery Vessel 12 9 2 Before starting Vascular Calculations 1 Press the Patient key on the control panel select the VAS page and enter all patient information for Vascular calculations For more information see Entering Patient Data on page 4 7 Note To cancel all calculations performed before and to start new measurement press this key and select End Exam or Clear Exam p 2 Press Start Exam re selected press the Probe key on the control panel and change it to Vascular For more i 3 Make sure that the probe and application are selected properly If another application is information see Probe selection on page 4 5 Probe 12 9 3 Vascular Calculations in 2D Mode s Distance Measurements like Intima Media Thickness and Flow Diameter
471. oaded from http www gehealthcare com transducers The listed products have been validated for appropriate cleaning and disinfection of the probes One of the recommended methods to disinfect the ultrasound probes is immersion disinfection 1 Place the probe into the solution of cleaning disinfectant Make sure not to immerse the probe into the liquid beyond the immersion level given in the pictures below Make sure that the probe is covered with the cleaning disinfectant up to the immersion level during the complete disinfection time Leave the ultrasound probe in the solution for the time specified by the manufacturer see Probe Care Card Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 2 19 Safety and Maintenance 2 Scrub the probe as needed using a soft sponge gauze or cloth to remove all visible residue from the probe surface Prolonged soaking or scrubbing with a soft bristle brush such as a toothbrush may be necessary if material has dried onto the probe surface 3 Rinse the probe with enough clean potable water to remove all disinfectant residues 4 Use a soft cloth to clean the cable and the user section of the probe with the cleaning disinfectant liquid Make sure that the surface of the probe and cable is wetted thoroughly with the cleaning disinfectant 5 Allow probe to air dry completely 6 Reconnect the probe to the ultrasound console and place the probe into its holder 7 Inspect the probe pri
472. obes Additional to disinfection the use of sterile legally marketed probe sheaths for endocavity procedures is MANDATORY Ultrasound probes can be disinfected using different methods The level of disinfection is directly related to the duration of contact with the germicide Increased contact time produces a higher level of disinfection CREUTZFELDT JAKOB DISEASE Neurological use on patients with this disease must be avoided If a probe becomes contaminated there is no adequate disinfecting means Recommendation for cleaning and disinfection of ultrasound probes 1 Remove the probe sheath if appropriate 2 Disconnect the probe from the ultrasound console 3 Remove all coupling gel and other visible substances from the probe by wiping with a soft dry cloth If necessary to remove material dried to the surface the cloth can be moistened with lukewarm water 4 After each use inspect the probe s lens cable and housing Look for any damage that would allow liquid to enter the probe If any damage is found the probe must not be placed into any liquid e g for disinfection and must not be used until it has been inspected and repaired replaced by a GE Healthcare Austria GmbH amp Co OG Service Representative Please consult our constantly updated Probe Care Card which is inside the transducer boxes for disinfectants and gels that are compatible with the surface material of the probes The Probe Care Card can also be downl
473. obes and Biopsies 5 3 5 2D Probes Phased Array Sector Probes 5 3 5 1 PA6 8 D Phased array transducer PAED O 3 not available 1 Patient applied part 2 Probe handle e Cardiology Small footprint not available e Small Parts Broad bandwidth e Pediatrics Multi frequency CFM MCFM Power Tissue PW and steerable CW Doppler 5 3 5 2 S4 10 D Phased array transducer not available S 1 Patient applied part 2 Probe handle e Cardiology Small footprint not available e Small Parts Broad bandwidth e Pediatrics Multi frequency CFM MCFM Power Tissue PW and steerable CW Doppler Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 5 29 Probes and Biopsies 5 3 5 3 3S D Phased array transducer Patient applied part 7 Probe handle Abdominal Harmonic Imaging Only CIVCO manufacturer needle guides may Cardiology CFM MCEM HD be used with this biopsy Pediatrics Flow Power Tissue Material PW and CW Doppler Plastic Neurology Multi angle biopsy Only the biopsy bracket is reusable For detailed information please contact the manufacturer 5 3 5 4 3Sp D Phased array transducer 1 Patient applied part 2 Probe handle Abdominal e Harmonic Imaging Only CIVCO manufacturer needle guides may Cardiology e CFM MCFM HD be used with this biopsy Obstetrics Flow Power Tissue Material PW and CW Doppler Pediatrics Plastic Neurology Multi angle biopsy Onl
474. ocal images after Bockup 2 Check the check box Remove Local Images after Backup if you want to save hard disk space and remove the backed up exams from your local hard disk 3 Then choose the exams you wish to backup according to date Choose a date from the drop down list All exams the from the last backup until the date you choose will be backed up now to date older than 1 Year 4 Confirm with Next If you want to choose exams or patients arbitrarily press Advanced The following window appears Patient View 2 Exam View PatientiD Patient Name Birthdate E Sex laste 1 4 004557 0 1 08 11 2008 Here you can choose between Patient View and Exam View Depending on which view you choose you can select patients or exams to save in your backup It is also possible to choose a singular patient or a singular exam To deselect a patient or an exam check the appropriate check box on the left side of the screen To select this patient or exam again check the check box again Use the Select All button or the Deselect All button below the information screen to select all exams or patients or deselect them Include Selected The selected patients will be saved Exclude Selected The selected patients will no be saved Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 14 62 H48691CF Revision 2 Utilities and System Setup Note It is possible to use the Shift key on the keyboard to
475. ocedures 3 through 5 When the trackball is moved the next indicator appears Exit The Indicator function is switched off but the previous entered indicator remains uncleared Return to the last active menu Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 4 30 H48691CF Revision 2 Operating the System Last Delete Last Last action an entered indicator is cleared All Delete All All entered indicators in the annotation area are cleared 4 5 4 Pictogram Pictogram Display body marks For the documentation of the scan position on the patient a selection of graphic body symbols body marks is available A short bright line indicates the scan position This line can be positioned freely on the bodymark symbol Pressing the Bodymark key causes the touch panel to change to the Bodymark menu The previously used bodymark is shown on the screen Page Meo Pen CARD Vas Tro Sue PED PNEU Mise Gyn Pl tT Pee ee eo MOT et let Meat Pest Mico Pigat Prag igen Per Operation 1 The last selected pictogram appears in the last selected place of the annotation area 2 To change the displayed pictogram select the pictogram of your choice on the touch panel Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 4 31 Operating the System 4 32 Note Note e Use the upper trackball key to switch between moving or rotating the scan plane identification line directi
476. of the System Product Description 3 2 system Assembly 3 3 Mechanical Adjustment 3 4 Concept of Operation 3 7 Layout of Menus 3 7 Button description 3 11 Electronic User Manual EUM 3 16 Chapter 4 Operating the System General Remarks 4 2 System Start Up 4 2 Probe connection and selection 4 4 Entering Patient Data 4 7 Image Annotation 4 26 scan Assistant 4 33 Chapter 5 Probes and Biopsies Probes 5 2 Biopsies 5 8 Overview of all probes and biopsies 5 13 Chapter 6 2D Mode 2D Main Menu 6 2 2D Operation 6 3 Cine
477. of the screen Vol Angle The moving indicator gives information about the position of the B image during the volume scan The sweep time varies and depends on the VOL BOX size depth range angle and the quality 6 positions The probe must be held steady and in place during the 3D volume scan The real time display of the swept B frames allows continual observation of the scan quality During the real time 4D scan it is not necessary to hold the probe steady because of the continuous volume acquisition 10 1 2 B Flow in 3D Volume Acquisition Mode B Flow is also available with 3D Volume acquisition mode B Flow is not available with 4D acquisitions apart from STIC For a B Flow volume acquisition the B Flow mode is first activated by means of the B Flow Mode key Afterwards press the 3D key to activate the Volume mode In the 3D Static Menu select a setting and an application key adjust settings and then start 3D volume acquisition Operation For more information see Volume Acquisition Static 3D Sectional Planes on page 70 73 or For more information see Volume Acquisition Static 3D Render on page 10 49 2 There are no further differences in operation compared to a normal 3D acquisition Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 5 Volume Mode id 4D Real Time acquisition is impossible while the B Flow mode is active 10 1 3 Principal Scanning Modes The volume scan is automatically
478. ogram Volume Histogram 14 1 3 1 2D Histogram Operation 1 Store a 2D mode CFM mode or PD mode image 2 Switch on Histogram by touching Utilities and Histogram H istogram The touch panel changes to the Histogram menu Calculate 3 Select the number of histogram 1 2 or 3 4 Use the trackball to place the rectangle over the ROI 10 en JOD 5 The upper trackball key changes from position to size of the ROI and back 6 Touch the Calculate key on the touch panel or press the right or left trackball key The histogram and corresponding number left below the box will be calculated and displayed Remarks Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 14 4 H48691CF Revision 2 Utilities and System Setup Measuring text annotation bodymarks entering as well as all post processing settings are not possible in Histogram mode Display of gray scale HISTOGRAM ee 55 Y axis incidence in normalized to maximal incidence A Average value A Sum of values x presence Number of values in ROI SD Standard deviation Display of a color HISTOGRAM ee 2 Y axis incidence in normalized to maximal incidence C Color values in SD Standard deviation f To exit the Histogram touch Exit on the touch panel 14 1 3 2 3D Histogram Operation 1 Store a 3D a 3D PD or a 3D CFM mode image 2 By touching the Utilities and the Histogram key the Histogram menu appears on the screen
479. ol panel before switching A OFF the system Otherwise the current Patient data as well as all the measurements in the Patient Worksheets get lost Voluzon ES Do you really want to End Exam w JE e If the End Exam Dialog field in the System Setup is marked by a check mark the End Exam dialog will be displayed on the monitor before ending the current exam For more information see General on page 14 14 1 Incomplete measurement exists Select No Dialog window disappears exit to previous operating state Select Yes End Exam command is executed and the dialog window disappears 2 No incomplete measurement exists Select No Dialog window disappears exit to previous operating state Select Yes End Exam command is executed and the dialog window disappears Patient ID exists Patient and measurement data are stored in the Data manager all temporary patient and measurement data are cleared ad No Patient ID exists all temporary measurement data are cleared Note All files will be compressed when ending a exam The status of the compression is indicated with a status bar on the lower left user interface Note The End Exam command is also executed if the End Exam key button is pressed again while the dialog window is displayed Note Ifa DICOM Printer is configured to print by End Exam and the printing page is not full the following message appears Voluson E8 E8 Expert
480. oluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 12 38 H48691CF Revision 2 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 12 6 4 12 6 Summary Report Exam Comment Touch this key to enter a comment using the keyboard or to enter a previous defined comment by touching the Comment A Comment B or Comment C key For further details review Basic Patient Worksheet Functions on page 72 5 The Summary Report Exam Comment is always included in the report printout For more N information see Basic Patient Worksheet Functions on page 12 5 12 Cardiac Calculations Application Cardiology Factory Sub Category Biometry allows measurements calculations in 2D 3D mode M mode and Spectral Doppler mode using various measure items For details about settings review Measure amp Calc on page 16 3 The methods for obtaining measurements in the Cardiology Calculations menu are similar to the generic measurement functions in 2D M and Spectral Doppler mode 12 7 1 Items of Cardiology Calculations The items of cardio calculations in each mode are as follows 2D 3D Mode LV Simpson Single amp Bi Plane Volume A L Volume Area Length LV Mass Epi amp Endo Area LV Length LV RVD IVS LVD LVPW LVOT Diameter RVOT Diameter MV Dist A Dist B Area TV Diameter AV LA Aortic Valve amp Left Atrium Diameter PV Diameter C Color Mode PISA LV IVS LVD LVPW RVD AV LA Ao Root Diam LA D
481. oluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 2D Mode 7 Press the Zoom digipot to exit the High Resolution Zoom function 6 3 Cine Mode While scanning a certain number of frames 2D images of the last examination sequence this will be stored in the cine memory automatically This is indicated by the green bar in the Run 13sec _ 264 bottom left corner When entering freeze mode by pressing the Freeze key or the defined Px key the cine memory will be stored as a sequence This sequence can be reviewed in loop mode or image by image After the cine clip is stored the cine memory will be deleted Move the trackball horizontally to display the 2D images of the stored sequence one by one The last stored sequence consists of images from the last scan procedure and will be stored C until the next scan procedure by Freeze ER Use the small buttons under the trackball to switch between Image mode and Cine mode Img Display Cine xxx in the monitor s status bar she n Run 13sec 335 lt m 204 1 P P Button values values P P Button values values oo a Clip length in Absolute e Clip length in seconds seconds Graphic display of the default Graphic display of the default Save length programmed under Save length programmed under P button P button Current acquisition state Run Current acquisition state Freeze Display of current c
482. oluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 General All references to standards regulations and their revisions are valid for the time of publication apy 1 of the user manual 1 2 Contacting GE Healthcare Ultrasound For additional information or assistance please contact your local distributor or the appropriate support resource listed on the following pages INTERNET Clinical Questions Service Questions Information Request Placing an Order ARGENTINA ASIA PACIFIC JAPAN Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 http www gehealthcare com http www gehealthcare com usen ultrasound products probe_care html For information in the United States Canada Mexico and parts of the Caribbean call the Customer Answer Center Phone 1 800 682 5327 or 1 262 524 5698 In other locations contact your local Applications Sales or Service Representative For service in the United States call GE CARES Phone 1 800 437 1171 For service for compact products in the United States call Phone 1 877 800 6776 In other locations contact your local Service Representative To request the latest GE Accessories catalog or equipment brochures in the United States call the Response Center Phone 1 800 643 6439 In other locations contact your local Applications Sales or Service Representative To order accessories supplies or service parts in the United States call
483. on Only Full Screen Format is available The display of the Biopsy guideline is impossible in XTD View mode Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 2D Mode 6 7 2 XTD View Operation The image optimizing functions like gain power depth image angle focus OTI etc are the same as in 2D mode For more information see 2D Operation on page 6 3 To perform an exam using XTD View For more information see Using XTD View on page 6 30 The quality and usefulness of XTD View images is affected by the transducer s motion Incorrect technique can contribute to image distortion Guidance and precautions for uniform motion Make sure that there is enough coupling gel along the scan path Always move the transducer slowly and steadily Best results are achieved by moving the transducer with 2cm s max 4cm s Continuous contact is required throughout the length of the extended image DO NOT lift the transducer from the skin surface Always keep the transducer perpendicular to the skin surface DO NOT rock rotate or tilt the transducer during the scan Keep the motion within the same scan plane if possible DO NOT slide the transducer laterally DO NOT change the direction of movement during the scan e g DO NOT move back and forward while scanning The system accommodates a reasonable range of motion velocity DO NOT make abrupt changes in speed of motion Deeper scans generally require redu
484. on E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 69 Volume Mode Outside Trace Inside Structures within the contour will be discarded Trace Outside Structures outside the contour will be discarded Use the trackball for tracing Position the first point enter it with right or left trackball key SET and move the cross along the desired trace indicated by a red line Press the right or left trackball key SET again The region inside outside the trace will be cut from the 3D rendered image If a contour is left open the program will automatically close the contour with a line directly from the end point to the start point s Box inside Box outside Inside Outside Box Inside All information inside the box will be cut Box Outside All information outside the box will be cut Position the left upper point with the trackball and enter it with the right or left trackball key SET Move the point with the trackball in a diagonal fashion to create a box The red trace of the box is displayed immediately Press the right or left trackball key SET again The region inside outside the box will be cut from the 3D rendered image e Eraser Eraser Small Big All information underneath the eraser will be cut Position the first point enter it with the right or left trackball key SET and move the eraser over the part of the image to be erased Press the right or left trackball key SET again to finish t
485. on see Volume Acquisition Static 3D Sectional Planes on page 10 13 Volume Acquisition Static 3D Render on page 10 49 4D menu after Volume Acquisition Sectional VCAD 7 ectiona opo Planes mu VOGAL Heart Segm o MagiCut Ref Image 3D Orientation B 90 There are different possibilities for a 4D Volume Acquisition see k Real Time 4D Acquisition on page 10 79 id Volume Contrast Imaging VCI A Plane on page 10 96 VCl Omniview on page 10 98 STIC Spatio Temporal Image Correlation on page 10 102 Real Time 4D Biopsy on page 10 109 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 4 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode 10 1 1 Principle of Volume Acquisition The acquisition of volume data sets is performed by 2D scans with special transducers designed for the 2D scans the 3D sweep and the real time 4D scans The Volume acquisition is started using a 2D image with superimposed VOL Box or using a 2D Color image In case of a 2D Color image the Color Box is at the same time the VOL Box The 2D start image represents the central 2D scan of the volume The volume scan itself sweeps from one margin to the other margin of the volume to be acquired The VOL BOX frames the Region of Interest ROI which will be stored during the volume sweep The display shows the actual 2D scan In 3D the range of the volume sweep is indicated by the VolAngle Pictogram which is displayed at the bottom right
486. on with the trackball 10 Move or rotate the scan plane identification line direction ie Press the left or right trackball key to fix the scan plane identification line and return to the last active menu with the bodymark displayed The scan plane identification is shown in the scan mode and the freeze mode Press Exit to return to the last active menu with the bodymark displayed Exit Off Press Exit Off to return to the last menu with the bodymark switched off Touch an application key to change between the different application related bodymarks Meo Mr Syn CARD Vas URO Swe Pe Neu Mien After selecting another application the menu changes back to the Bodymark menu with the bodymark symbols of the selected application Return to the Bodymark menu if no new application is selected The main application chosen in the Probe Selection menu does not change After touching the Appl key the touch panel changes to the Application Select menu When a main application in the Probe Selection menu Is selected the Bodymark application is set changed to this application Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Operating the System 4 6 Scan Assistant General Scan Assistant is an option If this option is not installed the Scan Assistant feature is hidden The Scan Assistant tracks all measurements It will also be listed in the work
487. onal plane With simultaneous display of the sectional planes A B and C the one chosen for reference is marked by the lit responsible key e g A If a single sectional plane A B or C is displayed full screen mode this is the reference image The reference image may be changed by touching the buttons A B or C Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 19 Volume Mode 10 2 3 4 Image Position By this function the position of a reference image A B or C in relation to the display field is determined First press the ROI button below the trackball Press the upper trackball key to change the function from axis position to image position eo By means of the trackball the reference image is shifted and positioned in X and Y direction respectively The center of rotation remains fixed only the volume is shifted 10 2 3 5 Image Magnifier By this function the aspect ratio of a reference image relative to the display field is determined a Turn this button and the sectional images A B and C will be magnified from the center of rotation 10 2 3 6 Initial Condition ee Touch this key on the touch panel to reset the rotations and translations of a volume section Init to the initial start position which automatically appears after a volume acquisition The center of rotations central dot has its initial position in the center of the scanned volume For more information see
488. ong the ultrasound beam the spectral analysis is being performed A flow direction cursor can be added to the sample volume The PW mode is subdivided in two groups In these groups you will see how to use PW mode and how to adjust the PW settings To use the PW mode For more information see PW Main Menu on page 8 2 To adjust PW setting For more information see PW Sub Menu on page 8 6 To use special utilities Utilities on page 14 2 and Gray Map on page 6 27 8 1 1 PW Main Menu PW Mode key hard key Press the PW control to activate the PW mode in the preparation mode First only the PW cursor appears on the active 2D image e To start and use the PW mode For more information see PW Operation on page 8 3 To adjust the PW settings For more information see PW Sub Menu on page 8 6 This hard key is also the Gain control for the PW mode in scan mode For more information see PW Operation on page 8 3 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 8 2 H48691CF Revision 2 Doppler Modes The PW Main menu appears on the touch panel scan mode ain PW oan n Display Format 1 V O cmis V Center Frequency Baseline WMF 120 Hz ry Remarks 8 1 2 PW Operation R PRF 0 kHz Changing the Gain Speed Gate width Loudspeaker Volume Wall Motion Filter and the PRF is not possible in freeze mode The Steering function is only available with linear probes The PW
489. onnection on page 4 4 and Probe selection on page 4 5 2 4 7 1 1 Coupling Gels Do not use un recommended gels lubricants They may damage the probe and void the warranty Applying Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 2 16 H48691CF Revision 2 Safety and Maintenance In order to assure optimal transmission of energy between the patient and probe a conductive gel or couplant must be applied liberally to the patient where scanning will be performed Precautions Coupling gels should not contain the following ingredients as they are known to cause probe damage Methanol ethanol isopropanol or any other alcohol based product s Mineral oil lodine Lotions Lanolin e Aloe Vera Olive Oil s Methyl or Ethyl Parabens para hydroxybenzoic acid Dimethylsilicone When scanning in air Ultrasound probe is not in contact with a human body or a phantom most of the ultrasound energy is reflected at the lens air surface and bounces back and forward between that interface and the transducer ceramics Already the smallest deviation from the ideal geometrical shape of the reflecting interfaces can cause irregularities in the reverberation pattern across the transducer surface However when the probe is coupled to the human skin or a phantom by using coupling gel most of the ultrasound energy passes the lens skin interface and these small geometrical deviations will have a negligible effect on the ultrasound
490. onous pumping of the fetal heart or of an artery Please make sure that the borders of the fetal heart or the artery are smooth and there are no sudden discontinuities One or more of the following artefacts in the data set indicate a disturbance during acquisition i Sudden discontinuities in the reference image B These are due to motion of the mother the fetus or fetal arrhythmia during acquisition Sudden discontinuities in the color display Motion of the mother the fetus or fetal arrhythmia affects the color flow in the same way it affects the gray image Fetal heart rate far to low or far to high After acquisition the estimated fetal heart rate is displayed If the value does not correspond to the estimations based on other diagnostic methods at all the acquisition failed and has to be repeated Asynchronous movement in different parts of the image e g the left part of the image is contracting and the right part is expanding at the same time The color does not fit the structures displayed in gray mode The color is displayed above or below the actual vessel Color moves through the image in a certain direction This artefact is caused by a failure in detecting the heart rate due to low acquisition frame rate Use higher acquisition frame rate for better result In all of the above cases the data set has to be discarded and the acquisition has to be repeated When is it not allowed to perform the STIC fetal
491. ontrast media Handle the contrast medium as described in the operation manual supplied with the contrast medium Check the side effects of the contrast medium used with the manufacturer of the contrast medium s s Cavitation may occur due to interactions between the ultrasonic waves and the contrast medium Always perform examination using the ALARA As Low As Reasonably Achievable principle The acoustic power can be changed using the Power flip switch on the control panel Stop the examination and perform appropriate treatment if there is any abnormality with the patient during use of the contrast medium 6 8 2 Contrast Techniques Description Intended Use Coded Phase Harmonic profusion Low MI Harmonic imaging Inversion for profusion tumor flow characteristics Standard Standard Image Switch to standard B Mode settings ETG 6 8 3 Contrast Operation The Contrast operation consists of Enhance Max maximum i Contrast Clock Time Delay All further image optimizing functions are the same than those of the 2D mode 2D Operation on page 6 3 Note Controls adjusted while in Contrast Imaging retain these values when you exit except for post processing controls When reactivating Contrast Imaging the last selected contrast technique is remembered 6 8 3 1 Enhance Max maximum This control provides quick transition to High MI imaging This allows the user a quick one button push to destroy the agent Useful when t
492. ontrol panel 2 Select the item LV and then touch LV Study A vertical line with a cursor appears in the M Mode trace display 3 Use the trackball to move the cursor on the line to the position of the anterior septum signal of the Diastole and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix it 4 Move the second cursor to the anterior IVSd signal and press the right or left trackball key Set The mark is fixed and the next cursor will appear 5 Move the cursor to LVDd and press Set The mark is fixed and the next cursor appears 6 Move the cursor to LVPWd and press the right or left trackball key Set again The mark is fixed and a new vertical line with a cursor appears 7 Use the trackball to move the cursor on the line to the anterior systolic position of the IVSs signal and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix it 8 Move the second cursor to the anterior IVSs signal and press the right or left trackball key Set The mark is fixed and the next cursor will appear 9 Move the cursor to LVDs and press Set The mark is fixed and the next cursor appears 10 Move the cursor to LVPWs and press the right or left trackball key Set again The mark is fixed and the measurement of the Left Ventricle is completed Additionally also RVDd and HR can be measured If the Heart Rate is measured also the Cardiac Output is calculated and shown in the worksheet IVSd Interventricular Septum diastolic
493. oot the system There is a National Language Support for the whole measurement package generic and calculation measurements Measurement setup and worksheets reports Note After changing the language the system must be rebooted 14 2 3 1 8 EUM Language Open pull down menu and select the language desired Note This selection is not influenced by general language selection and vice versa Only languages available on the system are listed If a new language Is installed it is automatically added to the list 14 2 3 1 9 Presentation Mode Select the Presentation Mode button to evoke the following menu to configure and start the presentation mode Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 14 16 H48691CF Revision 2 Utilities and System Setup Presentation Mode Image Duration Change the display time of a single image using the up and down keys OK Leave the menu without starting Presentation Mode but save changes to Image Duration Start Presentation Mode Cancel Leave the menu without starting presentation mode and without saving changes Stop the presentation with either Ctrl Alt I s Shutdown Button Esc key Where to find the images for the presentation The images can be found in D pictures voluson Ex 14 2 3 2 User Settings Teel Gayla Tetechibes ll spate Overview Window Position Off Left Top Left Bottom default Right Top or Right Bottom Large normal default or small 3
494. options are active The Foll meae aa ARP Ayi F P e EA EES The Forowing options ari ctivated for demo Tr y EADS listed below 2 O p our a rarua The window shows all demo options and the time they are valid Sly The 3 Month Demo options can only be activated once The user cannot repeat this zia activation To order a permanent option or to get a Demo Key from OKOS please contact 3s your local sales representative Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 14 30 H48691CF Revision 2 Utilities and System Setup 14 2 5 Connectivity 14 2 5 1 Peripherals oPirter cat oeat Maci Recorder Tipt Rapai Prinies VER Conan MIO seriei Prinber DAD Sony JD WE peaa pnn Cong MPRI se ies FPrinbe i Select Al Printerg Cleon Print ue Recorder Type Select an available recorder type For more information see Recorder type on page 77 8 If VCR or DVD is selected and the DVR is installed it is not possible to export or backup data to the DVR Video Norm Changing of the Video Norm between PAL and NTSC Only one selection is possible Ext Monitor Allows you to change the output for an external monitor between VGA and DVI Only one selection is possible DVR Auto format DVD RW for video recording f the box is checked every time a new DVD RW media is inserted it will be formatted for video recording only available if DVR is selected as a recorder type Add Printer Allows you to instal
495. or Position and Focus Activation of CW Mode CW Gain Control Sweep Speed on page 8 35 i Invert on page 8 32 Angle Correction on page 8 27 if Audio Signal on page 8 27 Baseline on page 8 28 Wall Motion Filter WMEF on page 8 36 e Velocity Range PRF on page 8 35 Real Time Trace on page 8 33 s Freeze PW Operation on page 8 3 CW Cineloop PW Operation on page 8 3 8 2 2 1 Cursor Position and Focus Goa D E D CT Oey TE ley vy In Continuous Wave Doppler a specific area along the ultrasound beam is sampled The location of the CW cursor can be changed with the trackball The angle correction line on the CW cursor is also the depth marker for the focus When changing the focal depth you see the current value displayed in centimeters on the left side of the display in the image info Adjust the CW cursor and the CW Focus with the trackball on the 2D single image gt CW cursor position t 4 CW Focus The angle correction line on the CW cursor is also the depth marker for the focus 8 2 2 2 Activation of CW Mode 8 8 Press the left trackball key to start the motion display the 2D image will be frozen The screen is divided asymmetrically In the image above the 2D image appears In the image below the CW mode spectrum starts running Three display formats are possible For more information see Format on page 8 30 The touch panel shows the CW Main m
496. or to use for damage or degeneration to the housing strain relief lens and seal Do not use a damaged or defective probe until it has been inspected and repaired replaced by a GE Healthcare Austria GmbH amp Co OG Service Representative 8 Put a new sterile legally marketed probe sheath over the probe prior to next use Other appropriate disinfection methods for ultrasound probes such as wipe disinfection may be applied as an alternative to disinfection by immersion provided that the products listed in the Probe Care Card are used 2 4 8 4 Probe Immersion Levels PA 6 8 D 3S D 9L D ji a 3Sp D EE ABE eet TaD RNA 5 9 D P2 D py S4 10 D i F C4 8 D j SP10 16 D 1 j i a f i l a i FA RSM 5 14 IC 5 9 D RM14L panse kaszso repesen RESID RRESIOD Fagg RM6C RAB 4 8 D a EE a be Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 2 20 H48691CF Revision 2 Safety and Maintenance 2 4 8 5 Planned Maintenance The following maintenance schedule is suggested for the system probe and reusable biopsy biopsy bracket to ensure optimum operation and safety Do the Following Inspect the Probes Clean the Probes Disinfect endocavity probes Disinfect all other probe types 2 4 8 6 Environmental requirements for Probes Probes must be operated stored or transported within the parameters outlined below Probe Environmental Requirements Temperature 18 to 30 C 10
497. ording check box in System media is inserted it will be formatted for video recording Setup Connectivity Peripherals only available if DVR is selected as a recorder type DVR Menu controls DVR Menu Control Description Record to DVD RW 3 titles on disc Record to USB stick by FORMAT ace using the DVR dedicated for Video USB port Play mode Stop mode Pause mode Record mode Fast forward search REW Reverse search ST ADV Next frame press PLAY then PAUSE then ST ADV SKIP gt Next title SKIP lt Previous title Eject Eject disc FORMAT for video Format disc only available for DVD RW media Erase Erase disc Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 17 10 H48691CF Revision 2 Connections DVR icons DVR Icon USB Icon Description DVR disc drive available Gray icon no disc inserted Green icon disc inserted DVR or USB PLAY mode DVR or USB PLAY PAUSE mode DVR or USB REC mode DVR or USB REC PAUSE mode DVR or USB status busy FS AH 8 A DVR messages Messages Do you really want to format this DVD Unsupported video recording media please insert a DVD RW media No space left on USB stick Please connect new USB stick Maximum number of titles reached No further recording is possible on this disc A DVR communication error occurred Please retry in a few seconds If the problem persists it is recommended to re initialize the DVR Do you want to re initialize DVR A DVR com
498. ork access from and to an ultrasound system with the remote access feature installed Other precautions like a secure network segment are encouraged 2 8 Bioeffects and Safety of Ultrasound Scans When ultrasound waves travel through tissue there is a certain risk for damage There has been a lot of research on the impact that high frequency waves can have on different kinds of tissues under defined conditions and There is to date no evidence that diagnostic ultrasound has produced any harm to humans including the developing fetus Guidelines for the safe Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Safety and Maintenance use of diagnostic ultrasound equipment Safety Group of the British Medical Ultrasound Society 2010 Physiological effects due to ultrasound are generally assumed to be deterministic and only occur above a certain threshold in contrast to ionizing radiation which causes effects accidentally Thus ultrasound examinations can be held very safe if certain proceedings are followed It is therefore recommended to read the following sections and study the cited literature 2 8 1 Prudent Use ALARA Principle In spite of the relatively low risk of ultrasound scans compared to other imaging techniques the operator shall choose the exposure level with caution to minimize the risk of bioeffects A fundamental approach to the safe use of diagnostic ultrasound is to use the lowest output power an
499. orksheet Threshold Turn the digipots to change the Threshold limits Growth Growth is controlling a parameter in the segmentation algorithm that defines the final shape of the objects found Increasing this parameter will allow the objects to fit tighter to the visible boundary A value too large might cause the objects to grow over the boundary and cover areas no longer part of the objects of interest Possible steps 3 2 1 mid 1 2 3 7 Separation Seperation Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 134 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode Separation is controlling a parameter of the segmentation algorithm that defines an initial threshold to separate objects Increasing this parameter will prevent objects from being identified as multiple objects e g when there is noise within the object but might prevent small objects from being found correctly Adjust tones Adjustment of the low tones dark echoes and high tones bright echoes 10 13 3 Undo operations Use the Undo Redo Undo All buttons in the main menu to correct your recent editing actions as described in Operation on page 10 131 10 13 4 Editing auto generated volumes To cut a volume a 1 Press the left trackball key to start drawing a path along the area you want to cut out Oy 2 Press again to set the path s endpoint If the path is not closed the software will connect the start and end point with a straigh
500. orts Dote ofExam 07 24 2007 Poge 5 6 Exom Type 36 36 e Dok Hans t DO03001 07 07 24 1 Growth Bar Graph GAILMP GAI AUA EFW Hadlock OOR BPD Hadlock 18w5d 17w0d 20w3d include Bar Graph on Report The Bar graph display can also be included on the report Botectizom OMZAaJ2007 Pope 3 8 Pma Type Nome Dok Hans E A S EPA MM illicenal E SS B a a EFW williams BPD Hadlock Current GAILMP Printer GA Reference Phat a 7 Current GAILMP i Trend Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 37 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports Gote of Enom ONZA ST Pope 5 6 Exam Type Mane Dok Henriette Pot ID GOS001 07 07 24 1 EFW Williams cr BPD H odiocki 2504250 He Hadlack len HC Hadlackd JADAH 2a Quad Display 12 6 4 12 4 Summary Report Fetus Compare Touch this key to compare all measurement results of the measured fetuses Fetus Compare Daie of Eram o7 2a 2007 Poget 6 7 Emom TPE me Bok Henriette Pot POF001 O7 07 24 1 Fetus Compare A AUA 2iwed EO DLAUA 11 13 2007 EFW Hadilock BPD Hodlock Leem OFD HC 11 28cm HE Hodlock 27 86cm HC Hodlock 25 65 m AC Hodlhock 15 40cm TAD 506cm 12 6 4 12 5 Summary Report Generic T This Summary report is only active if generic measurements were performed For further A details review Generic Measurements on page 11 2 V
501. ound the shape to be measured Note To re adjust the traced line press the upper trackball key Undo repeatedly 4 When the second cursor is near the initial cursor position or if you press the right or left trackball key Set again the trace is automatically completed by a straight line 11 1 2 2 2 Area Point 1 To measure circumference and area by setting several points as much as desired touch the Area Point key on the touch panel A cursor appears on the screen 2 Move the cursor to the start of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 11 7 Measurements 3 Move the trackball again to adjust the next line between two points and then press Set again Note To re agjust a line press the upper trackball key Undo repeatedly 4 Setas many points as necessary around the shape to be measured 5 When you press the Set key once again a straight line automatically completes the trace 11 1 2 2 3 Area 2 Distances 1 To measure circumference and area of an ovoid using 2 distances touch the Area 2 Dist key on the touch panel A cursor appears on the screen 2 Move the cursor to the start point of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker A second cursor appears 3 Move the second cursor to the end point of the first measurement and press Set again No
502. ow and will result in an underestimation of the large flow disturbances PD button Rotating adjusts the intensity of the PD signal When the GAIN control is turned clockwise Color becomes more intense When the GAIN control is turned counterclockwise Color becomes less intense 8 4 2 3 2D 2D PD The 2D 2D PD function changes the single image display to two simultaneous half frames The left frame shows only the 2D mode image The right frame shows the 2D mode image also with color information peony Switch on off this mode by touching the 2D 2D PD key 2D 2DI PD 8 4 3 PD Sub Menu The PD Main menu has to be active Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 8 17 Doppler Modes Note 8 4 3 1 PD Map Touch the Sub PD key The PD Submenu appears Some functions are only available in scan mode Following functions are available Frequency on page 8 31 gt Flow Resolution on page 8 29 Balance on page 8 28 Smoothing on page 8 34 Ensemble on page 8 29 Line Density on page 8 32 PD Map on page 8 18 Artifact Suppression on page 8 27 i Line Filter on page 8 32 Gray Map on page 6 21 ad Utilities on page 14 2 This function allows selection of the color coding for an optimized view of blood flow similar to the post processing curves with gray scale 2D scans It is useful especially with low flow rates It may be alter
503. ower cable is hospital grade Grounding reliability can only be achieved when the equipment is connected to an equivalent receptacle marked Hospital only or Hospital grade Applicable depending on local regulatory requirements Tipping danger Do not lean on the system and take special care when moving the system For more information see Moving or lifting the System on page 2 10 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Safety and Maintenance on your country s voltage This device uses alternating current For actual voltage range used for your device see symbol below 100 130 220 200v This text indicates the voltages that the 50 60Hz This indicates the electrical frequency device is built for Please note that either that the device is built for Please note the first voltage range OR the second that either the first frequency OR the voltage range is applicable depending second frequency is applicable depending on your country s frequency country specific see also description The voltage shown in this area is the 130k This indicates the approximate weight of voltage actually required for the device g the system in kilograms above This symbol indicates that in the United States of America federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a 1000 VA This indicates the maximum rated power consumption of the system physician This symbol ind
504. ox or the render start curvature The activated function is displayed in the status bar on the monitor Press the upper trackball key to change the function of the trackball from position to size or vice versa J Adjust the Quality This function changes the line density against the acquisition speed Fast speed low scan density This mode is selected only in case of expected movement artefacts A loss of volume resolution will result Ow Standard VOL scan medium scan density Slow speed high scan density Change the Penetration depth Select the penetration depth of the 2D image 10 5 4 2 Available Controls during and after the acquisition THlow 24 aad Vol Angle _ Mix between two render modes The mixing can be done in 2 steps from 0 to 100 by using the left control below the touch panel The mix ratio is displayed in Push the rotary control to set the ratio to 50 50 For Example To produce a better smoothed surface by mixing surface smooth and light mode Set the Threshold low Reject Normally this threshold must always be adjusted for a good appearance of the 3D surface image By changing the threshold all echoes below the level are enhanced in pink color for a certain interval Application With this function small echoes or noise are removed in order to achieve a clear vision from the start border of the render box to the surface of interest Set the Volume Angle Set the volume sweep a
505. p To specify a DICOM Address Connectivity on page 14 37 4 4 7 To Search in the Patient List Note Search Select the Search button using the trackball cursor and enter with the left or right trackball key In System Setup General Patient Info Display there is a check box Automatically List Patients If this check box is marked all exams will be displayed automatically upon pressing search If this check box is unmarked no exams will be displayed when you press Search until you click the Show All button on the screen This button is available on the Patient Information screen For more information see Patient Information screen on page 4 74 The Search Results dialog menu appears on screen n A Archive ID Name DOB Age Sex Cancel Search Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 4 25 Operating the System Potent ID Lost Nome First Name Maddie Name 2nd Patient ID DOB mm dd yyyyt ae pa A Last Exam 09 14 2007 01 30 2009 09 14 2007 03 25 2009 02 12 2009 02 04 2009 02 06 2009 03 11 2009 02 03 2009 11 10 2005 03 25 2009 03 18 2009 03 25 2009 01 28 2009 04 08 2009 04 08 2009 03 25 2009 03 25 2009 10 07 2010 09 30 2008 12 04 2008 11 18 2008 08 22 2006 Patient ID 2nd Patient ID Patient Name Birthdate Fetus 22 w HDF AMM Heart 35 w STIC Baker Cyst Breast 2D 3D Breast 2D 3D mal Breast Biopsy 3D Breast Cyst 3D Breast
506. page 11 4 Remark After the measurement the volume of the ellipse is displayed 11 1 2 3 3 1 Distance Ellipse 1 To measure volume of an ovoid using one distance and ellipse touch the 1 Dist Ellipse key on the touch panel A cursor appears on the screen 2 Move the cursor to the start point of the distance measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set A second cursor appears 3 Move the second cursor to the end point of the distance measurement and press Set again Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 11 9 Measurements Note To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key Change before completing the measurement This alternates the control from one cursor to the other ai When using single image mode measure the two distances Press Freeze to return to scan mode and scan the second image Press Freeze again A new cursor for the ellipse measurement appears If you have scanned the second image in Dual mode previously you can measure the ellipse within this second half image 4 Move the cursor to the start point of the ellipse measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set A second cursor appears 5 Move the second cursor to form an appropriate ellipse and press Set again Note To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key Change 6 Adjust the width of the ellipse by means of the trackball and then press the right tr
507. page 4 2 System Start Up on page 4 2 Probe connection and selection on page 4 4 A Entering Patient Data on page 4 7 Image Annotation on page 4 26 Scan Assistant on page 4 33 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 4 1 Operating the System 4 2 4 1 General Remarks Installation switching on for the first time and check up of the system must only be performed by authorized persons The Voluson E8 E8 Expert is delivered with recommended basic settings These offer suitable conditions for a large number of applications Depending on the user s experience these default settings can be changed and stored as new User Programs Storing these programs or quick loading of new programs of a second user is done by Backups Be sure to have read all system and probe safety information before proceeding For more information see System Safety and Maintenance on page 2 7 For more information see Probe Safety and Maintenance on page 2 14 4 2 System Start Up 4 2 1 Power On A A Never use an adapter that would defeat the safety ground The system must only be connected to a fully intact main socket with a grounded guard wire via an appropriate main cable The ground wire must never be removed or disconnected 1 Connect the Power Cable to the back of the system 2 Connect the Main Power Cable to a hospital grade power receptacle with the proper rated voltage
508. patient data from a worklist server is going to be merged with locally stored data Checking the Private Tags check box determines that the private tags defined for communication with Viewpoint worklist are used in a query Private Tags only works if the other system also supports Private Tags REPORT By selecting Service REPORT you can choose between two Transfer Modes Network to send the Patient report to a PC report station via DICOM network Serial to send the Patient report to a PC report station that is connected by serial port The optional PRY USB RS232 Connection kit must be connected to the system If you select Serial different fields are available to adjust the report transfer configuration Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Utilities and System Setup pa E mas a Network Note The baud rate bits per second must be the same as on the receiving PC report station MPPS Dinos Canagqureinon SHC BPS i EP Addie PETEN Pwt AE Tiie Store Sener TH Sinik If MPPS is selected from the Services pull down menu the available fields are Services Alias AE Title IP Address Port and Store Server SR Server Only the images sent to the selected Store Server SR Server are added to the image list of the MPPS completed or discontinued message Note As soon as an MPPS server is created and selected MPPS messages
509. performed by an automatic sweep of the transducer array inside the housing The scanned volume is similar to a section of a torus Transducer type 10 1 4 What is Interactive 3D Image Rendering The 3D Image Rendering is a calculation process to visualize certain 3D structures of a scanned volume by means of a 2D image The gray value for each pixel of the 2D image is calculated from the voxels along the corresponding projection path analyzing beam through the volume The render calculation algorithm surface or transparent mode decides which 3D structures are visualized VOXEL at PROJECTION WAY PIXEL 10 1 4 1 What is Interactive Interactive means that every operation adjustment concerning the result of the rendering process can be followed in real time The fast hardware and intelligent software enables calculation in real time rendered pictures After an operation step the result is rendered with a lower resolution in order to speed up the interactive feedback and when no further operation takes place the result is rendered in high resolution Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 6 H48691CF Revision 2 10 1 5 Image Orientation All Acquisition Modes Start condition B image Volume Mode Adjust a longitudinal scan of the object desired Switch on 3D or 4D mode and start the volume acquisition B image orientation up gt down Ventral Cranial Befault 6 00 4 06 C
510. ppears on the touch panel Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 47 Volume Mode 2 Select a predefined coloring map or if HD ve mode is active press Save to store a user setting 3 In HD ve Mode Hue and Saturation of the selected map can be modified by turning the rotary controls below the touch panel 4 If Depth Coloring is available Color Transition can be modified by turning the rotary control below the touch panel 3D Volume Coloring Tint 3D Maps Candle f Sepia jel gis Color Trans I gt Start 39 Slope 27 Save popup window HD ve TT Save 3D Volume Coloring 30 Volume Coloring al Tint HD live Maps Save tain Shin g a m geimi ERMS Sima Shin 10 shine Sa iiit i Shins Shin 10 User defined User definad Color Ui Color U Color W3 Color Ui Color U Color US Hue Saturation Hue Sanuration 10 3 9 Contrast To adjust the contrast of the 3D 4D image For more information see 3D Gray Chroma Map on page 10 45 Note The settings require an alert observation of the influence on the 3D image These keys are not available in Static 3D Sectional Planes mode 10 3 10 Background To adjust the background For more information see 3D Gray Chroma Map on page 10 45 Note This key is not available in Static 3D Sectional Planes mode Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 48 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode 10 3 11 Balance 1
511. programs the following message pops up when saving the program The user program is marked with a logo If you overwrite the program the logo will be Ss removed Do you want to proceed Click Yes to overwrite and remove the logo or click No to cancel Exit Back to the last active menu without saving Delete To delete stored settings from the database Save To save settings with the active Settings select menu Return Back to the User Setting main menu Default A change of the default setting is protected by a password The User cannot change the label Default 14 2 3 2 2 To Save a 3D 4D Program This tool saves current 3D 4D settings of the system under a 3D 4D program key 3D 4D programs 1 Select the 3D 4D programs button in the System Setup General User Settings page Note Only available after a 3D acquisition The 3D 4D Settings menu appears on the monitor Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 19 Utilities and System Setup Surfoce 2 Select a program button and press Set labeling area and cursor are displayed inside 3 Enter a new program label using keyboard or overwrite the existing label or don t change an existing program label if the same term is desired 4 Select Save or Save amp Exit The program parameters are saved in the database Exit Back to the last active menu without saving Delete To delete stored settin
512. r 1 Patient applied part 2 Probe handle Abdomen Gynecology Obstetrics 3D 4D Real Time imaging Wide field of view Small and light weight Biopsy guide available CFM MCFM HD Flow Power Tissue and PW Doppler Broad bandwidth Multi frequency Biopsy PEC74 H48621Y Biopsy PEC78 H46701AE Needle diameters lt 1mm lt 1 4mm lt 2 2mm Material Stainless Steel Sterilization with autoclave possible Only CIVCO manufacturer needle guides may be used with this biopsy Material Plastic Only the biopsy bracket is reusable For detailed information please contact the manufacturer Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 1 Patient applied part 2 Probe handle Abdomen Urology Gynecology Obstetrics Pediatrics Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 5 3 1 2 RAB4 8 D Abdominal transducer 3D 4D Real Time imaging Wide field of view Small and light weight Biopsy guide available CFM MCFM HD Flow Power Tissue and PW Doppler Broad bandwidth Multi frequency Biopsy PEC74 H48621Y Needle diameters lt 1mm lt 1 4mm lt 2 2mm Material Stainless Steel Sterilization with autoclave possible Probes and Biopsies Biopsy PEC78 H46701AE Only CIVCO manufacturer needle guides may be used with this biopsy Material Plastic Only the biopsy bracket is reusable For detailed information please
513. r appears 5 Move the second cursor to the second point of the measurement and press Set again Note To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key Change before completing the measurement This alternates the control from one cursor to the other 12 7 3 6 MV Mitral Valve To measure Distance A Distance B or Area of the MV Mitral Valve in 2D mode Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 43 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports Press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the item MV 3 Select the appropriate measurement parameter For example select Dist A 4 Use the trackball to move the cursor to the start point of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker A second cursor appears 5 Move the second cursor to the second point of the measurement and press Set again 12 7 3 7 TV Tricuspid Valve To measure the Diameter of the TV 7ricuspid Valve in 2D mode 1 Press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the item TV and then the measurement parameter TV Diam 3 Use the trackball to move the cursor to the start point of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker A second cursor appears 4 Move the second cursor to the second point of the measurement and press Set again Note To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key Change before complet
514. r flow derived in a near to perpendicular situation Since Color is not specifically designed to detect absolute velocity it is not as limited by incident angle considerations as pulsed wave Doppler The Color mode display incorporates the following with the 2D display a Color scale with Color base line Nyquist limit values a Wall Motion Filter a gray scale with a Color echo write balance marker and annotation of the 2D Color Flow control settings The CFM mode is subdivided in two groups In these groups you will see how to use CFM mode and how to adjust the CFM settings To use the CFM mode review For more information see CFM Main Menu on page 8 77 To adjust CFM setting review For more information see CFM Sub Menu on page 8 73 To use special utilities Utilities on page 14 2 and Gray Map on page 6 27 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Doppler Modes 8 3 1 CFM Main Menu Ty C Mode key hard key Pressing the C control activates the CFM mode The CFM box appears in the active 2D image e To use the CFM mode For more information see CFM Operation on page 8 77 e To adjust the CFM settings For more information see CFM Sub Menu on page 8 73 e This hard key is also the Gain control for the CFM mode in scan mode only For more information see CFM Operation on page 8 77 The CFM Main menu appears on the touch panel scan mode Application Peri Vascular
515. r lines green lines indicate frames with color in the Elastography image red lines indicate invalid frames without color CO Reference ROI is set to 1 9 Lesion is 0 8 times as rigid as the Reference ROI Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 9 9 Elastography Mode Elastography Analysis monitor display example ML6 15 D SMP MI 1 0 GE Healthcare PRF 60Hz Figure 9 7 Elastography Analysis monitor display example In both the Elastogram top left and the B mode image bottom left a small ovoid shaped dark lesion is visible The region to the left and right of this lesion represents normal fatty breast tissue The reference ROI is placed in the fatty breast tissue left yellow circle the ROI 2 is placed in the lesion right blue circle In the strain plot top right the strain of the reference is shown by the higher yellow line Higher peaks of both lines are caused by harder compression The lower right plot depicts the strain ratio of both ROIs The reference is set to a straight yellow line with the value of 1 the strain ratio of the lesion is represented by the blue plot In the example the ratio between breast tissue and the lesion is always close to 10 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Chapter 10 Volume Mode Describes the general functions of the Volume Mode Sections in this chapter Volume Acquisition with Volume Probes on page 10 2 Volume A
516. r not No Generic default Select Distance or Last Used Assign RT Trace results on Freeze If RT Trace is on and Freeze is activated then the measurement menu is shown to assign the measurement study Select Yes or No Fix Caliper by Select if the last measurement caliper of the currently performed measurement should also be fixed automatically when you press the Freeze key you press the ABC Bodymark or Indicator key you press a Px button Note More than one selections are possible Cursor size Select the size of the measurement cursor small or large Color when set Select the color of a fixed measurement cursor Cursor line with Select the thickness of the cursor lines Choose between large and small Cursor line display Select if the cursor line is displayed Yes or if only the cursor number is displayed No after completing a measurement Ellipse cross line display Select Yes or No Cursor Type Select Number Label or Number amp Label Font Size Select the font size used in the resulting window small medium large Font Color Select the font color used in the resulting window Result Position Select the measurement result location on the monitor display Result Position Mode dependent If desired set the check mark and then adjust the measurement result location on the monitor display Result Position 2D Choose the position from the pull down menu
517. r touch the Next key A The contour is automatically copied to the next image plane orthogonal to the other 90 5 Outline the second contour on the touch panel For further controls and possible adjustments review Contour Finder Trace Selection of a VOCAL Generation Mode on page 10 117 6 After you have defined the contours in both image planes touch the Done key The result is displayed on the monitor and the VOCAL Edit menu appears on the touch panel To edit the contour review VOCAL Edit on page 10 123 10 12 4 5 Automatic Sphere This computer assisted contour mode function is only useful if you want to outline the surface of a sphere Using this function a sphere round the main contour axis is generated within the two green arrows For details review VOCAL Settings on page 10 115 1 In the VOCAL Modes menu touch the Sphere contour mode key Adjust the upper contour point characterized by a green arrow by using this control below the touch panel the touch panel poez Adjust the lower contour point characterized by a green arrow by using this control below Two contour points are marked in the image plane s along the main contour axis to define the poles of the shell contour All generated contours in the image planes cross the main contour axis at these two points Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 122 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode 2
518. r without overview image Colorized Image colorized B colorized M colorized PW colorized 3D XTD split Frame review XTD view 18 6 Display Annotation Patient Name max 62 characters all fields together Date 3 Types selectable e MM DDIYYYY e DD MM YYYY e YYYY MM DD e 2 types selectable e 24 hours e 12 hours Probe Name Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 18 7 Technical Data Information User program Receiver Frequency Acoustic Power Gain Dynamic Contrast Gray Map Edge Enhance Persistence SRI CRI Focal Zone Markers Depth Scale Marker Probe Orientation Marker M Mode AMM Mode Gain Dynamic Contrast Edge Enhance Reject M Cursor AMM Cursor Time Scale Doppler Mode Acoustic Power Gain Angle Sample Volume Depth and Width Wall Motion Filter Velocity or Frequency Scale Spectrum Inversion Time Scale PRF HPRF Doppler Frequency Color Flow Imaging Modes Acoustic Power CFM PD TD HD Flow ealokGan Color Balance Color Balance Marker Quality Wall Motion Filter PRF Color Map Color Scale KHz cm s m s Power and Symmetrical Velocity Imaging Color Velocity Range Spectrum Inversion Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 18 8 H48691CF Revision 2 3D 4D Mode Elastography Mode TGC Curve 3D 4D Sub Program Threshold Quality Volume Box Angle Mix Acquisition Mode Compression Orientation Markers T U I slice distance
519. raj Foot Chitty GS Hellman Nyberg Rempen Tokyo Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 18 31 Technical Data Information Growth tables ASUM CFEF Chitty Hadlock Hansmann Jacot Guillarmod Jeanty Johnsen Kurmanavicius Lai Yeo Lessoway Leung Merz Nicolaides Siriraj Verburg Medvedev ASUM Chitty Jeanty Lai Yeo Merz OSAKA Siriraj Medvedev C e mooo osme MV E A HARADA BUNDUKI SONEK Medvedev RAD Chitty Jeanty Merz Siriraj Nicolaides Verburg Chitty Jeanty Merz Siriraj Fetal ratios Cl BPD OFD Hadlock FL AC Hadlock FL BPD Hohler FL HC Hadlock HC AC Campbell Va Hem Nicolaides Va Hem Hansmann Vp Hem Nicolaides LHR Peralta LTR CVR Peranteau Gestational Age by EFW Hadlock JSUM 2001 Osaka Shinozuka Tokyo Fetal Weight Growth FWg_ Alexander Brenner Bourgogne Doubilet Eik Nes Hadlock Hansmann Hansmann 86 Hobbins Persutte Johnsen Jsum 2001 Kramer Persson Osaka Shinozuka Tokyo Williams Yarkoni Ananth HC HL LV MAD OFD ASUM Chitty Hansmann Jeanty Kurmanavicius Merz Nicolaides Medvedev RAD AD C CD IB TD Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 18 32 H48691CF Revision 2 Technical Data Information 18 12 External Inputs and Outputs 18 12 1 Connectivity on rear panel direct access VGA out Standard SXGA at 60Hz Network RJ45 Ethernet IEC802 2 IEC802 3 Software DICOM 3
520. ransparent 255 full transparent 5 steps 9 2 4 Frequency For more information see Frequency on page 8 37 9 2 5 PRF For more information see Velocity Range PRF on page 8 35 9 3 Elastography Sub Menu Access the Elastography Sub menu by pressing the Sub Elasto key on the touch panel Following menu appears on the touch panel Elasto Map 1 Persist 5 Line Dens 3 Window Length 20 Window Step 5 a Filter Axial 3 Filter Lateral 7 Transparency Elasto Map Persist Line Dens Window Length Window Step 180 POE Frame Reject 200 po T Pixel Reject 200 Frequency resol Elastography Sub Menu Elastography color maps Range 4 5 Step size 1 Range 4 49 Step size 1 mows ooo 9 4 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Elastography Mode 9 4 Elastography Analysis Note This feature may not be available at the time of release of this Basic User Manual The Elastography Mode detects strains by correlating the echo amplitudes of the tissue when compressed and uncompressed Different displacement of echoes is an indicator for different stiffness strain of the tissue High strain means that the tissue is softer low strain means that itis stiffer Zero is absolutely stiff without any elasticity Elastography Analysis is a strain ratio comparative tool that enables users to compare the strain of one tissue to the surrounding tissue Us
521. rating the System 4 14 Note Exit Exit the patient procedure to previous operating state All patient information which has been entered previously will be cleared The ID number cannot be edited If 3D 4D data are loaded trom Archive back into the system editing is impossible the Edit key is grayed If Patient Dialog is open it is possible to start and stop recording by pressing the DVD VCR button 4 4 5 Patient Information screen Note Poieni ID Lost Morne Middle Nares MED IPJI 10 Lz 21 1 ard Pateni ID DOS mrvi uyk Age Sas AD Perf Physician Ref Prayer Sonographer Edopis Exam Type Fetus 1 M Fl Exom Comment Access Custonn SconJesstiont None H mdinare Exam Date ExomTime ExomType M img pplcation 1 Enter Patient Data 2nd Patient ID Additional ID number only 64 depends on available if checkbox is activated in system settings the System Setup pesas frener me e A o S female male selection in pull down menu Upon entering the day of birth The age is calculated and displayed automatically 2 Select Application OEA cyn caRD uro vas mnEuRO sme Patient Information Abdomen ABD Patient Information Obstetrics OB Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Operating the System id Patient Information Gynecology GYN Patient Information Cardiology CARD Patient
522. re information see Chapter 9 Power Doppler Pressing activates deactivates the Power Doppler mode Functions depend on current probe For more information see Power Doppler Mode PD Mode on page 8 15 XTD View Extended View Pressing activates deactivates the XTD View function Functions depend on current probe For more information see XTD View Extended View on page 6 21 Continuous Wave Doppler Pressing activates deactivates the Continuous Wave Doppler Functions depend on current probe For more information see Continuous Wave Doppler Mode CW Mode on page 8 7 ABC Image Annotation Write a comment annoation directly onto the screen For more information see Image Annotation on page 4 26 Play Record Press this key once to change the touch panel to the DVD VCR DVR remote control menu For more information see P keys on page 15 3 Press this key twice to start a recording on the connected DVD recorder or video recorder Press this key twice to stop the recording Tissue Doppler Pressing activates deactivates the Tissue Doppler Mode Functions depend on current probe For more information see Tissue Doppler Mode TD Mode on page 8 23 Contrast Imaging Pressing activates deactivates the coded Contrast Imaging function Functions depend on current probe For more information see Contrast Imaging on page 6 35 B Flow Pressing activates deactiv
523. reen format button to activate Omni View Ref Line view Press the Dual screen format button to activate Omni View dual view O Press the Single screen format button to switch back to Omni View full format view Switch between the slices using the 1 3 buttons on the touchscreen this will only be shown when Quad screen format is activated Omni View Ref Line To change the direction of the selected slices use the Omni View orientation Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 40 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode Omni View Orientation aiea 10 2 6 5 Orientation Icon The orientation icon head graphic helps to understand the orientation of the corresponding lines to each other The orientation icon is always on the startpoint of the reference line and facing in its direction The icon also has the same color as the reference line RMHECIOE Mi 1 0 10 6em LO SIHTE TRINA Be a a hurtice fait Omni View Icon ON OFF Probe Ortontating 3D 4D Sub Menu Gray Tint Maps Render View Direction R marear Gray 2D 3D Info 5 Tint 2D Clear OmniView Icon Background 0 The orientation icon can be turned ON or OFF by touching the OmniView Icon key on the right side of the touch panel The current On Off state will be stored in the system settings and will be set again the next time you start the system Note The OmniView Icon key is only visible when Omni View is activated
524. reen is divided asymmetrically into two frames The 2D image appears in the top O frame The M mode trace appears in the lower frame The touchpanel shows the MHD Main menu Three display formats are possible For more information see Display Format on page 7 7 The Freeze key stops the 2D image and MHD mode trace Note By pressing the Freeze key again the MHD cursor appears on the active 2D image 7 6 2 3 MHD Gain Control The adjustment of the Gain control determines the amount of amplification applied to the received echoes All received echoes are amplified with the same gain value regardless of the scan depth Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 7 14 H48691CF Revision 2 M Mode Rotate the M Mode key and or the PD Mode key to adjust the gain brightness of the entire image Note The M Gain function influences the M trace brightness only Note The PD Gain function influences the color saturation only Remarks The current gain value is displayed on the screen GN 7 6 3 MHD Sub Menu The MHD Main menu has to be active Touch the key Sub MHD key The MHD Submenu appears SS LT Main M MHD Flow Menu R MHD Flow Map Scale 1 a5 cmisec p Flow Res Artefact high Y Off Ensemble 10 Note Some functions are only available in scan mode The submenu settings are the same as those of the TD mode For more information see HD Flow Sub Menu on page 8 22
525. rement results will only be stored in the GYN Worksheet Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 132 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode The following touch panel appears Sectional Planes Render p SonoAVC Generic Cut Merge Ref Image Se Se z pp Add to Report Separation Growth TH low 80 mid mid Edit ROI Select this key to edit the ROI again see After the Static 3D Render Acquisition on page 10 57 Init Init Select this key to reset the rotations and translations of a volume section to the initial start position see Principle of Sectional Image Analysis on page 10 20 Cut Merge Undo Select the Undo All button to undo all edits Select the Redo button to redo the last edit ad Select the Undo button to undo the last edit Ref Image Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 133 Volume Mode Ref Image em Select one of the Ref Image buttons to swap reference image see Principle of Sectional Image Analysis on page 10 20 Display _ H Fs e More Select the 3D Frame to turn the 3D frame around the SonoAVC areas off or on Select the Filled button to highlight the segments by filling the area of the segment with color Select More to see more options i Add to Report Press the Add to Report to add the current results to the Topological W
526. rements Workflow 1 Press Calc on the user interface 2 Select the measure application OB 3 Select the desired measurement item BPD HC AC or FL 4 The calculation process starts The result is displayed on the monitor screen If no result is found a message appears on the screen and the system switches to manual measurement mode If a result is found continue with step 5 5 Press Set right or left trackball button to store the measurement or press Change top trackball button to continue with manual correction Note The measurement mode can be changed from auto to manual by using the left rotary control below the touch panel Available measurement methods depend on this selection and on the measurement item itself Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 12 24 H48691CF Revision 2 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 12 6 4 4 AFI Calculation To calculate AFI the Amniotic Fluid Index distances are measured in several images Note erro Biometry Gest Bones Cranium M ren cre Riom Uterus eas Applicat Uterine Ovary Work Sheet Q2 Q3 Q4 Clear Study Cancel Press the Calc key on the control panel Touch the AFI key and then select Q1 Use the trackball to move the cursor to the start point of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker A second cursor appears Move the second cursor to the second point of the measurement and pr
527. restored on the same Voluson E8 E8 Expert system within the same major software version 3 When loading a backup into a system with a software version that has a higher major number 10 x x gt 11 x x the following items will not be restored User Settings R Options s State of the Service platform new model type necessary for VOLC 4 The user is only allowed to restore data to a different system if and only if the software version on this system is the same as in the backup 5 The user is only allowed to restore data onto the same system if and only if the software version on this system is equal or higher than the version in the backup 6 The user is not allowed to restore the following items to a different system a Windows Network Settings s Options DICOM AE Title a DICOM Station Name j State of the service platform Loading procedure 1 To restore a previously saved backup click on the Load button of the Full System Configuration group in the System Setup Backup page The Full System Configuration Load window is displayed system Configuration Load Derive _ Internal HDD a Dvi cD Hetwork External US8 Driva e crip kion Ser ai Eig ata 2 Choose the source drive e g Network Drive 3 Click on the backup to be restored additional information is displayed in the table Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 14 56 H48691CF Revision 2 Utilities and S
528. rever slow flows occur e g blood circulation veins etc Functional description In contrast to Color Doppler which displays the frequency shift of the reflection Power Doppler displays the amplitude of the reflected signal The amplitude is determined by the amount with respect to the blood cell aggregates collected by the measuring volume of the ultrasound beam and is thus less dependent on the angle between blood flow direction and the incident ultrasound beam As Power Doppler measures a different physical property to color Doppler the color encoding is also different Power Doppler imaging generates a Color image by using the Doppler principles This Color image is overlaid onto the B image The Power Doppler image provides information about the energy Power of the blood cell motion The amplitudes of the Color Doppler signal are evaluated and displayed with special color coding All velocity determined functions Baseline Scale Display Mode etc are not available in Power Doppler imaging Power Doppler can be combined with spectral Doppler Power Doppler is only possible with electronic transducers The PD mode is subdivided in two groups In these groups you will see how to use PD mode and how to adjust the PD settings To use the PD mode For more information see PD Main Menu on page 8 75 To adjust PD setting For more information see PD Sub Menu on page 8 77 To use special utilities Utilities on page 14 2 and Gray
529. rform the following functions after a reload of RAW data sets from internal archive into the system 1 2D Cine Color Modes When reloading a 2D Cine the Auto cine menu will immediately come up and the cine will play automatically Please refer to 2D Auto Cine on page 6 17 2 4D Cine When reloading a 4D Cine press the Start key on the trackball to start the cine Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 13 39 Archive Note 13 5 5 Repro 13 40 The Auto Cine Menu will be displayed on the touchscreen For details please refer to Auto Cine on page 10 95 Doppler Cine M Mode Cine Zoom without overview image 2 a 2 Display measurements bodymarks annotations and indicators as they were when the data was saved 7 Make new measurements including AutoTrace measurements 8 Edit annotations patient name and medical history Changes can not be saved if the exam was reloaded trom a read only file In this case pressing the Patient hardkey opens a new exam with a new patient 9 Edit the angle in PW mode 10 Gray chroma in all modes 11 OTO L R and U D in 2D Mode 12 Base line and Invert in PW and CW 13 Color Display Mode Color Invert Gently Color Color Maps Color On Off are available as during examination Reload of DICOM data It is possible to perform the following functions after a reload of DICOM data Bitmaps from internal archive into the system 1
530. ribution Select the display format Dual screen display in 2D and 3D image mode For more information see Multi Format on page 6 70 Description of the System Quad Screen Format select the display format Quad screen display in 2D and 3D image mode For more information see Multi Format on page 6 70 Depth flipswitch Select the display depth of the 2D image using the flip switch For more information see 2D Mode Depth on page 6 4 HR Zoom Pan Zoom digipot Allows you to modify the Zoom ROI and choose a Zoom mode For more information see Zoom on page 6 12 Pulsed Wave Doppler on off Pressing activates deactivates the PW Doppler mode Functions depend on current probe Rotating allows setting of the PW mode gain within the probe defined range For more information see Pulsed Wave Doppler Mode PW Mode on page 8 2 Power Doppler Pressing activates deactivates the Power Doppler mode Functions depend on current probe Rotating allows to set the Power Doppler gain and HD Flow gain within the probe defined range When using 3D mode turning the button will rotate the volume on the Z axis For more information see Power Doppler Mode PD Mode on page 8 75 2D Mode all additional modes will be switched off For more information see Chapter 6 Pressing this control activates 2D Mode Rotating allows you to set the 2D image gain within the probe defined range For more informatio
531. ription of the System 2 Open up the page to view that page s information we gt 6 amp Hide Back Forward Pit pons Wetwalizaben 3 Descnption of the Syste Vocal Sections 4 Starting the System Planes 5 20 Mode 6 M Mode 7 Spectral Doppie Mode 8 CFM Mode Cobo Flow 9 PO Mode Power Dopph J 10 TD Mode Tissus Dopy There are different possibilities for a Volume Acquisition 3 Q 11 Volume Mode Q 11 1 Volume Acquisitio 11 1 1 Principle of 2 11 1 2 Principal Sc 3 QO 11 1 3 What is Inte 2 11 1 3 1 What P 11 1 4 image Osier 2 11 1 5 The Rende O 11 1 6 General Ad 2 11 1 6 1 Exam 11 2 Vokme Acqusiio 11 3 Sub Menus 11 4 Voimme Soqusitio 5 W 11 5Real Time 40 Ao f P k p d mahiaren t GE Medical Systems Kretztechnik r bate Stree prta com 7 11 5 21 Dispk Voke 43 7682 3000 0 2 11 5 22 Dispk w Puc 443I 200047 gt Em boetadgned p con Volume Acquisition Static 30 Sectional Planes chapter 11 2 Volume Acquisition Static 30 Render chapter 11 49 Real Time 40 Acquisition chapter 11 5 Volume Contrast imaging A Plane chapter 117 Volume Contrast imaging C Plane chapter 1 8 STIC Fetal Cardio chapter 11 9 Real Time 4D Biopsy Chapter 11 10 The blue underlined text links you to related topics After you click on the blue underline text the screen updates with this link s content To return to the previous screen click Back To return to the link
532. rk the position of the midline with a line of two points The measurement result is the calculated angle between the vertical axis and the midline As the rotation can be to the left or Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 147 Volume Mode to the right it is necessary to start measuring at the occiput to get accurate results 10 16 7 Head progression distance Perform this measurement in image plane A The measurement s point of origin is vertically locked to the pubis Mark the distal point of the fetal head to measure the distance between the pubis and the head in millimeters 10 16 8 Head progression angle Perform this measurement in image plane A Starting from the center of the pubis set the end point that the dashed line is tangent to the fetal head The resulting measurement is the Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 148 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode dihedral angle between the pubis and the defined line 10 17 HD ive Mode 10 17 1 Introduction While for current surface reconstructions the rendered object is illuminated by a frontal light source that doesn t move the new HD ive Mode uses a virtual light source that can be positioned around the rendered 3D object by the user By highlighting structures from the side the three dimensional impression is improved and the surface does not appear flat anymore The result is a mixture between the highlights and shadows of t
533. rmat active A render image will be replaced by the current reference section plane image during the 3D Multiplane measurement and is shown again when you exit the 3D Multiplane measurement e To erase the results touch the Init Key on the touchpanel Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 11 11 Measurements 11 1 2 4 Generic Angle Measurement wee Dist Area Volume 11 1 2 4 1 Angle 3 Point 1 To measure the angle by setting 3 points touch the Angle 3 Point key on the touch panel A cursor appears on the screen 2 Move the cursor to the start point of the angle measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker A second cursor appears 3 Move this cursor to the second point of the measurement and press Set again Note To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key Change before completing the each distance measurement This alternates the control from one cursor to the other 4 Move the third cursor to the end point of the angle measurement Remark The angle between the two lines is displayed 11 1 2 4 2 Angle 2 Line 1 To measure the angle between to lines touch the Angle 2 Line key on the touch panel A cursor appears on the screen 2 Move the cursor to the start point of the angle measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker A horizontal line appears 3 By means of the trackball rotate th
534. rom right to left and depicts the spectral distribution of the components of the Doppler shift frequency over time Frequency or velocity values appear on the vertical axis and time along the horizontal axis Component amplitudes appear as shades of gray The brighter the shade the higher the amplitude The Doppler display can be used alone but it is normally used with a 2D image The 2D image contains a Doppler cursor that defines the location of the Doppler ultrasound beam relative to the 2D image display The flow direction cursor can be aligned with the direction of flow within the vessel to determine the Doppler angle The system uses the Doppler angle to calibrate the Doppler velocity display When the Doppler frequency display is used the frequency display is not calibrated to account for the Doppler angle The Doppler display consists of the following the spectral analysis display of the ultrasound data patient data and identification image information a gray scale map a velocity or frequency scale and a time scale The Tl and MI values on the monitor depend on the values set by the Doppler controls Please refer to Chapter 2 and Chapter 5 for a complete explanation of the acoustic output for Pulsed Wave Doppler Pulsed Wave Doppler Mode PW Mode on page 8 2 for Continuous Wave Doppler Continuous Wave Doppler Mode CW Mode on page 8 7 A sample volume cursor is located on the PW cursor and it indicates where al
535. rotate and height adjust and inclinable 2 Loudspeaker 3 Control console rotate and height adjustable 4 Touch panel display 5 Probe holder 6 Place for B amp W printer 7 Place for printer or DVR 8 Shelf with probe connectors This module houses the entire electronics for connections up to 4 probe connectors and the beam former module transmit and receive electronics 9 Footrest 10 DVD drive or DVR box 11 12 3 casters with brake 1 caster without brake 3 2 1 Optional Peripheral Devices See System Options on page 18 11 for a list of peripheral and hardware options See Chapter 77 for details on connecting peripheral devices 3 2 2 Optional Modules Optional modules CW Doppler Real Time 4D etc according to the price list of the Voluson E8 E8 Expert Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 3 3 Description of the System 3 3 Mechanical Adjustment N Y Be sure to have read all mechanical adjustment safety informations before proceeding y N For more information see Mechanical adjustment safety on page 2 11 Be careful when adjusting mechanical parts of the equipment Ensure nothing is jammed Do not put your hands or other body parts between movable parts of the equipment s Be careful when adjusting or locking the monitor 3 3 1 Mechanical Monitor Adjustment The monitor can be rotated moved forward and backward and adjusted in height In
536. rrent Patient Current Patient Opens Current Patient Screen see Current Patient Dialog on page 13 3 U Image History Opens the Image History Screen see Image History on page 13 34 Exam Opens the Exam Review Screen see Review Exam Review on page 13 35 a Worklist Changes to Worklist Dialog see To n Retrieve Patient Data via External Work list Server on page 4 21 This button is only active if no exam has been selected and a worklist server is defined Worklist touch Sat panel Clear Entries Clears personnel information of the patient and also the information shown on the worksheets Saved exams will not be cleared Hide Patient Info Hides the Patient Information in the header during a scan to ensure a maximum of privacy Worksheet Press the Worksheet button if you want to enter or review data and comments into the worksheet of the currently selected exams see Exam Menu on page 13 23 This button is only active if an exam has been selected Exam Details Allows you to view the Exam Details see Exam Menu on page 13 23 Only active if an exam has been selected Past Exam Opens the Past Exam dialog Only available if the application is OB Only active if a patient ID has been entered 3 r AAi more see Patient Information screen on page 4 14 Start Exam Returns to Scanning Mode and starts a alternative 1 new exam with the currently se
537. ructures If you see Color on vessel walls the balance is probably set too high Additionally wall motion ghosting can be suppressed with a low balance setting Touch or on the Balance key and select the balance range 8 7 5 Baseline The Balance orientation line 1 is only visible in the color modes The line represents the position of the adjusted displayed gray value in the gray wedge Where the balance orientation line is on a gray step the gray value will be displayed only if a color value is present For example If the gray value is higher than 96 while a color value is present the gray value will be displayed The baseline shift can be used to prevent aliasing in one flow direction similar to the PW Doppler baseline shift Shifting the baseline enlarges the velocity range in one direction The zero line of the color bar is also shifted Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Doppler Modes ee Adjust the zero line with wa There are 8 steps in each direction By step 8 you see only the color wedge in one direction maximum velocity The other direction is KHz cm s m s The maximum value and minimum value of the flow velocities are displayed at the upper and lower edge of the color wedge 8 7 6 Dynamic Dynamic refers to the compression of gray scale information into a suitable range for the display Dynamic allows enhancement of a certain gray scale range which ma
538. rve as the selected User Remark A spline algorithm generates the curve through all 5 points Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 2D Mode 6 5 2 Tint Map Tint 2D Whereas the Gray map defines brightness the Tint map defines the relation between echo amplitude input and Chroma value color tone and saturation in a look up table You can select from a total of 15 tint maps an independent map for each one of the imaging modes For example Candle for 2D imaging and Blue for M imaging etc 1 Touch the Sub xx key regardless which mode is active and then the Tint key The Tint map menu appears Main 70 Gray Map T T Candle Sepia opper Tr m JON sept 2 Select the tint mode key bright Tint map selection assigned to this mode Remarks The actual values of the tint map depend on the current gray map This means the tint map values will be adjusted by selecting a different gray map 6 6 B Flow B Flow helps to visualize complex hemodynamics and highlights moving structures or blood It is visually intuitive when viewing blood flow for acute thrombosis parenchymal flow and jets B Flow has some major advantages over Color Doppler mode i less angle dependent no velocity aliasing artefacts s full field of view better resolution than Color Doppler mode It is therefore a more realistic intuitive representation of flow information allowing to view both high an
539. s Query Patients This is only possible in Patients amp Exams View 4 The list of Patients is filled with the patients from the DICOM Server that match the given criteria Field E is filled with because the number of exams belonging to this patient is yet unknown Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Archive Sourot DICOM Server Search potient Nome Potionts amp Exomes bums Onby Patients fe Patient iD COo Bir thedurte Fag hex j Lost Exam IE 30 06 30 H Flow imer Andren Alesana Exons u a e Exam Date Exom Tiri x img Erom Comment Emam Comment 5 Select one ore more patients from the list In the Archive Patient Area all buttons except data transfer are disabled 6 Press Query Exams Note This is only possible in Patients amp Exams View 7 The list of exams is filled with the exams of the selected patient If more than one patient was selected exams for these patients are available when switching between patients 8 Itis possible to switch between Patients amp Exams and Exams only view The exams are listed in both views 9 Select one or more exams from the list In the Archive Exams area all buttons except Exam Details and Data Transfer are disabled 10 Inthe Image list images containing a are displayed The number of images displayed basically corresponds
540. s avoid current bridge the signal input of the ECG preamplifier is defibrillator safe For further details and information please review ECG Preamplifier on page 17 12 2 3 6 Cleaning and Maintenance gt P p gt Have the system checked and serviced in regular intervals once per year by authorized service personnel In case of total failure first check if main voltage is present Mentioning any observations or failure symptoms to the service engineers is helpful Before cleaning the scanner switch it off Do not use disinfection spray nor gas disinfection Electric parts must be protected from drip water Keep the touch panel screen clean Dust and grime on the frame can cause irregular function Check the main cable transducer cables plugs and sockets on a regular basis No covers or panels must be removed from the system high voltage risk Only GE Healthcare authorized personnel must perform service and repairs Attempting do it yourself repairs invalidate warranty and are an infringement to regulations and are inadmissible acc to IEC 60601 1 For expected lifetime of equipment and probes see Service Manual The following table provides cleaning instructions for the ultrasound device Effective cleaning and disinfection is not possible for parts with narrow gaps and holes e g keyboard trackball It is the responsibility of the user to decide which cleaning and disinfection procedure is necessary to ensure a safe workin
541. s individual or all check mark in black box Tool Result shows parameters to measure and items that will be calculated Unit click into the line desired to change the dimension Precision click into the line desired to change the precision after comma Average click into the line desired to change the average display Table Equation Fetal Age select either Table or Equation and then click Edit Fetal Growth select either Table or Equation and then click Edit If it is desired to edit a table click this button Only user defined tables and equations can be edited Factory default tables and equations can only be viewed 16 3 1 6 To Display the exact Table or Equation 1 Invoke the Edit Measurement window Measure amp Calc on page 16 3 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 16 12 H48691CF Revision 2 Measure Setup Table Equation Fetal Age Fetal Growth Edit Edit 2 To display the exact Fetal Age Fetal Growth Table or Equation of the selected measurement parameter click on the Edit button of corresponding field _ Edit Table Values Note To display the exact table click on this button 16 3 1 7 To Copy Settings Copy 1 Select the Copy button in the Measure amp Calc page Copy settings Copy From Copy To Factor A 4 _ User 1 User 1 JUser 2 A User 2 _ User 3 Get Application OB i eis poka 2 Select Copy From a
542. s of A and B images are displayed automatically 10 4 1 4 Fixed ROI Edit ROI off The image data outside of the render box will be shown dimmed Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 57 Volume Mode When rotating the ROI a dot 1 in the center of the render image will help to orientate It indicates the middle axis of all sectional planes 10 4 2 Cine Calculation 10 58 To get an overall 3D impression of the rendered object a certain number of calculated views are displayed in a sequence The rendered object rotates or moves in front of the observer Transparent mode Only rotation of the object enables a 3D impression due to the movement of the structure There are 3 different kinds of cine 3D Rotation Cine 3D Translation Cine Slice Cine To calculate a Cine Sequence Press the Cine Calc key The Cine Calculation menu appears Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Note Volume Mode 3D Transl Cine Rotation Angle Step Angle Rot Axis re a 180 Calculate Cine Sequence Start Image End Image 22 5 22 5 Select the appropriate button for the cine you prefer Not all kinds of cine are available in all visualization modes see table below The following table shows the dependences 3D Rot Cine 3D Transl Cine Slice Cine Full View Full View Quad View Full View Render Render Sectional Planes X
543. s the list of USB and Network drives To stop a USB Drive 1 Select a device using the trackball and the left or right trackball key 2 Press the Stop Device button To Map the Network Drive 1 Press the Map Network Drive button The following window appears Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 47 Utilities and System Setup Map Betwork Drive DriveNumber NW Orive 1 fan ie Format hostname folder This button displays a dialog which is used to map a network drive to the system NW 1 NW 3 This network destination can then be used to store full backups or Image data to 1 Drive Number Select the Network Drive that this drive should be assigned to 2 Network Folder Name Network connection to be connected to Format hostname IP path Note The text in the field is pre defined and has to be changed to the required network path Note If you can not type a backslash on your keyboard you can copy and paste the backslash from this field Mark the backslash and use Crtl C to copy and Crtl V to paste 3 User User name as used to log onto the network destination 4 Password Password as used to log onto the network destination 5 Automatic Reconnect Automatically reconnect to network destination on startup 2 Press the Connect button to connect to network destination Press the Disconnect button to disconnect from the network destination Button is only ac
544. s you to open an already existing exam Note You cannot reopen exams which are older than 24 hours ad The reopened exam becomes the current exam All images of the selected exam are displayed on the clipboard A reopened exam will be opened in 2D write mode Press the End Exam hard or soft key to close the reopened exam Activities that are scheduled for End Exam such as Save Send are only performed on images which were added after the exam was reopened Images can be added to a reopened exam in the following ways Reload a data set change it rotation color and save it again using the programmable keys Create a new acquisition 2D 3D 4D and save it using the P buttons 13 3 5 2 Exam Details Exam Details Allows you to view the Exam Details Use the scroll bar on the left to scroll up and down Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 13 24 H48691CF Revision 2 Archive Exam Details Click OK to close 13 3 5 3 Worksheet Press the Worksheet button if you want to view data of the currently selected exam Alternatively you can press the Worksheet hardkey to evoke this function For more details see Chapter 11 Report After viewing the worksheet click the Exit button 13 3 6 Image Area When an image from the image area is selected the left margin of the screen and the touch panel show the image menu Patient Archive image Tansfer roe a Properti
545. scroll through the stored sequence The motion line will scroll simultanously with the 2D image The current 2D postion is indicated through the green A arrows on the motion line 7 3 M Sub Menu The M Main menu has to be active Touch the key Sub M key The M Submenu appears Display Format 50 50 Dyn Contr Enhance 1 0 Frequency norm Note Some functions are only available in scan mode Available functions For more information see 2 Reject on page 7 6 Enhance on page 7 6 ad Dynamic Contrast on page 7 7 sd Display Format on page 7 7 id Gray Map on page 6 27 bd Utilities on page 14 2 7 3 1 Reject The Reject function determines the amplitude threshold above which the ultrasound echoes are displayed on the screen suppression of smaller echoes The Reject state is displayed in the Image Info area on the screen 25 J Reject range max 255 Reject range min 0 step size 5 7 3 2 Enhance With the Enhance function the echo information is digitally processed such that certain existing information becomes easily visible e g adjacent media layers Due to the Enhance function a finer sharper impression of the image is produced Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 7 6 H48691CF Revision 2 M Mode Six steps are possible 0 1 2 3 4 5 recommended 0 1 2 3 4 The Enhance state is displayed in the Image Info area on the screen
546. se a wall filter that is high enough to remove motion artefacts but that is sensitive enough to display low velocity flows in small vessels The WMF control is used to change the wall motion filter The settings are low1 low2 mid1 mid2 high1 high2 and max Use the WMF flipswitch to adjust the required Wall Motion Filter Remarks The Wall Motion Filter is user selectable but the actual cutoff frequencies vary depending on the PRF control setting s The WMF filter is calculated automatically and adjusted when the PRF is changed Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Doppler Modes 8 7 22 1 WMF for PW A Wall Motion Filter is used to eliminate Doppler noise that is caused by vessel wall or cardiac wall motion which is low in frequency but high in intensity Use a wall filter that is high enough to remove the audible thumping of the cardiac walls but that is sensitive enough to retain grayscale spectral information near the base line The WMF control is used to change the wall motion filter The settings are 70Hz 120Hz 155Hz 190Hz 230Hz 300Hz and 500HZ n Use the WMF control to select the wall motion filter desired Press up to increase press 190 Hz down to decrease the filter The baseline can be shifted up in 8 steps or down in 8 steps Remarks od The Wall Motion Filter is user selectable but the actual cutoff frequency varies depending on the PRF control setting The lowest
547. sector width were detailed to show how these three factors can be used to obtain optimal 2D images A similar relationship exists in Power Doppler imaging On the PD Submenu the line density selection adjusts the balance between the 2D line density and the PD line density The values available are scan head dependent The ability to change the PD Box size and position provides flexibility in Power Doppler imaging The trackball changes the PD Box size and position Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 8 16 H48691CF Revision 2 Doppler Modes Use the trackball to adjust the PD Box position on the 2D image Single Dual Quad gt PD box horizontal position t 4 PD box vertical position The box is adjustable within the entire 2D image area The upper trackball key switches between PD Box position and PD Box size Press the upper trackball key to change from PD Box position to PD Box size Press it once more and it returns to the position change t decrease the vertical PD box size K 4 increase the vertical PD box size increase the horizontal PD box size lt decrease the horizontal PD box size 8 4 2 2 PD Gain Control PD Gain must be adjusted properly to ensure that continuous flow is displayed where appropriate PD Gain should be set as high as possible without displaying random Color speckle If you set the PD Gain control too low then the lack of sensitivity will make it difficult to detect small abnormalities in fl
548. see Probe selection on page 4 5 Probe 12 7 3 Cardiology Calculations in 2D Mode ad LV Simpson Vol A L Volume Area Length LV Left Ventricle 2 LV Mass LVOT or RVOT Diameter s MV Mitral Valve TV Tricuspid Valve AV LA Aortic Valve Left Atrium PV Pulmonary Valve 12 7 3 1 LV Simpson To calculate the left ventricular end diastolic or end systolic volume in 2D mode Vol AL LV LVM LVOT veea o ass are Applicat RVOT MV TV AVLA Work Sheet ne rer Study Cancel 1 Press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the item LV Simps 3 Select the desired measurement parameter For example select A4C Dias Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 12 40 H48691CF Revision 2 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 4 Perform the circumference measurement of the left ventricle by using the trackball key and then press the right or left trackball key Set 5 Move the trackball to the longitudinal axis of the left ventricle and press Set to fix the endpoint 12 7 3 2 Vol A L Volume Area Length To calculate Volume A L in 2D mode LV LV Mass LVOT A Meas Applicat ren Sheet MV TV AVLA PV RVOT Vol Syst re Cancel 1 Press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the item Vol A L 3 Select the desired measurement parameter For example select LV Vol Dias 4 Perform the circum
549. sequence will be shown on the monitor 4D Fetal Heart Sequence Estimated Fetal Heart Rate 107 Caution Measurement inaccuracies may occur due to limitations in the algorithm For more information please press F1 Cancel wii Guidance and precautions for interpretation of STIC images j Judge if the shown estimated heart rate is reasonable Visually rule out phase errors and other failures of the acquisition before confirming the scan by touching the Accept key Always adopt a critical attitude to images created in STIC mode i Be aware that any diagnostic conclusion must not be drawn from STIC images alone but have to be checked with other diagnostic procedures If you are in doubt about a structure seen in STIC mode consult the original 2D images for clarification Please note that the accuracy of measurements in STIC images is limited and can be lower than measurements in B images In case the acquisition fails touch the Cancel key and perform the acquisition again Touching this key will bring you to the pre acquisition mode Accept Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 108 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode Touch the Accept key The Vol Cine menu in freeze mode appears on the touch panel Upon Accept a certain number of volumes will be stored in the cine memory The 4D Sequence can be reviewed volume by volume For more information see Volume Cine on page 10 92 The 3D menu
550. ser Manual H48691CF Revision 2 5 1 Probes and Biopsies 5 2 5 1 Probes This chapter consists of the information for each probe such as features and applications As well as informations for biopsies and biopsy guides such as biopsy kits and accessories as well as basic procedures for attaching a biopsy guide to the different types of probes Be sure to have read all probe safety informations before proceeding Probe Safety and Maintenance on page 2 14 Detailed information on probe handling Probe connection and selection on page 4 4 Preparing the Transducer on page 2 16 Probe selection on page 4 5 5 1 1 Intended use contraindications and patient population Intended use Contraindications Patient population 5 1 2 Labeling Image Acquisition for diagnostic purposes including measurements on acquired image Extracting tissue samples with guided and freehand biopsy Probes are not intended for z ophthalmic use or any use causing the acoustic beam to pass through the eye intra operative use that is defined as introducing probe into a surgical incision or burr hole Abdominal and linear probes are not intended for z endocavity use H Age all ages incl embryos and fetuses Location worldwide Sex male and female s Weight all weight categories z Height no height limitations Each probe is labeled with the following information Manufacturer GE part number Probe s
551. sheets To activate or edit the Scan Assistant For more information see General on page 14 14 To activate the Scan Assistant for the patient For more information see Application Area on page 13 4 The Scan Assistant can be confirmed with a P key For more information see Chapter 15 or the Enter key on the keyboard Depending on the settings that are made in the Systemsetup gt General gt Scan Assistant Exam History 1 See the Scan Assistant by clicking on the Scan Assistant tab 2 Drop down menu to switch between the activated Scan Assistant lists 3 All Scan Assistant items Confirmed items will have a check mark in the box 4 Switch between page 1 and 2 to see all items Pause the Scan Assistant Press the Pause button The Scan Assistant will no longer track the measurements in the list To reactivate press the pause button again This can also be activated with the F2 key on the keyboard Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Operating the System 4 34 This page was intentionally left blank Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Chapter 5 Probes and Biopsies This chapter describes probes and biopsies and provides information on intended use and applications Sections in this chapter P Probes on page 5 2 Biopsies on page 5 8 Overview of all probes and biopsies on page 5 13 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic U
552. should be set as high as possible without displaying random speckle If you set the Gain too low the lack of sensitivity will make it difficult to detect small abnormalities in flow and will possibly result in an underestimation of the large flow disturbances 2D Mode key Rotate this key to adjust the gain brightness of the entire image When the GAIN control is turned clockwise the entire image becomes brighter When the GAIN control is turned counterclockwise the entire image becomes less bright 6 6 2 2 Background This function adjusts the display level of the background anatomy e g switch off the background when imaging the kidney liver and spleen and adds merging the B Ilmage information to the B Flow Image W Switch the Background with the flip switch control below the touch panel Three steps are Background 0 possible 0 1 and 2 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 2D Mode 6 6 2 3 Accumulation Accumulation detects the maximum signal and holds it for the level specified Switch the accumulation with the flip switch control below the touch panel Following steps ele are possible OFF 0 20 0 35 0 50 75 1 1 5 and Infinite 6 6 2 4 Image Orientation For more information see mage Orientation on page 6 9 6 6 3 B Flow Sub Menu The B Flow Main menu must be active Touch the Sub B Flow key The B Flow Submenu appears Note Some functions are only availab
553. sic User Manual 2 28 H48691CF Revision 2 Safety and Maintenance Guidance and manufacturer s declaration electromagnetic immunity Voltage dips short lt 5 UT lt 5 UT Mains power quality interruptions and voltage gt 95 dip in UT gt 95 dip in UT should be that of a typical variations on power supply commercial or hospital input lines IEC 61000 4 11 for 0 5 cycle for 0 5 cycle environment 40 UT 40 UT 60 dip in UT 60 dip in UT for 5 cycles for 5 cycles 70 UT 70 UT 30 dip in UT 30 dip in UT for 25 cycles for 25 cycles lt 5 UT lt 5 UT gt 95 dip in UT gt 95 dip in UT for 5 s for 5 s Power frequency magnetic Power frequency magnetic field 50 60Hz IEC fields should be at levels 61000 4 8 characteristic of a typical location in a commercial and hospital environment NOTE UT is the a c mains voltage prior to application of the test level Guidance and manufacturer s declaration electromagnetic immunity TheVoluson E8 E8 Expert is intended for use in electromagnetic environment specified below The customer or the user of the Voluson E8 E8 Expert should assure that it is used in such an environment Portable and mobile RF communications equipment should be used no closer to any part of the Voluson E8 E8 Expert including cables than the recommended separation distance calculated from the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter Immunity test IEC 60601
554. sion 2 Volume Mode Plane Graphic Press this key to switch on and off the heart template Set Starting Plane Press this key to display the VCAD application menu see During VCAD Operation on page 10 143 More Press the More button to go to submenu see Sub Menus on page 10 42 Cephalic Breech Press this key to turn the image 18 around the y axis Init Touch this key to reset the rotations and translations of a volume section to the initial start position see Principle of Sectional Image Analysis on page 10 20 SR Press the SRI button to allow for an adjustment in the submenu see Speckle Reduction Imaging SRI II on page 10 44 Ref Image Press one of the Ref Image buttons to swap reference image see Principle of Sectional Image Analysis on page 10 20 10 15 3 During VCAD Operation Standard Set New Plane Start Plane p p Cardiac 1 Cardiac Cardiac 3 Cardiac 4 Cardiac 5 Slices Distance Previous Yol Cine ri 1 0 Next 1r 3x3 Press the 3x3 and the 2x2 keys to toggle between nine displayed slices and four 2x2 Set Starting Plane Press the Set New Plane button to get back to the VCAD Heart Main menu see Before VCAD Operation on page 10 142 More Press the More button to go to submenu see Sub Menus on page 10 42 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 143 Volume Mode Compare Image Press the Compare Image button to open
555. sion reduces image quality which can lead to a false diagnosis 14 2 5 8 WLAN Configuration WLAN is the abbreviation of Wireless Local Area Network In order to use the WLAN of your location you need a WLAN adapter How to configure the WLAN 14 44 Plug in the WLAN adapter into the USB socket Press the Utilities hardkey Press System Setup on the touch panel Select Connectivity on screen Select Device Setup on screen WLAN Configuration Select WLAN Configuration The following screen will appear Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Utilities and System Setup D D Link AirPlus G Wireless Utility mare stots EE ee EE Wireless Mode Is 0 Connection In i Tx Rate D Channel M Rescan_ Signal Quality Signal Strength Conhiguration es PacketCont Transmit gt 500 0 The configuration process will start automatically and after a few seconds waiting the field Connection Info on screen should say connected and the other values should have been entered automatically If not ask your local system administrator for help The WLAN security has to be adjusted to prevent viruses and to ensure data protection Ask your local System Administrator to adjust the WLAN security The WLAN adjustments and hardware may differ in some countries Please check the requirements or talk to your local Online Center Troubleshooting If no WLAN ad
556. sired and press the left right trackball key Set 2 If one exists clear edit the current key code 3 Enter the encrypted serial code with the keyboard and then click on Submit The code will be checked 4 Click the Save amp Exit button Remarks After activating a key code restart the system turn off and on the system ii To Exit from the System Setup without saving select the Exit button Operation for activating 3 Month Demo Note Confirm that the Date amp Time are selected correctly You must not change the Date or Time after activating all the options To prevent fraudulent use this feature will be blocked To Enter Date Time and Time Zone For more information see General on page 14 14 3 Month Demo Activate 1 Click the Activate button to unlock all the Options over a limited period of 3 months Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 29 Utilities and System Setup Voluson E8 Unlock all Options for 3 months Cancel The following window appears on the screen 2 Click the Now button to activate all options After activating the Demo field in the Options window indicates the expiration date of the 3 Month Demo All options are activated for Demo until 17 10 2007 Demo 3 To Exit from the System Setup click the Save amp Exit or the Exit button Following window appears during starting the application if demo
557. sly displayed on the screen Each quarter of the monitor displays a sectional view through the volume body as shown below Sectional planes A B C Display of A B C The intersection lines of the planes are displayed in colors AB blue AC red BC yellow Orientation of intersection lines on the screen Intersection line AB ie V Vertical Intersection line AC Intersection line BC eS in V P Perpendicular By this definition the relation of the position of the 3 images A B C is also indicated as made clear by the direction of arrows The presentation of 3 orthogonal sectional planes may lead to non conformance with the conventional customized orientation to the patient in 2D sonography An identification system the automatic display of the direction of section will clarify Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 21 Volume Mode Please note Whenever a usual longitudinal section of the patient is selected for display field A the usual orientation for longitudinal and transverse sections is valid 10 2 4 1 Rotations While turning a rotary control the corresponding axis is shown in the reference image as a line X or Y axis or as a circle Z axis Rotations around any one of the axes X Y and Z can be performed freely For faster rotation push on the rotary controls once toggle function slow rotation fast rotation For rotation around the X axis of a reference
558. sound image This is done by looking at the area surrounding the cursor or finger position and trying to detect borders in the ultrasound image that lie in that area Apart from that the VOCAL contour is generated in the same way as in Manual Trace i e the boundaries need to be drawn or modified for every rotation step 2 Contour Finder Semiauto Trace Finder Finder The boundary is drawn in the same way as described in Contour Finder Trace However only two boundaries have to be drawn One for the first rotation step and one at an angle of 90 degrees from the first rotation step The boundaries for the rotation steps in between those two rotation steps are calculated automatically by trying to detect the structure in the ultrasound image i Contour Finder Semiauto Trace is faster than the Contour Finder Trace method but AN less accurate The resulting VOCAL contour has to be reviewed with extreme care s If the Contour Finder modes do not lead to satisfying results use Manual Trace to create the VOCAL contour 10 12 4 3 Contour Finder Trace This function allows you to outline any lesion by tracing the object on the touch panel with your finger or using a stylus for touch screen input same as used for PDA s DO NOT use any spiky object The number of the semi automatic generated contours depends on the selected rotation step For details review VOCAL Settings on page 10 115 Finder Finder 1 In the
559. splay modes B XTD Screen formats 18 10 2 M Mode Working modes 2D imaging Single B Dual B B Quad B B B B XTD View Single XTD Dual B XTD M conventional M Mode AMM Anatomical M Mode Power control range 1 100 GAIN range 15 to 15 dB M sweep speeds Review memory times Signal processing M Display Modes Screen formats window arrangement 900 450 300 225 150 100 pixels sec 26 44 13 22 8 81 6 61 4 40 2 94 cm s in relation to system monitor gt 60 s 32MB Dynamic range 1 to 12 Reject 0 to 255 Enhance 0 to 5 Gray maps 18 Tint maps 15 M 2D M 2D M CFM 2D M HD Flow 2D M PD 2D M TD AMM 2D AMM 2D CFM AMM CFM 2D HD Flow AMM HD Flow 2D TD AMM TD 2D M and 2D AMM up down horizontal three different sub formats 30 70 50 50 70 30 left right vertical 50 50 2D AMM AMM left rt up rt down 50 25 25 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Technical Data Information 18 10 3 Spectral Doppler PW CW Operating Modes Pulsed Wave Doppler Single Gate PW Continuous Wave Doppler CW f J J Transmit frequencies PW Doppler 1 75 18 MHz e CW Doppler 1 75 16 MHz Pulse Repetition e PW Doppler 0 9 22 0 MHz Frequency e CW Doppler 1 3 40 0 MHz PRF Sample Volume Doppler Length 0 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15mm Gate e Position 5 mm to B scan end Angle correction 85
560. splayed image The focus of the settings for Directional Power Doppler is for high spatial resolution and low artefact visibility allowing vessels to be seen with less blooming and finer detail HD Flow Mode is available in 2D Mode 3D Mode M Mode and Fetal Cardio Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 8 19 Doppler Modes HD Flow Main Menu on page 8 20 id HD Flow Sub Menu on page 8 22 e Utilities on page 14 2 8 5 1 HD Flow Main Menu q gt PD Mode key hard key By pressing the control PD the PD mode is switched on The color box and the color wedge appears immediately in the active B Image The C Mode hard key is also the Gain control for the HD Flow mode in scan mode only For more information see HD Flow Operation on page 8 27 Once HD Flow has been activated it is automatically activated each time the PD hardkey is pressed until the user switches to PD again by using the PD soft key on the touch panel HD Flow Mode key Touching the HD Flow key activates the HD Flow mode The HD Flow HD Flow i i i Box appears in the active 2D image To use the HD Flow mode HD Flow Operation on page 8 21 To adjust the HD Flow settings HD Flow Sub Menu on page 8 22 The HD Flow Main menu appears on the touch panel scan mode Setting Application Peri Vascular Vertebralis Vessel Gen Artery DEFAULT en a R Sub window
561. ssed is surrounded by a yellow frame like in the illustration above How to program the different kinds of keys P1 P4 P keys on page 15 3 Start Exam Start Exam Button on page 15 8 End Exam End Exam Button on page 15 9 15 1 Where to program the keys The keys can be programmed in System Setup Connectivity Button Configuration Press the Utilities key to enter Utilities menu ay Select System Setup to enter System Setup System Setup Wei ee Select Connectivity Select the Button Configuration filing card Now you are in the Button configuration menu tab overview Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 15 2 H48691CF Revision 2 Programmable Keys Button Configuration Stort Exom End Exom Select the key you would like to program 2 Key actions Choose the action s you want the key to do Note There are different actions for different keys The tab Detailed Settings is only available for the P keys Choose the tab Detailed Settings if you want to personalize your settings i Peripherals vice Setup Button Configuration epi P2 P3 PA Stort Exam End Exom Overview Detailed Setup Chpboard Send max Cine Length 2D Sove ingie kd 20 Send ingle v 20 Save Send D M Sove Single v D M Send Single d D M Save Send 3D Sove angie Volume 30 Send AD Sove angie Volume z 4D Send Saeensho 4D Save Send mage Comment Request Comment image Comment
562. ssible Resolution Normal Penetration Frequency Remarks The selected frequency range is displayed on the touch panel The frequency range is displayed in 2 line of the B mode Image Info area e g 7 5 5 OMhz 7 5 start frequency 5 0 end frequency 6 2 9 Harmonic Imaging Hl Tissue not only scatters back echoes with the nominal transmitted frequency but also with double threefold fourfold and so on harmonic frequencies as a result of a physical effect called non linear propagation Coded Harmonic Imaging delivers better gray scale contrast compared to standard ultrasound imaging This technique has proved to be particularly useful for difficult to image patients and furthermore is less prone to artefacts Switch on off the Coded Harmonic Imaging function in 2D mode brightly illuminated Harmonic Imaging is active receiving frequency is the double of the transmitted frequency Weakly illuminated Harmonic Imaging can be used with the selected probe but is not active the last adjusted transmitting frequency is active Not illuminated Harmonic Imaging cannot be used with the selected probe See Use the Harm Frequ control to adjust the range of the frequency Three settings are Harm Frequ i high possible high mid low Remarks i The Harmonic frequency setting is displayed in 2 line of the B mode Image Info area 6 2 10 B View Beta View The Beta
563. st the first trigger image with the trackball 3 Switch the image position press key again and adjust the second trigger image with the trackball For more information see Cine Split Function on page 6 77 Remark The green ECG line indicates to which image the trigger mark is related The Cine Split Function is also possible in Auto Cine Touch the Off key to switch off the ECG Display function Touch the On key to switch on the ECG Display function Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 1 19 Connections 17 4 5 ECG preamplifier MAN Connection Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 17 16 H48691CF Revision 2 Chapter 18 Technical Data Information All technical data of the ultrasound device Sections in this chapter R A Safety Conformance on page 18 2 Physical Attributes on page 18 3 System overview on page 18 5 Screen Formats on page 18 6 Display Modes on page 18 7 Display Annotation on page 18 7 System Standard Features on page 18 10 System Options on page 18 77 System Parameters on page 18 13 Scanning Parameters on page 18 17 Generic Measurements and Measurements Calculations on page 18 26 External Inputs and Outputs on page 18 33 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 18 1 Technical Data Information 18 1 Safety Conformance TYPE Voluson MODEL Voluson E8 E8 Expert
564. start end point setting Mid Line Undo last start end point setting Progression distance Undo end point setting Progression angle Undo end point setting SonoVCAD abormain menu Exit to Volpre 10 16 2 Mark pubis position Auto Adjust Auto Adjust is a convenient feature to automatically align the ultrasound image Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 145 Volume Mode Draw a line consisting of an start and end point along the pubic bone either in image plane A B or both The other image planes are aligned automatically You can tweak the result using rotation translation and zoom Confirm the correct alignment by clicking the Set Position menu item 10 16 3 Mark pubis position manual Bring the volume in the correct position using rotation translation and zoom Align image plane A to the Pubis Longitude mark and image plane B to the Pubis Transverse mark Confirm the correct alignment by clicking the Set Position menu item Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 146 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode 10 16 4 Set fetal contour Trace the position of the fetal head point by point 10 16 5 Set head direction Draw a line of two points along the maximum head diameter Then mark the most distant point of the head contour The head direction is automatically calculated as a line orthogonal to the max diameter passing through the distal point 10 16 6 Set midline Ma
565. start point of the period and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker Begin trace To re adjust the traced line press the upper trackball key Undo repeatedly 4 Trace to the end of the period and press the Set key again to fix the mark Remark To select the Doppler measuring results which should be displayed after the measurement Auto Manual Trace and to select if the envelope curve will be performed with a continuous trace line or by setting points Manual Trace Mode For more information see Application Parameters on page 16 77 12 4 5 3 Measurement of Each Item 1 After obtaining a feasible Doppler spectrum press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the desired measurement item and then select the PS ED RI or PI key A cursor appears on the Doppler spectrum 3 Perform the measurement using the right or left trackball key Set 12 4 5 4 Measurement of PSV EDV RI SD Note 12 4 5 5 Time Note 1 After obtaining an appropriate image press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the desired measurement item and then select the PSV EDV RI SD key The horizontal line for the PSV measurement appears 3 Perform the PSV measurement by moving the trackball and press the right or left trackball key Set The horizontal line for the EDV measurement appears 4 Perform the EDV measurement using the trackball and press the right left trackball key
566. stography Volume Modes 3D 4D 3D Static 4D Real Time VCI A VCI OmniView STIC 4D Biopsy Single 2D Dual 2D 2D Quad 2D 2D 2D 2D 2D B B Flow Contrast B CFM B PD B HD Flow B TD B TL Top Bottom 3 format sizes 40 60 50 50 60 40 B TL Side Side 50 50 B AMM AMM Side Top Bottom 50 25 25 TL M AMM PW CW M CFM AMM CFM Render quad A B C 3D dual A 3D single 3D Sect Planes quad A B C dual A B A C Ref Any Plane single Ref TUI 1x1 1x2 2x2 3x2 3x3 3x4 4x4 Segmentation quad A B C Segm Object single Segm Object Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Technical Data Information 18 5 Display Modes Real time simultaneous in combination with SRI and or CRI capability B CFM B PD B HD Flow B TD B AMM 3D CFM 3D PD 3D HD Flow STIC CFM STIC PD STIC HD Flow STIC TD B B B B CFM B B PD or B B HD Flow in combination with SRI e 2D M 2D PW 3D BF 3D Contrast 4D Contrast Real time Triplex in combination with SRI capability e 2D CFM PW 2D PD PW 2D HD Flow PW 2D TD PW 2D M CEM 2D M HD Flow 2D M TD 2D AMM CEM 2D AMM HD Flow 2D AMM TD 2D CFM AMM CFM 2D HD Flow AMM HD Flow 2D TD AMM TD Selectable alterning in combination with SRI and or CRI modes e 2D PW 2D CW 2D CFM PW 2D PD PW 2D HD Flow PW 2D TD PW 2D CFM CW 2D PD CW 2D HD Flow CW 2D TD CW Zoom Read Write With o
567. stography ROI 3 Quality bar 4 Color bar 5 Elastography image info 6 Quality TL line 9 1 1 Quality bar Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 9 2 H48691CF Revision 2 Elastography Mode 9 2 Elastography Main Menu Elastography mode key hard key Press the Elasto key on the user interface to activate the Elastography mode When the Elasto key is pressed the Elastography main menu appears on the screen Application SmallPart Small Parts Small P Cont Thyroide sup Breast 2 Breast Gen Breast Pen 2D 2D Elasto Transparency P 180 Change the size and the position of the Elastography box by using the trackball key Change between size and position by using the upper trackball key 9 2 1 SRI II For more information see Speckle Reduction Imaging SRI Il on page 10 44 9 2 2 2D 2D Elasto View 2D image 2D image including Elastography on the screen simultaneously Operation 1 Activate Simultan mode by pressing the 2D 2D Elasto key in the main menu Both modes are appearing on the screen side by side 2D on the left 2D Elasto on the right 2 Turnof the simultan mode by pressing the 2D 2D Elasto key in the main menu Using the image format hard keys 1 2 or 1 4 image will also deactivate the simultan mode Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 9 3 Elastography Mode 9 2 3 Transparency Transparency of the Elastography image Range 0 not t
568. sy line adjustment for multi angle biopsy guide on page 5 77 Please read the Instructions for safe Use in Biopsy Safety and Maintenance on page 2 22 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 7 Utilities and System Setup Selecting a biopsy line 1 Press Util on the user interface to open the Utilities menu 2 The Utilities menu appears on the touch panel 3 Select a biopsy kit from the drop down list 4 Select a programmed biopsy line 5 Read all safety instructions before performing a biopsy For more information see Biopsy line adjustment for single angle biopsy guide on page 5 11 For more information see Biopsy line adjustment for multi angle biopsy guide on page 5 11 14 1 7 Lock Screen Lock Screen is a security function It protects the system by password against unwanted intruders There are two ways to activate Lock Screen Lock Screen by pressing the Lock Screen soft key as soon as the screensaver starts When Lock Screen is active a full screen dialog with no title bar or menu appears To regain full access onto your system enter the password in the text field in the lower left corner In case you have forgotten your password you can enter the system in an emergency mode by pressing the Emergency button The emergency mode will not give you full access but still allow you to scan and save patients Voluson This product is protec Ls
569. t or left trackball key to fix the mark 8 The amp PSS cursor appears on the screen Move the cursor to the EPSS point and press the right or left trackball key to fix the mark gt End of systolic immediately before the opening of the Mitral Valve The anterial leaflet of the mitral valve opens it peaks at E _ Lowest point of the initial diastolic closing In atrial systole blood is propelled through the mitral orifice and the mitral leaflets reopen The peak of this phase of mitral valve motion is indicated as A C Complete closure occurs after the onset of the ventricular systole closure occurs after the onset of the ventricular Complete closure occurs after the onset of the ventricular systole _ Distance between the Mitral Valve E point and the posterior edge of the inter ventricular septum at the same point in time 12 7 5 3 2 To measure the Items One by One To measure the items such as D E EPSS E F Slope A C Interval 1 Press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select MV and then select the appropriate item 3 Perform the measurements by using the trackball and the right or left trackball key Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 12 48 H48691CF Revision 2 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 2 7 5 4 HR Heart Rate To measure the Heart Rate in M Mode Meas Applicat Work Sheet Cancel HR Cycles 2 1 Press the Calc key on the control panel 2 Select the ite
570. t Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 I V This page was intentionally left blank Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual i vi H48691CF Revision 2 Chapter 7 General This chapter consists of information concerning indications for use and contact information Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 1 1 General The Voluson E8 E8 Expert is a professional diagnostic Ultrasound System which transmits Ultrasound waves into body tissues and forms images from the information contained within the received echoes The Voluson E8 E8 Expert is an Active Diagnostic Medical Product belonging to Class lla according to the MDD 93 42 EEC regulation for use on human patients The Voluson E8 E8 Expert is developed and produced by GE Healthcare Austria GmbH amp Co OG For more Information please contact GE Healthcare Austria GmbH amp Co OG Tiefenbach 15 Telephone 43 7682 3800 0 4871 Zipf Fax 43 7682 3800 47 Austria Internet http www gehealthcare com Dear Valuable Customer We herewith would like to inform you that the American Institute of Ultrasound in Medicine AIUM advocates the responsible use of diagnostic ultrasound The AIUM strongly discourages the non medical use of ultrasound for psychosocial or entertainment purposes The use of either two dimensional 2D or three dimensional 3D ultrasound to only view the fetus obtain a picture of the fetus or determine the fetal gender wi
571. t Image End Image 3 Select the step size Step Size The increment defines the amount of rotation between adjoining 3D images 4 Start the calculation of the cine sequence Calculate Cine Sequence 10 4 2 3 Slice Cine 2D images are moved in a translational movement through a volume Note Sectional Planes must be selected Single View Quad View Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 63 Volume Mode ee foeten test RAB2 5 D AGD MI 0 21 SE e167 0726 1 14 9om 1 0 21Hz Tis 0 0 26 07 2007 03 18 49 4M Operation 1 Press the 3D Slice Cine key The settings screen appears on the touch panel Step Size Calculate Cine Length Cine Sequence 156 Frames Start Image End Image 2 Use the Start Image and End Image control below the touch panel to select the starting point and end point desired When you select the first image either start image or end image the lines denoting the images will be linked when you select the second image the lines will be unlinked Cine Length 21 Frames Start Image End Image 3 Press the Wide Range button to set the start image and end image as far away from each other as the size of the render box allows 4 Select the step size Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 64 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode Step Size The increment defines the amount of rotation between adjoining 3D images
572. t Imaging hard key Press the Contrast control to activate Contrast Imaging To select a Contrast Technique For more information see Contrast Techniques on page 6 37 To use Contrast Imaging For more information see Contrast Operation on page 6 37 To adjust the Contrast Imaging settings For more information see Contrast Sub Menu on page 6 39 The Contrast Main menu appears on the touch panel in scan mode e g Coded PI l Sub Contrast Setting Application Abdomen Ss Penetration Kidney Aorta SES SESS Abdomen 1 Abdomen FFC Abd Ped DEFAULT Standard Enhance Image Max Contrast Clock Time Delay Accumulation 0 0 OFF Remarks Contrast Imaging is an option If the option is not installed or the selected probe is not applicable for this feature the Contrast key is not active Contrast Imaging is also available in 3D volume mode 4D acquisition is impossible ad Activating Contrast Imaging may change the TI and or MI Index Observe the output display for possible effects In Contrast Imaging only one focus zone is available Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 2D Mode Remark The use of contrast agents is restricted to LVO Left Ventricle Outflow application in the United States Precautions when using a contrast medium GE Healthcare Austria GmbH amp Co OG is not liable for any damage or injury resulting from improper use of c
573. t line 3 The area within the path is cut out and inserted as new volume To add or remove volumes 6a e Point the cursor to an auto generated volume and press the upper trackball key to remove it Point the cursor to a low echogenic object in the image which was not counted by the FPS algorithm and press the upper trackball key to add it to the list To merge volumes Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 135 Volume Mode 1 Press the right trackball key to start drawing a path that encloses or passes the volumes a you want to merge OR 2 Press again to set the path s endpoint If the path is not closed the software will connect the start and end point with a straight line 3 All volumes along the path now appear as a single segment 10 13 5 Viewing Follicles Full screen When follicles are defined and rendered they can be viewed in full screen by using the Single Screen Format key on the touch panel For more information see Button description on page 3 11 In Full screen the 3D follicle can also be rotated For more information see Cine Calculation on page 10 58 10 14 SonoAVC general Note SonoAVC general is an option 10 14 1 General Information In SonoAVC genera low echogenic objects in an organ e g ovary can be defined and named by the user User defined will show up in the patients report with the defined name 10 14 2 Operation 1 Create a 3D Sta
574. t of rotation between adjoining 3D images 4 Select the rotation axis Rot Axis Select between X and Y rotation of the 3D Rotation Cine sequence 5 Start the calculation of the cine sequence at Calculate Cine Sequence 10 4 2 2 3D Translational Cine A render box is moved in a translational movement through a volume Single View The basic screen elements are e Pre view of the rendered start image Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 61 Volume Mode top left position when rotating around the x axis ee bottom left position when rotating around the y axis e Pre view of the rendered end image bottom left position when rotating around the x axis eG bottom right position when rotating around the y axis Default Th2d Gual high 15 Wd _ Mio Operation 1 Press the 3D Transl Cine key The settings screen appears on the touch panel Step Size a 4mm Calculate Cine Length Cine Sequence 21 Frames Start Image End Image 2 Use the Start Image and End Image control below the touch panel to select the starting point and end point desired When you select the first image either start image or end image the lines denoting the images will be linked when you select the second image the lines will be unlinked Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 62 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode Cine Length 21 Frames Star
575. t the settings 2 HD Flow 2D Mode CW Doppler Continuous Wave Doppler HD Flow Menu In scan mode it is possible to switch between HD Flow menu CW menu and the Submenus to readjust the settings 3 HD Flow 2D Mode M Mode Motion Mode Sub M MHD Flow Menu In scan mode it is possible to switch between MHD Flow menu M menu and the Submenus to readjust the settings 8 6 Tissue Doppler Mode TD Mode Tissue Doppler imaging generates a Color image by using the Doppler principle This Color image is overlaid onto the 2D image The Tissue image provides information about tissue motion direction and velocity The Tissue Doppler captures low flow but high amplitude signals associated with wall motion and creates a color coded tissue image The TD mode is subdivided in two groups To use the TD mode For more information see TD Main Menu on page 8 24 To adjust TD settings For more information see TD Sub Menu on page 8 25 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 8 23 Doppler Modes To use special utilities Utilities on page 14 2 and Gray Map on page 6 27 8 6 1 TD Main Menu TD Mode hardkey Touching the TD hardkey activates the TD mode The TD Box appears in the active 2D image To use the TD mode For more information see TD Operation on page 8 24 To adjust the TD settings For more information see TD Sub Menu on page 8 25 The TD Main menu appears on the
576. tation function You can also press Space bar to start the documentation function Upon pressing the ABC Annotation key once more the text is switched off but the annotation text is not cleared There are two possibilities provided to write on the screen Annotation Annotation on page 4 27 with the keyboard keys Auto Annotation Auto Annotation on page 4 27 with the touch panel keys annotation with predefined words 4 5 1 Annotation This function enables text writing onto the ultrasound image using the keyboard in freeze mode or in scan mode respectively The inscription will be erased upon selection of a probe or a program Inscription is not possible outside the annotation area Using text annotation 1 Activate the Annotation Mode via ABC key or Space Bar 2 Position the cursor position the cursor with the trackball or the arrow keys on the keyboard or press Home on the keyboard to jump to the home position 3 Write the text desired using the keyboard 4 Press the Enter key to start a new line Press the Backspace key to delete the last character Storing and activating a cursor position 1 Press Fn Home on the keyboard to store the current cursor position as home position 2 Press Home to position the cursor at the home position Note An individual home position can be stored for each application If desired check the checkbox Home position application specific in the System Setup For more
577. tch Activate the desired option buttons TGC curve TGC graphic display on off Screen Lock Screenlock on off see Lock Screen on page 14 8 Show TX Power TX Power will be displayed on the screen if the box is checked Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 15 Utilities and System Setup Show MI in orange gt 1 0 If the MI is greater than 1 0 it will be displayed in orange on the screen s Screen Saver on 5 min after last operation the screen saver starts off Press any hard key i Auto Scan Stop 2 min after the last operation the system activates the freeze Mode if not yet active s Beeper off switch off the Beep sound which is audible when pressing system hard keys 3D 4D Screen Controls Click this box to switch on off the 3D 4D on screen controls 14 2 3 1 5 Clinic Name Select the text box to enter a new clinic name and use the keyboard to enter information The clinic name will be copied into the Hospital ID in the information header of the screen after closing the setup with Save amp Exit 14 2 3 1 6 Screen saver Text The entered text will be shown when the screensaver is activated 14 2 3 1 7 Language Open pull down menu and select the language desired Note Only languages available on the system are listed If a new language Is installed it is automatically added to the list After Save amp Exit the system will prompt with a dialog box to reb
578. te To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key Change before completing the measurement This alternates the control from one cursor to the other 4 Measure the second distance as described above 11 1 2 2 4 Ellipse 1 To measure circumference and area of an ovoid using an ellipse touch the Ellipse key on the touch panel A cursor appears on the screen 2 Position the cursor on the perimeter of the shape to be measured Press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the mark A second cursor appears 3 Move the second cursor to form an appropriate ellipse and press Set again Note To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key Change before completing the measurement This alternates the control from one cursor to the other 4 Adjust the width of the ellipse by means of the trackball and then press the right trackball key Set 11 1 2 2 5 Stenosis Area The measurement procedure is the same as the measurement of the Generic Area Ellipse pa For more information see 2D Mode Measurements on page 11 4 1 To measure a Stenosis touch the Stenosis Area key on the touch panel A cursor appears on the screen 2 Perform the measurement of the outer area of the stenosis using the trackball and the right or left trackball key Set A second cursor appears 3 Perform the measurement of the inner area of the stenosis and press the Set key Remark The results such as o
579. tem Setup Device Setup page to edit the network adapter properties Before configuring the network adapter properties the following message appears Network Configuration Please be aware that changes and modificabons which are not related to network configuration may cause system dysfunction Please continue only if you are familiar vath this task Dio pou want to continue Click Yes to continue but only if you are familiar with this task 14 2 5 7 Archive Configuration Archive Configuration To open the Archive Configuration window press the Archive Configuration button on the Device Setup page Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 14 42 H48691CF Revision 2 imope Compression img Cine Compr Volume Compr Sawe 2D a4 Sove SD os Image Compressionselect either NONE or JPEG Img Cine Compressionselect either NONE or JPEG Volume Compr Select None lossless or wavelet lossy Save 3D asselect either Raw Data or Image Save 2D asselect Raw Data or Image Press the Default button to discard the adjustments and return to default values Press the Save amp Return button to save the adjustments and return to the previous menu JPEG Nore Row Date how Dotto Compression Rate Volusion E 1 NOTE Using lossy less than 100 JPEG compression can lead to reduced image quality Ultrasound images are consuming a lot of the system s memory resources Therefore the Ar
580. test level Compliance level Electromagnetic environment guidance Conducted RF IEC 3Vrms 150kHz to 80 Mhz 3Vrms Recommended separation 61000 4 6 distance Radiated RF IEC 3 V m 80MHZz to 2 5 GHz p m 4 p 61000 4 3 d l fp 80MHz to 800 MHz f WP O 800MHZ to 2 5GHz Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 2 29 Safety and Maintenance Guidance and manufacturer s declaration electromagnetic immunity where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts W according to the transmitter manufacturer and d is the recommended separation distance in meters m Field strength from fixed RF transmitters as determined by an electromagnetic site survey a should be less than the compliance level in each frequency range b Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment marked with following symbol Co a Field strength from fixed transmitters such as base stations for radio cellular cordless telephones and land mobile radios amateur radio AM and FM radio broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy To access the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters an electromagnetic site survey should be considered If the measured field strength in the location in which the Voluson E8 E8 Expert is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above the Voluson E8 E8 Expert should be observed to verify normal operation If abnormal perform
581. the Set key right trackball key Type in the equation using the keyboard Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 16 9 Measure Setup Note Use only the available symbols and abbreviations Addition n left parenthesis sqt Square root root natural logarithm Subtraction g right parenthesis 2 71828 A Multiplication Square Square pi approx approx 3 1416 m 1416 approx 3 1416 m Additionally select resp enter Output Select the unit and the min and max value of the output Select the item unit and the min and max value of the input Select the Deviation Type Value and dimension i To save the values click the OK button To exit without saving click the Cancel button After saving the new table or equation is shown in the Measure column 16 3 1 3 To Delete a Sub Category Study or Measure Item 1 Select the relevant item in all the digest column s and then highlight the entry to be deleted For example Biometry 2D 3D Early Gest GS Biometry Fetal Biometry CRL Hadlock Early Gest GS Hellman Long Bones YS Fetal Cranium BPD Hadlock AFI FL Hadlock Uterus NT Ovary Delete Delete 2 Select the Delete button 3 Click the Yes button to confirm the Do you really want to delete message or click on No to cancel 16 3 1 4 To Rearrange Sub Categories Studies or Measure Items Select the relevant
582. the GE Healthcare Technologies Contact Center Phone 1 800 558 5102 In other locations contact your local Applications Sales or Service Representative GEME S A Miranda 5237 Buenos Aires 1407 Phone 1 639 1619 Fax 1 567 2678 GE Healthcare Asia Pacific 4 7 127 Asahigaoka Hino shi Tokyo 191 8503 Japan Tel 81 42 585 5111 T gt General AUSTRALIA NEW ZEALAND GE Healthcare Australia amp New Zealand Building 4B 21 South St Rydalmere NSW 2116 Australia Tel 1300 722 229 8 Tangihua Street Auckland 1010 New Zealand Tel 0800 434 325 AUSTRIA General Electric Austria GmbH Filiale GE Healthcare Technologies EURO PLAZA Geb ude E Wienerbergstrasse 41 A 1120 Vienna Phone 43 1 97272 0 Fax 43 1 97272 2222 GE Medical Systems Ultrasound Eagle Building BELGIUM amp LUXENMBURG Kouterveldstraat 20 1831 DIEGEM Phone 32 2 719 7204 Fax 32 2 719 7205 BRAZIL Equipamentos M dicos Ltda Av Das Na es Unida 8501 3 andar parte Pinheiros S o Paulo SP CEP 05425 070 C N P J 02 022 569 0001 83 Phone 3067 8493 Fax 011 3067 8280 CANADA GE Healthcare Ultrasound Service Engineering 9900 Innovation Drive Wauwatosa WI 53226 Phone 1 800 668 0732 Customer Answer Center Phone 1 262 524 5698 CHINA GE Healthcare Asia No 1 Yongchang North Road Beijing Economic amp Technology Development Area Beijing 100176 China Phone 8610 5806 8888 Fax 8610 6787 1162
583. the better the spatial resolution will be Hold the transducer still and ask the mother not to move 10 To start the acquisition press the Freeze key or the right trackball key Start gt displayed in Status bar area on the monitor JOR The volume acquisition starts and the acquired images are displayed Note If CRI is enabled in 2D Mode it is also used in STIC pre mode and during STIC acquisition The settings CRI value are taken from the 2D settings Use of CRI is indicated in the info block It is also possible to combine CRI with STIC Color CFM During the acquisition following message will be displayed on the touch panel Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 105 Volume Mode Volume Acquisition in progress stop acquisition Note The user must be sure that no one of the participating persons mother fetus user moves during the acquisition A movement of anyone will cause a failure of the acquisition Omni View Ref Line If the user recognizes a movement during the scan the acquisition has to be cancelled with the Exit Stop acquisition key Remarks The color settings adjusted in CFM mode will be also used in STIC CFM mode If the expected frame rate is too low for a good quality STIC acquisition lt 18MHz following message appears on the screen The acquisition can be started despite the message Wait till the system has completed the calculation After STIC Cal
584. the comment field in the current patient dialog If an exam comment already exists the dialog displays the current exam comment which can then be edited or deleted max 4 characters Press OK to save and exit Press Cancel to exit without saving 13 5 6 2 Image Comment Press the Abc key A window pops up asking for an image comment Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 13 41 Archive 13 5 7 Formats 13 5 8 Buttons 13 42 image Comment Comment The image comment is different from the exam comment in that it can differ for each image If an image comment already exists the dialog displays the current image comment which can then be edited or deleted max 4 characters Press OK to save and exit Press Cancel to exit without saving The following formats are available in Exam Review Mode and can be selected in the System Setup page see 1x1 2x2 3x3 A double click on an image that is not already in Full Screen Mode causes the image to be displayed in Full Screen Mode A second double click returns the image to the previous format 1 Cine Mode The Cine Mode button displays the acquisition type of the stored image or if there are more than one US pictures in one image then it displays more than one type of acquisition 2D 3D 4D 2 Play Loads the cine preview If cine data has been stored in Raw Format the Play key plays the cine continuously
585. the cursor to the start of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker 3 Move the trackball again to adjust the next line between two points and then press Set again Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 11 6 H48691CF Revision 2 Measurements Note To re adjust a line press the upper trackball key Undo repeatedly 4 Set as much points as required in the same manner 5 To finish the measurement and to display the result press the Set key once again 11 1 2 1 6 Stenosis Distance 1 To measure a Stenosis touch the Stenosis Dist key on the touch panel A cursor appears on the screen 2 Perform the measurement of the outer distance of the stenosis using the trackball and the right or left trackball key Set A second cursor appears 3 Perform the measurement of the inner distance of the stenosis and press the Set key Remark The results such as outer and inner distance and the Stenosis appear automatically 11 1 2 2 Generic Area Measurements Volume Angle hens Applicat Work Sheet Area Clear Study Ellipse Cancel 11 1 2 2 1 Area Trace 1 To measure circumference and area using trace touch the Area Trace key on the touch panel A cursor appears on the screen 2 Move the cursor to the start of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker A second cursor appears 3 Move the second cursor ar
586. the exam s to the selected storage medium Note If you like the patient data to be saved in a txt or pdf file select Include Report Data Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 13 31 Archive 13 32 Attention Pn ap 4 ais i All patient and exam data will be saved in an automatically created folder when the Create Patient Exam Folder check box is selected The folder will be named by the patients ID Apply JPG compression with a quality setting less than 100 to an image only once Images that were saved to Archive using lossy less than 100 JPG compression are sea Clearly marked with a yellow J e g J80 compression factor 80 Note A AVIs using MPEG4 compression cannot be played on a Windows PC without the right codec installed Please download the DivX codec from www divx com and install it on your computer in order to view MPEG4 encoded AVI s A lossy compression reduces image quality which can lead to a false diagnosis Save as DICOM format Free Space 6 348 Use DICOM Settings from Alas ViewPoint 3 249 4 57 7 Use DICOM Settings from Alias Source of the DICOM settings s DICOM Config Shows the DICOM Configuration window ad Include SR Includes structured report Combine OB amp GYN Combine OB and GYN data in structured report checkbox appears when Include SR is selected Anonymize function Anonymize patient data 13 3 7
587. the lower right quadrant in Sectional Planes mode To activate or deactivate the O H Graphic touch the Orient Help key in the Sectional Planes mode The help image figure shows the intersections of a plane within the volume body by lines as a section plane Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 18 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode e g O H Graphic of an Abdominal Transducer Note The alignment of the volume box is NOT the alignment of the patient s body 10 2 3 2 Automatic Optimization in Volume PreMode This function will optimize the contrast resolution of the sectional planes A B and C according to the histogram of the scan area However the rendered image is NOT affected The primary result is a value for the upper and lower endpoint of the actual histogram Pressing the auto key causes automatic optimization of the gray scale to enhance the contrast resolution of the sectional planes A B and C When the key is pressed again the optimization according to the histogram will be updated and remain active Double click the auto key to switch off the Automatic Optimization Remarks When the Automatic Optimization function is active the auto key is illuminated green The rendered image is NOT affected not optimized 10 2 3 3 Reference Image Ref Image Choosing a reference image automatically determines the rotary controls mode buttons and the trackball for the adjustment of a secti
588. the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker A second cursor appears 3 Move the second cursor to the second point of the measurement and press Set again Note To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key Change before completing the measurement This alternates the control from one cursor to the other 4 Repeat for the second distance 11 1 3 1 3 Slope 1 To measure the time and slope touch the Slope key on the touch panel A cursor appears on the screen 2 Move the cursor to the start point of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker A second cursor appears 3 Move this cursor to the second point of the measurement and press Set again Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 11 14 H48691CF Revision 2 Measurements Note To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key Change before completing the measurement This alternates the control from one cursor to the other 11 1 3 1 4 Time 1 To measure a horizontal time interval touch the Time key on the touch panel A line appears on the screen 2 Move the line to the start point of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set Note To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key A second line parallel to the first one appears gt Move this line using the trackball to the end point of the measurement and then press Set
589. the ultrasound images adversely In the event the equipment has been brought from a cold environment stock room airfreight into a warm room allow several hours for temperature balance and passing of condensation humidity before switching on for the first time Do not cover the ventilation holes of the Voluson E8 E8 Expert The user is responsible for the safety of all persons in the vicinity of the ultrasound system including the patient s Thermal Safety Maintaining a safe thermal environment for the patient has been a design priority at GE Healthcare The operating temperature of the ultrasound probe stays below 43 C if used as intended For more information see Details on page 18 2 Using the system in sterile environment i The ultrasound console cannot be sterilized The use of protective console covers is not validated by the manufacturer GE Healthcare Austria GmbH amp Co OG j It is in the responsibility of the user to use appropriate protective console covers from 3rd parties or have a non sterile person operate the system z Always follow the hygienic guidelines established by the institution where the ultrasound system is used i The ultrasound probes cannot be sterilized It is in the responsibility of the user to use sterile probe sheaths as described in the Basic User Manual 2 3 2 1 Electric Installation The system must be exclusively installed in medically used rooms The equipment conforms with regula
590. this key to display the body pattern from front The body pattern can be rotated in steps of 45 Touch this key to display the body pattern from behind The body pattern can be rotated in steps of 45 Touch this key to display the body pattern from top view The body pattern cannot be rotated Touch this key to display the body pattern from bottom view The body pattern cannot be rotated Change Press the upper trackball key to change between Scan and No Function or vice versa If Scan is selected use the trackball to place Scan Activate the probe marker on the body pattern The right trackball key has the same function as the Activate key Body Use the Body Rotation control to rotate the body pattern This function is only available if Rotation body view is front or back Use the Probe Rotation control to rotate the probe marker on body pattern Rotation Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 10 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode Tilt Tilt the Probe on body pattern using this control Two tilt angles are available 45 and 90 Touch the Activate key on the touch panel to activate settings or changes Activate Touch the Activate key on the touch panel to activate settings or changes The 3D 4D Menu is active and orientation markers are displayed in 3D 4D mode Note The Orientation marks appear on the Rotation Axis in the A B and C Plane They change accordi
591. thout a medical indication is inappropriate and contrary to responsible medical practice Although the general use of ultrasound for medical diagnosis is considered safe ultrasound energy has the potential to produce biological effects Ultrasound bioeffects may result from scanning for a prolonged period inappropriate use of color or pulsed Doppler ultrasound without a medical indication or excessive thermal or mechanical index settings American Institute of Ultrasound in Medicine Keepsake Fetal Imaging 2005 Thus ultrasound should be used in a prudent manner to provide medical benefit to the patient 1 1 About this User Manual Neh ee 1 2 Read and understand all instructions in the Basic User Manual before attempting to use the Voluson E8 E8 Expert This Manual has to be used in connection with the Voluson E8 E8 Expert Keep this User Manual with the equipment at all times All information contained in the Voluson E8 E8 Expert User Manual is relevant Periodically review the procedures for operation and safety precautions Please note that orders are based on the individually agreed specifications and may not contain all features listed in this manual It might be possible that some probes options or features are NOT available in some countries The screen graphics and illustrations in this manual are for illustrative purposes only and may be different from what is displayed on the screen or device V
592. tic Volume of the desired Organ see Volume Acquisition Static 3D Render on page 10 49 2 Select a Region of Interest or create a VOCAL see After the Static 3D Render Acquisition on page 10 57 3 Press the SonoAVC general Button in the top right corner Note lf a 4D Volume cine is present the system will automatically switch to 3D Static when SonoAVC general is pressed A a Sectional Render TUI Planes SonoAVC Generic Cut Merge ann Edit ROI n Init A B Ref Image 3D Init tilt Separation TH low 80 mid Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 136 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode The following screen appears be RSD GH Hse Tarai ala Lamo SHE Tia ot LL DEAE Os Faew Dew yell cam eae 10 14 2 1 Defining custom objects 1 Use the trackball to define the object area and confirm with Left Trackball key or Right Trackball key 2 Double click on the text box in the upper left corner A text window appears Enter new Description Enter a description and press Save amp Exit The new object will be added to the list and given a number and a color when the New button is pressed The follicle description will also be shown in the patient report If a description with the same name already exists following message will appear Voluz on E8 Description is already in use Do you want to overwrite it Confirm wit
593. tical one of the following messages will be displayed When loading a Small Backup The current user programs are not compatible with this software version When loading parts of a Small Backup The current user programs are not compatible with this software version Do you want to load the complete set of user programs This can be solved by loading the latest available backup Small Backup which is compatible with the software version Complete Backup gt gt Select the Complete Backup and click the gt gt button to copy the Complete Backup into the Load Data field Cs Click this button to start the loading procedure of the complete Backup into the system Note Also only parts of a Backup can be loaded into database to overwrite restore copy etc the database into the system Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 14 52 H48691CF Revision 2 Utilities and System Setup Click the plus sign to open the content tree Core SY ere oleae ER 7 UL VAL 2 ee 1 ee PP Campis beck User Programs Select the appropriate group all probes probe amp all applications etc down to the final single program within the displayed tree Click the Arrow button to copy the selected item into the Load Data field Click the Load button The load procedure starts to load the selected item of Backup into the system Auto Text Select the Auto Text group Click the Arrow to copy the selected item into the
594. tient Data Area on page 13 4 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Archive 4 Application Area see Application Area on page 13 4 Additional Study Information Area see Additional Study Information Area on page 13 4 Exam Display see Exam Display on page 13 6 13 1 1 Patient Data Area Middle Name patient s middle name a DOB Day of Birth patient day of birth LC female male selection in pull down menu Note Upon entering the day of birth The age is calculated and displayed automatically To conduct a search enter the required criteria and press the Search button see To Search in the Patient List on page 4 25 13 1 2 Application Area Abdomen ABD Obstetrics OB Gynecology GYN Cardiology CARD Urology URO For more information see Patient Information screen on page 4 14 13 1 3 Additional Study Information Area Perf Physician Name of the Performing Physician max 32 characters Ref Physician Name of the Referring Physician max 32 characters Sonographer Name of Sonographer max 32 characters Exam Type Type of Exam max 32 characters Exam Comment max 32 characters Review Standard Input on page 4 8 or To Search in the Patient List on page 4 25 13 4 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Archive Note The arrow keys on the keyboard can be used to scroll through the menu items pe Cu
595. tination b Max Cine Length If you send a cine you can adjust its running time here If you chose an image this option is grayed out c Request Comment check box If marked an image comment will automatically be requested upon pressing the respective key 3 Print Use report printers for reports If you check this check box reports will automatically be directed to the assigned report printer 4 General TUI One by one If you check this check box each T U I slice will be printed on a separate sheet of paper Otherwise all T U I slices will be printed on one General Worksheet All Pages Activate to enable printing sending and saving of worksheet pages in the worksheet menu 5 Save Send Options Clipboard and Send 2D Automatic Basically save the data that is displayed on screen In Freeze Mode save a single 2D image In Auto Cine Mode save Cine as defined in Auto Cine Menu In write mode save Cine according to max Cine Length setting Always save a single image regardless of the selected mode max Cine Length is disabled Always save a 2D cine In Write and Freeze Mode save the cine according to max Cine Length In Auto Cine Mode save the cine as defined in Auto Cine Single Save a single image containing both current Doppler data and current 2D data Doppler Cine Save two cines One containing the Doppler data and the other one containing the 2D data Raw Data 1 fi
596. tion Cure Polyline Omni View Ref Line Omni View Orientation Omni View Ghuality Vol Angle rot hight 1 1 Touch the Niche key to display the Static 3D Niche menu on the touch panel Multi Omni VCI planar View Static Niche View Ref Image Ref Image im mm Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 30 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode 3 Select the reference image A B or C The selected reference image is marked green Niche view 4 Set the view direction for the niche mode Use the Niche Y Rot control to rotate around the Y axis Y Rot Use the Niche X Rot control to rotate around the X axis X Rot Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 31 Volume Mode 5 Position the images in the niche mode display with the trackball JOL 6a 6 Use the upper trackball key to change the function of the trackball from image position to AO axis position Remarks Use the Single screen format key and the Quad screen format key to change from full to quad Niche display and vice versa Use the rotary controls X Y and Z to rotate the volume around any one of the axes Rotation around X Y and Z axis can be performed freely Perform the parallel slicing of the image axis by rotating the Parallel shift Mode rotary control for the selected reference image 10 2 4 7 VCI Static VCI Static is a special Visualiza
597. tion mode compared to Volume Contrast Imaging VCI A Plane on page 10 96 and VCl Omniview on page 10 98 which are Acquisition modes The data is represented as in Static 3D Sectional Planes However the three planes are VCI renderings tissue information of a thick slice computed from the 3D data set E A After the 3D Image Aquisitation VCI 1 Touch this key to display the VCI Static menu on the touch panel Static Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 32 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode 10 2 5 Tomographic Ultrasound Imaging TUI Parallel Slices Note Tomographic Ultrasound Imaging is an option If this option is not installed the TUI key is hidden TUI is a new Visualization mode for 3D and 4D data sets The data is presented as slices through the data set which are parallel to each other An overview image which is orthogonal to the parallel slices shows the parts of the volume which are displayed in the parallel planes This method of visualization is consistent with the way other medical systems such as CT or MRI present the data The distance between the parallel planes can be adjusted to fit the requirements of the given data set In addition it is possible to set the number of planes The planes and the overview image can also be printed to a DICOM printer for easier comparison of ultrasound data with CT and or MRI data T U I is available in 4D Real Time Vo
598. tion position the center of rotation in the area of the image that you want to keep 10 2 4 2 Translation The translation allows a displacement of the center of rotation along the intersection lines of the sectional planes A B and C The displacement of the center of rotation leads to the display of parallel sectional images To perform parallel slicing of images rotate the Parallel Shift rotary control Turn the Parallel Shift rotary control clockwise Reference image A The sectional plane migrates from the front to the rear through the volume body Reference image B The sectional plane migrates from the left to the right through the volume body Reference image C The sectional plane migrates from the top to the bottom through the volume body Important note The terms front left top etc do not refer to the patient but serve for explanation Parallel movement of the reference image will display the new intersection lines with the non reference images The sectional planes of the non reference images are not altered Axis positioning of the center of rotation in the reference image Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 24 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode The center of rotation can be X Y positioned by the trackball This causes also a parallel displacement of those planes presented by the non reference images The intersection line A of the non reference images with the reference i
599. tional Planes acquisition the system automatically changes to the 3D menu The selected format will be present on the monitor e g A B C Sectional Plane mode Note C If you want to return to the 3D Volume Mode menu press the right trackball key Vol pre displayed in the status bar area on the monitor Display of sectional planes A B C Sectional Plane Mode Reference Image Mode Niche Display Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 17 Volume Mode For more information see Principle of Sectional Image Analysis on page 10 20 een Render Multi planar Curve Trace Polyline Omni View Ref Line Orin View Orientation Previous j Line Clear All Omni View duality Vol Angle rot high 1 Visualization modes i Niche Display Mode Principle of Sectional Image Analysis on page 10 20 a After the Static 3D Render Acquisition on page 10 51 After the Static 3D Sectional Planes Acquisition on page 10 17 2 VOCAL II on page 10 111 VCI Static Principle of Sectional Image Analysis on page 10 20 ad Tomographic Ultrasound Imaging TUI Parallel Slices on page 10 33 VCl Omniview on page 10 98 10 2 3 1 Orientation Help Graphic The orientation help image shows only the position of the actual reference image plane within the volume body without direct relation to the patient The orientation help image is only displayed in
600. tions for electrical safety IEC 60601 and safety class Ila according to the MDD 93 42 EEC regulation for use on human patients Ultrasound probes are rated Type BF Local Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Gro Safety and Maintenance A A 2 3 3 Moving or lifting the System Moving the system on plains Moving the system on inclines 2 10 safety regulations may require an additional connection between the potential equilibrium bolt and the building s grounding system Before switching on the first time the local main voltage and frequencies have to be checked against the values indicated on the Voluson E8 E8 Expert rating plate located on the rear panel Only authorized personnel must perform any change to the system Unauthorized modifications may result in hazardous situations The minimum required house installation must have 16A The system is equipped with main outlets separated by an isolation transformer for peripheral equipment printer VCR DVR To ensure electrical safety these instruments must never be connected to a wall socket The Voluson E8 E8 Expert weighs 130 kg or more depending on installed peripherals 300 Ibs or more when ready for use Care must be used when moving it or replacing its parts Failure to follow the precautions listed could result in injury uncontrolled motion and costly damage ALWAYS Two people are required when moving on inclines or lifting
601. tive 2 Click the triangles containing the page numbers to swap pages PED cer TE Click this triangle to swap to the previous page Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 13 7 Archive 13 2 1 2 Saving onto the Clipboard Use the P1 default value programmable button to store pictures onto the clipboard Press the P1 hardkey and a scaled down picture will appear in the clipboard area Note If you press P1 without having started an exam the following dialog appears You have to start an exam first Don t display this message again Pressing OK evokes the Current Patient Dialog and you can enter a Patient immediately After entering the patient data and returning to scan mode using the Start Exam button the image or cine will be stored automatically and a message will show in the message window Pressing Cancel cancels the dialog and returns to Scan Mode No Patient has been entered and pressing P1 will lead to the same dialog Note Check the check box if you do not want this message to appear again 13 2 2 Manipulating Files on the Clipboard Use the trackball keys to delete export to CD or reload the pictures 13 2 2 1 Reload from the Clipboard 100 13 2 2 1 1 Saving a reloaded image Press the left trackball key to reload the full screen image General Edited Reload images Measurements Annotations have to be saved again to the clipboard using a
602. tive if a connection is established Press the Return button to close this dialog and return to Drives tab To reinstall a drive If a USB device was not recognized you can reinstall it 1 Select the USB device from the list 2 Press the Reinstall Drive Button The following message appears Rezcenning single USH Driwe x Do vou really want to reinstall USB drive Optiarc OWD RW 40 51704 USE Device Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 14 48 H48691CF Revision 2 Note 14 2 6 Backup a 4 D 1 2 a Utilities and System Setup Confirm with OK The following dialogue appears USE Device x Rescanning USB devices Please wait This can take up to 30 seconds After the rescan the following message appears Rescanning single USB Drive Please check if the device is recognized correctly now IF it is still not recognized correctly please select no device from the list and press Reinstall All Devices Confirm with OK To erase a CD or DVD Insert a CD or DVD into the drive Press the Erase CD DVD button The following dialog appears Greene Erase the disc AI data on DYDD wall be erased A complete deletion of the DVD RW and DVD R is not available as those media will thereby be destroyed Press OK to accept or press Cancel to cancel the process When both modes are possible and the user changes from complete mode to fast mode a dialog wi
603. to activate Omni View Ref Line view Press the Dual screen format button to activate Omni View dual view Press the Single screen format button to switch back to Omni View full format view 10 10 STIC Spatio Temporal Image Correlation With this acquisition method the fetal heart or an artery can be visualized in 4D It is not a Real Time 4D technique but a post processed 3D acquisition STIC Fetal Cardio is only available on RAB amp RIC probes in the OB GYN application sd STIC Vascular is only available on the RSP probe in the Peripheral Vascular application Data is acquired for a predefined period of time 7 5 15 sec The acquired images are post processed to calculate a 4D Volume Cine sequence representing one complete heart cycle In order to achieve a good result try to adjust the size of the volume box and the sweep angle to be as small as possible The longer the acquisition time the better the spatial resolution will Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 102 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode be The user must be sure that there is minimal movement of the participating persons e g mother and fetus and that the probe is held absolutely still throughout the acquisition period Movement will cause a failure of the acquisition If the user trained operator clearly recognizes a disturbance during the acquisition period the acquisition has to be cancelled A good STIC data set shows a regular and synchr
604. to fix the marker A second cursor appears Move the second cursor at the diagonal edge of the NT ROI to the second point of the measurement and press Set again To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key Change before completing the measurement This alternates the control from one cursor to the other 5 NT Methode SOnONT If the analysis finds a result The NT measurement will be displayed The NT position can now be changed using the NT position flipswitch If the analysis can not find a result A message appears on the screen No valid NT distance found Start over with step 4 NT Method Switch between Manual or Sono NT Face up down Switch between Face up or Face down Select Ni according to scanned image Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports NT calculation algorithm i i inner inner i m inner middle Key is hidden if not activated in system setup For more information see Application Parameters on page 16 77 K Nicolaides The 11 13 6 weeks scan Fetal Medicine Foundation London 2004 FMF Certificate of Competence in the measurement of Nuchal translucency http www fetalmedicine com fmf training certification certificates of competence 1 1 13 week scan nuchal 2010 The NT measurement will be displayed in the worksheet as follows 20 Mecsurements ALV HT 1
605. tored The gray map valid before entering a new one in Edit mode will be valid again Pos By touching one of these keys you select a certain position on the Gray curve Note If you Exit now changes in the Edit menu are stored under the selected pos key and the key position remains active in the Gray menu Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 46 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode HRIGHT GRAT F graphic display on screen Operation 1 Select the position to modify by touching one of the Pos 1 to Pos 7 keys on the touch panel 2 The selected point can now be positioned with the trackball in X and Y direction 3 To change the position of the other points proceed as in 1 and 2 4 Touch one of User 1 to User 3 keys to store the adjusted Gray curve Remark A spine algorithm generates the curve through all 5 points To create your own Gray Map curve For more information see 2D Gray Map on page 6 22 Note These settings require an alert observation of the influence on the 3D image With the Background function the contrast between screen background and 2D image is set This function is only of significance in B scan when a part of the screen background is visible F Background 5 Adjust the contrast of the screen background from dark to bright Return to the 3D 4D Menu 10 3 8 Tint Map Tint 3D 1 Press the Tint 3D button in the 3D 4D Sub menu The 3D Tint menu a
606. tors like fever of the mother are again reasons to keep the TI values as low as possible on the one hand and go only as high as necessary to achieve the desired clinical results Prudent Use ALARA Principle on page 2 25 The mechanical index which indicates the risk of cavitation becomes important at the interface between gas and soft tissue nonfetal lung and bowel but also with the use of gas body contrast agents Often an MI value of 0 4 or less is suggested for examinations of tissue containing stabilized gas bodies This value arises from operating experience and is not confirmed Some examples where the MI and TI respectively are more or less important are shown in the following table according to Particular requirements for the basic safety and essential performance of ultrasonic medical diagnostic and monitoring equipment IEC 60601 2 37 2nd Edition 2007 Annex CC Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 2 26 H48691CF Revision 2 Safety and Maintenance a Of greater importance Of less importance MI With contrast agents In the absence of gas bodies i e most Mechanical l l tissue scanning Cardiac scanning lung exposure Index Abdominal scanning bowel gas TI 1st trimester scanning Well perfused tissue i e liver spleen Thermal Fetal skull and spine Cardiac scanning Indices Neonatal head Vascular scanning Patient with fever Poorly perfused tissue Scanning near ribs or bone Tlb Furth
607. touch panel scan mode Setting Application Abdomen BML ANA ES Penetration Kidney Liver Abdomen 1 Near DEFAULT 2D 2D TD Invert Remarks i Changing the Gain Quality PRF Gain Invert and 2D 2D TD is only possible in scan mode The TD key is only visible if the selected probe is capable of the Tissue mode 8 6 2 TD Operation The TD operations TD Box Position and TD Box Size TD Gain Control on page 8 25 Quality on page 8 33 Velocity Range PRF on page 8 35 i Invert on page 8 32 2D 2D TD TD Gain Control on page 8 25 8 6 2 1 TD Box Position and TD Box Size In 2D imaging the relationship between 2D frame rate line density and field of view are well known factors to be considered to obtain optimum 2D Images Similar relationships exist in Color Imaging On the TD Submenu the selection of the line density adjusts the balance between the 2D Line Density and the Tissue mode line density The available values are scan head dependent Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 8 24 H48691CF Revision 2 Doppler Modes The ability to change the TD Box size and position provides flexibility in TD Imaging The trackball changes the TD Box size and position Adjust the TD Box position on the 2D image with the trackball in Single Dual or Quad Mode gt TD box horizontal position t 4 TD box vertical position The box is adjustable within the
608. trackball Set key again The Heart Rate is displayed 12 4 6 Abdomen Worksheet Press the Worksheet key on the control panel or touch the Worksheet key in the Calculation menu to view the report that contains detailed results of abdomen calculations Report 04 13 2006 Page 1 3 Exam Type Name DOE Martha Perf Phys DrArzt Pat 1D wysywyg DOB 12 12 1980 Ref Phys Dr Or Arzt Indication Sex Female Sonogr Kain Arzt 2D Measurements m2 m3 mA mS Aorta Al A2 Sten Ares Vessel Al Body Tall Liver Length Width Height Portal V Diam 113 With this flip control below the touch panel additional worksheet pages can be selected To close the worksheet touch the Return key on the touch panel Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 17 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports For additional description please refer to Basic Patient Worksheet Functions on page 12 5 12 5 Small Parts Calculations Application Small Parts Factory Sub Category Default Breast allows measurements calculations in 2D 3D mode M mode and Spectral Doppler mode using various measure items For details about settings review Measure amp Calc on page 16 3 The methods for obtaining measurements in the Small Parts Calculations menu are similar to the generic measurement functions in 2D M and Spectral Doppler mode 12 5 1 Items of Small Parts Calculations Sub
609. ttings page The Auto Text menu appears on the screen Uber ma A Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 21 Utilities and System Setup 14 22 Note 2 Select an Auto Text button and press Set The cursor appears inside the selected button 3 Enter the Text with the keyboard 4 Select the next Text button and so on 5 If more than 20 entries are done a 2nd page is available 6 Click Save amp Exit to store and close the System Setup Exit Back to the last active menu without saving Delete To delete an entered word from the database Save To save a word with active Auto Text page menu Return Back to the User Setting main menu 2nd Page 15 Page This key alternates between the first and second text page Application This button changes to the Auto Text Application select menu The Auto text Application select menu appears on the monitor Operation 1 Open the Application window with the Application button 2 Choose the application desired select the corresponding application button After a selection the first Auto Text page of the selected application appears on the screen Return Click Return to return to the previous Text Auto page without saving changes Save amp Exit button must be selected before exiting Text Auto or changes will be lost Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Utilities an
610. ub menu The AMM Submenu consists of Gray Map on page 6 21 id Display Format on page 7 7 2 Frequency on page 7 5 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 M Mode Display Format Off V 40 60 SEE EEE EE SS Frequency norm AMM rot Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 7 19 M Mode This page was intentionally left blank Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 7 20 H48691CF Revision 2 Chapter 8 Doppler Modes Describes the general functions of the Spectral Doppler Mode PW Continuous Wave Doppler CW Color Flow Mode CFM Power Doppler PD High Definition Flow HD Flow and Tissue Doppler TD Sections in this chapter Doppler modes Pulsed Wave Doppler Mode PW Mode on page 8 2 Continuous Wave Doppler Mode CW Mode on page 8 7 Color Flow Mode CFM on page 8 10 Power Doppler Mode PD Mode on page 8 15 HD Flow Mode Bi directional Angio Mode on page 8 19 Tissue Doppler Mode TD Mode on page 8 23 Doppler functions and filters Doppler Mode Functions and Filters on page 8 27 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 8 1 Doppler Modes 8 1 Pulsed Wave Doppler Mode PW Mode Doppler imaging includes a spectral analysis which describes the Doppler shift signal from the moving reflectors within a sample volume The spectral display scrolls f
611. ultiple formats only the Cine Sater sequence of the active 2D image indicated with the green dot is displayed mna Linked B Mode and Timeline Cine loop review 2D amp TL E Cine loop review only Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 6 18 H48691CF Revision 2 2D Mode Timeline Cine loop review only P1 P4 Edit Save Clip Toggle between playback and stop of the save cine clip selected by the Edit Px button Button is disabled if no save send clip is available Remarks m The 2D Auto Cine function is only possible in freeze mode The 2D Auto Cine is also possible with multiple formats Therefore select the desired image before touching 2D Cine To change to the next frozen 2D image touch the Exit key choose the image activate 2D Cine and then Start to play back the cine memory of the active 2D image indicated with the green dot ad If the 2D Auto Cine function is stopped move the trackball horizontally to display the 2D images of the stored sequence one by one Touch the Exit key to return to the 2D freeze mode menu 6 4 2D Sub Menu The Main 2D mode has to be active Touch the Sub 2D key The 2D Sub menu appears Main 2D Gray Map Tint 7 V Clear Line Filter ES Persist Enhance 3 1 OFF 4 4 Line Dens VCI Reject if ad te 10 norm Omm OTI Frequency adipose norm Note Some functions are only available in scan mode The
612. ultrasound Image 2 Probe Program Menu If this check box is checked the system automatically shows the Probe select menu when Start Exam is pressed The image on screen is cleared no image visible Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 15 8 H48691CF Revision 2 Programmable Keys D Probe Application User Program Activates the selected probe application user program on start exam if auto start is selected If last used is selected for Probe then Application and User Program also switch to last used 4 Clipboard Saves the scanned image to the clipboard upon pressing Start Exam 5 Send There are three check boxes You can choose up to three different destinations where to send your images or cine data to Choose the destination from the drop down list To alter the drop down list see Connectivity on page 14 37 6 Print There are three check boxes You can choose up to three different destinations where to print your images or cine data or reports Choose the destination from the drop down list To alter the drop down list see Connectivity on page 14 37 15 4 End Exam Button Archive Mowe Clipboard Content to Internal Archive on End Exam Transfer Workeheet Transfer Worksheat to Destination 1 on End Exam jdicam Je 1 81165 _ Tronsfer Worksheet to Destination 2 on End Exam jdicom 3 213 81 165 _ Transfer Worksheet to Destination 3 on End Exam dikon 3 213 61165 Show End Exam
613. ultrasound image for the region of interest is adjusted The number of image lines and the frame rate are automatically optimized Changing the depth is only possible in real time scan mode When you change the Depth the 2D image display the depth scale acoustic power indices MI TIS TIB TIC frame rate and focal depth will change accordingly Remarks The maximum and minimum depth depend on the selected probe The actual depth in cm is displayed in the Information Header bd freeze mode The displayed 2D image is positioned on the monitor again without change in the depth range 6 2 3 2D Image Angle 6 4 Use the Angle control to select a part of interest of the 2D image The advantage of the decreased field of view is an increased 2D frame rate due to the smaller sector width Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 2D Mode 1 Turn the control clockwise to increase the image width Turn the control counterclockwise to aul lela decrease the image width Remarks If the selected probe has the possibility to adjust the 2D angle the display above the digipot control will show its value Digipot display curved array probe Angle degree 6 2 4 TGC Slider Controls The TGC slide controls vary the gain in certain depths of the 2D image to allow an exact compensation for the attenuation of the echoes over time depth TGC slide controls to selectively adjust the gain br
614. upper trackball key changes between cursor position and Color box size and vice versa Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 M Mode 7 4 2 2 Activation of MCFM Mode Press the right or left trackball key and 2D mode and MCFM mode trace are active q k The screen is divided asymmetrically into two frames The 2D image appears in the top frame The M mode trace appears in the lower frame The touchpanel shows the MCFM Main menu Three display formats are possible For more information see Display Format on page 7 7 The Freeze key stops the 2D image and MCFM mode trace Note By pressing the Freeze key again the MCFM cursor appears on the active 2D image 7 4 2 3 MCFM Gain Control The adjustment of the Gain control determines the amount of amplification applied to the received echoes All received echoes are amplified with the same gain value regardless of the scan depth Rotate the M Mode key and or the C Mode key to adjust the gain brightness of the entire image Note The M Gain function influences the M trace brightness only The C Gain function influences the color saturation only Remarks The current gain value is displayed on the screen GN 7 4 3 MCFM Sub Menu The MCFM Main menu has to be active Touch the key Sub MCFM key The MCFM Submenu appears Main a Ss eee MCFM Menu V VY cm sec VY Frequ Flow Res Artefact mid mid2 OFF
615. urements are performed the current measurement will be placed in the lower right corner The previous measurements are displayed above in successive order like a shift register Except for Auto Trace measurements all measurement results will be automatically included in the corresponding Worksheet To store Auto Trace measurement results press the right or left trackball key Set previously Depending on the Application setting and the adjustment in the Measure Setup RI and PI will be calculated using ED End Diastole or MD Mid Diastole Vdiastole Vend diastole or Vmin depending on this selection all previously set measuring marks are erased when starting a new scan unfreeze gt Run mode the Spectral Doppler envelope curve is performed with a continuous trace line or by setting points the Doppler measuring results according to the Auto Manual Trace setting are displayed after an Auto or Manual Trace measurement Setting will be ignored in Cardiac calculations measurement items e g BPD will be shown with or without the Author s Name For more information see Application Parameters on page 16 17 ud Depending on the setting in the Measure Setup all previously set measuring marks are erased when activating cine mode gt a new cursor appears to repeat the measurement or not the caliper the last measuring mark of the current measurement is fixed when pressing the Freeze
616. urface imaging requires hypo echoic structures e g liquids between render start area and the surface to be displayed With the control TH low echo structures adjacent Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 72 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode to the surface can be cut off if their gray values are much lower than the gray values of the surface structures Always cut out signal noise with the control TH low 2 Transparent Modes For a good 3D impression transparent mode images need a certain number of different views which are shown in a rotation cine The increment step angle should be about 5 degrees The 3D impression results from the different movements of diverse structures 1 Touch the Render Mode key The following menu appears on the touch panel Press the More button to show more details Inversion Render P Settings Surface Skeleton Fetal Cardio ees crs Surface 1 HDlive More Sartace A HDlive Render Settings pe Surface Skeleton Fetal Cardio Render Mode 1 Render Mode 2 Max i Max mstrace Texture X Ray Abiven mApiVe Surface Smooth Light X Ray Mix TH low 21 Transparency Transparency 50 50 30 TH low 24 30 2 Select image type among Gray Render Mode s Color Render Mode Glass Body Render Mode s Inversion Render Mode 3 Select Render Algorithm e g Surface Texture and Light Return to the Static 3D Render menu 10 4
617. used since it leads to the best results In case Surface mode is selected it will normally be necessary to adjust the threshold for the border recognition of the surface These threshold values do not apply for the Transparent modes For adjustment of Threshold low and Transparency review Gray Render mode Render Mode Image Type and Render Algorithm on page 10 72 10 4 4 9 Measurements in rendered image It is possible to measure distance and area generic and calc also in the rendered image Default Th22 Oual high HOO Soh Mix4 0 60 If the measurement function is activated in Render mode a yellow caution symbol appears on the screen This symbol reminds the user that UNINTENDED USE of this feature could lead to measurement inaccuracy For more information see Accuracy of measurements on page 11 20 This symbol will also be shown on the patient report in the report header if the performed Render Mode measurements are stored in the report For more information see Basic Patient Worksheet Functions on page 12 3 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 78 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode 10 5 Real Time 4D Acquisition Real Time 4D mode is obtained through continuous volume acquisition and simultaneous rendering In Real Time 4D mode the volume acquisition box is at the same time the render box All information in the volume box is used for the render process Therefore size and position of t
618. uter and inner area and the Stenosis appear automatically Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 11 8 H48691CF Revision 2 Measurements 11 1 2 3 Generic Volume Measurement Dist Area Angle Clear Study a a 4 Dist Ellipse Es 1 Dist Cancel 11 1 2 3 1 3 Distances 1 To measure volume of an ovoid using three distances touch the 3 Dist key on the touch panel A cursor appears on the screen 2 Move the cursor to the start point of the measurement and press the right or left trackball key Set to fix the marker A second cursor appears 3 Move the second cursor to the end point of the first measurement and press Set again Note To re adjust the start point press the upper trackball key Change before completing the measurement This alternates the control from one cursor to the other 4 Measure the second distance as described above When using single image mode measure the two distances Press Freeze to return to scan mode and scan the second image Press Freeze again A new cursor for the third distance measurement appears If you have scanned the second image in Dual mode previously you can measure the third distance within this second half image 5 Perform the measurement of the third distance in the same manner 11 1 2 3 2 Ellipse The measurement procedure is the same than the measurement of the Generic Area Ellipse N For more information see 2D Mode Measurements on
619. ve In total you can create 3 Region of Interests and 1 Reference Region of Interest Each ROI can be edited or deleted A ROI can also be drawn manually To edit a ROI move the cursor over it until 2 yellow crosses appear along the circle See Figure Editing a ROI on page 9 5 Change the size and position of the ROI by using the trackball buttons Ealt Size Edit Pos The diameter of the ROI is displayed below the circle Figure 9 1 Editing a ROI To delete a ROI move the cursor over it and press Se ected on the touch panel To delete all ROIs press A on the touch panel To draw a ROI manually press 7race on the touch panel and draw a shape The position of this shape can be edited Edit Pos See Figure Hand drawn ROI Trace on page 9 6 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 9 5 9 6 Elastography Mode Hint Info Touch panel Figure 9 2 Hand drawn ROI Trace 11 The following plots can be displayed Strain Ratio or Strain amp Ratio sd Press Strain to display the strain plot curves of the ROIs bd Press Strain amp Ratioto see a combined view of the Strain and Ratio plot curves see Figure Touch panel Elastography Analysis on page 9 7 Press Ratio to display the ROIs proportionally to the Reference ROI 12 Press Exifto get back to Elastography Mode Use the trackball to scroll the Cine Loop quickly e Asmall strain value indicates small compressio
620. vide the required separation from AC mains for both the system and auxiliary devices Two power cables for connecting auxiliary devices are located in the shelves An additional power cable is located on the right side of the system and is accessible when the side cover is removed The Voluson E8 E8 Expert provides several inputs and outputs I O such as Audio Video Ethernet USB DICOM and Printer signals Special care must be taken when connecting auxiliary devices via these input and output I O connections The IEC 60601 standard provides a guideline for safely interconnecting medical devices in systems Everybody who connects additional equipment to the signal input portion or signal output portion configures a medical system and is therefore responsible that the system complies with the requirements of the system standard IEC 60601 If in doubt consult the technical service department or your local representative 1 The medical device may be connected to a single IEC XXX device protection class placed in a room which is not medically used 2 Ifthe device is to be connected in a medically used room the following rule applies IEC XXX compliant devices protection class may be connected with an additional safety measure IEC 60601 compliant devices may be connected as such For all situations 1 and 2 the additional device shall be installed outside the typical patient environment Possible additional safet
621. view MV Mitral Valve on page 12 49 12 7 6 3 TV Tricuspid Valve Work Meas Sheet Applicat PV Pulmonary HR RVOT Veins Peak E A Dec Time TR Trace TR Vmax Baseline There are different methods to perform measurements and calculations of the Tricuspid Valve in the Spectral Doppler mode The measurement methods are similar to those of the Mitral Valve Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 12 51 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 12 7 6 4 PV Pulmonary Valve Meas Applicat RVOT Pulmonary Veins Acc Time PR Trace Eject Time or PR Vmax Angle 5 Baseline There are different methods to perform measurements and calculations of the Pulmonary Valve in the Spectral Doppler mode The measurement methods are similar to those of the Mitral Valve 12 7 6 5 LVOT or RVOT Doppler i oe eo a PM om There are different methods to perform measurements of LVOT Left Ventricle Outflow Tract or RVOT Right Ventricle Outflow Tract in the Spectral Doppler mode The measurement methods are similar to those of the Mitral Valve Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 12 52 H48691CF Revision 2 Calculations and Patient Worksheets Reports 12 7 6 6 Pulmonary Veins To measure the Items such as Diastolic Velocity Systolic Velocity A Reverse Velocity or A Reverse Duration in Spectral Doppler mode Syst V ARevV ARev Dur me
622. volume data sets may be processed by means of the software option interactive volume rendering and Real Time 4D for surface or transparent mode images 10 1 Volume Acquisition with Volume Probes Volume mode key hard key Press the 3D or 4D key to switch on the Volume mode function Depending on what button you pressed before either the 3D Mode menu or the 4D Mode menu appears on the touch panel scan mode 3D Mode Screen scan Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 10 2 H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode 3D Static Setting Application Obstetric s Skeleton urface oye ectional Planes Quality Vol Angle high2 65 4D Mode Screen scan Sectional Segmen Planes tation eens MagiCut Render Cine Mode Calc a Ref Image 3D Orientation Init D amaa B 90 EITE mo m ee on m tilt see c Mix 100 0 TH low 28 Select your settings Then acquire a volume After you have acquired the volume the following menus will be displayed on the touch panel 3D menu after Volume Acquisition Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 10 3 Volume Mode MagiCut Render Cine 4 Mode Cale a a pap Ref Image 30 Orientation SRI i i Init 3D ee R B 30 I c 30 180 270 x a oe a Quality Vol Angle TH low 25 pt high2 95 There are different possibilities for a 3D Volume Acquisiti
623. w Mode Bi directional Angio Mode 8 19 Tissue Doppler Mode TD Mode 8 23 Doppler Mode Functions and Filters 8 27 Chapter 9 Elastography Mode GUI elements 9 2 Elastography Main Menu 9 3 Elastography Sub Menu 9 4 Elastography Analysis 9 5 Chapter 10 Volume Mode Volume Acquisition with Volume Probes 10 2 Volume Acquisition Static 3D Sectional Planes 10 13 Sub Menus 10 42 Volume Acquisition Static 3D Render 10 49 Real Time 4D Acquisition 10 79 sono Render Start 10 92 Volume Cine 10 92 Volume Contrast Imaging VCI A Plane 10 96 VCl Omniview 10 98 STIC Spatio Temporal Image Correlation 10 102 Real Time 4D Biopsy 10 109 VOCAL Il
624. w Weasure amp Calc on page 16 3 The methods for obtaining measurements in the Pediatrics Calculations menu are similar to the generic measurement functions in 2D M and Spectral Doppler mode 12 11 1 Items of Pediatric Calculations The items of pediatric calculations in each mode are as follows 2D 3D Mode Hip Joint not yet specified Doppler Mode not yet specified 12 11 2 Before starting Pediatric Calculations 1 Press the Patient key on the control panel select the PED page and enter all patient information for Pediatric calculations For more information see Entering Patient Data on page 4 7 Note To cancel all calculations performed before and to start new measurement press this key and select End Exam or Clear Exam 2 Press Start Exam Start E selected press the Probe key on the control panel and change it to Pediatrics For more 3 Make sure that the probe and application are selected properly If another application is information see Probe selection on page 4 5 Probe 12 11 3 Pediatric Calculations in 2D Mode 12 11 3 1 Hip Joint The Hip Joint calculation assists in assessing the development of the infant hip In this calculation three straight lines are aligned with the anatomical features as shown in the figure below The two angles are computed displayed and can be used by the physician in making a diagnosis SA The order of entering the lines 1 to
625. w key is hidden By setting the necessary sweep angle for the desired ROI the system provides a coronal plane Omni View The rendering box is very thin and so you can visualize the tissue information of a thick slice A mixture of surface texture and transparent maximum or X ray rendering modes 70 30 plus a low setting of surface transparency 20 50 is used The resulting image shows the average integrated gray value of the tissue contained within the narrow box Omni View improves the contrast resolution and the signal noise ratio and therefore facilitates the detection of diffuse lesions in organs The result is an image with no speckle pattern and a highly improved tissue contrast Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Volume Mode The 3D Mode menu appears on the touch panel Scan mode Render Multi planar Trace Polyline Omni View Ref Line Opni View Orientation Previous Line p ham weg 3 2 T Omni View Quality Vol Angle rot high a 1 Select the Omni View key 2 Select a VCI C user setting e g Default The preset values are loaded 3 Move the horizontal green dotted line with the trackball to the desired position of the 1 ultrasound image on the screen 4 Select the desired Line Curve Trace Polyline 5 Select the display format desired For more information see Omni View Ref Line on page 10 102 Note The selected
626. will be blocked by any foreign body lying on it or e g by remainder of coupling gel clean the touch panel regularly with a wetted soft cloth The touch panel enables a comfortable control of menus Only those touch keys are provided which are necessary for the activated menu The touch panel eases working under dim light condition 3 4 2 Digipot controls Trackball Activated functions are easily controlled by these controls When rotated they deliver digital pulses and can be selected by program call up They are displayed on the touch panel screen by their location their function and their actual value of setting A dual function is marked e g Bbalance Touching causes an increase of balance aac Touching causes a decrease of balance 3 5 Layout of Menus Mainly two menu levels are used for operating the system the main menu level and the submenu level From the main menu the most important submenus e g adjusting the 2D image are directly accessible Some hard keys activate a specific submenu on the touch panel e g the Archive key Normally changing from one submenu to another is made via the main menu direct call up from one to another submenu is possible in some rare cases only 3 5 1 Layout of the 2D Mode Main Menu All B Mode operations are started from this menu It contains 4 main groups of operating functions Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Description of the Syste
627. x Mode is the simultaneous real time display of 2D mode Spectral Doppler and Color Doppler There are two possibilities to combine Continuous Wave Doppler CW with Color Information 1 CW 2D Mode Color Mode CFM Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 8 9 Doppler Modes In scan mode it is possible to switch between CW menu CFM menu and the Submenus to readjust the settings 2 CW 2D Mode Power Mode PD In scan mode it is possible to switch between CW menu PD menu and the Submenus to readjust the settings 2 CW 2D Mode HD Flow Mode HD In scan mode it is possible to switch between CW menu HD Flow menu and the Submenus to readjust the settings 8 3 Color Flow Mode CFM Color imaging uses the Doppler principle to build a Color image The Color coding gives information about blood flow velocity direction quality and timing This information is used to overlay a Color image onto the 2D gray scale scan image Color imaging helps you to locate blood flow disturbances Color imaging also helps you to locate the sample volume for pulsed wave Doppler spectral analysis Pulsed wave Doppler provides the most accurate peak velocity information when the sound beam axis and flow axis are nearly parallel This relation between accuracy and angle still exists with Color but it is not as critical as in pulsed wave Doppler Abnormal flow can still be detected and conclusions drawn with Colo
628. x is activated the image annotation Abc switch Abc on can be activated by pressing the space bar on the keyboard User program select Scan geometry does not change when switching to another program in Run mode Vascular Auto Frequency If this box is checked default an algorithm is used to change Change the frequency and the PRF for vascular applications depending on the color box depth or gate depth Home position application f this checkbox is checked a cursor home position can be specific stored for each application when in image annotation mode 14 2 3 2 1 To Save a User Program This tool saves the current settings of the system under a program key Select the User programs button in the System Setup User Settings page The Settings menu appears on the monitor Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 14 18 H48691CF Revision 2 Utilities and System Setup Note It is possible to select which user program shall be started when a new exam is created Setting Application 1 Select a program button and press Set labeling area and cursor are displayed inside 2 Enter a new program label using keyboard or overwrite the existing label or don t change an existing program label if the same term is desired 3 Select Save or Save amp Exit The program parameters are saved in the database Programs with a logo e g FWF are certified programs If changes are applied to such
629. xpert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 2 25 Safety and Maintenance the rarefactional peak pressure but decreases with the pulse frequency Therefore the Mechanical Index MI was introduced to take account of both the pressure and the frequency The higher the MI the greater is the risk of nonthermal bioeffects 2 8 3 Regulated Parameters Relevant parameters having physiological effects For more information see Bioeffects on page 2 25 are regulated according to FDA and IEC guidelines and standards These parameters are Mechanical Index C Tis Tib Tic Thermal Indices TI one of the following values can be displayed Tis soft tissues Tib bone in focal region Tic bone at surface e g cranial Ispta 3 Averaged intensity at spatial peak 720 mW cm2 with a derating of 0 3dB cm MHz T Temperature at the patient s side of 43 C 50 C No the probe lower limit during patient 109 4 F 122 F contact higher limit for rest position 2 8 4 Interpretation of displayed parameters MI and TI During obstetric examinations these displayed values shall be observed very critically because there may be conditions that are potentially hazardous even below the regulatory limits Some guidelines recommend that embryonic and fetal in situ temperatures of 41 C 4 C above normal temperature should be limited in time by 5 min or less Thus for a reasonable safety margin Tl values above 1 should be avoided Additional fac
630. y Reports Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 18 27 Technical Data Information Cardiology 2D Mode LV Simpson Single amp Bi Plane Volume Area Length LV Mass Epi amp Endo Area LV Length LV RVD IVS LVD LVPW LVOT Diameter RVOT Diameter MV Dist A Dist B Area TV Diameter AV LA Aortic Valve LeftAtrium PV Diameter M Mode LV IVS LVD LVPW RVD AV LA Ao Root Diam LA Diam AV Cusp Sep Ao Root Ampl MV D E E F Slope A C Interval EPSS HR Heart Rate HR HR Atrial HR D Mode MV Mitral Valve AV Aortic Valve TV Tricuspid Valve PV Pulmonary Valve LVOT amp RVOT Left amp Right Ventricle Outflow Tract Pulmonic Veins PAP Pulmonary Artery Pressure measurement HR Heart Rate C Mode PISA Tei Index Others Diast Vol Bi Syst Vol Bi Stroke Volume Volume Flow Cardiac Output Ejection Fraction Fractional Fract Shortening Myocardial Thickness LA Ao Ratio E A Peak Peak Gradient Acceleration Mean Gradient Mean Gradient Acceleration VTI TVA PG PHT MVA AVA ERO CVP Cardio Vascular Profile Score etc Urology Bladder Prostate Left Right Testicle Left Right Kidney Left Right Renal Artery Left Right Dorsal Penile Artery Vessel all included in Summary Reports incl PSAD PPSA 1 PPSA 2 calculation Vascular Carotid CCA ECA ICA Bulb Vertebral Subclav Vessel UEA SUBC A AXILL A BRACH A RADIAL A ULNAR A
631. y measures are Additional protective earth connection between the 2 devices or a safety isolation mains transformer for the other device Special care has to be taken if the device is connected to a computer network e g Ethernet because other devices could be connected without any control There could be a potential difference between the protective earth and any line of the computer network including the shield In this case the only way to operate the system safely is to use an isolated signal link with minimum air clearance and creepage distance of the isolation device in agreement with Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Connections IEC60601 incl national deviations For computer networks there are media converters available which convert the electrical to optical signals Please consider that this converter has to comply with IEC xxx standards and is battery operated or connected to the isolated mains output of the Voluson E8 E8 Expert review Connector Panels on page 77 6 Additionally the IEC60601 requires control measurement of leakage currents The system integrator any person connecting the medical device to other devices is responsible that the connections are safe IEC XXX Stands for standards such as IEC 60601 for medical devices IEC 60950 for information technology equipment etc 17 1 1 Important Notes Connecting Auxiliary Equipment The ultrasound system provides standard LA
632. y the biopsy bracket is reusable For detailed information please contact the manufacturer Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Probes and Biopsies 5 3 6 Pencil Probes 9 3 6 1 P2D a not available 1 Patient applied part 2 Probe handle e Cardiology e Continuous Wave not available Peripheral Vascular Doppler e Neurology 9 3 6 2 P6D es ee iii not available 1 Patient applied part 2 Probe handle Cardiology Continuous Wave not m eee Peripheral Vascular Doppler Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 5 31 Probes and Biopsies This page was intentionally left blank Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 5 32 H48691CF Revision 2 h Describes the general functions of the 2D Mode Sections in this chapter 2D Main Menu on page 6 2 2D Operation on page 6 3 Cine Mode on page 6 15 2D Sub Menu on page 6 19 Gray Map on page 6 21 B Flow on page 6 25 XTD View Extended View on page 6 27 Contrast Imaging on page 6 35 Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 Chapter 6 2D Mode 6 1 2D Mode 6 2 The 2D display consists of the ultrasound image an orientation marker patient data image information a Gray scale bar a depth scale with focal zone markers and an actual TGC curve The ultrasound image is derived from the tissue echoes that return to the scan head They ar
633. y to prevent the risk of disease transmission or infections NRTL Classification Label old and new version CE Conformity mark according to Medical Device Directive 93 42 EEC 0123 Identification number of the notified body T V S D Product Service All labels looking similar to the label on the left are a marker used during manufacturing and have no meaning relevant to the usage of the device Consult accompanying documents This symbol advises the reader to consult the accompanying documents Caution consult accompanying documents This symbol advises the reader to consult the accompanying documents for important safety related information such as warnings and pre cautions that cannot be presented on the device itself Disposal For more information see Disposal on page 2 27 This symbol is followed by the name and address of the manufacturer of the device Pictogram on Probe Care Card Do not immerse the probe into any liquid beyond the level specified for that probe Refer to the user manual of the ultrasound system Pictogram on Probe Care Card Describes precautions necessary to prevent the risk of injury through electric hazards GOST R Label This product consists of devices that may contain mercury which must be recycled or disposed of in accordance with local state or country laws Within this system the backlight lamps in the monitor display contain mercury Indicates that the p
634. yer A button either on the touch panel or on the screen or the Text A key on the keyboard displays the Text Layer A and makes it available for modification and deletion Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual 4 28 H48691CF Revision 2 wo LayerB Operating the System Pressing the Text Layer B button either on the touch panel or on the screen or the Text B key on the keyboard displays the Text Layer B and makes it available for modification and deletion Pressing the Text Layer A B button either on the touch panel or on the screen displays both layers at the same time Pressing the button again deactivates the function and only the pre selected layer will be displayed Pressing the Hide Text button hides the text of all layers on the screen as well as on printer report and VCR DVR but does not delete it This key has two functions 1 Turning the digipot highlights the words of the pre selected layer one after the other 2 Pressing the digipot deletes the highlighted word Pressing Delete Backspace on the keyboard also deletes the highlighted word Pressing the upper trackball key highlights the words of the pre selected layer one after the other All the text of the preselected layer in the annotation area is cleared Delete the last written word The cursor jumps to current home position Init position The 1 2 7 page of auto text words appears 1 current page 2 number of availa
635. ystem Setup 4 Select the Next button The following window will be displayed system Configuration Load Select Data to be restored _ User Settings _ Measure Configuration _ Patient Archive no images Options _ Image Transfer Configuration DICOM Network Configuration Service Platform 5 Select the data to be restored to the Voluson E8 E8 Expert system The data from the backup always replaces the corresponding data on the Voluson E8 E8 Expert system 6 Select the Next button again to start the restore process 7 Confirm with Yes to start the Restoring process System Confipuration Load G Start Restore Backup now Voluson E8 E8 Expert Basic User Manual H48691CF Revision 2 14 57 Utilities and System Setup The User Programs and System Settings on this machine will be lost and replaced by the data on the backup Do you want to continue Confirm with Yes 9 Confirm the next message box to reboot the system After copying the data the system reboots and the application starts again Delete Full System Configuration There is no undo function for this action 1 To delete an existing backup click on the Delete button of the Full System Configuration group in the System Setup Backup page The Full System Configuration Delete window is displayed System Configuration Delete Drive Internal HDD d Methork External USB Drive Des

Voluson™ E8/E8 Expert Basic User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Voluson&trade; E8/E8 Expert Basic User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Voluson™ E8/E8 Expert Basic User Manual